Home

IBM Optim Installation and Configuration Guide

1. Click Change Remove to run the Configuration program Installation and Configuration Guide 611 Appendix J Uninstalling The Uninstall Optim Drop Optim Created DB Objects dialog is displayed lt gt Uninstall Optim Drop Optim Created DB Objects Optim Configuration can drop the Optim Directory Tables Sample Tables and other database objects e g Packages Procedures or Plans that were created for use by A Optim Select the appropriate option button then select lt Proceed gt to proceed Select lt Cancel gt to abort the entire uninstall process Select one of the three options e Prompt before dropping each set of Optim created database objects Drop all Optim created database objects without prompting Do not drop any Optim created database objects 612 Optim 7 1 J 1 Prompt Before Dropping Each Set of Optim Database Objects J 1 Prompt Before Dropping Each Set of Optim Database Objects When you select this option and click Proceed you are prompted to confirm the deletion of each object After all objects have been dropped you are asked to confirm deletion of the Optim Archive ODBC Interface driver Refer to 7 17 Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables on page 238 for the sequence in which you are asked to confirm the deletion of Optim created database objects J 2 Drop All Optim Created Database Objects Without Prompting When you select this option and click Proceed you are cautioned th
2. eeeeeeeeeneerees 173 Authentication occ cececseeeeeeteenees 170 Choose Product Configuration File 171 COMM BURG orearen 151 Optim 7 1 Connection Defaults 0 eee 160 default Archive directories 173 Default Directories ccceececeees 154 directories limit client access to 163 Enable Disable ccccccesseeseseeees 132 Endpoints srssigps ti oe aldatons 169 Error defaults ccccsceseessereeteenes 156 General defaults 0 cccceeceeeseeees 154 Loader defaults sesiinassrasras 158 LOgOm GialOg gargana 307 Maximum Processes cccecceeceeees 154 Merge Current User e 159 162 Mittor PtoCess sienai 154 HAME a ckeeiat epee teeantn 154 172 Network Access cccccceceeeeeseeeeetees 167 Personal Options 0 00 305 306 Protocols sapan 169 DCCUMLY oT 171 Security defaults cee 166 Service Logoi sismes 165 Settings Dialog ssiirireiasasvere 152 Start as Process 164 Start a8 Service idcccsaiescascsascveesnveasvens 164 Startup defaults 00 0 cceeceeseeeeeees 164 S AUS AES EE E PE E 177 Trace Files spssehsessaptecescraeetael atlecan 133 update Configuration File 171 Oracle create drop packages for DB Alias oe eceececeeseesteteees 99 for Optim Directory s es 85 Oracle Connection Diagnostic Tool 31 P Password always ask TOP sstesucersvapanetenecnstt 94 ALWAYS requite sarsivesss
3. ptim must use Optim created Packages to access the Data Dictionary The Optim onfiguration program can create new Packages or can use Packages created for nother Optim Directory for that database Specify whether to create or use the xisting Packages If enabled specify the Package Schema Name zi DB Alias Tables MYALTAS Data Dictionary Package Specifications Create Refresh Schema Name Use Existing optusrt Grant Auth ID aj Drop PUBLIC T Display SQL Previous Skip Undo Cancel Oracle Q0R922K Oracle Q0R922K_ Installation and Configuration Guide 99 5 Configure Workstations The Create Drop Packages dialog includes the following DB Alias The previously entered name for the DB Alias for which packages plans or procedures are being created Tables Type of tables Data Dictionary Catalog Tables or System Tables depending upon the DBMS for which packages plans or procedures are being created Stored Procedure Create Refresh Specifications Use Existing Drop Qualifier Prefix Grant Auth ID 100 Select this option to create new or refresh existing packages plans or procedures This option is always available when creating a new DB Alias and is the default selection when the dialog opens Select this option to use existing packages plans or procedures The Configuration program creates a DB Alias that refers to the packages plans or procedures bu
4. wormdevicedays 0 7 wormdeviceyears 0 7 sybaseunchain active inactive defaultactive defaultinactive uncommittedread active inactive defaultactive defaultinactive Installation and Configuration Guide 371 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux Keywords customerid customername license tempdir datadir 372 Company identifier n Unique six digit Company ID provided with Optim 000000 The Optim demonstration ID Default customerid 000000 Customer name name Company Name provided with Company ID and license key Up to 40 characters XXXXXXX The Optim demonstration name Default customername XXXXXXX The Optim license key Note The license key is saved in the registry This registry entry is replaced if you connect to an Optim Directory with a more recent key Therefore you can remove this keyword after you start prOsvce the first time license key The 5 part license key provided by IBM demonstration The Optim demonstration key shown in the key following example Default license 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Directory for temporary work and trace files directory Name of the directory for temporary work and trace files If this directory does not exist the shell script creates it tempdir PSTHOME temp Directory for Extract Compare Control Export and other process files for which a complete path is not p
5. 192 7 4 1 Specify Optim Directory 0 00 enrere eee eee 192 7 4 2 Initialize Security or Change Security Administrator 193 7 4 3 Set Functional Security Option 000 2 196 7 4 4 Set Optim Object Security Option 20065 197 7 4 5 Set Archive File Security Option 00005 200 7 5 Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server 201 7 6 Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine 202 7 7 Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access 203 7 8 Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access 0 0000 000s 205 7 8 1 Query Method to Apply Maintenance 206 7 8 2 Apply Maintenance for a Single DB Alias 207 7 8 3 Apply Maintenance for All DB Aliases 209 7 8 4 Apply Maintenance for Specific DBMS 210 79 Rename an Optim Directory ceeste cs o he e ee ee e e etwi 213 7 9 1 Rename an Optim Directory and the Windows Registry Entry 215 7 9 2 Only Rename the Windows Registry Entry 219 7 10 Update DBMS Version for an Optim Directory 221 7 11 Update DBMS Version fora DB Alias 200 5 224 7 11 1 Update DBMS for a Single DB Alias 224 7 11 2 Update Multiple DB Aliases 0 000 000 ee 228 7 12 Configure pons e cocci oe tae eb ee eee ea ee 232 F13 Create Primary Keys e ee ck oh be eee ie ee eee 233
6. 4 In Name type a name for the ODBC data source and click Next to open the ODBC Attunity Server Setup Binding and User Profile dialog ODBC Attunity Server Setup Binding and User Profile x n Choose a binding and security profile to be used i A Binding NAV d ATTUNITY CONNECT 3 T Security profile MV Use default security profile NAV z DaTaBases amp Specify binding and security profile that will be used Cancel lt lt Back Next gt gt C Finish Installation and Configuration Guide 545 Appendix F Open Data Manager 5 Select NAV from the Binding list select the Use default security profile check box and click Next to open the ODBC Attunity Server Setup Extended Properties dialog ODBC Attunity Server Setup Extended Properties x m Default Data Source IV Select default data source Name AFDSNT a m Application requires a default data source to be specified Check Single to set this DSN as a single database data source Single Check Passthru to pass SQL commands directly to the DaTasases f backend database 3 I Passthru SE x ATTUNITY CONNECT SERVERS m Virtual Database Jin one T Note Default data source cannot be specified when a virtual database is selected and vice versa Cancel lt lt Back Hert C in 6 Select the Select default data source check
7. Company Name Company ID 4 gt InstallShield To modify settings click the Back button to return to a previously displayed Setup program dialog To begin the installation click Next Setup shuts down any component of Optim that is running and during the installation displays a progress bar to monitor the process When the files are copied Setup prompts you to install icons on your desktop Click Yes to create the desktop icons or click No to skip this step Either choice opens the Setup Complete dialog Installation and Configuration Guide 45 2 Installation Setup 2 2 Installation Complete When the installation process is complete the Install Complete dialog allows you to do two things e View the README text file for the installed release e Launch the Optim Configuration program and display the Sign Optim Exit dialog The Sign Optim Exit dialog allows you to sign the default exit supplied with Optim or a custom user supplied exit of your own creation as described in 3 5 The Sign Optim Exit Dialog on page 56 You must sign the default exit or a user supplied exit to continue with the Configuration process and use Optim After you sign an exit the Configuration program will launch the Optim Configuration Assistant which is described in detail in 4 1 4 Configuration Assistant on page 71 IBM Optim Setup InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wizard has successfully in
8. 000 e cee eee eee eee 11 1 2 2 Required Database Permissions 02 eee ees 14 1 2 3 Required Server Authorizations 002 eee 19 1 24 Character Formats soca peesaa ee de goede heabiweasene 21 1 3 Troubleshooting Your Installation 0 0 cee eee eee eee 30 1 3 1 Image Locator Diagnostic Tool s s seis oserror 554 e005 tas 30 1 3 2 Oracle Connection Diagnostic Tool 2 0005 31 1 3 3 Microsoft Debugging Utility ssis 06 0 5 0s cs dens bees een 32 2 Installation Setup 0 0 ccc cect e nee 35 AA RUD SEND ccna ace tte Sea oS eet Aw a ONS De as DRS 37 2 1 1 Saftyare Licni cee ees beac eden bead been bo 38 2 1 2 Customer Intonmatn e ec pegs oe os pe ag eos sere ees 39 2 1 3 Select the Type of Setup oso ceca ices eben 40 2 1 4 Chodse Destination Location 0 05 eee ee ee eee bes 41 215 Select Components cos recrirecri tiee eee inia E 42 2 1 6 Select Program Folder csse ccssi 5 a0 cae cew ag buw p ENOS 44 21 7 Start Copying Files sic icc ie ea ence rece eee ee ee 45 E Testa Maa ho ee os Se eh Ang Ba ee Ay Oa Sood kee 45 2 2 Installation Complete cc cc eck ecb eee nee eee bee 46 2 3 Configuration OVerniewy o s oc seseas besa gewnad ire Heep nun 47 3 Signing an Optim Exit 0 0 eee eee 49 3 1 Writing Your Own Exit 6 coke coe ed sos ee hee ie See 51 3 2 Prerequisites to Signing a User Supplied Exit 52 3 3 Signing an Exit in WindOWS occ
9. 006 387 RTSETENV shell script 006 386 SCCULIND 2 ccnp ieee 394 402 configuration files 398 402 password file s ssneeseeseseeeereeeeee 398 select components ccc eeeeeee 341 ACS dAYS asenn 373 Load tab Personal Options 293 294 PBNA snid R 293 exception tables ssucnssisnisisisas 294 path to DBMS Loaders cee 294 Load tab Product Options 274 275 additional loader parameters 215 DB Alias ssaswacticeninuniiness 215 delete when truncate fails oo 275 force at TUN tIME 0 eee eee steerer etree 275 Optim Directory cccceceeeeeeeeees 275 override loader defaults 215 prime new request s src 215 Load Drop Data Privacy Tables 115 Load Drop Sample Tables ce cee 112 Lock Tables cscsschiteaenctoacntinennawn 253 Logon for multiple DB Aliases 125 saved for multiple DB Aliases 126 Logon tab Personal Options 303 305 always ask for password sseiseeeeeee 305 always fail connection sseeeee 305 connection string ssessesseeseseeeeseeeeeee 305 for Optim Directory sssr 304 s t PASSWOLS eeeeeceseesceseceteeteeeeeens 305 specify User ID srann 304 test database connection s s seesee 305 M Main Window ATOS IZE asiasi i eai Enana 288 maximum component s s s 288 Maximum 619 Index commit frequency eceeeceetee
10. Click the down arrow to select a version from the list The version you select must be different from the current version If not an error message displays To continue click Proceed Connect to If you are updating the DBMS version for only one DB Alias the Database Connect to Database dialog opens You specify the User ID Password and Connection String needed to connect to the selected database Note Ifyou are updating the DBMS version for Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix and you have several databases on one server refer to 7 11 2 Update Multiple DB Aliases for complete details 226 Optim 7 1 7 11 Update DBMS Version for a DB Alias Create Drop The Configuration program displays the Create Drop Packages Packages dialog the Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog or the Bind Drop Plans dialog as appropriate for the DBMS you are using amp Update the DBMS Yersion for a DB Alias Create Drop Packages ioj x Optim he Optim Configuration program can drop the Optim created Packages For the Data ictionary The Package Schema Name must match the name used when you created he Packages IF the Packages are used by another Optim Directory click lt Skip gt E DB Alias Tables DBMS Data Dictionary Package Specifications Create Refresh Schema Name Use Existing optuet4 Grant Auth ID Drop T Display SQL Skip Undo Cancel Oracle QOR922K Oracle QOR922K 74
11. DSNPASSWORDS datasourcename domainname userID password QPTDPNAME primaryservername daemonportnumber Installation and Configuration Guide Subsets an Archive File Collection to specific Archive Files Use one of the following parameters AF_IN 1 7 Archive Files to include where n is an Archive File name GUID or Archive File ID Ifa specified Archive File cannot be found the process will fail AF DATE RANGE vyyy mm dd hh mm ss yyyy mm dd hh mm ssy A range of Archive File creation dates You must include the time of day hh mm ss You can use zeros for the time e g 00 00 00 AF_ID_ RANGE xy A range of Archive File IDs where x is the start and y is the end An optional attribute for turning on the Optim Trace file This attribute should be used at the direction of Optim support Do not use commas in the PSTTRACE attribute The user ID and password for Archive File Security authentication The datasourcename is the data source to which the credentials apply The domainname is optional You can use forward or backward slashes within the parameter If this parameter is not used the credentials of the user running the Attunity Server will be used for Archive File Security authentication The primary server name and port number of the Attunity daemon on the primary server Required when the connection string is passed from a secondary server 555 Appendix F O
12. Oracle Q0R922K 7 Optim Directory displays the Directory name and Security State indicates that security is Jnitialized Security Administrator for this Optim Directory identifies the Security Administrator by the two part Domain User Name To change the Security Administrator click Change The Configuration program displays the next dialog depending on the following e Ifthe Security Administrator is not signed on to the workstation the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog is displayed and the administrator must enter the domain password e Ifthe Security Administrator is logged on to the workstation or a password is supplied the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog allows the user to specify a new Security Administrator For more information see Specify Domain Connection Information on page 129 After specifying a new Security Administrator Security Administrator for this Optim Directory displays the new Administrator and Proceed is available You must click Proceed to complete the change of Administrator Optim 7 1 7 4 Configure Security for an Optim Directory If a new Security Administrator is specified clicking Skip will cancel the change of Administrator After clicking Skip or Proceed the Set Archive File Security Option dialog is displayed Click Cancel to exit the security configuration process and cancel any changes to the Security Administrator Installation and Configur
13. cccececceeceeseesseeteeeteeees 24 Uninstalling gestasiscseectancemsioieinsiacetsncad 611 614 CANCEL onet kE neer 614 do not drop all objects 00 0 0 614 drop all objects cccceeeseseeeteenees 613 prompt to drop all objects ee 613 Windows Control Panel 04 611 UNIX command line 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeees 370 385 COMMANAS jadsaciasdrcadivenianteaanies 391 392 customer TD siszsceacerszscenreranceiceces 361 372 data directories ccceeeeeeeees 361 372 DB Alias snicijeasciarasudiacs 366 375 DB Alias logon sssr 364 destination folder cc eee 339 environment variables 0ce 386 InstallatiON stccsesrceisecesebersiecennaas 335 357 license agreement eceeeeeeeeeees 338 IGAG Er sikisen KNEE REEENENEN ROKEREN 367 376 locale conversion sesseessssseseseeseeee 390 LOCALE CONF file cc cece 390 lOO baee en 364 Maximum Processes cceee 363 Index Optim Directory essee 366 374 PSTIMNUSSION g csistseccsch aizgusecalgatertecueceagies 365 prOpass program s 399 pstlocal configuration file 370 pstserv configuration file 0 360 RTAS shell script 0 cceeeeeeeeeeereee 389 RTSERVER shell script 000005 387 RTSETENV shell script 000 386 SCCUMING siaizecacecempacasersaiaieneiiaiees 394 402 configuration files 398 402 password file sssoseeseeesrereeeeee 398
14. Oracle Q0R922K 7 Ifyou plan to access tables in addition to Optim Directory tables in the same database select the check box to Create Select DB Alias for this Database After creating the DB Alias you are prompted to share connection information for the DB Alias and the Optim Directory If you want to create a DB Alias for a different database clear the check box Click Proceed to continue Installation and Configuration Guide 95 5 Configure Workstations 96 Create Select DB Alias DB Alias Specifications Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog to create and name a single new DB Alias create multiple new DB Aliases for a single server or modify an existing DB Alias If configuring a workstation that is to function as an Optim Server Server you also must provide information for each DB Alias on the Connections tab on the Optim Server Settings applet Refer to 6 4 Connection Tab on page 160 Configure First Workstation Create Select DB Alias ojx Optim he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database connection in DB Alias Select the Create New option to create a single new DB Alias the Create Select Multiple option to create or select multiple DB Aliases from a Single DB erver or the Use Existing option to use an existing DB Alias then click lt Proceed gt to antinue Selectina lt Skin mill alen skin those Functions that require a DR lias a
15. When you are done importing objects click Skip to display the Complete dialog described under Conversion Complete on page 582 Note When you are ready to process the last group of objects you want to import you can click Next instead of Import to complete the import process If you do that you do not have to click Skip to display the Complete dialog During import processing the status bar displays information about the import process After processing completes imported objects are identified by a gray check box If any errors occur processing continues or stops based on the setting specified for the Continue Import if Errors prompt Errors are identified by a red X beside each object in error If the Overwrite Installation and Configuration Guide 581 Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects Existing Definitions check box is cleared duplicate definitions are noted in bold and they are not imported If some objects fail to be imported due to errors check the specifications and then retry the import process by clicking Import Conversion When you are finish importing objects the Conversion Process opens Complete the Complete dialog Click Close on that dialog to return to the Configuration main window where you can quit the program or perform other tasks Convert Optim Directory Objects Complete he Configuration process is complete The following files may have been created during thi
16. 258 616 Configure Additional Workstations Configuration Assistant eee 140 configure options c cccecceseeeseeeees 149 create registry entry 0 0 143 DBMS client software cece 9 description GF paizssseiaigicascceancetebecancababantans 6 enable disable ODBC interface s es 149 Optim Server sicciaiccncacnent 148 BUIGEMINGS sais sccesselnrscelaetesshieloetecuneecann 140 import registry entries sesse 141 PIOCESS SLEDS srren raan T A EIE 9 Product Configuration File 149 task S MINATY sisi aiseesalnssnietasdisenialgics 150 Configure Application Servers description Of sssrinin 10 PIOCESS SLEDS annonserar 9 Configure First Workstation completion files ccccceceeeeeeseeeees 138 Configuration Assistant 0 0 0 BS configure options c cccceeceeeeseeeees 132 create DB Alias savicatinctaeukimniienes 94 Multiple DB Aliases 118 127 Optim Directory 0 0 0 79 Optim Directory tables 83 create drop packages fot DB AMS psscaecscapssccetussacyeeveuseiee 99 for Optim Directory seee 85 DBMS for DB Alias octet eeeseeseeeeeeeeeeees 97 for Optim Directory sses 80 description Of sisusse a aar 6 export registry data nsss seee 137 load drop sample tables 112 114 237 Optim Security 00 eee 128 131 pro esS St ps csasseswsessccestesastazanracanrasveraavers 6 product license key c cesceeeeeeeeeees 78 set perso
17. Note This prompt is displayed only if the Optim Directory is in a Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix database Note If you are creating a new Optim Directory and specify a User ID associated with another Directory in the database the following pop up dialog informs you that another ID must be specified for the Optim Directory tables schema name e Select Yes to use the existing Directory instead of creating a new Directory and proceed to the Create Drop Packages dialog e Select No to continue creating a new Directory and specify a new schema name in the Create Optim Directory Tables dialog Optim Directory was found with the Schema Name pstuser To create a new Optim Directory you must specify a different Schema y Name Select lt Yes gt to use the existing Optim Directory or select lt No gt to specify a different Schema Name and create a new Optim E aans Wo Create Optim After the workstation is connected to the database you can create the Directory Tables Optim Directory The Configuration program names the tables automatically but you can specify the identifier Creator ID Owner ID or Schema Name and the database tablespace for each table You can create the Optim Directory tables in a unique tablespace or in the same tablespace as the other database tables The Create Optim Directory Tables dialog prompts you for the information to create these tables Installation and Configuration Guide 83 5 C
18. Open the Select Access Control List Model dialog to model the ACL after another ACL Available to roles permitted to update the ACL For more information about this dialog see Select Access Control List Model Optim 7 1 D 2 Access Control List Security Users Click Change Owner to open the Security Users dialog used to reassign ACL ownership Use this dialog to select a user account from a list of accounts in a specified network domain To display the list select an Optim Server Name and a Domain To select a network user account click the name in the Users grid and click Select amp Security Users ojx Server Name Domain Local TS M Users 16DE918B C768 4B3 23B6EAB0 SCDF 46 NA Acct Ops NA Calendar for manager department tasks Aland NA PreSales UK AlexM NA Marketing generic reply acct Aliciac NA Account Disabled 12 10 2007 GSharp Aliciact NA Support NJ do not delete AMolish NA PeopleSoft Rep Andrei NA Development QA NJ ANM NA Pivotal Active Notification ApplSupport NA Application Support admin account bdunean NA IAM IT Security Snecialist z Server Name Select the name of a Server If your site does not use a Server Local is displayed Domain Select the name of the domain for the users you want to list The domain is within a network that includes the server in Server Name Note Ifa UNIX server is selecte
19. The Optim Server can now be deployed on Red Hat Linux 4 0 AS Optim now supports DB2 v9 and Sybase ASE v15 Optim 7 1 1 Getting Started This guide describes the programs used to install and configure the Optim solution The Setup program guides you through the installation process and the Configuration program prepares your databases and workstations to use Optim 1 1 Conceptual Overview In the simplest configuration Optim operates as a client application with all processing taking place directly on the Windows workstation Unless the database is installed locally the appropriate DBMS client software is used to communicate with the remote database over a network Optim DBMS Client Sanne SHARED NETWORK Other Other Workstations Workstations All Optim data flows over shared network along with other traffic Installation and Configuration Guide 1 Getting Started However a different configuration may be desirable when network traffic generated by Optim competes with other network use or when workstation capacity processor memory or disk space causes some tasks to be inefficient or impossible to accomplish Also a different configuration is required if processing data from a database in a UNIX or Linux environment The Optim Server Server allows users to define tasks on a Windows workstation
20. 0 Do not retain reports Default n The number of reports retained for a particular process up to 200 Once the number of retained reports equals this amount the oldest report is deleted as the current report is saved reportlevel 0 centeraallowaltret Indicator for minimum Centera retention settings 0 Use the Centera default Any Storage Profile or centeraretention settings for retention will cause the process to fail 1 Use centeraretention settings or overriding Storage Profile settings for minimum Centera retention Default If centeraavail is 0 the Archive Process will fail centeraallowaltret 1 centeraavail Indicator for the use of a Centera device 0 Centera device is not used Default 1 Centera device is available for use This setting is required in order to copy an Archive File to a Centera device or process such a file centeraavail 0 centeraretention Default minimum retention setting for Archive Files copied to Centera none No minimum retention period Default default The Centera default applies Installation and Configuration Guide 379 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 380 centeradays centerayears networkeravail tivoliavail interval Use any centeradays and centerayears settings or overriding Storage Profile settings for minimum Centera retention infinite Retain the file on Centera forever the file cannot be deleted centeraretention none
21. 2 1 6 Select Program Folder The Select Program Folder dialog allows you to specify a folder to hold the program icons for each installed component The dialog opens with the default name IBM Optim specified as the Program Folder You can accept this name choose a name from the list of Existing Folders or specify a new name Note Ifthe specified Program Folder does not exist Setup creates the folder as part of the installation process IBM Optim Setup x Select Program Folder Please select a program folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Program Folder IBM Opting Existing Folders Adobe Altova MissionKit for Enterprise XML Developers Hummingbird Connectivity 10 InstallShield lt Back Next gt Cancel To continue click Next 44 Optim 7 1 2 1 Run Setup 2 1 7 Start Copying Files 2 1 8 Installation The Start Copying Files dialog displays settings for the current installation The dialog allows you to review settings before beginning the installation IBM Optim Setup x Start Copying Files Review settings before copying files Setup has enough information to start copying the program files If you want to review or change any settings click Back If you are satisfied with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings
22. User Supplied Exit Prerequisites Run the opmusign Script If your company requires the additional functionality available via a user supplied exit you can create your own exit and then sign that exit as your Optim exit See the Optim Initialization Exit Programmer s Guide for detailed information on how to write an exit Before you can sign a user supplied exit you must do the following 1 Compile your user supplied exit and create a load library named libopmexit so in AIX Solaris and Linux or liboptmexit sl in HPUX 2 Make sure the Optim Server is not running if it is shut it down 3 Copy the file libopmexit so or libopmexit sl to the rt bin directory thereby overwriting the existing file assuming one already exits As part of setup Optim places the script file opmusign in the rt sbin directory You can run the opmusign script at any time following setup to sign a user supplied exit The letter u in the script s name indicates it is used to sign a user specified exit The syntax for opmusign is as follows opmusign _install_directory rt Company Id Name Password Parameter Identifies Installation and Configuration Guide 413 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 414 opmusign Signing Example 1 install_directory rt the rt subdirectory appended to your install directory Company Id the six digit Id assigned to your company Name t
23. 5 Configure Workstations Information on If you select multi byte format in the Specify Character Set of DB Multi byte Format Alias Data dialog you are prompted to acknowledge the following MBCS for a DBA DBMS character set requirements for multi byte Both the DBMS client and database must have the same supported multi byte character set The Optim Directory must be in Unicode or multi byte format amp Configure Fi First Wo Workstation Information on Multi byte Format MBCS f for ou have selected the option to configure this DB Alias so character data is kept in Multi byte ormat a E nt 5 ar gai aera EE character set which must be listed as a supported Multi byte character set in is feature ee 106 Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Round Trip Issues with Multi byte Format for a DBA Register DB Alias After you acknowledge the DBMS character set requirements for a DB Alias in multi byte format or if the Optim Directory is in multi byte format you are prompted to acknowledge multi byte round trip conversion issues Optim uses the Unicode character set in dialogs and to process data In some multi byte character sets such as Oracle JA16SJIS multiple characters are mapped to the same Unicode character When these characters are converted from Unicode back to multi byte a round trip the original character may not be returned Note To avoid round trip issues with multi byte data
24. Clear the check box to provide access to all Server files and directories Enter paths to specific directories and subdirectories accessible to delegating workstations Click the browse button to select from a list Installation and Configuration Guide 163 6 Configure the Optim Server 6 6 Startup Tab Start How Start When 164 Optim Server Settings Use the Startup tab to assign startup information Start as Service Start as Process The Server is enabled when the machine is started A service does not need a currently logged on user the machine can be left unattended Note When the Server runs as a service mapped drives are unavailable The Server starts in a DOS window The security of the logged on user applies you cannot use a service logon When Start as Service is selected Manual Automatic Only the logged on user can start the Server You can use the Optim Server Settings dialog to start the Server The Server starts when system boots Optim 7 1 6 6 Startup Tab When Start as Process is selected Manual Select Optim from the Windows Start Menu Automatic When Optim starts Optim is added to the Start Startup menu Service Logon When Start as Service is selected you must provide service logon information Use Local Select this check box to use the logon information System account for the local machine as provided on the Personal Options Server tab If you clea
25. From the Report To create a Report Request from the Editor Reduce Editor To create a new Report Request select New from the File menu in the Report Request Editor To create a new Report Request modeled on an existing one open the desired Report Request and select Save As from the File menu To create and store a copy of the active Report Request and continue editing select Save Copy As from the File menu These steps are the minimum required to create a Report Request After you create a request you can run the process immediately or save the request and schedule it Because the options to create a Report Request and to modify a Report Request are similar refer to E 2 Using the Editor for complete details Installation and Configuration Guide 513 Appendix E Security Reports E 1 2 Select a Report Request to Edit You can select a Report Request for editing from the main window or from the Report Request Editor From the Main To Select a Report Request to Edit Window 1 In the main window select Open from the File menu to display the Open object selection dialog 2 Double click to select Report Request and expand the Identifier list 3 Double click the Report Request Identifier to display a list of Report Requests 4 Optional Specify a Pattern to limit the list based on your criteria and click Refresh 5 Double click the grid row for the desired Report Request to open the Report R
26. Inserting rows into ALIAS2 OPTU2 ADD Process Time 7 Create Update At this point the steps for creating a new DB Alias are complete To Another DB Alias use Optim with additional databases you must create corresponding DB Aliases After you load the sample tables and the data privacy tables the Configuration program prompts you to create another DB Alias Your positive response opens the Create Select DB Alias dialog to repeat the configuration process for another database Note Ifthe DB Alias you created is for a DB2 z OS database the Create Copies of DB2 MVS Relationships dialog displays instead of the prompt to create another DB Alias That dialog allows you to copy the DB2 relationships into the Optim Directory to reduce the run time when accessing DB2 tables as described in 7 14 Create Copies of DB2 z OS Relationships on page 235 After that task is completed the Configuration program will prompt you to create another DB Alias as indicated above After all DB Aliases are created you can configure Personal and Product Options Refer to 5 1 5 Configure Options Installation and Configuration Guide 117 5 Configure Workstations Create Multiple DB Aliases If you are using SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix you may have several databases on one server You can create multiple DB Aliases one for each database in a single operation Configure First Workstation Create Select DB Alias he Optim Con
27. Optim ptim must use Optim created Procedures to access the System Tables For each jatabase that you want to access The Optim Configuration program can create new rocedures or it can use Procedures created for another Optim Directory for that Jatabase Select the databases to be accessed then specify whether to create or use he evicting Procedures Databases Logon Defaults Saved Logon Defaults Stored Procedure Defaults Save Registry Specifications User ID Joptusr1 Password Verify Password oook Sk T Display SQL Previous Proceed Skip Undo Cancel MS SOL Server SQLOPT qs 7 The entries on the Saved Logon Defaults tab allow you to save registry entries to access the databases You must enter your password a second time for verification e To modify the saved User ID and Password from within the Configuration program select Configure Options from the main window and edit Personal Options e To modify the User ID and Password from within Optim select Personal from the Options menu on the main window and edit the Logon tab Note The default saved logon information applies to all DB Aliases unless you provide explicit logon information on the Databases tab 126 Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Stored Procedure Use the Stored Procedure Defaults tab to provide the procedure Defaults Qualifier and Grant Auth ID required to create refresh stored pro
28. The Create Drop Packages for the Optim Directory Function was successful Database QOR922K successfully disconnected Connection to database QOR922K successful for user pstuser The Optim Directory you selected already has a name of PSTDIRECTORY The registry entry PSTDIRECTORY successfully saved Database QOR922K successfully disconnected Connection to database QOR922K successful for user pstuser Transaction committed The Write Sianature Record to the Oracle Optim Directory PSTDIRECTORY fc Use this log to review the actions in the configuration process and determine if additional action is required The Processing Log shows the following The date and time you started the Configuration program A list of the processes started completed or cancelled The tasks performed successfully or unsuccessfully Instances of connecting to or disconnecting from the database The names of newly created Optim Directory tables The names of newly created database plans packages or procedures The sample tables Optim objects and data privacy data tables loaded or dropped To keep processing steps in view you can move the Processing Log window without regard to other open windows Optim 7 1 4 1 Main Window and Menus The Configuration program generates a file PROCNFG LOG of configuration information from the current and previous sessions This file is saved to the Temporary Work Directory specifi
29. The Drop option is selected when this dialog opens You can select the Display SQL check box to browse the DDL statements generated for the process To continue click OK After the Drop process completes this dialog redisplays with the Create Refresh option selected automatically Click Proceed to create the following e Packages to access the Data Dictionary in Oracle e Plans to access Catalog Tables in DB2 e Procedures to access System Tables in Sybase ASE or SQL Server e Procedures to access Catalog Tables in Informix When the process completes the database signature is updated automatically and the Complete dialog displays Installation and Configuration Guide 227 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 7 11 2 Update Multiple DB Aliases If you are updating the DBMS version for Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix you may have several databases on one server The procedure to update the DBMS for multiple DB Aliases is similar to the procedure for updating the DBMS for a single DB Alias After you select the DB Alias and specify the new DBMS version the Configuration program automatically displays the following dialog showing all the DB Aliases that reside on a particular server amp Update the DBMS Version for a DB Alias Update Multiple DB Aliases fel EG Optim ptim will drop the Optim created Procedures created for the previous DBMS version It will hen create new Procedures to access the S
30. ile Driver Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step xl Optim Directory IOCORAIZ License Information Archive License Status Licensed Archive ODBC Driver State for this Machine Enabled Specify Product Configuration File Enable Disable Archive ODBC Interface Feature for This Machine Enable C Disable Previous Proceed _ Skip Cancel Oracle Q0R922K Ui If your site is not licensed for Archive Enable is not available Use the Specify Product Configuration File dialog to provide the complete directory path and name of the configuration file olx Configure First Workstation Specify Product Configuration File he Configuration program can create a File to hold the Optim Product Options In a ulti user environment the file must be located on a server accessible to all orkstations running Optim To create a new Configuration file select the Create New ile option and specify the name of the file to create You must also enter your xj amnans Mame Cannan IM and Password evacth as the mere sent ta won Fram TRM M Configuration File Specifications Create New File Use Existing File File Name ee Company Information Name ID Password Ss es Previous Proceed _ Undo Cancel 4 Installation and Configuration Guide 133 5 Configure Workstations Configuration
31. 3 Metadata e mary ODI Machines 9 PimaqODM T Properties 3 Alm oe Property Value Location localhost 2551 Name Primary ODM Path Primary ODM 2 Clear the Everyone check boxes 3 In the Administrators section click Add User to open the Add User dialog To add a group click Add Group Ej dd User x Provide username to be added to access list es Name cannot be empty 550 Optim 7 1 F 5 ODM Security Securing the Attunity Daemon 4 Type the user ID or group name that will have administrative privileges for the server 5 Click OK 6 From the File menu select Save All To secure the Attunity daemon assign machine access and administrator privileges to the daemon Administrator privileges allow a user to start or stop the daemon Machine access privileges determine if a user ID and password are required to use the daemon You must also assign access and administrator privileges to the daemon workspace These privileges determine the users that can use and administer the workspace Secure the daemon on the primary and secondary servers To secure the Attunity daemon 1 In the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer expand the ODM Server list the Daemons list and the IRPCD list to display the Navigator member 2 Right click the Navigator member and select Edit Workspace to open the daemon configuration edito
32. 7 14 Create Copies of DB2 z OS Relationships 235 15 Lead Drop Sample Data o ecrccritant it areren bebe ates eek 236 2 16 Lead Drop Data Privacy Data 22 occ get ce ee eine 237 7 17 Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables 0 0 0 eee eee eee 238 7 17 1 Drop the Optim Directory 2 0 cee ce ce eee 242 7 18 Purge Optim Directory Registry Entry 0000 243 7 12 Purge DB Alias 2 sce etd ene Ge takes eS bea eee ace 244 8 Product Options oe oce cieie ecek sere eee eee eee eee 245 8 1 Open the Product Options Editor 0 cece eee eee 246 Gyo USI the ENOT oo cid cana E e EE E E ne ates E 248 AAEE TOW cs eve thie dl oes E E dle aren 249 S22 Database Tan oe ee eth he did betas bende per ee OEE 252 2 3 Configuration File Tab oc pens seco seen pete oe ede a eS 257 S24 Password Tab ecis ec tanieri inia dekh ident etna EE 258 GOS Bat I E E E E E e aoe 259 Ree Servas Tal sacs bcc eke bese eed ee E E EE 268 Bo AE TED 2 5 stc55 2 pe Sasa sy os Og Gee HEE OO Deeg OS 270 S28 Load Tabii uice enan Sess dees Ea bb ee ea es 274 S29 Report Vals eenas oi vate eed be aos kee eee hee ee 276 9 Personal Options 0 0 ccc cece een e ens 279 9 1 Open the Personal Options Editor 0 2 eee eee eee 280 9 2 Using the Editor serie ceresiscie biari ia Seas ek Ha a 282 Installation and Configuration Guide ix 0 2 1 General TaD o ccc ccd ced cess eee wow ew eee ew ed 284 922 Con
33. A dump file will be created in the current directory unless you specified a target dump file name with a name similar to PROTOOL DMP Installation and Configuration Guide 33 1 Getting Started 34 Optim 7 1 2 Installation Setup Installing Optim takes only a few minutes The Setup program guides you through the installation process When Setup completes use the Configuration program to prepare your workstations to use Optim Note You can find information needed to install and configure the Optim Server Server feature of Optim on a machine using the Solaris operating environment under SPARC the HP UX operating environment the AIX operating environment or Red Hat Application Server in Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux Installing from You can copy the contents of the Optim CD to a network drive and then a Network Drive run the Setup program from the network drive To copy to a network drive 1 Create a directory on a network drive 2 Copy the contents of the Optim CD to the directory Copy all of the files in the root of the Optim CD and all of the files in the directories including subdirectories to the network drive 3 See 2 1 Run Setup to begin installation Command Line When Setup is run in Windows a command line application will be Application Display launched to shut down any Optim applications that may be running Depending on the setting of your workstation the application
34. Arguments OK Cancel Installation and Configuration Guide 335 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux Do not enter options or arguments Click OK to continue The progress of a Sun Java Runtime Environment which launches an InstallShield Wizard is displayed initially Initializing InstallShield Wizard Preparing Java tm Virtual Machine Running InstallShield Wizard The InstallShield Wizard displays a Welcome panel The Welcome panel reminds you that at the conclusion of the installation process you must manually modify the configuration files before you can run Optim Optim Server Setup InstallShield Click Next to continue 336 Optim 7 1 A l Installation Troubleshooting If the InstallShield Wizard or Welcome panel fails to display check the Setup following e The DISPLAY environment variable must be set to a value that points to the graphical workstation session used to run the setup program The signature of the mounted Optim CD must not contain the character When Automount is used on a Sun Solaris machine to mount a CD it creates a unique signature for the CD which is usually the CD s volume label If another CD with a matching volume label is mounted Automount appends a n to the end of the volume label to generate a unique signature This can occur if two versions of an Optim CD are mounted and UNIX has not been rebooted between mou
35. Configuration File and A 2 2 Pstlocal Configuration File for the Command Line Utility Password File Parameters in both configuration files may include system user ids i e filelogon odbcserver webserver server and tivoliavail DBMS logons i e pstdir and dbalias with passwords To secure passwords for configuration parameters you can use an encrypted password file separate from the configuration files The prOpass program maintains the password file encrypting passwords for parameters in the configuration files By default the password file is installed in the etc pstpass subdirectory to the PSTHOME directory However you can override the location and name of the file by providing the full path and file name in PSTPASS an environment variable Refer to A 2 3 RTSETENV Shell Script for a description of the PSTPASS environment variable Users that can start prOsvce or execute prOcmnd or prOcoms must have permission to read the password file and users that use prOpass must be able to write to the password file Note Do not move the password file to another system to do so will corrupt the file To use encrypted passwords e Execute prOpass from the Command Line to add the passwords You must be logged on to the Install directory as the owner as a user within the fenced group or as the root user e Within the configuration files specify a question mark for the password to retrieve the password from the password fi
36. Extract Files Archive Files Control Files inherit the standard file privileges of the processing user account Thus if you use the filelogon client parameter a process may be unable to access files not created under its own user account and can open files only according to the file permissions which include access to networked files If however you use the filelogon local parameter or the filelogon server userid password parameter any process can access a file created by any other process and any accessed directories must be writable to the processing user account Valid settings are local The process runs under the user account used to start the prOsvce daemon client The process runs under the user account specified on the Personal Options Server tab for the initiating Windows client or the overriding server credentials specified in pstlocal cfg server userid The process runs under the credentials password provided with the server parameter Note client or server settings require root authorization for the user account used to start the prOsvce daemon a local setting does not Installation and Configuration Guide 395 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 396 odbcserver tivoliavail userid password webserver The odbcserver parameter provides the credentials presented for physical access to Archive Files Archive Files inherit the standard file privileges of the user
37. F 9 Archive File Collections F 9 2 PST_ARCHIVE_ID Pseudocolumn The PST ARCHIVE ID pseudocolumn is logically added to each archived table during ODM processing and contains the Archive File ID of the Archive File that includes the table Use PST_ARCHIVE_ID to specify the Archive File from which a row is selected For example you can use PST ARCHIVE _ ID to control a join by avoiding duplicate rows from a table in multiple files in the Archive File Collection If the DETAILS table is related to the ITEMS table and only the DETAILS table is unique across all files in the collection then a join between the tables would result in duplicate ITEMS rows joined with DETAILS rows To avoid duplicate rows use the following syntax SELECT FROM PST DETAILS PST ITEMS WHERE PST DETAILS ITEM_ID PST ITEMS ITEM_ID AND PST DETAILS PST_ARCHIVE_ID PST ITEMS PST_ARCHIVE_ID F 9 3 PST_ARCHIVE_FILES Table An Archive File Collection includes a table named PST ARCHIVE FILES which contains a row for each Archive File in the collection PST ARCHIVE FILES has the following columns Column Name Data Type Description ARCHIVE_ID INTEGER Archive File ID GUID CHAR 40 Archive File GUID ARCHIVE_FILE NAME VARCHAR 256 Archive File name ARCHIVE_DATETIME TIMESTAMP Archive File creation date and time You can use this table to query context data from the Archive Files in the collection For example use the following syntax to find the latest Archive Fil
38. If blank the entry on the Stored Procedure Defaults tab is used For Sybase ASE databases sharing stored procedures the entry sp_ is displayed and cannot be edited An identifier for users authorized to maintain stored procedures Specify a User ID Group Name or Public If blank the entry on the Stored Procedure Defaults tab is used User ID up to 30 characters required to create refresh stored procedures If blank the entry on the Logon Defaults tab is used The password up to 30 characters required to create refresh stored procedures If blank the entry on the Logon Defaults tab is used The User ID up to 30 characters required to logon using the DB Alias This identifier is saved to the Windows registry of the workstation If blank the entry on the Saved Logon Defaults tab is used 123 5 Configure Workstations 124 Saved Password Always Ask for Password Create Primary Keys Display SQL The password up to 30 characters required to logon using the DB Alias If blank the entry on the Saved Logon Defaults tab is used Note You can change the Saved User ID and Saved Password when you configure options and when you set Personal Options Select this check box to require a password each time you connect to the database If you clear this check box you need not supply a password on future attempts to connect to the database Select this check box to create primary keys as needed for the dat
39. M Database Alias Specifications Create New For any Single DB Alias Name p E Greate Select Multiple For a Single DB Server Sybase erver Informix Use Existing For any Single Existing DB Alias Mames z Previous Proceed _ Skip Undo Cancel The Create Select DB Alias dialog presents the following options Create New Select this option to create a new DB Alias You must provide a name for the DB Alias Name Enter the name of the new DB Alias 1 to 12 characters no embedded blanks Name is blank when the Create Select DB Alias dialog opens Create Select Select this option to create or select a DB Alias for Multiple each of two or more database instances on a Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix database server Refer to Create Multiple DB Aliases Use Existing Select this option to use a previously created DB Alias Use this option to modify the name of a stored procedure for an existing DB Alias Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Name Select the name of the DB Alias Name is available only if Use Existing is selected To select from a list click the down arrow Create New or Use Existing When you select an option to create a new or modify an existing DB Alias you are prompted for the necessary information Specify DB Alias You can provide a description to distinguish a new DB Alias from other DBMS DB Aliases The configuration process displays th
40. NA optt 2006 06 1 9 15 51 00 Buitt in account for Note You must save the ACD in order to save any changes made to the role including Functional or Object Association Privileges Role Name The role name up to 30 characters To create a new role for the ACD type the name or select from a history list of role name entries e You cannot use the Role Name history list to navigate from role to role in the ACD You must open each role from the Access Control Domain Editor e Itis possible to assign identical names to roles made up of different user accounts if the roles are in different ACDs For simplicity a consistent naming convention that prevents duplicate role names may be advisable However duplicate role names may be useful if you wish to use the Optim Object Template ACL with more than one ACD In this case the Template ACL would assign access permissions to a standard set of roles with the role members varying by ACD Installation and Configuration Guide 453 Appendix D Optim Security Description Access Control Domain Allow All Privileges for this Role Tabs D 1 3 Users Tab User Group Domain Type Modified By Modified Date 454 You can use a role that is displayed in the Role Specifications dialog as a model to create a new role or replace another role in the ACD by typing or selecting a Role Name from the history list Optional text that describes the role up to 40 c
41. ORACLE SYBASE or INFORMIX DBMS version in the form n n n n n or ni as appropriate to the DBMS Creator ID Schema Name or Owner Information defined to the DBMS client to connect to the database Name within connection Provide name if DBMS is Informix or Sybase ASE and pstlogon is client or specify if pstlogon is server User ID and password for DBMS logon Provide this information if pstlogon is server Specify as the password when a secure password is supplied in a password file See A 4 2 Securing the Configuration Files for more information To use OS Authentication for Oracle specify a forward slash for userid and do not specify a password pstdir OPTIMDIR Oracle 9i APPPROD USERID pstdir OPTIMDIR DB2 8 1 APPPROD dbalias pstdir DB Alias information Use dbalias for each DB Alias that the Server can access on behalf of a client Note that a DB Alias is created from a Windows machine using the Configuration program and the DB Alias information is not verified until a connection is required by a client Name of the Optim Directory that includes the DB Alias A pstdir entry for the referenced Optim Directory is required Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration name connectstring userid password Name of the DB Alias Information needed by the DBMS to connect to the database typically the system name and port ID Enter if the database designated by the DB
42. Statement delimiter to group a series of qualifiers for a parameter An optional keyword or argument is shown in square brackets A choice of settings from which only one must be selected is shown in curved brackets A choice of settings from which none or any may be selected is shown in angle brackets Separates options Optim 7 1 C 1 Syntax and Keywords C 1 Syntax and Keywords Use the following command line syntax General PROCNFG NOLOGO FILE filename AUTORUN TRUE FALSE ON OFF YES NO RESPONDFILE filename IGNORE Optim Directory PSTDIRNAME pstdirname currentdir PSTDIRID pstdirid PSTDIRCONNECTSTR dbmscnctionstr PSTDIRPASSWORD password PSTDIRUSERID userid DB Alias DBAACTION CreateNew UseExisting DBANAME dbaliasname CONNECTSTR dbmscnctionstr PASSWORD password PASSWORDREQUIRED TRUE FALSE ON OFF YES NO USERID userid DBMSTYPE DB2MVS INFORMIX ORACLE SYBASE UDB SQLSERVER DBMSVERSION versionnum DBQUALIFIER databasequal SPSHARE TRUE FALSE ON OFF YES NO DESCRIPTION description UNICODEDB TRUE FALSE ON OFF MULTIBYTEDB TRUE FALSE ON OFF Optim Directory SPACTION BINDACTION CreateNew UseExisting or DB Alias SPQUALIFIER COLLECTIONNAME name Task TASK DB MAINTPST MAINTCAT Installation and Configuration Guide 431 Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks Key
43. You can start this process by selecting Load Drop Data Privacy Data from the Tasks menu or by selecting the Configuration Assistant from the Help menu A DB Alias is required to access the data privacy tables The DB Alias used as a high level qualifier for the table names provides a single name association for parameters needed to connect to the database The DB Alias and other Optim objects created when the data privacy tables are created are stored in an Optim Directory Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see page 185 to select the name of the Optim Directory Click Proceed to open the next dialog Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog see page 207 to specify the DB Alias for the data privacy tables Click Proceed to open the next dialog After you select the DB Alias for the data privacy tables the Configuration program opens the Load Drop Data Privacy Tables dialog If you are creating or refreshing the tables you must specify an identifier Creator ID Schema Name or Owner ID and Tablespace If you are dropping data privacy tables only the identifier is required Refer to Load Drop Data Privacy Tables on page 115 After you load or drop sample data privacy tables associated with a particular DB Alias the Configuration program displays the Load Drop Data Privacy Data for Another DB Alias dialog and prompts you to load or drop the data privacy tables associated with a different DB Alias If so the Create Select DB A
44. archivefilename ARCV_GUID gggggg ARCV_ID r COLLECTION archivefilecollection PST_AF_SUBSET AF_IN n n AF_DATE_RANGE yyyy mm dd hh mm ss yyyy mm dd hh mm ss AF_ID_RANGE x y PSTTRACE COMP nn COMP nn gt lt DATASOURCE gt 538 Optim 7 1 F 2 Define the ODM Data Source on the Primary Server Syntax lt DATASOURCE gt NAME datasourcename TYPE PST GDB READONLY true lt CONFIG gt DIRDB pstdirectoryname ARCV_FILE archivefilename ARCV_GUID geggoo ARCV_ID nn COLLECTION archivefilecollection PST_AF_SUBSET AF IN AF DATE RANGE AF ID RANGE Installation and Configuration Guide Use the following syntax to define a data source Specifies the name and type of the data source and information required to connect to the data source The data source name which can be up to 32 characters and cannot include hyphens The data source driver The value for the ODM driver is PST_GDB The value for an Archive File or Archive File Collection is true Specifies configuration properties of a data source The name of the Optim Directory in which the Archive File or Archive File Collection is registered Standard Optim processing opens the Optim Directory either reading a configuration file or obtaining Windows registry informa
45. click Next Installation and Configuration Guide 41 2 Installation Setup 2 1 5 Select Components The Select Components dialog lists the components available for installation IBM Optim Setup Eg Select Components Select the components setup will install Select the components you want to install and deselect the components you do not want to install M Description s z This component includes Optim Online Documentation 31061 K the Optim executable Optim Archive ODBC Interface 8988 K and on line help files Optim ODM Interface OK Sample Files OK 5 x PST Directory Conversion Files 64505 K Space Required on C OK Previously installed components are excluded Space Available on C 196888484 K when calculating Space Required InstallShield New gt _ Corca Compare the Space Required to install the selected components with the Space Available in the directory you specified in the Choose Destination Location dialog Note Ifthe space available is insufficient for installing the selected components click Back to specify a different destination or click Cancel to quit the installation process Optim Select Optim to install the product and the online help files Optim Online Select Optim Online Documentation to install the Introductions User Documentation Manuals Installation and Configuration Guide Optim Basic Manual and Common Elements Manual in PDF format Additionally t
46. he Optim Configuration program can convert and import the Optim Definitions in the xported File specified below Specify the file that contains the Exported Optim efinitions Optionally select the definitions to import Click lt Proceed gt or lt Import gt o import the Optim Definitions or lt Skip gt to skip this step xj Optim Directory Export File Name Jortimorr PSTEXPORT DS5 fd Optim Definitions i E DB Alias H A Access Definition 4 ARI Column Map ag Delete Request AG Re Extract Request T Continue Import if Errors I Overwite Existing Definitions Import Previous _ Proceed Skip Cancel Name of the Optim Directory into which objects are imported Enter the name of the Export File The Export File was created during the Export Process and contains the object definitions to import Identifies the objects in the Export File You can display a list of objects of a certain type by clicking the plus sign Select the check boxes associated with the objects you want to import To exclude an object clear the corresponding check box You must select at least one object definition to run the Import Process Indicate whether processing should stop if an error occurs To continue processing if an error occurs select the check box To halt processing if an error occurs clear the check box Indicate what action is required when the name of an imported object matches that of an object alrea
47. i e Request Editor Command Line Interface or ODBC Interface Run the process under the initiating user account These credentials determine the network access allowed for the process and for Oracle OS Authentication or the Informix Loader the User ID used for DBMS access The credentials are verified by the system and must include a valid User ID known to the specified security provider For Windows an actual logon for the specified user occurs and the process is started under those credentials as if the user logged on from the console directly For UNIX or Linux the effective User ID and Group ID for the process are changed to the credentials specified for running Optim processes Installation and Configuration Guide 419 Appendix B Server Credentials Run Under Server Credentials You can run processes under the authentication provided by the Server credentials This limits access to the files local to the Server machine or at least to the files that are accessible with the Server credentials Select Server credentials for processes as follows Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet select Server for the File Input Output option and select the Only files local to this Server may be accessed check box UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the filelogon parameter to local Note the following when you use the Server credentials to run processes e For Windows a service running
48. in the process 136 Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation 5 1 6 Export Registry Data If you intend to configure several workstations you can save time by exporting the Optim Directory registry data to a file and saving the file to a directory that is easily accessible During the process of configuring the first workstation you are prompted to export registry data or you can select Export Registry Data from the File menu on the Configuration main window The Export Optim Directory Registry Data dialog allows you to specify an output file name and select the registry entries and other information you want to export amp Configure First Workstation Export Optim Directory Registry Data ioj x Optim he table on the left is initialized with the Optim Directory Registry Entries defined on his workstation The table on the right indicates the entries to export Drag entries tween the two tables until the desired entries are present in the right table a File Name I Export License Information 7 H I Export Optim Directory Logon Information T Export DB Alias Logon Information Excluded from Export Selected for Export Description Previous Proceed _ Cancel Ready h The Export Optim Directory Registry Data dialog includes the following File Name Enter the name of the file to which you want to export the registry data The file name uses a default txt extension To
49. sometimes with disastrous results Installation and Configuration Guide 13 1 Getting Started For the 2000 and XP versions of Windows the disk drives and amount of disk space reserved for the paging file virtual memory can be limited by user settings that can impact stability You can view or change this value Go to System Properties gt Advanced tab gt Performance Settings button gt Advanced tab 1 2 2 Required Database Permissions Oracle 14 The user account used to perform the Optim Configuration requires specific database permissions for example to allow tables and procedures to be created This section describes the required permissions for the database management systems that Optim supports When you use the Configuration program to create the Optim Directory tables and procedures create a DB Alias and load the sample tables for an Oracle database the user account must have the following permissions CREATE PROCEDURE CREATE TABLE CREATE SESSION UNLIMITED TABLESPACE SELECT ANY DICTIONARY Note The SELECT ANY DICTIONARY permission can be granted to PUBLIC to satisfy the requirement If the Oracle Initialization parameter 07_ DICTIONARY ACCESSIBILITY is set to TRUE the SELECT ANY TABLE permission can be used instead of the SELECT ANY DICTIONARY permission The above permissions cannot be revoked for the user account once the Optim Directory or DB Alias is created Oracle packages are run under the pe
50. the Select an Access Control List dialog used to select a model ACL from a list of objects If you select an ACL using the Select an Access Control List dialog the Type and Name for the selected ACL will be displayed automatically To populate Type and Name with the current entries each time you open the Select Access Control List Model dialog click Set as Default Select an Access Control List Use the Select an Access Control List dialog to select a model ACL from a list of objects The Identifier area displays the object types to list on the right side of the dialog Select an Access Control List olx Access Control Domain ACL Name Modified By Modified Date 4 bid pi gt OTHER WEST DOMiga 9 15 2005 12 20 21 PM TEST NA topt4 2 2 2007 2 26 26 PM EMPTY WEST DOM eng1 9 5 2005 12 20 21 PM TEST3 NA opt2 2 2 2007 2 27 02 PM NA topt3 71 2006 2 17 29 PM NA opt 2 9 2008 2 15 02 PM Access Control Dor a Access Definition A Archive Request At o Calendar ACL EE Column Map ACL Column Map Proc 4 7a Compare Request DR Convert Request A gt gt Enter pattern for Access Control List NAME TEST 7 Cancel Refresh Help 4 After you select an Identifier ACLs are listed on the right side below the type of object Double click the desired ACL to select it as a model Note An ACL is identified by the name of its associated object Enter Patter
51. the Windows Control Panel will contain an entry to onfigure the Optim Server console Select an option to enable or disable the Optim erver feature Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step xl a Optim Directory DIRECTORY m License Information Server License Status Server State for this Machine Licensed Enabled M Enable Disable Server Feature for This Machine Enable C Disable Previous Proceed _ Skip Cancel Oracle Q0R922K 7 If the site is not licensed for the Server Enable is not available Refer to Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server for configuration information Installation and Configuration Guide 201 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 7 6 Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine Specify Optim Directory Enable Disable the Archive ODBC Interface Feature 202 To enable or disable the ODBC interface capability of a machine select Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine from the Tasks menu The Configuration program displays the Specify Optim Directory dialog The Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry option is selected Specify the name of the Optim Directory you want to use Click the down arrow to select from a list Click Proceed to continue On the Enable Disable the Archive ODBC Interface Feature dialog specify whether to enable or disable the ODBC d
52. update DBMS version 0000 228 Installation and Configuration Guide Archive File Collection cceeeeeee 561 SUDSEUS cissesedaiwonenictentosannnaeierioanmans 562 Archive tab Personal Options 315 316 Archive browse index directory 313 Archive directory sesser 315 Archive index directory c 0 315 directory for Subset Extract Files 316 file backup device c ceceeeeeeeteee 316 tiim Search list sietne 316 use index to search sesser 316 Archive tab Product Options 270 273 available file backup devices 270 Centera Options cccecceeseeseeeteenees 27 Centera retention period 06 271 Tivoli options 271 user can review data to be deleted 270 WORM device retention period 272 Audit Tables dialog 262 264 311 312 Select Table to be Audited dialog 266 SUMIMALY yinin 267 Auditing Active Statis carscescecacsesencaxnvestdacanmrencent 260 active user status sses 260 Audit Tables dialog 262 264 311 312 descriptions sisirain 267 enable disable for tables 0 312 INAactive StAtUs ssssisiisirissssisisissrississs 260 Personal Options tables list 311 312 Product Options Edit tab 262 PSTAUDIT sasscrctstecineceostasenacsonces 262 311 Site defaults sjsssnscilsseacsesilosssscsniivldeens 262 SUMUMALY prienna nA 267 615 Index B Bind Drop Plans creatin
53. 1 W UpdateFilesPanel Update_rtserver 0 1 W UpdateFilesPanel Update_rt4s 0 1 W UpdateFilesPanel Update_pstserv 0 1 W UpdateFilesPanel Update_pstlocal 0 1 W UpdateFilesPanel Update_locale 0 1 W View_Readme Value 0 1 Keywords W LicensePanel selection The Optim license agreement You must accept the license agreement to continue the installation 1 lI accept the terms of the license agreement 2 Ido not accept the terms of the license agreement W LicensePanel selection 1 P installLocation The directory path for installing the Server If the directory name contains spaces enclose it in double quotes P installLocation opt IBM Optim rt P ProgramFeature active Install the Server This option installs all files needed to run the Server in a Solaris HP UX or AIX operating environment including shell scripts and configuration files true Install the Server false Do not install the Server P ProgramFeature active tru 352 Optim 7 1 A l Installation P ODBCFeature active Install the Optim Archive ODBC Interface feature Selecting this component registers the Optim Archive ODBC Interface driver with ODBC on your workstation Note true false P If an earlier version of ODBC is installed selecting this component will upgrade the API Install the Optim Archive ODBC Interface feature Do not
54. 2 Using the Editor Tivoli Select this check box if Tivoli is available If you select this check box the Tivoli Options box becomes available Note To use a Tivoli device you must install the Tivoli client and API support on the machine where the Optim Server runs HP RISS Select this check box if HP RISS is available Note You can copy an Archive File to a backup device by referencing a Storage Profile with the necessary backup device parameters in an Archive Request For details refer to the Archive User Manual Storage Profile Tivoli Options Node Name Specify an identifier that allows access to the Tivoli tape backup device Password Specify a password that allows access to the Tivoli tape backup device Centera Minimum Specify the default minimum retention period for protecting Archive File Retention Files on Centera from deletion The minimum retention period is measured from the time the Archive Process copies the file to Centera After the minimum retention period expires the file can be deleted from Centera Allow User to alter Select this check box to enable the Minimum Minimum Retention File Retention setting in the Storage Profile Utility allowing users to override the default minimum retention defined in Product Options Centera Default Select to use the Centera default minimum retention period based on your Centera configuration Infinite Select to keep an Archive File on Centera forever the file c
55. 255 8 Product Options DBMS Buffer Limits 256 Insert Load Convert Requests Ignore all round Continue processing when a trip Failures Use Value from multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Default Use the round trip processing Personal Options setting from the Database tab in Personal Options Select an option for handling round trip conversion issues during Insert Load or Convert processing Stop Processing Stop processing when a multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Each row of data is checked for characters that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Ignore all round Continue processing when a trip Failures Use Value from multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Default Use the round trip processing Personal Options setting from the Database tab in Personal Options Select the Ignore all round trip Failures option if the database does not contain data with characters that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion or if columns used to manipulate data in a Column Map e g a function is used and columns for which selection criteria are defined do not contain characters that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Set the buffer size to use when fetching or deleting rows from the database Optim multipl
56. 422 Mapped drives cannot be used for file names when processes are run from the Server because the drive is mapped only when the user is logged on to the interactive desktop Mapping is removed when the user logs off or disconnects from the share Thus a file that is valid when the request is created may be invalid at run time To specify network files use a Universal Naming Convention UNC in the following format servername sharename Each file server must specify the User IDs and access rights read write execute and so on for each of its shares The User ID that is sent to Optim 7 1 B 1 Server Credentials these file servers is the User ID used to run the process i e using Server credentials explicit credentials or client credentials The following restrictions apply The share on the file server can specify the User ID from that Domain or everyone The share on the file server can specify the Server machine name and the User ID or everyone e You cannot specify Local System Account on a file server since there is no external name associated with this credential When a connection is made to the file server the guest or anonymous account is used therefore the network share must specify that the guest account or everyone has access to the share B 1 5 Registry Access for Process Requests Windows The Server component always uses the Local Machine hive in the registry which is
57. ACL for a File Access Definition from this dialog or from the File Access Definitions dialog Create or Edit This section explains how to create or edit a File Access Definition an FAD To create or edit a File Access Definition 1 In the main window select File Access Definitions from the Security submenu on the Options menu to open the File Access Definitions dialog 2 The next step depends on your purpose To create a new FAD select New FAD from the Tools menu in the File Access Definitions dialog to open the File Access Definition Editor e To edit an existing FAD double click the grid row to display the desired FAD in the File Access Definition Editor 3 The next step depends on your purpose To change the ACD used as the basis for roles listed in a new FAD select a name from the Access Control Domain drop down list To edit the Table List or list columns for explicit permissions use the shortcut menu e To list a Role select a role name from the Role drop down list in the Table Access Control grid Installation and Configuration Guide 479 Appendix D Optim Security To Allow or Deny access to the table or column select the appropriate check boxes 4 Click OK to save the FAD These steps are the minimum required to create or edit an FAD Refer to the following for complete details D 3 1 File Access Definition Editor Description Access Control Domain 450 Use the File Acc
58. Alias includes the Optim Directory User ID and password for DBMS logon Provide this information if dbaliaslogon is server Specify as the password when a secure password is supplied in a password file See A 4 2 Securing the Configuration Files for more information To use OS Authentication for Oracle specify a forward slash for userid and do not specify a password dbalias OPTIMDIR DBALIAS USERID dbalias OPTIMDIR DBALIAS DO805 dbalias OPTIMDIR DBALIAS USERID PASSWORD loader The location of the DBMS loader for a delegated Load Request You can identify a loader for a specific Optim Directory and DB Alias or you can identify a default loader be used for any DB Alias within a DBMS pstdir dbalias dbmstype pathtoloader excptntblcid The Loader is for a specific DB Alias Enter the name of the Optim Directory that includes the DB Alias The Optim Directory must be referenced in a pstdir parameter This setting requires a dbalias name The Loader is for a specific DB Alias Enter the name of the DB Alias The DB Alias must be referenced in a dbalias parameter This setting requires a pstdir name The Loader is the default fora DBMS You must also provide a value for dbmstype DBMS type Enter Oracle Sybase Informix or UDB Path to the executable loader file Default CID for creating an exception table loader oracle opt oracle 816 bin sqlldr loader PSTDIR DBALIAS opt orac
59. Archive File before displaying the File Access Definition Table Column Selection dialog For more information see Selecting Tables from an Archive File Note Access permissions in the ACL for the FAD determine the options and actions that are available to you For example the Remove shortcut menu options are not available to a role that is limited to read access Optim 7 1 D 3 File Access Definition Table Access Use the Table Access Control list to define access permissions for an Control entry in the Table List You can assign access permissions to selected roles in the associated ACD and a default for all user accounts and roles for which access permissions are not assigned explicitly If the AC Type for an entry in the Table List is None Table Access Control list is blank and cannot be edited Role Default and names of roles for which the File Access Definition explicitly controls access Role names not included in the Access Control Domain that serves as the basis for the FAD are italicized and settings for them have no effect Notes e Ifa user is included in multiple roles in the list the most restrictive permission applies e Unless the AC Type for the Table List entry is None the Table Access Control list includes a Default setting This default cannot be deleted and applies to users for which no explicit permissions are granted Type the name or use the drop down list to select the name of a role defined
60. Calendar and set cascade delete update options The General tab is always foremost when the dialog opens 248 Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor Database Configuration File Password Edit Servers Archive Load Report 8 2 1 General Tab Establish the maximum number of rows that can be processed in an Insert or Delete Process before a commit is issued and prevent or allow optional table locks during an Insert or Delete Process Establish the path to the Configuration File for the selected Product Options Change the password for the Product Options dialog Select audit preferences for editing data Specify other site options for using default values Specify protocol endpoint address and network information for machines configured with the Server Select options that apply to Archive Processes Specify options for adding Loader parameters Specify defaults for creating reports using the Report Request Editor including limits and spacing preferences Use the General tab to establish default fetch and extract limits for Archive Compare Edit and Extract Processes Limits Establish the maximum number of rows in a fetch set for browsing or editing data or using Point and Shoot and the maximum number of rows for extracting or archiving data Maximum Fetch Rows Installation and Configuration Guide Specify the maximum number of rows 1 to 100000 retrieved from a table This limit applies to rows t
61. Configuration Tasks are used to configure workstations to use Optim The first Configure the First Workstation creates the Optim Directory and establishes connectivity to databases through the creation of associated DB Aliases If additional workstations are used the Configure Additional Workstations task guides you through the process needed to establish them Once established any workstation can be configured as an Optim Server if your license permits Tasks Menu Use the Configuration Assistant or commands from the Tasks menu to configure the Optim environment You can choose to perform these tasks at any time Note Before you configure the first workstation and any additional workstations you must sign the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit of your own creation You cannot continue with the Configuration process or use Optim until you sign a valid exit using the Sign Optim Exit dialog as described in Chapter 3 Signing an Optim Exit Installation and Configuration Guide 77 5 Configure Workstations 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Several steps are required to configure the first workstation However you need not accomplish all steps while configuring the first workstation but can come back to them later by selecting a task directly from the Tasks menu For example you are given the opportunity to initialize and establish security when configuring the first workstation but will probably want to perform this
62. Configure Workstations During the process that drops sample tables and loads refreshes sample tables the Configuration program displays the Insert Request Progress dialog Sampk Tabks Insert Request HIM E3 m Totals Rows to be processed 2678 Rows Inserted 4237 Rows Updated 0 Rows with Errors 0 Current Table Rows Inserted 1700 Rows Updated 0 Failed Rows 0 coma Inserting rows into ALIAS2 OPTUS DET Process Time 7 Load Data Privacy Data Tables 114 Data privacy data tables are available to clients who have an Optim Data Privacy License thus the instructions that follow apply only to those clients Data privacy tables allow you to mask company and personal data such as employee names customer names social security numbers credit card numbers and e mail addresses to generate transformed data that is both valid and unique Generally these data privacy tables are loaded when you configure the first workstation but you also can load or refresh them by selecting Load Drop Data Privacy Data from the Tasks menu Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Load Drop Data Privacy Tables DB Alias Load Refresh DP Tables Drop DP Tables Table Specifications Display SQL The Load Drop Data Privacy Tables dialog allows you to provide the identifier Creator ID Schema or Owner ID and tablespace for the data privacy tables before they are loaded Co
63. Connections Ne inactive fad i E IV Allow User to Lock Tables MBCS Roundtrip Processing IV Allow Insert Action Delete Option Archive Extract Requests top Processing IV Enforce DBMS Rel Name Lengths Jv lise Gracie Array Delete Insert Load Convert Requests ignore all round trip Failures x T Allow Optim PK Rels on DB Views Extract using Uncommitted Read M DBMS Buffer Limits Inactive g Fetch Buffer Size Delete Buffer Size 512x P 51x x Undo Defaults aa Cancel Apply Help Zi Specify the maximum number of rows 1 to 999999 inserted restored or deleted before changes are committed to the database If you do not specify a limit the default value is 200 An Insert Restore or Delete Request can require more frequent commits Optim normally runs in chained mode When a trigger in a Sybase ASE table will be fired as a result of an Insert or Delete Process and the trigger calls a stored procedure that must run in unchained mode the connection must be in unchained mode for the procedure to work Select an option for running an Insert or Delete Process as follows Active Require Insert Restore and Delete Processes to run in unchained mode the Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options see Sybase Unchained Mode on page 329 is unavailable Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor Allow User to Lock Tables Allow Insert Action Delete Option Enforce D
64. Control List IDENTIFIER NAME PPTUSR Cancel Refresh Help Double click on an item to display its contents WY D 1 1 Access Control Domain Editor The Access Control Domain Editor lists roles in the ACD The name of the ACD is displayed at the top of the dialog The Role List displays the roles in the ACD When you open the Access Control Domain Editor by selecting New ACD from the Tools menu in the Access Control Domains dialog the Optim Administrator role is displayed by default You can also open the Access Control Domain Editor dialog for an existing ACD by double 450 Optim 7 1 D 1 Access Control Domain clicking the name of an ACD listed in the Access Control Domains dialog OTHER Access Control Domain Editor File Edit Tools Options Help lel Es 6 8 a 5 3 6 S rl Description o Role List Modified By Modified Date 4 bia 41 Tech Writers NRTH DOMiga 2005 09 15 12 20 21 Description 4 gt l Administrator NRTH DOMiqa 2005 09 1 12 20 21 Security Manager To add edit or delete a role use the shortcut menu to open the Role Specifications dialog which is used to create and modify roles for an ACD and if Functional or Object Security is used at your facility to grant or deny related privileges to those roles Description Role List Installation and Configuration Guide Optional text that describes the ACD up to 40 characters A g
65. DB Alias or Optim Directory Tables as well as enable or disable the Optim Security features Each task is described in the following sections Optim 7 1 7 1 Create Update DB Alias 7 1 Create Update DB Alias Optim supports the use of any number of database instances However there must be a unique DB Alias in the active Optim Directory for each database instance A DB Alias serves as a high level qualifier for naming database tables and provides a single name for connecting to a particular database You can define the necessary DB Aliases at installation or use the Configuration program to add DB Aliases after installation by selecting Configuration Assistant from the Help menu or by selecting Create Update DB Alias from the Tasks menu Notes e Ifusing the Server to access data referenced by the DB Alias you also must add the DB Alias information to the Connections tab on the Optim Server Settings applet See Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server e If Object Security is enabled and DB Alias objects are secured when saved a new DB Alias is secured by an ACL modeled after the Optim Object Template ACL If the Optim Object Template ACL has not been defined when you create a DB Alias you must define an ACL for each object that requires an ACL For more information about securing objects see D 2 Access Control List on page 469 Installation and Configuration Guide 185 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Specify
66. E 1 Open the Report Request Editor lt 2 0 06 0 6 beeen 513 E 1 1 Create a New Report Request 0 5 0 4640 513 E 1 2 Selecta Report Request to Edit 0 0 6 0606 eee eed 514 E2 Using the Editor cienne eons EEEE ieee engin EE 515 E21 General TA eeo E E E E EE ee E EE RE 517 E22 Souny CENA eeina aie eE a EE Ge we eve 518 Eoo MoD Tab eea beh bea bees PAORO 522 E3 Process Repon Request 3 ok conse ease eeaeeeene eeeaens 523 E 3 1 Schedule a Report Process 0000 cee cece eens 523 E32 Runa Report Request se seas es an eas bade se ease ake 523 E33 Report Process Report ics 52cis eet ee aad eet 524 Appendix F Open Data Manager 0 0 00 ce eee eee 527 FA cts D ae a iP re 528 F i Windows Installation 4 04 5 50044 o4 374 h as box eres soot 528 P12 UNIX Installation lt ei sca sets bed bee he ee 531 F 1 3 UNIX Administation escocesa sae pe eee eee ee ee 533 F 1 4 Attunity Studio Configuration 0 2 0 e eee eee 534 Installation and Configuration Guide xi F 2 Define the ODM Data Source on the Primary Server F 3 Secondary Server Configuration 0 0005 F 4 Thin Client Installation 0 0 0 cece ee eee ees F4 1 ODBC Tht Client cs ceca cd cide nce ce reres Pal JDBC Tikit Client 2 022 i44cctseeetiiicesivns F 5 ODM Security 0 cee cece eee eee nenes F 6 Runtime Connection Information 005 F 7 ODM Data Type Conv
67. E 2 2 Security Criteria Criteria Type Use the Security Criteria tab to define criteria for reports on permissions for Functional or Object Security privileges Permissions apply to users and groups defined in roles in an Access Control Domain ACD Functional Security reporting lists permissions defined in the Default ACD Object Security reporting lists permissions defined in the ACD associated with the Access Control List ACL that secures a specified object For more information about ACDs ACLs and security privileges see Appendix D Optim Security OPTUSR RPT1 Report Request Editor ioi x File Edit Tools Options Help Blslalal 6 S AB valel Description test report General Security Criteria Notify Criteria Type User ks Server Name iLocal v Select a Security Report type User Lists Functional Security permissions for specified users and groups Function Lists all Functional Security permissions for selected privileges Object Lists Object Security permissions for specified users and groups that apply to specified objects and the ACL that secures each object Optim 7 1 E 2 Using the Editor Server Name User Report Domain and User Group Function Report For User and Object Security Reports Select the name of an Optim Server or the Local workstation that the Report Process will use to verify user and group names The machine must be part of the domain or
68. Existing Optim Directory Select this option to register an Optim Directory in the Windows registry on the workstation This option allows you to perform the Access Existing Optim Directory task see page 191 214 Optim 7 1 7 9 Rename an Optim Directory 7 9 1 Rename an Optim Directory and the Windows Registry Entry Specify Optim After selecting the option to rename an Optim Directory the Specify Directory Optim Directory dialog is displayed The option to Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry is selected Specify the Name of the Directory you want to rename To select from a list click the down arrow Rename Optim Directory Specify Optim Directory he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains a Optim Directory in a named registry entry Select the name of a Optim Directory From he list of existing registry names then click lt Proceed gt to continue Installation and Configuration Guide 215 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Connect to When renaming an Optim Directory the Configuration program must Database connect to the database and verify the user has authorization to perform the task On the Connect to Database dialog you must specify the User ID Password and Connection String that the workstation needs to connect to the Directory Rename Optim Directory Connect to Database Directory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authori
69. Export Data from an Old Directory dialog Optim 7 1 G 1 Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories G 1 2 Step 2 Export Data from Old Optim Directory The next step in the process is to export objects from the old Optim Directory B amp Convert Optim Directory Objects Step 2 Export Data from an Old 0 olx n Step 2 you will export the data from the old Optim Directory using this version of al To begin this step select the Export Data from an Old Optim Directory check box and click Proceed To skip this step and display the Import Data into New Optim Directory dialog leave the check box blank and click Proceed Installation and Configuration Guide 571 Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects Specify Optim Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog to select the name of the Directory Optim Directory from which objects are exported Convert Optim Directory Objects Specify Optim Directory he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains a Optim Directory in a named registry entry Select the name of a Optim Directory From he list of existing registry names then click lt Proceed gt to continue Connect to The Configuration program must connect to the database in order to Database access the old Optim Directory tables The entries in the Connect to 572 Optim 7 1 G 1 Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories Database dialog are populated with
70. File Specifications Company Information Modify Product Options 134 The Specify Product Configuration File dialog includes the following Create New File Use Existing File File Name Name ID Password Select this option to create a new Product Configuration File Select this option to use an existing Product Configuration File Provide the complete directory path and name of the Product Configuration File To select a file from your system directories click the browse button Note The Configuration File is usually shared by all users at a site specify a path on a file server that is easily accessible to all users Name of the company licensed to use Optim Company identifier required for using Optim Enter the password required for creating a new Product Configuration File Note The password is provided by email when the product is shipped Optim is distributed with standard settings for Product Options The Modify Product Options dialog allows you to customize these settings to accommodate conditions at your site If the Optim Directory is in multi byte format you will be prompted to use Product Options to indicate how Optim should handle round trip Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation errors For more information see MBCS Roundtrip Processing on page 255 amp Configure First Workstation Modify Product Options he Configuration program allows you to configure product op
71. Installation and Configuration Guide Optim Directory for the task pstdirname Name of the Optim Directory currentdir The current Optim Directory default Identifier that prefixes Optim Directory table names Schema Name Creator ID or Owner ID for the Optim Directory tables pstdirid Connection to the Optim Directory dbmscnctstr Name that permits access to the database containing the Optim Directory Password for connection A value is required if the Always Prompt for Password option is active for the Optim Directory password User account with DBMS permission to connect userid If TASK MAINTPST the user account must have the authority through System Privileges or Roles to create the tables and to catalog the packages plans or procedures under the appropriate table identifier 433 Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks DB Alias DBAACTION DBANAME CONNECTSTR PASSWORD PASSWORDREQUIRED 434 Processing indicator for the DB Alias CreateNew Create a new DB Alias named by DBANAME UseExisting Use the existing DB Alias indicated by DBANAME Name of DB Alias dbaliasname Required if TASK DB or TASK MAINTCAT Connection string for the database associated with the DB Alias dbmscnctstr Required if TASK DB or TASK MAINTCAT Password for connection password Required if the Always Prompt for Password option is active for the DB Alias or if cre
72. Map Proc dialog type a name in the Pattern box and click Save 6 Edit the Column Map Proc as needed 7 Compile Sample Standard A Standard procedure is called to derive the value for a destination Procedure column in a Column Map This sample Column Map procedure is created from the CMExit bas file provided as described above This procedure performs two operations on the sample database table OPTIM_ CUSTOMERS as follows e Discards rows that have a value of zero 0 inthe YTD SALES column and processes all other rows e Assigns a value of SE012 to the SALESMAN _ ID column for customers in Florida rows with FL in the STATE column To use this sample in a Column Map you must specify PROC CMEXIT BAS in the source column for the destination column SALESMAN ID Sample Table The sample table information Column Map procedure is created from Information the TBLINFO BAS file as described above This sample is provided to Procedure demonstrate the Optim Basic Column Map procedures that you can use to retrieve data about a process product or database table This procedure moves unchanged source data to the destination and demonstrates how to output the following e Name of Optim Temp Directory e Name of Optim Data Directory e Name of Optim Script e Company Name e Optim Release Number Optim Build Number e Optim Error Codes e Instance Thread ID Thread Handle e Operating System e Operating System R
73. Object Template ACL The ACD that forms the basis for the roles in the ACL An ACL references roles in the ACD in order to translate them into network accounts Roles not defined in the ACD or in the ACD but not referenced in the ACL are denied access The type of object secured by the ACL Installation and Configuration Guide 471 Appendix D Optim Security ACL Grid 472 The grid allows you to list roles in the ACL and define permissions Role Access Type Object Access Enter a role name or select from the drop down list of roles in the ACD Role names not included in the ACD are italicized Notes Ifthe ACD does not include any roles the Role list is not available e A role that is not defined in the ACD is denied all access e A user or group account that is not included in a listed role is denied all access The most restrictive permission applies to a user or group account that is included in multiple roles in the ACL Allow and Deny identify the check boxes in their rows If both the Allow and Deny check boxes are cleared accounts in the role are provisionally denied the privilege but may be granted the privilege as members of another role Possible access to the object Use each set of Allow and Deny check boxes to define access permissions for the role Read Controls the ability to open or view an object If access is denied a warning popup indicates the object is restricted by sec
74. Optim Directory Description Type and Version may be populated with previously entered information The Specify Optim Directory DBMS dialog includes the following Optim Enter text to explain the purpose of the Optim Directory Directory up to 40 characters The description is Description especially valuable if you have multiple Optim Directories Type Select the DBMS for the Optim Directory database To select from a list click the down arrow The selected DBMS appears on the status bar of subsequent dialogs in the process Note You cannot create the Optim Directory in a DB2 z OS database Also an Optim Directory in an SQL Server database is not accessible to a UNIX based Optim Server Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Version Select the version of the DBMS for the Optim Directory database To select from a list click the down arrow Specify Character Character data such as object names and primary keys are stored in the Set of Optim Optim Directory in one of these formats ASCII Unicode or multi Directory byte Choose the option that corresponds to the character set of the database for the Optim Directory Configure First Workstation Specify Character Set of Optim Director Bi EG Optim he Optim Configuration Program can configure this Optim Directory to keep character a lata stored in it e g object names Optim Primary Keys Audit data etc in one of hree Formats Single
75. Optim Directory s es 85 update DBMS version 0000 228 System Requirements hardware software ecceeeeeeeeeneees 11 supported DBMSS ceeseceeeseereees 12 T Tasksanenu sipiin 183 244 access Optim Directory s s s 191 configure additional workstations 140 150 configure first workstation 78 139 configure Options c cceeeeeeees 232 copy DB2 relationships 0 235 create additional Optim Directory 190 create primary keys sses 233 create update DB Alias 96 185 189 create update Optim Directory 190 drop DB Alias sssi 238 241 drop Optim Directory 238 242 enable disable ODBC Interface occ eee 202 Installation and Configuration Guide Optim Server viswnincinudiann 201 load drop sample data 236 237 maintain access DB Alias suscisisiimsinssrsntsass 205 212 Optim Directory sses 203 204 purge MB ANAS gare 244 Optim Directory cceeeeee 243 DULPOSE purrasa eran nRa EE Et 10 update DBMS version for DB Alias cece 224 231 for Optim Directory 221 223 Trace Fill scsccatousvase meinen R 284 Troubleshooting cccecsesceeseeeteeteeseeeees 30 Image Locator Diagnostic Tool 30 Microsoft Debugging Utility 0 0 0 0 32 Oracle Connection Diagnostic Tool 31 U UDT suenen 296 Uncommitted Data Extract 0 0000 254 Unicode Support
76. Optim Server Settings applet which allows you to provide settings unique to the server such as the path and executable file name for each database loader connection strings for all DB Aliases and protocols for access to the server C Program Files IBM Optim RT BIN C Documents and Settings The tabs on the Optim Server Settings dialog are described in the following paragraphs Detailed information is provided in the following sections General Errors Load Connection Access The default Temporary Work Directory and Data Directory Font characteristics for displays of informational warning and error messages Indicate the maximum number of lines displayed in the message bar and whether to hide the message bar when empty The path and name of the executable required to gain access to each DBMS Loader Connect strings for all DB Aliases in an Optim Directory Access to specific Server drives and directories Optim 7 1 Startup Type of start up for the Server Security The source of User ID and password information to log on Endpoints Protocol and address information for machines hosting the Server Archive Directories for storing Archive files and Archive Index files Retention Options to scan Optim Directories for Archive Files with a retention policy Status Current workstation connections to machines hosting the Server Email Email addresses for report messages As part of the insta
77. Optim The first step in creating a new DB Alias is to specify the Optim Directory Directory where you want to store that DB Alias The Configuration program displays the Specify Optim Directory dialog Create Update Optim Directory Specify Optim Directory he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains a Optim Directory in a named registry entry The name is also stored in the Optim Directory Shared Optim Directories must have unique names Specify the name for the Optim Directory and registry entry then click lt Proceed gt to continue Greate New Registry Entry for Existing Optim Directory e The option to Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry is selected Specify the name of the Optim Directory you want to use To select from a list click the down arrow To continue click Proceed 186 Optim 7 1 7 1 Create Update DB Alias The Configuration program opens a query dialog lt gt Create Update DB Alias Create Update DB Alias for the Optim Dire F you are creating 4 DB Alias for the database containing the Optim Directory Tables select the Create Update DB Alias for the Optim Directory Database checkbox Select E Proceed gt to continue to the next step If you plan to use Optim to access user tables other than Optim Directory tables on the database select the Create Update DB Alias for the Optim Directory Database check box If you want to create a DB Alias f
78. Optim server if it is running 2 Change to the users roberts rtinstalled rt directory Notice the rt subdirectory appended to the install directory this is required 3 Run the opmdsign script in the rt sbin subdirectory and specify the present working directory In the following example the user specified the system variable pwd to indicate that users roberts rtinstalled rt is the present working directory The pwd variable has the same effect as specifying the directory s full path 410 Optim 7 1 A 5 The Optim Exit in UNIX Console cd users roberts rtinstalledirt sbinfopmdsign pwd prOsign d Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to your company Id E Note Inthe above example the pr0sign d parameter shown on the third line was generated by the signing script to indicate the default script is being signed 4 Type your company credentials when prompted for that information Your company credentials consist of the company Id Name and Password assigned to your organization when you received Optim All three entries are case sensitive and you must enter them in the format provided to you Press Enter after each prompt to display the next prompt After you specify your company Id for example press Enter to display the Name prompt Console cd users roberts rtinstalled rt sbin opmdsign pw prOsign d Please wait Please enter the Optim credentia
79. Oracle QOR922K 74 To retain the packages plans or procedures click Skip To browse the DDL used to drop the packages plans or procedures select Display SQL and click Proceed Drop Another After you drop the DB Alias the Configuration program opens the DB Alias Drop Another DB Alias dialog Select the check box to open the Create Select DB Alias dialog and restart the process for another DB Alias Installation and Configuration Guide 239 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Disable the Optim The Configuration program opens the Enable Disable Optim Server Server Feature Feature dialog next to allow you to disable the Server feature amp Drop DB Alias Optim Tables Enable Disable Optim Server Feature _ OF x he Configuration program can configure machines running Windows NT 2000 xP to be an Optim Server When enabled the Windows Control Panel will contain an entry to onfigure the Optim Server console Select an option to enable or disable the Optim Server feature Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step Click Proceed to disable the Server feature or click Skip to advance to the next step without disabling the Server feature If the site is not licensed for the Server this dialog is not displayed 240 Optim 7 1 7 17 Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables Disable the Archive The Configuration program opens the Enable Disable Archive ODBC Feature ODBC Featu
80. Rows Specify the number of rows 100 to 5000 to process before updating the status message on the Progress dialog The default value is 100 Seconds Specify the number of seconds 5 to 60 to pass before updating the process time on the Progress dialog The default value is 5 Format Numeric Select this check box to format numeric values displayed on progress Values dialogs and in process reports for all actions Clear this check box to display numeric values without formatting e g 99888 For example if you select this check box and run the Extract Process the Extract Request Progress dialog would display 99 888 for the total number of rows extracted depending on the numeric format defined for Windows Note To view the numeric format for your workstation select Regional Options from the Control Panel and review the Numbers tab Report Retention Report Levels Specify the maximum number of reports you can retain for each type of process You can specify a value from 0 through 200 A value of 0 default disables the report retention feature When the number of retained reports for a particular type of process exceeds the maximum the oldest report is deleted and the current report is saved 322 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Retain Scheduler Command Line Reports Report Retention Directory Installation and Configuration Guide Select to retain reports generated by processes invoked using the the Scheduler or
81. Servers Exchange Server Name or Internet SMTP Outgoing Server s Name Port if not standard Sender s mailbox From address Email account logon Logon domain Email account password Send Test Email Microsoft Outlook client version 2000 or later to send messages through a Microsoft Exchange server Email Transport 21x IV Activate Collaboration Data Object Transport Uncheck to use Simple Mail Transport Protocol Set From one of these known Email Servers custom bad Exchange Server Name or Internet SMTP Outgoing Server s Name Port if not standard EXCHANGESERVER Sender s mailbox From address MyAccount MyExchangeServer com Email account logon Logon domain Email account password yDoMaIN Jescccscees Send Test Email Co Cancel MyUserID If you use the SMTP email transport keep this check box cleared default and select OK A popup will ask you if you want to connect without entering a password If you use the CDO email transport select this check box to enable the dialog and continue entering information Click to select an account from the list and populate the remainder of the Email Transport dialog with information for the selected account Type an exchange server name or internet address Type a port name or leave blank default port Type the sender From email address Type the email logon name Type the domain name Type the password A blank password is vali
82. Tab Use the options on the Browse tab to set preferences for browsing data and to select font characteristics for browsing a Compare File to quickly identify changed data Personal Options lt a 1 4 E Display Column Select to display the data type length and nullable attributes for all Attributes columns in a selected table when browsing an Extract File Archive File or a Compare File To display only column names clear the check box Side Label Display Select to display rows one at a time with column names and values side by side To display multiple rows in a columnar format clear this check box Auto Switch Select to automatically switch subordinate tables in a stack of two or more joined tables to display related rows When you select a row in a table and there are no related rows in the subordinate table the display is automatically switched to the next table in the stack that has a related row Installation and Configuration Guide 313 9 Personal Options 314 Display Row Count Maximum Exclude Rows Changed Data Display Attributes Specify the default number of rows to display for each joined table Use row count to manage the display area when you join several tables Specify a row limit to improve performance when browsing an Extract Archive or Control File that contains a large number of rows When browsing the Exclude Rows and Only Show Rows in Error features are unavailable for tables
83. Text that describes the user or group account Shortcut Menu Right click the grid to display the following shortcut menu commands Commands Add Users Groups Open the Security Users and Groups dialog used to select multiple user and group accounts from a list of members in a network domain Remove Remove the selected user or group account from the role Remove All Remove all user and group accounts from the role Everyone Group The Everyone group includes all users in all Windows domains and UNIX nodes in your network This group is not available in the Security Users and Groups dialog To add this group to a role type Everyone in User Group leave Domain blank and select the Type Group Security Users and Groups When you select Add Users Groups from the shortcut menu on the Users tab the Security Users and Groups dialog is displayed Use the Installation and Configuration Guide 455 Appendix D Optim Security Security Users and Groups dialog to select user and group accounts in a network domain amp Security Users and Groups Iof x Server Name Domain Loca a M Users Select All 16DE918B C768 4B3 NA Deselect All 23B6E4B0 9CDF 46 NA Acct Ops NA Calendar for manager department tasks ADC_YDYVBSBGO NA alains NA xl M Groups Select All Deselect All 4 NA Members can administer domain user and group NA All users with Righ
84. The Optim z OS Solution cannot process an Extract File created with Optim On HP UX PA RISC architectures Oracle versions 91 and later provide both 64 bit and 32 bit libraries The directory for the 32 bit library must be on the 32 bit shared library path SHLIB_PATH Optim supports the HP UX Itanium architecture in 32 bit emulation mode only On Solaris SPARC Oracle versions 10g and later provide both 64 bit and 32 bit libraries The directory for the 32 bit library needs to be on the shared library load path LD LIBRARY PATH Optim does not support the Solaris x86 architecture You must manually edit the Optim environment setup script rt rtsetenv and change the RTORACLELIB environment variable definition in that Optim 7 1 1 2 Planning for Installation and Configuration file based on your Oracle environment The shell file rt rtsetenv contains comments describing how to make the necessary changes Hardware Requirements Optim requires the following hardware Intel Pentium or greater or comparable processor e CD ROM drive unless installing from a LAN e Hard disk space 400 megabytes e Disk space for the database as required e 256 MB of RAM is recommended 64 MB minimum is supported Additional memory enhances performance Physical Memory Physical memory RAM requirements depend on the version of Windows you have installed refer to the system requirements for your Windows version The actual memory requi
85. The number of days to retain an Archive File copied to Centera This value and the centerayears value determine the retention period when the centeraretention parameter or overriding Storage Profile setting indicates an interval for Centera File retention 0 Default The file can be deleted from Centera at any time n Number of days up to 18300 to retain the file centeradays n The number of years to retain an Archive File copied to Centera This value and the centeradays value determine the retention period when the centeraretention parameter or overriding Storage Profile setting indicates an interval for Centera File retention 0 Default The file can be deleted from Centera at any time n Number of years up to 100 to retain the file centerayears n Indicator for the use of a NetWorker system 0 NetWorker is not used Default 1 NetWorker is available for use This setting is required in order to copy an Archive File to NetWorker or to process such a file networkeravail 0 Indicator for the use of a Tivoli device Note To use a Tivoli device you must install the Tivoli client and API support on the machine where the Optim Server runs 0 Tivoli is not used Default Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration 1 Tivoli is available for use This setting is required in order to copy an Archive File to Tivoli or to process such a file userid Tivoli is available for use with the specified User ID password and password Th
86. Type is unavailable for other entries in the Table List Column Indicator that access permissions are defined for one or Secured more columns in the table Installation and Configuration Guide 481 Appendix D Optim Security 482 Shortcut Menu Commands To define access permissions for columns right click the table entry and select List Columns from the shortcut menu Column access permissions are defined in the Table Access Control dialog Column Secured indicates a table with column access permissions defined Right click a row in the Table List to display the following shortcut menu commands Remove Table Remove All Tables List Columns Add table Remove the table name from the list This command is not available for Default Remove all table names except Default from the list Open the Table Access Control dialog to define access permissions for columns in the selected table This command is not available for Default Display submenus and select a source From Database or From Archive File for a table selection list Use the list to add one or more table names to the Table List Note Add table is available only from the blank row at the bottom of the Table List Select From Database to display the Select Table s dialog listing tables in the database For more information see Selecting Tables from a Database Select From Archive File to display the Open dialog from which to choose an
87. allows the workstation to connect to the database and access Optim Directory tables If you are using Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix you must indicate the DB Name Also provide the identifier Creator ID Schema Name or Owner ID for Optim Directory tables Note For some database management systems the identifier for Optim Directory tables must match the identifier used to create the Optim Directory including case The configuration process locates the Optim Directory and displays a confirmation message Click No to cancel the function and return to the main window or click Yes to create a registry entry for the Optim Directory and display a second Connect to Database dialog Installation and Configuration Guide 145 5 Configure Workstations 146 Connect to Database Subsequent Access On the next dialog you are prompted to provide the User ID and Password for subsequent access to the Optim Directory from the workstation Configure Additional Workstation Connect to Database he Optim Configuration program remembers the User ID and optionally the Password or future access to the Optim Directory Specify the User ID and Password then click Proceed opto otus Corer Prevos e ea Subsequent steps allow you to initialize Optim Security or assign a Security Administrator designate the workstation as a Server if the optional Server feature is licensed enable the ODBC Interface featu
88. an ACD Open Dialog Domain Modified By Modified Date Description 448 FAD or ACL to determine whether it references a role that should be included in the ACD Each Optim Directory for which security is initialized contains an ACD named Default which is the default ACD for secured objects in the directory Default also determines the roles that can create and modify additional ACDs To create an ACD a user account must be a member of a role allowed the Create Access Control Domain privilege in the Default ACD If Functional Security is not enabled a user account must be a member of a role with update access to the ACL for the Default ACD In the main window select Security from the Options menu Then select Access Control Domains from the submenu to open the Access Control Domains dialog Access Control Domains olx Fie Tools Options Help Domain Modified By Description 4 NAtadm02 2007 02 02 14 27 05 NAtadm02 2006 07 20 08 41 38 OPTIM DOMeng 2007 02 02 14 26 27 OPTIMDOMengS _ 2007 02 02 14 27 41 WEST DOM proj 2006 06 29 10 51 30 NRTH DOMiga 2008 01 23 12 45 11 The Access Control Domains dialog lists the ACDs in a read only grid The ACD name The identifier for the user account used to create or last modify the entry The date and time the ACD was created or last modified Optional text that describes the ACD Optim 7 1 D 1 Access Control
89. and direct resource intensive data processing functions to a machine more suited to the task When a task requires the movement processing or storage of very large volumes of data the request can be defined at the workstation in the normal way then directed for remote processing on the machine hosting the Server Optim Client Sever DBMS Server SHARED NETWORK Other Other Workstation Workstation Minimal Optim data flows over shared network most data stays within the Server DBMS Server The Server can be installed and run on a Microsoft Windows Sun Solaris Hewlett Packard HP UX or IBM AIX platform or on a Red Hat Application Server If this machine is the machine on which the database is running network traffic associated with the movement of Optim 7 1 1 1 Conceptual Overview data is eliminated You can also install the Server on a machine dedicated to the Server function Optim Server Server SHARED NETWORK Other Other Workstation Workstation Minimal Optim data flows over shared network most data flows between the Server and the DBMS Server A dedicated server must have connectivity to the database but can be configured to avoid competition with other network traffic In general a process must be defined u
90. and the Default setting representing users not included in the ACD and roles not specified in the list is assigned Deny access Installation and Configuration Guide 495 Appendix D Optim Security D 4 Exporting Security Definitions Export Security Definitions Dialog 496 Use the Export Security Definitions Utility to export security definitions ACDs ACLs and FADs from one Optim Directory to another The Export Security Definitions Utility eliminates the need to recreate security definitions manually and allows you to use the same definitions with the imported objects they secure To export security definitions 1 N Da F amp F WD In the main window select Export from the Security submenu on the Options menu to open the Export Security Definitions dialog In Definitions select the security definitions to export Enter a Secured Output File name Type a Secured Output File Password Re type the password in Verify Password Choose Run from the File menu Monitor progress in the Export Progress pane When Security Definition Export processing is finished choose Show Process Log from the Tools menu to review or print the Security Export Process Log When you open the Export Security Definitions dialog the tree hierarchy on the Definitions pane is populated with the security definitions in the Optim Directory to which you have read access Notes e ACLs that secure ACDs and
91. another version of that exit you must sign the updated exit to use Optim This is true even if the executable was previously signed e g in another installation or copied from a backup of a signed exit 52 Optim 7 1 3 3 Signing an Exit in Windows 3 3 Signing an Exit in Windows Signing an Exit during Configuration In Windows you can use the Configuration program to sign either the default exit or a user supplied exit although you may also use the pr0sign program to sign either exit Note To use Optim you must sign an exit for each installation of Optim on a Windows workstation or server This is also true if you installed multiple copies of Optim on a single machine Moreover if you copy a signed exit from one installation to another you must sign the exit again at the target installation To sign an exit in Windows you must run the Optim Configuration program You also must run the Configuration program to switch from using the default exit to a user supplied exit or vice versa When you install Optim you can launch the Configuration program and display the dialog used to sign an exit by selecting the Launch Optim configuration check box on the Install Complete dialog as described in 2 2 Installation Complete on page 46 Before you run the Configuration program confirm that no other Optim processes are running if other processes are running shut them down or wait for them finish before you run the Configurati
92. are running a Server or a command line process under the same user id that is running setup you must stop one or more Optim Servers or Optim command line processes Before shutting a Server down you must log on as the processing user account for the Server and run the following commands mwcleanup mwadm stop If the services cannot be stopped because they are in use you may see a message You must then wait until the services end after all Optim command line processes that use them have exited and all Optim Servers that use them have been stopped You can periodically check the status of the services with the mwadm status command If you want to force stop the services you can enter the mwadm stop f command However use this command as the last resort as it will force terminate all running Optim programs that are using the services being stopped 340 Optim 7 1 A l Installation Select Components Optim Server Executable Files Sample Files Optim Open Data Manager Interface Confirmation The select components dialog lists the features available for installation All components are selected by default Optim Server Setup InstallShield Select this check box to install all files including shell scripts and configuration files needed to run the Server in a Solaris HP UX AIX or Linux operating environment Upon completion of the installation process you are prompted to modify the shell scripts and
93. as follows 1 Log in as the root user 2 From the console enter the following commands e In s opt IBM Optim rt sbin rt4s etc rc d rc2 d S99rt4s eIn s opt IBM Optim rt sbin rt4s etc rc d rc1 d KO7rt4s A 2 6 LOCALE CONF Conversion File The LOCALE CONF file provides locale conversion information between platforms An example of LOCALE COMF is in the etc subdirectory to the PSTHOME directory Use the area at the end of this file to provide additional locale conversion information between or within platforms Specify locale conversion information using the following format LocaleA LocaleB 390 Optim 7 1 A 3 Maintenance and Performance A 3 Maintenance and Performance A 3 1 Commands The following commands can generally be used to start stop and maintain prOsvce the Server daemon These commands are unique to the Server under UNIX Note Only one command line argument can be presented at a time An argument must be preceded by a dash or a slash prOsvce h prOsvee s id prOsvee u id prOsvee d id prOsvee l id Installation and Configuration Guide Display Help Shut down pr0svce after last client disconnects idl Process ID User ID or endpoint to identify prOsvce Leave blank to shut down daemons started under the logged on account Reload configuration file for prOsvce idl Process ID User ID or endpoint to identify prOsvce Leave blank to reload for
94. byte ASCII Unicode UTF 8 or Multi byte MBCS Select the ption that corresponds to the character set of the database for the Optim Directory gt Jokes The character sets of hath the DRMS client and Natahase server must anree mith M Options Keep Optim Directory Data in Single byte Format ASCII Keep Optim Directory Data in Unicode Format UTF 8 Keep Optim Directory Data in Multi byte Format MBCS Previous Proceed _ Cancel A The options on this dialog are Keep Optim Directory Data in Single byte Format ASCII e Keep Optim Directory Data in Unicode Format UTF 8 e Keep Optim Directory Data in Multi byte Format MBCS Select the option and click Proceed to open the next dialog Connect to The Configuration program must connect to the database to create the Database Optim Directory tables and packages plans or procedures To enable this connection you must provide a valid User ID Password and Connection String The User ID must have the DBMS privilege to create the tables and to catalog the packages plans or procedures under the appropriate table identifier Creator ID Schema Name or Owner ID during the Installation and Configuration Guide 8l 5 Configure Workstations configuration process Later this workstation can access the Optim Directory using the same identifier or a different identifier with perhaps less authority Use the Connect to Database dialo
95. can start in either a MS DOS Window or in Full Screen mode If the setting for your workstation is to start command line applications in Full Screen mode it may appear that your system has crashed when Setup launches the application To correct this problem you can set the property of your MS DOS windows to run in Window mode and not Full Screen mode Installation and Configuration Guide 35 2 Installation Setup 36 To change or check the setting for your workstation perform the following steps 1 From the Start Menu select Run In the Run window enter CMD EXE and click OK If a Full Screen MS DOS session appears press Alt Enter to convert the session into an MS DOS Window If an MS DOS window appears go to the next step Using the mouse select the C gt icon on the top left corner of the MS DOS window to display its System Menu On the System Menu select Properties On the Properties window make sure that the Window radio button is selected on the Options tab page Select OK to save the change On the Apply Properties window select the Save properties for future windows with the same title radio button Select OK to save the change Optim 7 1 2 1 Run Setup 2 1 Run Setup You can begin Optim installation in one of three ways 1 Insert the Optim CD in the workstation drive Optim begins the installation automatically 2 Open Windows Explorer double click the icon for your CD drive and doubl
96. client machine and directed to the Server are executed if this name matches a name in the Product Configuration File used by the client or for command line and ODBC processes that explicitly require the Server the Server parameter in pstlocal cfg servername 1 to 15 character name localcomputer The computer name Default name rtservernam servernam tempdir Temporary Directory for temporary work and trace files If the directory referenced by the keyword does not exist the Shell script creates it tempdir PSTHOME temp Installation and Configuration Guide 361 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux datadir Data Directory for Extract Compare Control Export and other process files for which a complete path is not provided If the directory referenced by the keyword does not exist the shell script creates it datadir PSTHOME data datadirclient Indicator for creating Data subdirectories for client data Settings are 0 or blank Do not create client subdirectories Default 1 Create client Data subdirectory as the default Data Directory when a client first connects to the Server datadirclient 1 archivedir Directory for Archive Files for which the process request does not provide a complete path If the directory does not exist the shell script creates it Archive Files are stored in the Data directory datadir by default archivedir PSTHOME archive archivediridx
97. columns used to manipulate data in a Column Map e g a function is used and columns for which selection criteria are defined do not contain characters that could cause round trip errors Warn On Cascade Delete Update Display a warning if a cascading delete or update may occur to a table that is not explicitly included in an Access Definition or a process Runtime Saving Access Definition Always Never Display a cascade delete update warning only at run time of a process Display a cascade delete update warning only when saving the Access Definition Display a cascade delete update warning at run time of a process and when saving the Access Definition Do not display a cascade delete update warning This is the default setting The Warn on Cascade Delete Update setting in Product Options see Cascade Delete Rule on page 250 affects the availability of this option for user input If available you can click the down arrow to Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor choose when to display a warning If unavailable the value specified for Warn on Cascade Delete Update in Product Options is displayed and cannot be modified Sybase Unchained Mode Run in Unchained Mode Installation and Configuration Guide Optim normally runs in chained mode When a trigger in a Sybase ASE table will be fired as a result of an Insert or Delete Process and the trigger calls a stored procedure that must run in unchained
98. configuration files to suit your environment Select this check box to install sample Extract Files For more information about samples refer to Appendix H Samples Select this check box to install Open Data Manager ODM which is used with external applications to access data in Archive Files ODM requires a product license and is required for installations of certain Optim Application Aware Solutions If ODM is needed the Installation Guide for the Optim Application Aware Solution directs you to select ODM Refer to Appendix F Open Data Manager for ODM installation instructions To continue click Next Setup displays the destination location the features selected for installation and the space required for your confirmation To change Installation and Configuration Guide 341 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux the destination or selection of features click Back to return to the previous dialog Optim Server Setup InstallSmieldi To begin the installation click Next A progress indicator allows you to monitor the progress of the installation Optim Server Setup InstallShield 342 Optim 7 1 A l Installation Edit Scripts and Configuration Files You must modify shell scripts and configuration files before you can start the application the first time Setup installs the rtedit command file to launch your default editor so that you can make these modifications Opt
99. continue using the Personal Options dialog click Apply e To save your changes and close the Personal Options dialog click OK to return to the Modify Personal Options dialog 10 Click Proceed to complete the process 280 Optim 7 1 9 1 Open the Personal Options Editor Within Optim To change the settings within Optim 1 In the main window select Personal from the Options menu 2 On the Personal Options dialog provide the necessary information on each tab 3 Choose one of the following To close the Personal Options dialog without saving your changes click Cancel To save your changes and continue using the Personal Options dialog click Apply To save your changes and close the Personal Options dialog click OK Installation and Configuration Guide 281 9 Personal Options 9 2 Using the Editor The Personal Options dialog allows you to customize Optim for the workstation Personal Options Ioj x fim Display Errors Scheduling Load Create Logon Server edt 4l i B C Program Files IBM Optim Current New Folder al C Program Files IEM Optim RTIBIN New Folder 2 Ry PRNOPTUSRAPSTRTCFS o oo OO rone X Tabs The tabs in the Personal Options dialog are described briefly in the following paragraphs Detailed information is provided in each section of this chapter General Identify the Temporary Work Directory Data Directory and the directory for the Pr
100. daemons started under the logged on account Display all instances of prOsvce in the system This command can be run under root or any user account to determine whether prOsvce is running idl Process ID User ID or endpoint to identify prOsvce Leave blank to display all daemons for all users List active processes and clients connected to prOsvce The PID for each client is displayed and can be referenced in the c cancel client command idl Process ID User ID or endpoint to identify prOsvce Leave blank to list for all daemons for all users 391 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 392 prOsvee k id prOsvce daemon prOsvce c clientid ALL idl prOsvce v configuration file name Shut down pr0svce without waiting for clients to disconnect Use this command only when the normal shutdown s is inoperative Open datasets including the trace file are truncated to the last written buffer and each client SVER process must be identified and killed individually idl Process ID User ID or endpoint to identify prOsvce Leave blank to shutdown all daemons started under the logged on account Start prOsvce as a foreground process To run prOsvce as a background process use nohup prOsvce daemon gt outfilename 2 gt amp 1 amp This command causes any hang up signals to be ignored and directs standard output stdout and standard error st
101. database If you clear this check box you need not supply a password on future attempts to connect to the database Note This option is selected and unavailable if you selected the earlier option to Always Require a Password for this Database This completes the steps for creating the DB Aliases Next you create Optim Primary Keys for databases you want to use with Optim Installation and Configuration Guide 109 5 Configure Workstations Create Primary Keys In some cases primary keys are required to extract and insert data Certain tables in the database may not have primary keys but may have unique indexes You can use the Configuration program to create Optim Primary Keys for these tables Optim Primary Keys are stored in the Optim Directory and supplement primary keys defined to the database Use the Create Primary Keys dialog to confirm the DB Alias for the database tables that require Optim Primary Keys amp Configure First Workstation Greate Primary Keys tion program can create a Optim Primary key for every table that defined Click lt Proceed gt Optim Configura does not have a primary key but does have a unique index display a list of unique indexes if they exist or lt Skip gt to bypass this step Note You can also create Optim Primary Keys on a table by table basis 110 Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Select Tables The Select Tables dialog allows you to select tables for c
102. disable Functional Security select Enable or Disable and click Proceed If the Security Administrator is not signed on to the workstation the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog is displayed and the password for the Security Administrator must be entered Important Before Functional Security is first enabled the Security Administrator must open the Default ACD and establish Functional Privileges for all users If Functional Privileges are not defined before Functional Security is enabled users will be unable to access any functions in Optim For more Optim 7 1 7 4 Configure Security for an Optim Directory information see D 1 1 Access Control Domain Editor on page 450 7 4 4 Set Optim Object Security Option The Set Optim Object Security Option dialog allows the Security Administrator to configure Object Security for the Optim Directory Object Security controls access to objects in the Optim Directory such as Column Maps and Access Definitions All security definitions are secured by an Access Control List ACL Other Optim objects that have an ACL are secured if Object Security is enabled For more information about ACLs see D 2 Access Control List on page 469 Configure Security Set Optim Object Security Option ioj x Optim he Configuration program can Enable or Disable the Optim Object Security Feature for lick lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this st
103. do 3 Write the appropriate code to respond to those exit points within your user supplied exit After you create an exit you must compile link and copy the exit to the bin directory in which Optim is installed before you can sign it The same is true when you modify an exit Ifa signed exit does not exist you cannot use Optim See the Optim Initialization Exit Programmer s Guide for more information on creating a user supplied exit A 5 2 Prerequisites to Signing a User Supplied Exit If you want to use your own user supplied exit the following requirements apply The exit load linked module name must be appropriate for your platform as shown below Platform Linked Module File Name Windows opmexit dll AIX Solaris Linux libopmexit so HPUX libopmexit sl e You must copy the exit file to the bin directory before you run the opmusign script in UNIX The opmusign script is used to sign a user specified exit while the opmdsign script is used to sign the default Optim exit The exit file must exist in the bin directory and be signed on every Optim installation Thus each time you install Optim in a directory Installation and Configuration Guide 405 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux a signed exit must exist in the bin directory If you install a new version of Optim over a previous version you have to re copy your exit into the bin directory and resign it
104. do not use multi byte characters in your source data that will result in ambiguous conversions from Unicode Optim provides a Product Option on the Database tab and a Personal Option on the Database tab that determine how to handle round trip conversion issues when processing data in a multi byte database Configure First Workstation Round Trip issues with Multi byte Format jie Ea Optim he code units between U 4dc0 and U 4dff contain the Yijing Hexagram Symbols hich are not on any legacy code page These symbols should not be used as input on ny Optim window such as DBMS Object Names e g Tables Columns Keys etc or ptim Object Names e g Archive Requests Access Definitions etc since they may x nthe converted correctly hetwieen LTF 16 the character set used on iiiindowsc and M Options T 1 Acknowledge Round Trip Issues with Multi byte Format Previous Proceed _ Cancel Ready 4 The Configuration program creates a registry entry for subsequent access to the database Unless the connection is shared with the Optim Directory you must provide on the Connect to Database dialog information needed for this registry entry Installation and Configuration Guide 107 5 Configure Workstations Connect to When the Connect to Database dialog opens User ID Password and Database Connection String are populated with any previously entered values Optim he Optim C
105. each initiating client Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet select Client for the DB Aliases option UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the dbaliaslogon parameter to client The connection string you specify on the Optim Server Settings applet for Windows or in the configuration file for UNIX or Linux is always used regardless of whether Server or Client is the source of the credentials for Optim Directory and DB Alias access You must specify a connection string to access an Optim Directory and use a DB Alias otherwise the Optim process will fail If Server is the source of DBMS logon credentials specify the following Windows On the Connection tab of the Optim Server Settings applet provide a User ID Password and Connection String UNIX or Linux For pstlocal cfg provide a userid password and connect string for the pstdir and dbalias parameters If Client is the source of DBMS logon credentials specify the following for the Server machine Windows On the Connection tab of the Optim Server Settings applet provide a Connection String only User ID and Password are ignored UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg provide a connect string for the pstdir and dbalias parameters userid and password are ignored Also if Client is the source of DBMS logon credentials you must specify the following for the client machine Windows On the Logon tab in Personal Options provide the User ID
106. eee H 3 Sample Column Map Procedures 0005 H 4 Sample Extract Files 0 00 e ee eee eee H S SanpleJCL File ook cis ade de weieets tawda EEE eae Appendix I Data Privacy Data Tables I 1 Content of Data Privacy Tables 02 005 Appendix J Uninstalling 0 00 00 e eee J 1 Prompt Before Dropping Each Set of Optim Database Objects J 2 Drop All Optim Created Database Objects Without Prompting J 3 Do Not Drop Any Optim Created Database Objects J 4 Cancel the Uninstall Process 0 00 00 00008s re 584 TETE 587 aan se 588 ee 590 ae 591 TET 593 se is 594 eee 595 TT 596 ere 597 ley as 597 re 598 oe 598 TT 599 emek 601 ee 603 eer 603 eaten 605 eee 606 About this Guide This guide provides information needed to install and configure the IBM Optim solution This release runs in the Microsoft Windows environment or in the Sun Solaris Hewlett Packard HP UX IBM AIX or Red Hat Linux environments supplemented with a Windows workstation Optim supports the IBM DB2 Oracle Sybase Adaptive Server Enterprise ASE Microsoft SQL Server and IBM Informix database management systems The information in this guide is organized into the following chapters 1 Getting Started General information about installing and configuring Optim with suggestions for preparing your site and requirements for hardwar
107. following severity levels Success Send email notification for all processing messages including Success Information Send email notification for Information or more severe messages Warning Send email notification for Warning or more severe messages Error Send email notification for Error or more severe messages Exception Send email notification for Exception messages To clear entries right click a grid cell and select Remove or Remove All from the shortcut menu Specify the number of days 1 to 999 before email notification is resent for a persistent error or warning Select this check box to clear the send history once the Server is started When selected any email notification that took place prior to the starting of the Server is ignored Right click a grid row and select Send Test eMail to validate the email address Click this button to display the Email Transport dialog so that you may activate and configure the Collaboration Data Object CDO transport to send email If you don t click this button email is sent using the Simple Mail Protocol Transport SMTP Note You must use the CDO transport if the email client on the server requires logon credentials to send an unattended message or requires user input when SMTP is used to send a message Also select the CDO option if the server uses a Optim 7 1 6 12 Email Tab Activate Collaboration Data Object Transport Set from one of these known Email
108. for each DBMS type If you have more than one version of a particular DBMS type you can enter the unique loader specification for each version Click the down arrow to select the specific DB Alias then enter the appropriate path and name of the Loader executable file for the particular DBMS version Installation and Configuration Guide 293 9 Personal Options 9 2 7 Create Tab 294 Exception Table Specify a default Creator ID for exception tables Default Creator ID DB2 and Oracle or violation tables Informix This field is available only when you select a DB Alias for a DB2 Oracle or Informix database Fully Qualified Path Specify the directory path and program name for for DBMS Loader the specific DBMS Loader Consult your DBMS documentation for the name of the loader program To select from your system directories click the browse button z OS FTP User ID Provide the default user ID for the z OS FTP server used when uploading files to the z OS machine during the Load Process This option is available when you select the Default or a DB2 DB Alias You can override the user ID in the Load Request z OS FTP Password Provide the password for the default z OS FTP server user ID This option is available when you select the Default or a DB2 DB Alias You can override the password in the Load Request Use the options on the Create tab to set defaults for creating objects Note that you can establish as many as
109. for messages Optim Server Settings The default fonts for message text and data fields are shown in each of the font message boxes To open the Windows Font dialog to select font attributes click the command buttons for text or fields To modify the font for text messages click Text To modify the font for data fields noted in message text click Field Informational messages are not critical for example messages that ask whether information should be saved when a dialog is closed Info Text Specify font characteristics for the informational message text The default is System 10 point Bold Black Info Field Specify font characteristics for the data referenced in an informational message The default is System 10 point Bold Underline Black Optim 7 1 6 2 Errors Tab Font for Warning Warning messages indicate serious but not critical conditions A Messages warning message does not interrupt an action but may indicate that you should reevaluate the current action Warning Text Specify font characteristics for the warning message text The default is System 10 point Bold Navy Warning Field Specify font characteristics for the data referenced in a warning message The default is System 10 point Bold Underline Navy Font for Error Error messages indicate critical conditions and interrupt the current Messages action A problem presented in an error message must be addressed before the attempted action c
110. for tables and columns that do not exist in an associated Archive File do not affect the security of the file Only roles in the Access Control Domain ACD used as the basis for the File Access Definition can be assigned explicit permissions Any user accounts for which explicit permissions do not apply are allowed or denied access according to a default setting for the File Access Definition For example you can grant access to roles in the ACD explicitly and use the default setting to deny access to all other users For a detailed File Access Definition example see D 3 3 File Access Definition Example To create an FAD a user account must be a member of a role allowed the Create File Access Definition privilege in the Default ACD If Functional Security is not enabled a user account must be a member of a role with update access to the ACL for the Default ACD You can limit the ability of roles to process or view archived data at the level of table or column For a Restore Process members of a role can insert or update from a table and column in a secured Archive File if permitted If the account is not permitted to access a column that affects the referential integrity of the data e g a primary key an error message is displayed in the Process Report For a Delete Process only an account that is permitted access to data in a table and column in a secured Archive File can delete database data from that table and column If an
111. for the Optim Directory tables 2 The Owner ID for the Optim Directory tables must be a valid user account for the database and must have a LOGIN to the database server If desired you may specify the special Sybase ID of dbo as the Owner ID of the Optim Directory tables and related stored procedures Note The Owner ID may be different from the ID used to connect 3 Ifthe user account that corresponds to the Optim Directory table Owner ID does not have SA role the user account must have the following permissions CREATE TABLE CREATE PROCEDURE Installation and Configuration Guide 15 1 Getting Started Informix 16 To create a DB Alias in Sybase ASE the following must be true 1 You must connect to the database as the System Administrator SA a user account with SA role a user account with a dbo alias or a user account with CREATE PROCEDURE permission Note The account used to connect to the database may be different from the Owner ID for the procedures used to access the system tables 2 The Owner ID for the procedures used to access the system tables must be a valid user ID for the database and must have a LOGIN to the database server If desired you can specify the special Sybase ID of dbo as the Owner ID of the stored procedures Note The Owner ID may be different from the ID used to connect 3 Ifthe Owner ID for the procedures used to access the system tables does not have the SA role then the
112. heir tivindawis Peniskry with Fhe new Ontin Directory name Select Proceed tn a cma A Installation and Configuration Guide 213 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Select a Rename The first step in renaming an Optim Directory is to Select a Rename Option Option Rename Optim Directory Select a Rename Option _ OF x Optim o rename the Optim Directory and update the Windows Registry on this workstation elect the Rename a Optim Directory and the Windows Registry Entry option button F the Optim Directory has already been renamed on another workstation and only the indows Registry needs to be updated on this workstation to reflect the new name elect the Anke Rename the tivjindamis Renictr Entei antian huttan TF this morkstatian M Options Rename a Optim Directory and the Windows Registry Entry Only Rename the Windows Registry Entry Access Existing Optim Directory Previous Cancel e Rename a Optim Directory and the Windows Registry Entry Select this option to rename an Optim Directory in the Directory tables and the Windows registry on the workstation To rename a Directory this option needs to be performed only once Only Rename the Windows Registry Entry Select this option to rename the Optim Directory in the Windows registry on the workstation Use this option on each workstation that uses a renamed Directory e Access
113. in the ACD You can also edit a role name To remove a role name use the Remove commands in the shortcut menu Access The type of access permissions for the role Select one of the following Allow The role is allowed access to the table Deny The role is denied access to the table You must select either Allow or Deny for Default Roles for which both Allow and Deny are blank assume the permission selected for Default Installation and Configuration Guide 483 Appendix D Optim Security Shortcut Menu Right click the Table Access Control list to display the following Commands shortcut menu commands Remove Remove the role from the list This command is not available for Default Remove All Remove all roles except Default from the list Allow all non default Allow access for all listed roles except Default Deny all non default Deny access for all listed roles except Default Selecting Tables from a Database Use the Select Table s dialog to select the names of one or more tables from a database referenced by a specified DB Alias To open the Select Table s dialog right click the blank row at the bottom of the Table List select Add table from the shortcut menu and select From Database from the submenu You can then select one or more table names to be added to the Table List The Select Table s dialog lists the database tables e DB Aliases for available databases are listed on the left To list
114. is finished The log is displayed in the Browse File dialog You can review and print the log for diagnostic information about errors If some objects fail to be exported due to errors check the specifications and try the Export Process again by clicking Proceed When processing is finished the status bar displays the message Ready Browse File The Browse File dialog displays the results of the Export Process and includes the following details e Names of exported objects grouped by object type e Date and time each object was exported Explanatory text for each error if errors were encountered Installation and Configuration Guide 575 Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects 576 The following is a sample export process log C RTdata PNOEXPT LOG Browse File File Edit Options Help Bel es aS i2006 01 09 12006 01 09 12006 01 09 i2006 01 09 i2006 01 09 i2006 01 09 i2006 01 09 i2006 01 09 i2006 01 09 i2006 01 09 i2006 01 09 12006 01 09 i2006 01 09 i2006 01 09 i2006 01 09 i2006 01 09 4 nne_n1_na SHIP_INSTR_AAC SHIP_INSTR_ADI EMPPROJACT_ARP SHIP_INSTR_ARP EMPPROJACT_ ASQ SHIP_INSTR_ASQ SHIP_INSTR_CRE M EMPPROJACT_DAA SHIP_INSTR_DAA SHIP_INSTR_DEL SHIP_INSTR SHIP_INSTR_EDN SHIP_INSTR_EDT EMPPROJACT_EXT SHIP_INSTR SHIP_INSTR_EXT Repppnaracr TWC Print the log by choosing Print from the File menu Each execution of the Export Proc
115. is secured the report includes the ACD in parentheses associated with the ACL that secures the object the ACL owner and the permissions If an object is not secured the report will display Not Secured next to the object name Installation and Configuration Guide 525 Appendix E Security Reports Following the listed objects a List of Used ACDs displays the ACDs listed in the report The following details are included User Group Role Object Access ACL Access 526 The users and groups assigned permissions Group names are indicated by a G The role name that includes the user or group The ACL Owner is also included Access privileges for the object Permissions Allow or Deny are listed below each privilege None indicates a permission is not defined Owner indicates the user is the ACL owner and allowed the privilege overriding a permission set for another role that includes the user N A indicates the privilege does not apply to the object Read Open or view an object Upd Save an object Del Delete an object Exec Run a process request Access privileges for the ACL that secures the object Permissions Allow or Deny are listed below each privilege None indicates a permission is not defined Owner indicates the user is the ACL owner and allowed the privilege overriding a permission set for another role that includes the user Read View the ACL Upd Mo
116. is successful you can create or select a DB Alias Optim 7 1 7 11 Update DBMS Version for a DB Alias Create Select The next step is to select the DB Alias to update the corresponding DB Alias DBMS version amp Update the DBMS Yersion for a DB Alias Create Select DB Alias he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database connection in a DB Alias Selecting a DB Alias for a MS SQL Server Sybase or Informix database will also change the DBMS Version for all DB Aliases For that server Select a DB Alias from he list of existing 0B names then aaa Seer to continue Selecting lt Skip gt Click the down arrow to select a DB Alias from the list of existing DB Alias names then click Proceed to continue Note Ifyou are using SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix and have several databases on one server the Configuration program automatically selects every DB Alias that resides on the same server Installation and Configuration Guide 225 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Specify DB Alias You must specify the DBMS version to use for the selected DB Alias DBMS amp Update the DBMS Yersion for a DB Alias Specify DB Alias DBMS he Optim Configuration program will update the DBMS of the selected database Select he new DBMS version For the target database then click lt Proceed gt Note Support or some of the listed DBMS versions may have been discontinued by the vendor
117. method to prevent users outside the group from executing the software is to change permissions by using the chmod command as follows chmod o rwx lt install directory gt User Accounts Before any processing occurs you should establish all user accounts If you change user accounts after processes have run the ability of processes to access files produced in earlier processing may be affected For example a Restore Process that uses Centera or NetWorker as the user id in effect when the file is recalled from a backup device and when the recalled file is deleted from disk after the specified retention period Use the following information to help determine which user ids to specify for each parameter The user account under which the prOsvce daemon is started i e the account that is logged on when pr0svce is started must have write access to the Optim temporary directory and read access to pstserv cfg 394 Optim 7 1 A 4 Securing the Products and Configuration Files As you establish additional user accounts keep in mind the following parameter settings in the configuration files which affect the credentials under which the prOsvce daemon runs as well as the credentials presented to run a process and to access files during a process filelogon The filelogon parameter indicates the source of the credentials for processes Unless you override the normal umask behavior using the filemode configuration parameter output files
118. name of a Optim Directory From he list of existing registry names then click lt Proceed gt to continue M Optim Directory Specification Rename Optim Directory and Registry Entry Name Create New Registry Entry For Existing Optim Directory Rename Optim Directory Registry Entry Name ac Previous Proceed _ Undo Cancel When renaming an Optim Directory registry entry the Configuration program must connect to the database and verify the user has authorization to perform the task On the Connect to Database dialog you must specify the User ID Password and Connection String that the workstation needs to connect to the Directory After connecting to the database a pop up dialog displays the new Optim Directory name Click Yes to confirm the new name and rename the registry entry Click No to terminate the process IBM Optim 2 A Optim Directory with the name OPTIMDIR was found Is this the correct Optim Directory Click lt Yes gt to create a Registry entry to lt 7 access this Optim Directory Table or click lt No gt to terminate this function w After an Optim Directory registry entry is renamed the Configuration program updates connection information in the registry entry For subsequent access to the Directory from this workstation use the Connect to Database dialog to specify a User ID and Password see page 93 Click Proceed to display the Complete dialog a
119. new tables during the Create Process 461 Appendix D Optim Security 462 File Maintenance Invoke Action Editors Drop Tables During Create Modify SQL During Create Modify SQL During Primary Key Index Analysis Modify SQL During Relationship Index Analysis Drop Tables During Create privilege is required to drop tables during the Create Process Modify SQL During Create privilege is required to modify SQL statements during the Create Process Modify SQL During Primary Key Index Analysis privilege is required to modify SQL statements when creating indexes from the Primary Key Index Analysis dialog Modify SQL During Relationship Index Analysis privilege is required to modify SQL statements when creating indexes from the Relationship Index Analysis dialog File Maintenance privileges are required to delete or rename files and directories This class includes the following privileges File Deletion File Renaming Delete a file or directory Rename a file or directory Invoke Action Editors privileges are required to create edit or run an action request e g Insert Request The respective Action menu item will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Archive Request Compare Request Convert Request Delete Request Extract Request Insert Request Load Request Report Request Restore Request Table Editor Optim 7 1
120. of security definitions by 502 Identifying the security definitions in the Secured Input File If there are no definitions of a specific type e g no FADs the check box for the definition type is shaded Otherwise you can expand the list of definitions of the type by clicking the plus sign Scanning the Optim Directory and identifying the security definitions in the Secured Input File that exist in the Directory The check box to the left of each listed definition is selected or not according to the Overwrite existing definitions setting If Overwrite existing definitions is not selected the check boxes to the left of definitions that exist in the current Optim Directory are shaded and selected and are unavailable for Import Optim 7 1 D 5 Import Security Definitions If Overwrite existing definitions is selected all check boxes to the left of each security definition are cleared and any definition can be selected Ifa selected definition exists in the Optim Directory Security Definition Import overwrites it Note At least one available security definition must be selected to run the Security Definition Import Process Import Progress Statistics detail the current and total number of security definitions imported by definition type and the current and total number of errors encountered the total numbers are the composite counts for all Security Definition Import Processes performed in the session
121. of your site must be weighed against potential performance compromises The higher the protection level the greater the overhead required The more often verification is requested the more time required to complete a process Select the appropriate level of authentication None During Connect first call only Every Call Each Packet No authentication is required Authenticate when the user connects to the Server on the first call This security level ensures only that the connection is valid and is from the proper user No further authentication is made and transferred data is not verified This level of security requires the least overhead and of the available options offers the least security Authenticate the user each time data is exchanged regardless of number of packets Confirm that each packet of transferred data is received from the authenticated user This level of security requires more overhead and offers more protection than the Connect Level Optim 7 1 6 8 Endpoints Tab Each Packet Confirm that each packet of Verify not transferred data is received from the changed authenticated user and verify that it has not been modified This level of security requires more overhead and offers more protection than the Packet Level Each Packet Confirm that each packet of Verify not transferred data is received from the changed and authenticated user verify that it has Encrypt not
122. one user supplied exit to another If you are switching to user supplied exit you must compile link and copy that exit to the bin directory before you can sign it In a UNIX environment you can only sign the default exit during installation i e during the Optim Setup program If you want to sign a user supplied exit you must run an opmusign script file following installation Another script file is available to revert to the default exit from a user supplied exit if needed See A 5 3 Signing an Exit in UNIX on page 406 for more information The Optim default exit is delivered unsigned to ensure e itis signed by a user with the appropriate company credentials and e the person signing the default exit is authorized to make the decision to use that exit as opposed to a user supplied exit This is important because the default exit returns a continue code at every exit point Thus if the default exit was delivered signed it would bypass any security checks and additional functionality included your user supplied exit assuming you already created one Optim 7 1 A 5 The Optim Exit in UNIX A 5 1 Writing Your Own Exit If you want to employ the additional functionality available via a user supplied exit you must write your own exit To write an exit you must do the following 1 Determine what you want the exit to do 2 Determine which Optim exit points that call your exit are suitable for what you want to
123. or a colon e Using a keyword that is inappropriate for the type of processing may cause a fatal conflicting parameter error The DBMS type keyword must precede the DBMS version keyword All other keywords can be specified in any order Installation and Configuration Guide 429 Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks If you use a keyword more than once for a task the last instance applies You can include all keywords and arguments for one or more tasks in a text file and reference this parameter file on the command line In a parameter file keywords and arguments for a task may be on more than one line Note that lines after the line containing the TASK keyword are processed in the next task if any If a keyword required for a task is omitted values specified for the previous task or values specified the last time the Configuration program was run are used by default Note This feature may be advantageous for a series of tasks that share the same setting for one or more parameters An argument that includes spaces must be enclosed in single or double quotes co 09 To clear a parameter specify the value as an empty string i e Syntax The syntax conventions used to describe these statements are Conventions KEYWORD Keywords are shown in uppercase for emphasis but can text O G 430 be specified in lower or mixed case Variable text is shown in lowercase italics
124. or disable the Optim Server feature Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step If the Server is not licensed Enable is not available Refer to Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server for information needed to configure the Server 148 Optim 7 1 5 2 Configure Additional Workstation 5 2 5 Enable Disable Archive ODBC Interface On the Enable Disable Archive ODBC Interface dialog indicate whether to enable or disable the ODBC driver for the current machine Configure Additional Workstation Enable Disable Archive ODBC Fe i E3 Optim he Configuration program can configure workstations to use the Archive ODBC nterface When enabled the ODBC Data Source Administrator will contain an entry for he Optim Archive File Driver Select an option to enable or disable the Optim Archive ile Driver Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step ea Optim Directory OPTIMDIR License Information Archive License Status Archive ODBC Driver State for this Machine j Licensed Enabled Enable Disable Archive ODBC Interface Feature for This Machine Enable C Disable Previous Proceed _ Skip Cancel Oracle Q0R922K 7 If the site is not licensed for Archive Enable is not available 5 2 6 Specify Product Configuration File After you create the Windows registry entry for the Optim Directory you must identify the Produ
125. or procedures Note If you attempted to create a new Optim Directory but responded Yes to the pop up dialog on page 83 the following pop up prompts you to confirm that you will use the existing Directory instead of creating a new one e Select Yes to use the existing Directory name and proceed to the Connect to Database dialog e Select No to not use the existing Directory name and terminate the Directory creation process 2 he name OPTIMDIR does not match the name of the Optim Directory you selected You must use the name ERa in order to connect to this Optim Directory Table Do you want to delete the name OPTIMDIR and use the name PSTDIRECTORY in We Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Bind Drop Plans When creating an Optim Directory in a DB2 database the configuration process prompts for authorization information using the Bind Drop Plans dialog Configure First Workstation Bind Drop Plans The elements in the Bind Drop Plans dialog are similar to those described for Create Drop Packages with the following exception Always Display Output Select this check box to open the Browse File dialog to review any errors warnings and information regarding the bind Note If problems or a failure occurs during the bind the Browse File dialog opens whether or not you select Always Display Output Installation and Configuration Guide 87 5 Configure Workstations Define Char
126. output default Note When you choose to include the name of the Column Map procedure with the print output and a Local i e unnamed Column Map procedure is used a name for the Local Column Map procedure is automatically generated The name is generated using the corresponding table name column name and a unique number as follows tablename columnname n The following options allow you to modify parts of the generated name for a Local Column Map procedure the full table name and column name are used by default Show Full Table Name When Local Proc Show Full Column Name When Local Proc Select this check box to include the full table name in the generated Local Column Map procedure name If you clear this check box use the From Left and From Right controls to specify a subset of the table name From Left indicates the number of bytes to use from the beginning of the table name From Right indicates the number of bytes to use from the end of the table name For example if the table name is CUSTOMERS and you specify 4 for From Left and 2 for From Right the subset of the table name used is CUSTRS Select this check box to include the full column name in the generated Local Column Map procedure name If you clear this check box use the From Left and From Right controls to specify a subset of the column name From Left indicates the number of bytes to use from the beginning of the column name From Right indica
127. permissions for Functional or Object Security privileges assigned to user and group accounts in your network Appendix F Open Data Manager Provides access to data in Optim Archive Files for programs that use the ODBC and JDBC APIs Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects Contains information on converting PST Directory objects created in earlier versions of Optim into a format suitable for use in version 6 0 or later Installation and Configuration Guide XV About this Guide xvi Appendix H Samples Contains information on the sample database tables Column Map Exit Routines Column Map Procedures Extract Files and ODBC applications included on the installation CD Appendix I Data Privacy Data Tables Contains information on the data privacy data data tables included on the installation CD Appendix J Uninstalling Contains information on using the uninstall procedure for Optim Optim 7 1 Summary of Release 7 1 Summary of Release 7 1 The following enhancements have been made for release 7 1 of Optim Optim Functionality Enhancements e Data Privacy Optim data privacy capabilities generate and propagate valid masked values appropriate for application testing This release includes a new parameter SEED in the HASH LOOKUP function Use SEED to vary the calculation performed by the hashing algorithm The hashed value of the source column and the SEED
128. primary key column Relationships The OPTIM CUSTOMERS table is a parent of to other tables e The OPTIM ORDERS table through a foreign key on column CUST_ID e The OPTIM SHIP_TO table through an Optim relationship on column CUST_ID The OPTIM CUSTOMERS table is a child of e The OPTIM SALES table through its foreign key on column SALESMAN ID 592 Optim 7 1 H 1 Sample Database Tables and Structure H 1 3 OPTIM_ORDERS Table The OPTIM_ ORDERS table contains information for orders including order number customer ID and salesman The OPTIM_ ORDERS table has the following columns Column Name Data Type and Description ORDER_ID DECIMAL order ID number cannot contain null CUST_ID CHAR customer ID number up to 5 characters cannot contain null ORDER_DATE DATE date of order cannot contain null has default value ORDER_TIME TIME time of day cannot contain null has default value FREIGHT_CHARGES DECIMAL dollar amount can contain null value ORDER SALESMAN CHAR up to 6 characters can contain null value ORDER POSTED DATE TIMESTAMP cannot contain null has default value ORDER_SHIP_DATE CHAR date when order is shipped up to 8 characters cannot contain null has default value Primary Keys The ORDER ID column is the primary key column Relationships The OPTIM ORDERS table is a parent of the OPTIM DETAILS table to other tables through a foreign key on column ORD
129. select Interval the Years and Days boxes become available Years Specify the number of years to protect an Archive File from deletion The default value is zero 0 Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor Days Specify the number of days 0 to 999 to protect an Archive File from deletion The default value is zero 0 Note The interval cannot exceed the maximum date 01 17 2071 Archive checks the interval when you set the Product Options save a Storage Profile and run the Archive Process Maximum Use the maximum date 01 17 2071 None Do not use a minimum retention period allow an Archive File to be deleted from the device at any time Installation and Configuration Guide 273 8 Product Options 8 2 8 Load Tab Use the Load tab to customize loader parameters and enforce loader requirements for your site This can be particularly helpful when you have more than one database or more than one Optim Directory You can specify default parameters applicable to all defined DB Aliases and as needed specify unique parameters for each different database each instance or version of a database or each different Optim Directory For example after selecting an Optim Directory you can select Default in the DB Alias box Loader settings you define will apply to all DB Aliases in the selected Optim Directory If the default settings are not appropriate for one DB Alias you can select that DB Alias in the DB Alias box select
130. set of tables is also installed with the sample database Tables in the additional set have the same names as tables in the first set with the suffix 2 appended The four tables in this additional set are e OPTIM CUSTOMERS2 e OPTIM ORDERS2 e OPTIM DETAILS2 e OPTIM_ITEMS2 Tables in the additional set do not contain data They are used to demonstrate the facilities in Optim Installation and Configuration Guide 589 Appendix H Samples H 1 1 OPTIM_SALES Table The OPTIM_ SALES table identifies each salesperson by name ID number and manager The OPTIM_SALES table has the following columns Column Name Data Type and Description SALESMAN ID CHAR up to 6 characters cannot contain null FIRST NAME CHAR up to 15 characters cannot contain null LAST NAME CHAR up to 15 characters cannot contain null AGE INTEGER cannot contain null has a default value SEX CHAR character cannot contain null has a default value TERRITORY VARCHAR up to 14 characters cannot contain null MANAGER ID CHAR up to 6 characters SSN CHAR up to 11 characters cannot contain null EMAIL VARCHAR2 up to 62 characters cannot contain null PHONE NUMBER CHAR up to 10 characters can contain a null value Primary Keys The SALESMAN ID column is the primary key column Relationships The OPTIM_SALES table is a parent of to other tables e The OPTIM_ CUSTOMERS table through a foreign key
131. specify a forward slash for userid and do not specify a password dbalias ORACLE806 ORACLE806 DO806 rt password The location of the DBMS loader for a command line process You can specify a loader for a specific Optim Directory and DB Alias or specify a default loader be used for any DB Alias within a DBMS pstdir dbalias dbmstype pathtoloader excptntblcid The Loader is for a specific DB Alias Enter the name of the Optim Directory that includes the DB Alias The Optim Directory must be referenced in a pstdir entry A pstdir entry requires a dbalias entry The Loader is for a specific DB Alias Enter the name of the DB Alias The DB Alias must be referenced in a dbalias entry A dbalias entry requires a pstdir entry The Loader is the default fora DBMS You must also provide a value for dbmstype DBMS type Enter Oracle Sybase Informix or UDB Path to the executable loader file Default CID for creating an exception table loader oracle opt oracle 816 bin sqlldr loader OPTDIR DBALIAS opt oracle 816 bin sqlldr Allow users to lock tables 0 1 Do not allow users to lock tables Allow users to lock tables Default allowlocktbls 1 Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration codepage Code page for System 390 access codepgenum Valid code page settings are 37 273 277 278 280 284 285 297 500 and 871 db2default The DB2 default setting Default codepage 871 cmmaxshuffleretr
132. supported databases are to be kept in Unicode format 2 ADB Alias for an SQL Server database must use the same character format as the Optim Directory 26 Optim 7 1 1 2 Planning for Installation and Configuration Sybase ASE To prevent any loss of data the character set used by the Sybase ASE database client must be compatible with that of the database server Optim enforces this requirement as follows 1 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database the client character set is automatically set to match the server character set 2 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias that is not configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database an error results 3 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias that is configured for Unicode data to connect to a non Unicode database an error results DB2 LUW To prevent any loss of data the character set used by the DB2 LUW database client must be compatible with that of the database server Optim enforces this requirement as follows 1 All DB2 LUW DB Aliases in a DB2 LUW Optim Directory must have the same Unicode format as the Directory 2 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database the client character set is automatically set to match the server character set 3 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias that is not configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database an error results 4 Ifthe client uses
133. tables in the form dbalias creatorid tablename You can also right click a grid cell and select Add Tables to display a selection list Select the auditing status for the table or tables Click to display a down arrow and select Enabled or Disabled for each table or pattern in the list Use this selection to override the default status established with the Enabled check box Note If auditing is disabled for a table other table specific parameters cannot be edited If a table is listed in both Personal Options and Product Options the status in Personal Options is Superseded by Product List The user cannot change the auditing status for that table Users can modify the table name however or remove it from the list 263 8 Product Options 264 Days to Retain Max Rows Write Option Specify the maximum number of days 1 to 999 to retain audit information for the table or tables To retain Audit information indefinitely specify zero 0 or leave blank Specify the maximum number of audit rows 1 to 999999 retained for each database table or tables To retain an indefinite number of rows specify zero 0 or leave blank Note The Max Rows limit is checked after 15 commits to the database table Select the level of audit information to record for the table or tables Click to display a down arrow and select All Columns to record audit information for all columns in edited rows e Changed Columns to re
134. tables in a database double click the DB Alias or overtype the DB Alias in the Pattern box e Objects referenced by the selected DB Alias are listed in the Database Table grid in alphabetical order by Creator ID and Table Name The type of object table view alias synonym DBMS and fully qualified name are provided 484 Optim 7 1 D 3 File Access Definition Selecting Tables from an Archive File When you select Add table from the Table List shortcut menu and select From Archive File from the submenu the Open dialog is displayed to allow you to select an Archive File In the Open dialog select the server on which the file resides and click Refresh Use Look In to select the directory or path containing the file and then double click a listed file Name or enter the File Name and click Open The names of tables in the selected file are listed in the File Access Definition Table Column Selection dialog Source indicates the path for the file File Access Definition T able Column Selection iof x Source es Tempiarchtest af DBMS OPTUSR CUSTOMERS DBMS OPTUSR ORDERS Use the File Access Definition Table Column Selection dialog to select the names of one or more tables in the Archive File Click a table name to select it To select multiple tables hold the Ctrl or Shift key while clicking the table names To select names of all tables in the Archive File click Select All Click OK to add the selected names to
135. task sometime later If so you can skip this portion of the Configure the First Workstation process 5 1 1 Specify Product License Key The first time you start the Configuration program after installing Optim you are prompted to provide the Product License Key Configure First Workstation Specify Product License Key _ OF x Optim ptim uses a 30 character License Key to determine the features and number of users licensed to your company IBM sent this information to you via email or mail You must nter the Key the first time you run the Configuration program To change this Key elect the License option From the Options menu on the main window zj a M Product License Key Helpful Hint Pasting a 30 character License Key to the First segment populates the remaining segments gt Company Information Name ID SSS Se Undo Cancel The Product License Key provides an internal control that determines the features and number of users your company is licensed to use Optim This key may be changed from time to time when you upgrade the product To enter the license key you can copy it from the email sent to you by IBM To continue click OK 5 1 2 Create Optim Directory To create an Optim Directory you must provide the Directory name the database instance in which the Directory resides and the information needed to connect to the database After creating the Optim Directory 78
136. tend to be unconcerned with the volume of network traffic and therefore may not derive any benefit from remote processing on the Server Your decision to install Optim on individual workstations or on a file server does not affect licensing requirements but there are considerations for either method The advantages of installing on individual workstations include Improved performance the executables are not loaded across a network e Users are not affected by an upgrade made on the file server e Old images are not in use while installing configuring or upgrading the software In contrast a single installation on a file server offers the following advantage e Ease of administration both at installation and when applying maintenance or upgrades Regardless of your choice you should install and configure each additional workstation to create desktop shortcuts and create necessary Windows registry entries Installation and Configuration Guide 5 1 Getting Started 1 1 2 Configuration Phase The configuration process creates an Optim Directory establishes connectivity to the databases accessed by Optim and supports other maintenance tasks The Optim Directory is a set of tables that store all the Optim specific object definitions you create Typically a site uses one shared Optim Directory regardless of the number of database instances to be accessed or the number of workstations using Optim However you may
137. text file sql txt containing the DDL generated during the current and previous sessions You can browse or print this file using a text editor such as Notepad The file is generated whether or not you select Display SQL on a particular dialog and is stored in the default Temp directory Optim 7 1 4 1 Main Window and Menus If you select Display SQL and click Proceed the Browse SQL dialog opens as illustrated in the following figure Browse SQL Jof x CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE pstuser PSTV0200 DSSAUDI amp TYPE t_userid IS TABLE OF pstuser PSTAUDIT2 U INDEX BY BINARY_INTEGER TYPE t_actiondt IS TABLE OF pstuser PSTAUDIT2 INDEX BY BINARY INTEGER TYPE t_type IS TABLE OF pstuser PSTAUDIT2 AUD INDEX BY BINARY INTEGER TYPE t_seqno IS TABLE OF pstuser PSTAUDIT2 SE INDEX BY BINARY INTEGER TYPE t_subseqno IS TABLE OF pstuser PSTAUDIT2 INDEX BY BINARY INTEGER z The Browse SQL dialog displays the generated DDL statements in sequence To display the next DDL statement select the Display SQL check box may be checked when the dialog opens e To execute remaining DDL statements without review clear the Display SQL check box Note The check box to Display SQL is dynamic If selected or cleared on one dialog it automatically changes on other dialogs where appropriate Installation and Configuration Guide 75 4 Configuration Window and Menus 76 Optim 7 1 5 Configure Workstations Two
138. than one role the following rules apply to avoid security conflicts e Ifa privilege is denied for a role then the privilege is unavailable to all members of the role even the members associated with another role in which the privilege is allowed e Ifneither the Allow nor Deny check box in a Privilege tab is selected the privilege is denied but members of the role may be allowed the privilege as members of another role that is allowed the privilege Functional Privileges Tab 458 Use the Functional Privileges tab on the Role Specifications dialog to assign Functional Privileges to roles in the Default ACD You can Optim 7 1 D 1 Access Control Domain allow or deny access to Functional Privileges for any role in the Default Access Control Domain Configure Functional Security using the Functional Privileges tab on the Role Specifications dialog For additional information see Assigning Privileges When a role is denied a Functional Privilege any functions associated with the privilege are unavailable to the user and group accounts in the role For example if the privilege to invoke the Access Definition Editor privilege from the Invoke Definition Editors privilege class is denied to a role the Access Definition option in the Definitions menu on the main window is unavailable to users in that role and also the Edit Access Definition button and menu option are unavailable from any request editor e g the Extract Req
139. the Command Line Interface This check box is cleared by default Specify the complete path to the default directory in which you want to store reports Leave blank default to use the Temporary Work Directory specified on the General tab To select from your system directories click the browse button Note Itis recommended that each user specify a private directory for storing reports 323 9 Personal Options 9 2 15 Printer Tab Use the Printer tab to set printer font and language preferences for printing a request or definition Note that font and language settings appropriate to the character set used for a request or definition will ensure that text prints correctly if the Locale settings for your computer do not match settings for the computer used to create the object The default printer and font information for requests and definitions are shown in each of the message boxes To open the Windows Print Setup dialog to select a printer click Set Printer To open the Windows Font dialog to select font attributes and specify the desired language script click Set Font 324 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Printer Set Printer Click to display the Print Setup dialog Select a printer to use as the default when printing requests or definitions Print Setup lteter H yt ooo Field Font Set Font Click to display the Font dialog Select font characteristics and a language script to use when prin
140. the ODM Server Installation installation script and register the Attunity license file To install an ODM Server in UNIX 1 Run the ODM Server installation file Odmlnstall located in the rt odm install subdirectory 2 When prompted type the path of the Attunity license key license txt 3 Log off and log back on to effect changes to profile Note For users of Oracle prior to release 9 2 ODM and the Oracle Transparent Gateway use different versions of the libnvbaseshr so library To avoid a conflict Oracle Transparent Gateway and ODM must be assigned to different user accounts The shared library path environment variable e g LIBPATH for AIX for the Oracle Transparent Gateway account must reference the library in the Oracle directory before the library in the Attunity directory 532 Optim 7 1 F 1 Installation F 1 3 UNIX Administration After ODM is installed if it has not been done previously you must source the RTSETENV file to set up the environment needed to run ODM If you have added RTSETENV to your profile or login source that file instead If not change to the directory where Optim is installed e g opt IBM Optim and use Jrtsetenv Starting the ODM Once you have set up the required environment use the following to Server start the ODM Server irpcdstart Stopping the ODM Optim and the ODM Server share common resources To reinstall or Server upgrade Optim you must shut down both Opt
141. the Optim Directory database instance Password Enter the password up to 30 characters that corresponds to the specified User ID Connection Enter the name or string required to access the String database 98 Note Ifyou are using DB2 the term is Database Name or Alias Oracle uses DB Alias Sybase ASE uses Server Name SQL Server uses System Data Source Name and Informix uses Host Name Syntax is described in the DBMS documentation Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation DB Name Enter the name of the Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix database instance referenced by the DB Alias Note This prompt is displayed only if the Optim Directory is in a Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix database Create Drop Access to database tables requires plans packages or procedures Packages which the configuration process creates automatically e Ifyou are configuring a DB2 database the Bind Drop Plans dialog is displayed see Bind Drop Plans on page 87 e Ifyou are using Oracle the Create Drop Packages dialog opens Similarly the Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog is shown for SQL Server Sybase ASE and Informix Use the Create Drop Packages dialog or the Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog to specify the identifier for new or existing packages plans or procedures when available You can use common stored procedures for Sybase ASE E Configure First Workstation Create Drop Packages ioj x Optim
142. the Override default settings check box and define specific settings for that DB Alias only You can repeat the procedure for any or all DB Aliases in the selected Optim Directory and similarly for all DB Aliases in each Optim Directory Product Options Joj x General Database Configuration File Password Edit Servers Archive Load Report Optim Directory DB Alias J Override default settings Defaut z I Use Delete when Truncate fails Loader Parameters Additional Loader Parameters Force at Run Time Use to prime New Request Undo Defaults e Cancel Apply Help 4 Optim Directory Select the name of the Optim Directory containing the DB Aliases for which you want to customize loader parameters If your site has more than one Optim Directory and you want to specify loader parameters 274 Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor for DB Aliases contained in those directories click the down arrow to select from a list DB Alias Click the down arrow to select from the available DB Aliases in the selected Optim Directory If you select Default the custom loader parameters you specify apply to all DB Aliases in the selected Optim Directory Override default settings Directory Use Delete when Truncate fails Select to define unique loader parameters for a specific DB Alias when default values are defined for all DB Aliases in a selected Optim This c
143. the Server under UNIX or Linux 402 Protecting the Configuration Files password file at the risk of disabling the product or requiring reentry of all affected passwords It is recommended that you allow only the owner or the root user to update the configuration files Maintenance of the configuration file does not require knowledge of the actual passwords if group members are allowed to update the password file since the character can be specified for the passwords Note Group members who can modify the configuration file would be able to obtain additional privileges to the Optim Directory or DB Alias or execute the ODBC Server or client processes under any identifier Optim 7 1 A 5 The Optim Exit in UNIX A 5 The Optim Exit in UNIX Optim includes a mechanism that allows you to use a custom exit to apply an additional layer of security to Optim beyond the extensive security already included in the product to meet any security requirements mandated by your company or government regulations This additional security layer is accomplished through a client supplied exit that identifies who can use Optim and which executables each user can run Client supplied exits are called user supplied exits in Optim to differentiate them from the default exit supplied with Optim The Optim default exit allows all requests by all users within the security limitations defined for each user or user group via the security funct
144. the module used to challenge the signing is missing The information displayed in Optim 7 1 A 5 The Optim Exit in UNIX the text editor is stored for future reference in the prOsign txt file in the rt temp directory Optim will display the Sign Optim Exit dialog along with the text editor window so you can do one of the following e Ifyou can resolve error you can sign the exit e Ifyou cannot resolve the error select No in response to the question Do you want to sign the default Optim Exit and then click Next After Optim is installed you can fix the problem that caused the error and then sign the exit you want to use by running either the opmdsign script file to sign the default exit or the opmusign script to sign a user supplied exit of your own creation A 5 6 Signing the Default Exit after an Installation After Optim is installed there are two options available in UNIX to sign the default exit if you did not sign that exit during setup Run the script file opmdsign located in the rt sbin directory The letter d in the script s name indicates that it is used to sign the default exit e Run Setup again but do not select any components for installation Run the opmdsign As part of setup Optim places the script file opmdsign in the rt sbin Script directory When you use Setup to sign the default exit it launches this script file to set up the environment and calls prOsign Y
145. the tables you must specify an identifier Creator ID Schema Name or Owner ID and Tablespace If you are dropping sample tables only the identifier is required Refer to Load Drop Sample Tables on page 112 After you load or drop sample tables associated with a particular DB Alias the Configuration program displays the Load Drop Sample Data for Another DB Alias dialog and prompt you to load or drop sample tables associated with a different DB Alias If so the Create Select DB Alias dialog opens to restart the process Otherwise the process completes and returns to the main window Optim 7 1 7 16 Load Drop Data Privacy Data 7 16 Load Drop Data Privacy Data Specify Optim Directory Create Select DB Alias Load Drop Data Privacy Tables Load Drop Data Privacy Data for Another DB Alias Data privacy data tables are available to clients who have an Optim Data Privacy License These tables allow you to mask company and personal data such as employee names customer names social security numbers credit card numbers and e mail addresses to generate transformed data that is both valid and unique Generally these data privacy tables are loaded when you configure the first workstation but you also can load them independently or when you configure an additional workstation You can load refresh or drop data privacy data by selecting the Load Drop Data Privacy Data option which guides you through the process
146. to activate Archive retention select the Optim Directories to scan the time of day to scan and configure options for deleting Archive Files from File Backup Devices e g EMC Centera HP RISS and IBM Tivoli For more information about specifying a retention policy see the Archive User Manual 10 2 8 Retention Policy Tab Optim Server Settings ol x General Errors Load Connection Access Startup Security Endpoints Archive Retention status Jesle I Activate Archive Retention M Allow delete from File Backup Devices Time of day to scan 00 01 Optim Directories to scan M Tivoli Options Node Name Password m IV All Optim Directories Defaults Undo Configuration aa Cancel Apply Help Ready Activate Archive Select this check box to scan the selected Optim Directories If you Retention clear the check box the Optim Directories are not scanned but the parameters on the Retention tab remain Allow delete from List of the Backup Devices integrated with Archive Select the File Backup Devices appropriate check box es to allow the device to delete the Archive File when the retention policy has elapsed Tivoli Options Specify the node name and password that allow the Server to access the Tivoli tape backup device Installation and Configuration Guide 175 6 Configure the Optim Server Note To use a Tivoli device you must install the Ti
147. to each database of a particular DBMS Type and version in the selected Optim Directory 206 Optim 7 1 7 8 Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access 7 8 2 Apply Maintenance for a Single DB Alias If you select the option on the Query Method to Apply Maintenance dialog to apply maintenance for a single DB Alias the task includes the following 1 Create Select the DB Alias 2 Connect to the Database 3 Drop old Packages Plans or Procedures 4 Create Refresh Packages Plans or Procedures After maintenance is applied the task is complete or you can choose to apply maintenance for another DB Alias Create Select When you select Apply Maintenance to a database for a single DB DB Alias Alias the Configuration program opens the Create Select DB Alias dialog allowing you to select the DB Alias for maintenance Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Create Select DB Alias ioj x Optim he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database connection in DB Alias Select a DB Alias from the list of existing DB Alias names then click lt Proceed gt to continue Selecting lt Skip gt will also skip those functions that require a DB lias xl M Database Alias Specifications a Create New For any Single DB Alias Mame Greate Select Multiple For a Single DB SQL Server Informix Use Existing For any Single Existing DB Alias Name Skip Und
148. to install and configure the Optim Server on a machine using the Sun Solaris operating environment under SPARC the Hewlett Packard HP UX operating environment the IBM AIX operating environment or the Red Hat Application Server Note that an Optim Server installed in a UNIX environment cannot access an Optim Directory in an SQL Server database Configuration files included with the installation must be modified to adapt the Server to the requirements of your environment After completing the installation and configuration processing initiated on a Windows workstation can be directed to the Server Additionally processing can be initiated via ODBC or from a console using a Command Line Interface When you install Optim 6 5 and sign a user exit an entry is made in the AIX cache If you need to reinstall Optim 6 5 you must remove this entry before reinstalling 1 Log in as the root user 2 From the console enter this command s usr sbin slibclean where usr sbin is the Optim install directory You can copy the contents of the Optim Server CD to a network drive and then run the setup program from the network drive To copy to a network drive 1 Create a directory on a network drive Installation and Configuration Guide 333 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 2 Copy the contents of the Optim Server CD to the directory Copy all of the files in the root of the Optim Server CD to the netw
149. to the current Optim Directory A Secured Output File generated by Security Definition Export is used as the Secured Input File To import security definitions ti In the main window select Import from the Security submenu on the Options menu to open the Import Security Definitions dialog Specify a Secured Input File name The Import Security Definition Validation pop up is displayed Type the Password for the Secured Input File and click OK Select options on the Process Owners and Objects tabs 5 Choose Run from the File menu 6 Monitor progress in Import Progress 7 Choose Show Process Log from the Tools menu to review or print the Import Process Log The Import Security Definitions dialog has three tabs Each tab and menu command available on the dialog serves a unique purpose Process Owners Objects Identify the Secured Input File select security definitions you want to import and provide parameters for Security Definition Import processing Change the owner of ACLs you want to import Designate names for the imported security definitions Optim 7 1 D 5 Import Security Definitions File Menu Set as Default Save your entries on the Import Security Definitions dialog as the default specifications The settings for the following options on the Process tab are saved e Allow ACL for non existent Optim Objects e Overwrite existing definitions e Conti
150. use UTF 8 but may use UTF 16 The Oracle client will typically use a single byte character set Note Using char semantics from Oracle Unicode Servers for char type columns longer than 500 and varchar2 type columns longer than 1000 is not supported in this release To prevent any loss of data the character set used by the database client must be compatible with that of the database server Optim enforces this requirement as follows Version 8i Oracle clients For release 87 the character set for the Oracle client is set in the NLS_LANG environment variable for example SET NLS_LANG AMERICAN_ AMERICA UTF8 Restart Optim and or the Configuration program after making any changes to the character set 1 Ifthe client uses a Unicode character set the database server must also use a Unicode character set The Optim Directory must reside in a Unicode enabled database and the Directory and DB Alias for the database must be configured for Unicode data 2 Ifthe database server does not use a Unicode character set the client cannot use one either The DB Alias for the database must not be configured for Unicode data 3 Ifthe database server uses a Unicode character set and the client does not an error results Installation and Configuration Guide 25 1 Getting Started Version 9 0 and later Oracle clients For releases 9 0 and later the character set for the Oracle client is set in the NLS LANG environment variabl
151. used by anyone else you can safely drop the old packages plans or procedures without affecting other users Note Ifthe same qualifier applies to multiple users or if you regularly run different builds of Optim then you may not want to drop the old packages plans or procedures The Configuration program displays the Create Drop Packages dialog see page 85 the Bind Drop Plans dialog or the Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog as appropriate for the DBMS you are using This dialog allows you to Create Refresh the e Packages to access the Data Dictionary in Oracle e Plans to access Catalog Tables in DB2 e Procedures to access System Tables in Sybase ASE or SQL Server e Procedures to access Catalog Tables in Informix After you apply maintenance for a single DB Alias the Configuration program opens the Apply Maintenance to Another DB Alias dialog and prompts you to apply maintenance for another DB Alias To apply maintenance for another DB Alias select the check box and click Proceed to open the Create Select DB Alias dialog To end the task clear the check box and click Proceed to open the Complete dialog Optim 7 1 7 8 Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access 7 8 3 Apply Maintenance for All DB Aliases If you select the option on the Query Method to Apply Maintenance dialog to apply maintenance for all DB Aliases the task includes the following 1 Choose to apply maintenance to the first or another
152. value are matched with a sequential number from the lookup table to obtain the replacement value for the destination column You may specify a value from 1 to 2 000 000 000 Data privacy transformation library functions allow you to mask personal data such as social security numbers credit card numbers and e mail addresses The DECIMAL data type is now permitted for source and destination columns for the SSN and CCN functions Additional lookup tables are included in this release The tables provide comprehensive data for the following countries Australia Canada Germany Spain France Italy the UK and the US e Sample database tables The prefix OPTIM_ has been added to table names in the sample database The columns CCN and EMAIL have been added to the OPTIM_CUSTOMERS table The columns SSN EMAIL and PHONE NUMBER have been added to the OPTIM SALES table The column SALESMAN NAME in the OPTIM_ SALES table has been split into the following columns FIRST_NAME and LAST NAME The total number of rows in each table except for OPTIM_ STATE LOOKUP has increased Installation and Configuration Guide xvii About this Guide e Additional multi byte code page support For sites using DB2 in the Linux UNIX and Windows environments Optim now supports additional multi byte code pages for the Chinese and Korean languages xviii Optim 7 1 Summary of Release 6 5 Summary of Release 6 5 The followi
153. values entered when the old Directory was created lt gt Convert Optim Directory Objects Connect to Database he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to access the Optim al Directory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to perform the f selected task w Connection String The name or string needed for the server to access the Optim Directory database Password Enter the password up to 30 characters that corresponds to the specified User ID Installation and Configuration Guide 573 Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects Export Old After the workstation is connected to the database you can export Directory objects using this dialog Definitions Convert Optim Directory Objects Step 2 Export Data from an Old 0 BE EG Optim he Optim Configuration program has determined the version of Optim that was used to reate the old PST Directory If this is not correct select the correct version Then select he name of a file to store the exported PST Definitions from the old PST Directory Click lt Proceed gt to export the PST Definitions or lt Skip gt to skip this step gt a PST Directory DOCORAS17 PST Directory Specifications Version fs s 5 3a x Export File Name PSTEXPORT DSS H I Always Display Output PNOEXPT LOG I Continue Export if Errors Display Output Previous Proceed _ Skip
154. when saved Use the check boxes in the Optim Objects list to select the object types To exclude an object type clear the corresponding check box E Configure Security Select Optim Object Types ioj x Optim he Configuration program can force selected Optim Object types to be secure when hey are saved Select the object types that you require to be secure Use a right ouse click to select or deselect all Optim Object types Click lt OK gt to confirm the election or lt Cancel gt to leave the previous selection unchanged gt a Optim Directory DIRECTORY Optim Objects These settings do not effect existing objects YE Mie Archive Request MEA Calendar JERE Column Map Vis Column Map Proc wea Compare Request MER Convert Request xl cma Oracle Q0R922K The following shortcut menu commands are available Select All Select all objects in the list Deselect All Clear all selections in the list Invert Selection Reverse selected and unselected object types Optim Object ACLs for Optim Objects are modeled after the Optim Object Template Template ACL ACL The Optim Object Template ACL does not secure any objects and can be edited by the Security Administrator only The Security Administrator can open the Access Control List Editor and edit the Optim Object Template ACL from the Configuration program or the main window From the Configuration program click Edit Optim Object
155. within Optim The Samples CMProc subdirectory includes sample files written in Optim Basic that can be used to create a set of Column Map procedures The file names are CMEXIT BAS Sample Optim Basic Column Map procedure modeled after the Standard Exit routine Refer to Sample Standard Exit TBLINFO BAS Sample Optim Basic Column Map procedure that demonstrates how to access and retrieve data about the process product or database table This sample procedure moves source data to the destination without changing it and can be used with most column data types DEFAULT BAS Sample Optim Basic Column Map procedure used to populate the Column Map Procedure Editor when installed in the BIN subdirectory To create a Column Map Procedure from one of the files provided 1 In the main window select Column Map Proc from the Definitions menu to open the Column Map Proc Editor and last edited Column Map Proc 2 Select New from the File menu in the Column Map Proc Editor 3 Select Import from the File menu in the Column Map Proc Editor to open the Supply an Import File Name dialog 4 Type or click the Browse button and select the path to the Samples subdirectory containing the sample files and the file name e g C Program Files IBM Optim RT Samples CMProc CMEXIT BAS Installation and Configuration Guide 601 Appendix H Samples 5 Select Save As from the File menu in the Column Map Proc Editor In the Save a Column
156. you a few questions to determine which tasks need a o be performed on this workstation so that Optim can be run Select lt Proceed gt to ontinue to the next step To continue click Proceed The next dialog prompts you to Configure the First Workstation Configuration Assistant Configure First Workstation n order to use Optim a Optim Directory one or more DB Aliases and a product onfiguration file must be created The DB Administrator should create the Optim Directory the first DB Alias and the configuration file If these tasks have not been Formed at this site select the Configure the First Workstation check box Select 72 Optim 7 1 4 1 Main Window and Menus This dialog and the other dialogs in Configuration Assistant are similar to the Welcome dialog with the addition of a task check box e To perform a task select the check box and click Proceed to open the first dialog for the task e To skip a task clear the check box and click Proceed to open the next Configuration Assistant dialog 4 1 5 Dialogs The Configuration program presents a series of dialogs to complete a specific task You respond to prompts or provide necessary information and proceed to the next step in the process Some configuration dialogs are used in a number of different tasks however only the options appropriate for a specific task are available In this guide unavailable options are explained only if certain co
157. your company 1d 105499 Name Sample Company Name Password Note If any of the company credentials you specified are incorrect an Invalid Credentials Specified dialog will prompt you to re enter your credentials as described in A 5 4 The Invalid Credentials Specified Dialog on page 407 If there are any other exit related problems a Sign Optim Exit Failed dialog will prompt you to correct those errors as described in A 5 5 The Sign Optim Exit Failed Dialog on page 408 Installation and Configuration Guide 347 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux Read Me After editing and saving the files you are prompted to view the readme txt file containing installation notes and information Optim Server Setup InsteliiShielia Remove Temporary Files During installation Optim creates several temporary log and error files and stores those files in a tmp softech directory Optim support personnel use those files to diagnose any problems encountered during installation If installation was successful you should remove those files when prompted to do so on the Remove Temporary Files dialog If you do not delete the temporary files and you do another install using a different user id the old files will prevent the new files from being created Select Yes and click Next on the Remove Temporary Files dialog to delete the temporary log and err files stored in the tmp softech director
158. z OS Tablespace includes both Unicode and non Unicode tables you must create a separate DB Alias for each table type a Unicode DB Alias and a non Unicode DB Alias During Load Processing you can use only one connection either Unicode or non Unicode You must exit Optim before switching between a Unicode or non Unicode connection If the Load Process includes UTF 8 characters in table or column names the Control File will be in UTF 8 format Before transferring a UTF 8 Control File to a z OS machine the file must be converted to binary format To browse a UTF 8 Control File on a z OS machine you must apply IBM SPE APAR OA07685 ISPF Browse Support for Unicode to the machine Unicode support is not available for Informix If an Optim Directory is in an Informix database all DB Aliases must be non Unicode The Optim Directory and DB Aliases can be configured to support multi byte character encoding if character data in your database is kept in a multi byte character format If Optim processes data in a multi byte enabled database the Optim Directory must be in a multi byte or Unicode enabled database The Optim Directory and DB Aliases for multi byte enabled databases must be flagged during the configuration process An Optim Directory in multi byte format supports multi byte DB Aliases only Optim uses the Unicode character set in dialogs and to process information In some multi byte character sets such as Oracle JA16SJIS mult
159. 228 Initialize Optim Security 0 0 0 0 128 147 Installation additional workstations c ceceeee 9 first Workstation ccccecceecccetcetteeeeeeees 4 TANOK eana terre ee tree 335 Opti Hustmsnusiminianniwrsdnnnaa cons 4 planning FOT sisreieiskorotauekpseiaviiiavaiinas 10 starting Setup rsrsrs sisiriisiisisisiinsiis ae system requirements s s s 11 UND enana in vier 335 workstations OF Server sessesseeeeeseesee 5 J JCL File SAIMPIS srsatstaiacssetaiabagiae sceapenlsngnubabianets 603 L Large Objects Personal Options 289 License Agreement x 20 ssasieceernnetacns 38 Linux command line s s s 370 385 COmMMANdS ou eee eeseeteeeeeeeeeeees 391 392 customer ID sicintiemewdenceads 361 372 data directories accscccsscsissaycancesascassceenane 361 DB Alias sson 373 destination folder cccceceeseeceees 339 environment variables cce 386 Installation ce eeeeeceeseceeeeees 335 357 license agreement c ecceeeeeees 338 loader aree coal omaha caccemeteecay 367 376 locale conversion 6 ceseereeteeeeees 390 LOCALE COMF file 00 c cece 390 Installation and Configuration Guide Optim Directory sissssrorisascisssisiieus 374 prOpass program sssessssesereereeereees 399 pstlocal configuration file 370 pstserv configuration file 0 0 0 0 360 RTAS shell script scssecciswicssnicsvaccaswccavene 389 RTSERVER shell script
160. 3 1 Writing Your Own Exit following installation Another script file is available to revert to the default exit from a user supplied exit if needed See Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux for detailed information on signing an exit in UNIX The Optim default exit is delivered unsigned to ensure itis signed by a user with the appropriate company credentials and e the person signing the default exit is authorized to make the decision to use that exit as opposed to a user supplied exit This is important because the default exit returns a continue code at every exit point Thus if the default exit was delivered signed it would bypass any security checks and additional functionality included your user supplied exit assuming you already created one 3 1 Writing Your Own Exit If you want to employ the additional functionality available via a user supplied exit you must write your own exit To write an exit you must do the following 1 Determine what you want the exit to do 2 Determine which Optim exit points that call your exit are suitable for what you want to do 3 Write the appropriate code to respond to those exit points within your user supplied exit After you create an exit you must compile link and copy the exit to the bin directory in which Optim is installed before you can sign it The same is true when you modify an exit Ifa signed exit does not exist you cannot u
161. 7 3 Access Existing Optim Directory A workstation uses a Windows registry entry to access the Optim Directory This registry entry is typically created when the workstation is configured however if a workstation must access more than one Optim Directory you must create entries for each Optim Directory after the first The task to Access Existing Optim Directory replicates the steps described in 5 2 2 Create Registry Entry on page 143 You must specify the Optim Directory and the DBMS Type and Version for the database where the Optim Directory is stored In addition you must provide information to connect to the database including an identifier for Optim Directory tables This task does not prompt to create a separate Product Configuration File or to modify Product or Personal Options Installation and Configuration Guide 191 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 7 4 Configure Security for an Optim Directory To initialize Optim Security and assign the Security Administrator for the directory select the Configure Security for an Optim Directory option from the Configuration program Tasks menu Only one Security Administrator can be assigned to an Optim Directory After Optim Security is initialized the Security Administrator can use this option to enable or disable Functional Security Object Security and Archive File Security Note You can also initialize Optim Security from the following Configuration program options
162. 9 Personal Options 9 2 5 Scheduling Tab Use the options on the Scheduling tab to specify a default directory for Optim to store process requests and to set options for the Scheduler Personal Options E Program Files IEM Optim RT BIN New Folder 2 Scheduling Enter the full path to the default directory for schedule files To select Directory from your system directories click the browse button Each user should have a unique directory for schedule files Scheduling Monitor Select options for using the Scheduling Monitor The Scheduling Monitor must be active for scheduled jobs to be processed Add to StartUp Select this check box to add the Scheduler to Folder the group of programs that start automatically when you start Microsoft Windows Show in Taskbar Select this check box to display the Scheduler Icon Tray icon in the Microsoft Windows task bar icon tray instead of as a button on the taskbar 292 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Start scheduling Clear this check box to prevent starting when monitor starts scheduled jobs immediately when the Schedule Monitor starts 9 2 6 Load Tab Use the options on the Load tab to set specifications for a Load Process Personal Options Load Specifications Specify the complete path and name of the executable to access each DBMS Loader that can be used with a Load Request DB Alias Select Default to enter the path and name of the Loader executable file
163. Apply Maintenance After you apply maintenance for a DB Alias the Configuration to Another program opens the Apply Maintenance to Another DB Alias dialog and prompts you to apply maintenance for another DB Alias e To apply maintenance for another DB Alias select the check box and click Proceed to open the Connect to Database dialog To end the task clear the check box and click Proceed on each subsequent dialog until the Complete dialog displays 7 8 4 Apply Maintenance for Specific DBMS If you select the option on the Query Method to Apply Maintenance dialog to apply maintenance for a specific DBMS the task includes the following 1 Specify the DB Alias DBMS Type and Version 2 Choose to apply maintenance for the first or another DB Alias 3 Connect to the Database 4 Drop old Packages Plans or Procedures 5 Create Refresh Packages Plans or Procedures After maintenance is applied you can choose to apply maintenance to databases in a different DBMS or the maintenance task is complete 210 Optim 7 1 7 8 Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Specify DB Alias When you select Apply Maintenance to databases with a specified DBMS DBMS Type and Version the Configuration program opens the Specify DB Alias DBMS dialog Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Specify DB Alias DBMS _ Lx he Optim Configuration program can apply maintenance to an existing database Select the DBMS type and version for
164. Archive Index Directory for Archive Index Files for which a complete path is not provided If the directory does not exist the Shell script creates it Archive Index Files are stored in the Archive Directory archivedir or the Data directory datadir by default archivediridx PSTHOME archiveidx archivebroidx Archive Browse Index Directory for Archive Browse Index Files for which a complete path is not provided If the directory referenced by the keyword does not exist the Shell script creates it To expedite the retrieval of data an Archive Browse Index File is created when a user browses archived data and joins tables By default Archive Browse Index Files are stored in the Archive Directory archivedir or the Data directory datadir archivebroidx PSTHOME archivebro 362 Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration maxprocesses Maximum number of processes that can run on the Server simultaneously When the server reaches the maximum an error message Server too Busy is displayed Specify n A value from 10 to 48 Set the limit according to the capacity of the machine CPU disk space network access speed memory etc noting that typically a mirror validation process is created each time a client edits a process request that specifies the Server Both processes run simultaneously For example if a workstation initiates two processes simultaneously the Server executes four processes 48 Default setting maxproces
165. BMS Rel Name Lengths Use Oracle Array Delete Inactive Set all processes to run in normal mode the Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is unavailable Default Active The Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is available and selected by default Insert Restore and Delete Processes run in unchained mode unless the Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is cleared Default Inactive The Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is available and cleared by default Insert Restore and Delete Processes run in normal mode unless the Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is selected Select this check box to enable the Lock Tables option in the Insert Restore and Delete Request Editors Users can then use the option to lock tables during an Insert Restore or Delete Process Locking tables ensures that other database activity does not interfere with the process and prevents other users from accessing tables involved in the process Select this check box to enable the Delete Options box in the Insert Request Editor If you clear this check box the Delete Options box is unavailable and the Delete option is set to No Tables by default Select this check box to enforce DBMS restrictions for relationship name length when creating or importing relationships This option is selected by default Clear this check box to override DBMS naming restrictions and create or impor
166. CALE CONF Conversion File 005 390 A 3 Maintenance and Performance 000s ee ee eee 391 ASL COMMANdS oere Leis ae dks ons Die Ene 391 Ad 2 Temporary Piles secere erret Wee ae ak eae beta ee 393 A 4 Securing the Products and Configuration Files 394 AA Securing the Products oo c cae dscns dese awe neres ka 394 A 4 2 Securing the Configuration Files 2 005 398 AS The pt m Exit mUNIX shes bee ek beck het sd eae ees 403 A 5 1 Writing Your Own Exit 0 eee eee eee eee 405 A 5 2 Prerequisites to Signing a User Supplied Exit 405 ASS Signing an Beit mi UNIX osei ose sho eases sede bee 406 A 5 4 The Invalid Credentials Specified Dialog 407 A 5 5 The Sign Optim Exit Failed Dialog 408 A 5 6 Signing the Default Exit after an Installation 409 A 5 7 Signing a User Supplied Exit in UNIX 413 Appendix B Server Credentials 00 0 00 00 e eee 417 B Server Credentiale wow pcr ka cena eek peek areas pe eeees 418 B 1 1 Credentials to Run the Server o osse cerun icia eee eee 418 B 1 2 Credentials to Run Optim Processes 2 0005 419 B 1 3 Server Privileges for Explicit or Client Credentials 422 B 1 4 UNC Network Share Access Windows 0005 422 B 1 5 Registry Access for Process Requests Windows 423 5 1 6 Oracle OS Authentication 04 046 c
167. Cancel A PST Directory Name of the PST Directory from which objects are exported PST Directory Version Version of Configuration program used to create the Specifications old PST Directory Export File Enter the name of the Export File The Export File is Name a plain text file and has a dss extension by default Other extensions may be specified or the file can be designated without an extension The Export File is used as the input for Import Processing Always Display Output Select the check box to automatically display the export process log PNOEXPT LOG for the current process When the Export Process is complete the log is displayed in the Browse File dialog To display the log only in the event of an error clear the check box Continue Export if Indicate whether to halt processing if an error occurs To continue Errors processing if an error occurs select the check box To halt processing if an error occurs clear the check box 574 Optim 7 1 G 1 Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories Run Export To start the Export Process click Proceed If you specify the name of an Export File that already exists a dialog prompts you to confirm that you want to overwrite the file During Export Processing the status bar displays information about the process If errors occur processing continues if Continue Export if Errors is selected Errors are written to the export process log after Export Processing
168. Column List Note Add column is available only from the blank row at the bottom of the Column List Select From Database table to display the File Access Definition Table Column Selection dialog listing columns in the database table For more information see Selecting Columns from a Table Select From table in Archive File to display the Open dialog from which to choose an Archive File before displaying the File Access Definition Table Column Selection dialog For more information see Selecting Columns from a Table in an Archive File Note Access permissions in the associated ACL determine the options and actions that are available to you For example the Remove shortcut menu options are not available to roles limited to read access 488 Optim 7 1 D 3 File Access Definition Column Access Use the Column Access Control list to define access permissions for Control the entry in the Column List You can assign access permissions to roles in the ACD and a default for all user accounts and roles for which access permissions are not assigned explicitly If the AC Type for an entry in the Column List is None Column Access Control list is blank and cannot be edited Role Access Installation and Configuration Guide Default and names of roles for which the File Access Definition explicitly controls access Role names not included in the Access Control Domain that serves as the basis for the FAD are italicized and settin
169. Configure the First Workstation Create Update Optim Directory and Configure Options however you can both initialize Optim Security and enable the security features from the Configure Security for an Optim Directory task only The Security Administrator can also control access to the Default Access Control Domain ACD and Access Control List ACL 7 4 1 Specify Optim Directory 192 When you select Configure Security for an Optim Directory from the Tasks menu in the Configuration program the Specify Optim Directory dialog is displayed The option to Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry is selected Specify the name of the Optim 7 1 7 4 Configure Security for an Optim Directory Optim Directory you want to use To select from a list click the down arrow E Configure Security Specify Optim Directory _ OF x Optim he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains Optim Directory in a named registry entry Select the name of a Optim Directory From he list of existing registry names then click lt Proceed gt to continue M Optim Directory Specification Create New Optim Directory and Registry Entry Names Create New Registry Entry for Existing Optim Directory Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry Name Ready Ui When you click Proceed and e Optim Security is not initialized for the Directory the Initialize Securi
170. Create Drop Packages Packages dialog the Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog or the Bind Drop Plans dialog as appropriate for the DBMS you are using Update the DBMS Version for an Optim Directory Greate Drop Pack Mi E3 Optim Optim Configuration program can drop the Optim created Packages for the Optim a ectory Tables The Package Schema Name must match the name used to create the ackages Tables Optim Directory Tables Package Specifications Greate Refresh Schema Name C Use Existing optus Grant Auth ID Drop I Display SQL Previous proceed J sep undo cancel The Drop option is selected when this dialog opens You can select the Display SQL check box to browse the DDL statements generated for the drop process To continue click Proceed Note The Configuration program attempts to drop all old packages plans and procedures for the specified DBMS version even if they were never installed After the Drop process completes this dialog redisplays with the Create Refresh option selected automatically Click Proceed to create packages plans or procedures to update the DBMS for the Optim Directory When the process completes the database signature is updated automatically and the Complete dialog displays Installation and Configuration Guide 223 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 7 11 Update DBMS Version for a DB Alias When you select Update DBMS Version for a
171. D 1 Access Control Domain Invoke Command Line Actions Invoke Configuration Actions Installation and Configuration Guide Invoke Command Line Actions PROCMND privileges are required to execute a utility from the command line This class includes the following privileges Archive Directory Maintenance Browse Import Migrate Restart Retry Run Table Editor Invoke Archive Directory Maintenance privilege is required to register or unregister Archive Files or update Archive File entries from the command line i e use ARCMAINT Invoke Browse privilege is required to browse Archive Files Compare Files Extract Files and Control Files from the command line i e use X Invoke Import privilege is required to import Optim objects from the command line i e use IMPORT Invoke Migrate privilege is required to perform the Archive File Migration Process 1 e use MIGRATE Invoke Restart Retry privilege is required to restart or retry processes from the command line i e use RESTARTRETRY Invoke Run privilege is required to run processes from the command line i e use R Invoke Table Editor privilege is required to edit tables from the command line i e use E Invoke Configuration Actions privileges are required to perform tasks within the Configuration program e g Create Update DB Alias The respective Tasks menu item will be unavailable to roles that are denied a
172. DB Alias 2 Connect to the Database 3 Drop old Packages Plans or Procedures 4 Create Refresh Packages Plans or Procedures After maintenance is applied you can choose to apply maintenance for the next in a series of DB Aliases or the maintenance task is complete Apply Maintenance When you select Apply Maintenance to databases for all DB Aliases to DB Alias the Configuration program prompts you to confirm maintenance for each DB Alias in the selected Optim Directory one at a time Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Apply Maintenance to DB A WE Ea o apply maintenance to the DB Alias DBMS select the Apply Maintenance to DBMS heckbox Select lt Proceed gt to continue to the next step M Options IV Apply Maintenance to DBMS cma Ready Oracle Q0R922K Ui On the Apply Maintenance to DB Alias dialog you can do the following e To apply maintenance for the named DB Alias select the check box and click Proceed to open the Connect to Database dialog Installation and Configuration Guide 209 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks e To bypass maintenance for the named DB Alias clear the check box and click Proceed The Configuration program prompts you to apply maintenance for the next DB Alias Note The steps to connect to the database and create drop packages plans or procedures are the same as those described to apply maintenance for a single DB Alias
173. DB Alias from the Tasks menu the first dialog cautions that you should select this task only when a DB Alias refers to a database that has been upgraded to a new version This task prompts you to 1 Select the Optim Directory containing the DB Alias 2 Select the DB Alias and select the new DBMS version 3 Drop the old packages plans or procedures and create new ones for the Optim Directory When this process completes the database signature is updated automatically 7 11 1 Update DBMS for a Single DB Alias Specify Optim Directory Connect to Database 224 You can update the DBMS version for a single DB alias however if you are using Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix and you have multiple databases on one server the Configuration program automatically directs you to the appropriate dialogs The initial steps are the same whether you are updating the DBMS version for one DB Alias or multiple DB Aliases The first step in updating the DBMS version for a DB Alias is to specify the name of the Optim Directory associated with that DB Alias Click the down arrow to select an Optim Directory from a list and click Proceed to connect to the database The Configuration program must connect to the database to access the Optim Directory Tables On the Connect to Database dialog see page 205 you must specify the User ID Password and Connection String that allows the workstation to connect to the database If the connection
174. Database haracter sets must be UTF 8 This option is required in order for any DB Alias to have he Unicode feature enabled or to have a mixture of DB Aliases with different character Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Information on If you select multi byte format in the Specify Character Set of Optim Bea Format Directory Data dialog you are prompted to acknowledge the following DBMS character set requirements for multi byte Both the DBMS client and database must have the same supported multi byte character set e An Optim Directory in multi byte format supports multi byte DB Aliases only amp Configure First Workstation Information on Multi byte Format MBCS fel x ou have selected the option to configure this Optim Directory so its character data is ept in Multi byte format To enable this Feature both the DBMS client and Database ust have the same Multi byte character set which must be listed as a supported Multi byte character set in the README TXT file This Feature requires that all DB Aliases Installation and Configuration Guide 91 5 Configure Workstations Round Trip Issues with Multi byte Format 92 After you acknowledge the DBMS character set requirements for an Optim Directory in multi byte format you are prompted to acknowledge multi byte round trip conversion issues Optim uses the Unicode character set in dialogs and to process data In some multi byte character set
175. Domain To open the Access Control Domain Editor and create a new ACD click the New ACD toolbar button select New ACD from the Tools menu or use the shortcut menu You can also use the shortcut menu to delete an ACD list FADs and ACLs that are based upon the ACD or open the ACL for the ACD Note Access permissions in the ACL for the ACD determine the options and actions that are available to you For example the Delete shortcut menu option is not available to roles limited to read access Shortcut Menu Although similar to the Open dialog described in detail in the Common Commands Elements Manual the Access Control Domains dialog provides the following specialized shortcut menu commands New ACD Open the Access Control Domain Editor to create anew ACD Open Open the Access Control Domain Editor to view or edit the selected ACD Delete Delete the selected ACD from the Optim Directory Not available for the Default ACD Note When you delete an ACD the Default ACD becomes the basis for any FADs or ACLs based upon the ACD Roles that do not exist in the Default ACD are denied access List Object ACLs Open the Open Object Access Control List dialog which lists the ACLs based upon the selected ACD This option is available only if the ACD is the basis for one or more ACLs Not available for the Default ACD View or Edit ACD To view or edit an ACD in the Access Control Domain Editor double click the grid ro
176. ER_ID The OPTIM ORDERS table is a child of the OPTIM CUSTOMERS table through its foreign key on column CUST_ID Installation and Configuration Guide 593 Appendix H Samples H 1 4 OPTIM_DETAILS Table The OPTIM_ DETAILS table contains additional information for each order in the OPTIM ORDERS table The OPTIM DETAILS table has the following columns Column Name Description and Data Type ORDER_ID DECIMAL order ID number cannot contain null ITEM_ID CHAR item ID number cannot contain null ITEM QUANTITY SMALLINT number of items cannot contain null DETAIL UNIT PRICE DECIMAL unit price dollar amount cannot contain null Primary Keys The ORDER _ID and ITEM_ID columns are the primary key Relationships The OPTIM_ DETAILS table is a child of to other tables e The OPTIM ORDERS table through its foreign key on column ORDER ID The OPTIM_ ITEMS table through its foreign key on column ITEM_ID 594 Optim 7 1 H 1 Sample Database Tables and Structure H 1 5 OPTIM_ITEMS Table The OPTIM_ ITEMS table contains information about each item for an order including description price and quantity in inventory The OPTIM_ITEMS table has the following columns Column Name Description and Data Type ITEM_ID CHAR up to 5 characters cannot contain null ITEM_DESCRIPTION VARCHAR up to 72 characters cannot contain null CATEGORY VARCHAR up to 14 characters cannot conta
177. FADs are not listed but will be exported with these definitions Optim 7 1 D 4 Exporting Security Definitions The Default ACD is not listed and cannot be exported Export Security Definitions olx Fie Tools Options Help 23 23 m Definitions Export Progress URS Access Control Domain O Access Control List OI File Access Definition Curent Total Access Control Domains 0 0 Access Control Lists a 0 File Access Definitions 0 0 Export errors encountered 0 0 Secured Output File fe temp Secdefs txt x fal Password Verity Password essees t i t C Cd eel Ready You can select the check box for a security definition type in order to export all definitions of that type or expand the list and select the definitions to be exported Tools menu commands allow you to select or de select all definitions Secured Output File The name of the Secured Output File The Secured Output File is a text file and is given a txt extension automatically but other extensions may be used The Secured Output File is used as the Secured Input File for Security Definition Import processing Password Password for securing the Secured Output File This password must be entered when using the file with the Security Definition Import Process Verify Password Re enter the Password for verification Tools Menu The following commands are available from the Tools menu Select All Definiti
178. IBM Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Version 70 Release 1 IBM Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Version 70 Release 1 Note Before using this information and the product it supports read the information on the next page This edition applies to Version 7 Release 1 of IBM Optim and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions IBM Corporation 1998 2008 IBM Optim Installation and Configuration Guide This manual and the software described in it are furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement The software and the documentation may be used only in accordance with the terms of that agreement No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording for any purpose without the express written permission of IBM Corporation IBM Optim Installation and Configuration Guide Version 7 0 Release 1 November 2008 Trademark Acknowledgments IBM the IBM logo and ibm com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States other countries or both If these and other IBM trademarked terms are marked on their first occurrence in this information with a trademark symbol or these symbols indicate U S registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the time this information was published
179. Key determines the Optim features your company is allowed to use This key is unique to your company and is sent to you by E mail when Optim is shipped You must use this Optim 7 1 1 1 Conceptual Overview key when you configure the first workstation and any additional workstations Note During the process to configure the first workstation you can optionally export the Product License Key and other details and import this information when configuring additional workstations Create Optim Although you may use any number of database instances with Optim Directory only one is designated to hold the Optim Directory Typically the Directory will share an instance used for other tables While the Optim Directory is rarely so large or so heavily accessed as to justify a dedicated database instance you can dedicate a database instance solely to the Optim Directory if desired When you create the Optim Directory you are prompted for the following information Optim Directory Any meaningful name up to 12 characters DBMS Type Supported database management systems include and Version DB2 Oracle Sybase ASE SQL Server and Informix Connection User ID and password needed to connect to the Information database instance and the connection string needed to permit user access Table Identifier Creator ID Owner ID or Schema Information Name for the Optim Directory tables and the tablespace where they are created This ide
180. Manager ODBC Data Source Definition 544 Once the ODM data source shortcut has been created on the secondary ODM Server you can define the ODBC data source To define an ODBC data source on the secondary ODM Server From the Administrative Tools in the Windows Control Panel select Data Sources ODBC to open the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog From the User or System tabs depending on the data source you want to create click Add to open the Create New Data Source dialog 1 Create New Data Source Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source Attunity Connect Driver 4 Driver da Microsoft para arquivos texto txt csv 4 Driver do Microsoft Access mdb Driver do Microsoft dBase dbf Driver do Microsoft Excel xls Driver do Microsoft Paradox db Driver para o Microsoft Visual FoxPro IBM DB2 ODBC DRIVER INFORMIX 3 31 32 BIT Micrmontt Annass Diver mdb 4 lt Back Cancel Optim 7 1 F 3 Secondary Server Configuration 3 Select the Attunity Connect Driver and click Finish to open the ODBC Attunity Server Setup DSN Properties dialog ODBC Attunity Server Setup DSN Properties x Specify DSN name and description b z A Name 4 ATTuniTy CONNECT F I Description SERVERS ing H DATABASES f Specify DSN name and optional description here lt lt Back Hents Finish
181. N_ID c 6 FIRST_NAME C 15 LAST_NAME C 15 AGE N SEX C 1 E TERRITORY C 14 f MANAGER_ID C 6 SSN C 11 EMAIL C 62 PHONE_NUMBER C 10 1 1 OPTIM MALE RATES RSMR DP AGE N RATE_PER_1000 N OPTIM_FEMALE RATES RSFR t AGE N RATE_PER_1000 N RSSL OPTIM_STATE_LOOKUP DISTRICT C 2 DIST_CODE C 3 OPTIM_ORDERS ORDER_ID N CUST_ID C 5 ORDER_DATE DATE FREIGHT_CHARGES N ORDER_SALESMAN C 6 ORDER_POSTED_DATE TIMESTAMP ORDER_SHIP_DATE C 6 Rop OPTIM DETAILS Cascade Restrict ORDER_ID N ITEM_ID c 5 ITEM_QUANTITY N RID DETAIL_UNIT_PRICE N OPTIM_ITEMS ITEM_ID c ITEM_DESCRIPTION C CATEGORY C 14 RATING rox UNIT_PRICE N ON_HAND_INVENTORY N 5 72 4 Optim 7 1 H 1 Sample Database Tables and Structure This diagram shows the relationships among the tables as follows e Arrows indicate the flow from parent to child e Solid lines represent relationships defined to the DBMS e Dashed lines indicate relationships defined to the Optim Directory during training and demonstrations e Dotted lines indicate Optim Extended Relationships Extended relationships can emulate implicit or application managed relationships in your database allowing you to manipulate sets of relational data in the same manner as in your production environment e Data is provided for all tables in the sample database shown in the diagram An additional
182. OB tablespaces AUX tables and unique Indexes This check box is selected by default Select a font color to highlight object name changes in the SQL statements shown on the Review SQL dialog before creating those objects in the target database During the Create Process object names specified in the Table Map are translated to be appropriate for the target database This feature applies to creating text type database objects functions packages package bodies procedures triggers and views Limit When creating a large number of objects highlighting object names in color can affect the speed of the process Specify the maximum number of created objects to highlight in color i e if the number of objects to create exceeds the limit you specify colorization is not used The default is 1000 Confident Select a font color to highlight object name changes that are reasonably confident Accept the default color blue or click the down arrow to select a different color Uncertain Select a font color to highlight object name changes that may require verification because of the way different DBMSs use object names Accept the default color yellow or click the down arrow to select a different color Use the Tables tab to specify the default database for DB2 z OS Specify a default tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace for creating database objects Specify an allocation percent to adjust SQL storage related parameters for Ora
183. OC Column Map Procedure COMP Compare Request CONV Convert Request CURRENCY Currency Table DBALIAS DB Alias 506 Optim 7 1 D 5 Import Security Definitions DEL ED EXTR LOAD PK REL REPT REST STORPROF UPIN Object Name New Object Name Delete Request Edit Definition Extract Request Load Request Primary Key Relationship Report Request Restore Request Storage Profile Table Map Update or Update Insert Request The names of the security definitions available for importing Specify a new name for the security definition The name must comply with the naming conventions for the security definition Shortcut Menu Right click to select from the following shortcut menu commands Commands Copy Name Copies the Object Name to the New Object Name column for the security definition Available in the Object Name column only Populate Clear Copies the Object Name to the New Object Name column for all security definitions Add Copies the Object Name to the New Object Name column for security definitions without a New Object Name Empty Empties names from the New Object Name Installation and Configuration Guide column for all security definitions 507 Appendix D Optim Security Run Import Import Errors 508 To import security definitions choose Run from the File menu Note The Run command will not be available until you select at least one available security definition During Secu
184. ODM will use a unioned index until a column with a different name or attribute is found compatible attributes are not used The unique column and remaining columns in the index will not be processed Archive File If Archive File Security denies you access to a table or a column in Security table no rows are retrieved from the table F 9 1 Archive File Collection Subsets You can specify a subset of files in an Archive File Collection using a data source definition see page 538 connection string see page 554 or SQL WHERE clause The PST _AF SUBSET pseudocolumn is logically added to each archived table during ODM processing and allows you to create a subset using an SQL WHERE clause Use the following syntax PST_AF_SUBSET AF_ N n n AF_ID_RANGE x y AF_DATE_RANGE yyyy mm dd hh mm ss yyyy mm dd hh mm ss SAF_IN 1 7 Archive Files to include where n is an Archive File name GUID or Archive File ID AF ID_RANGE y A range of Archive File IDs where x is the start and y is the end AF DATE RANGE A range of Archive File creation dates You vyyy mm dd hh mm ss must include the time of day hh mm ss yyyy mm dd hh mm ss You can use zeros for the time e g 00 00 00 The subset criteria need only be specified once in an SQL statement If subset criteria is specified in the data source or connection string the WHERE clause subset must be a subset of that criteria 562 Optim 7 1
185. Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation tables the Configuration program creates packages plans or procedures and a Windows registry entry that allows the workstation to access the Optim Directory Specify Optim The first step in creating an Optim Directory is to name it Use the Directory Specify Optim Directory dialog to name or select the Optim Directory Configure First Workstation Specify Optim Directory OF x Optim he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains Optim Directory in a named registry entry The name is also stored in the Optim irectory Shared Optim Directories must have unique names Specify the name For the ptim Directory and registry entry then click lt Proceed gt to continue ea M Optim Directory Specification Create New Optim Directory and Registry Entry Name OPTIMDIR Create New Registry Entry For Existing Optim Directory C Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry Names The Specify Optim Directory dialog presents the following options You must select an option enter an Optim Directory name and click Proceed to open the next dialog e Create New Optim Directory and Registry Entry Select this option to create the first or an additional Optim Directory This option is always available and is selected when the dialog opens If no Optim Directory registry entry exists for the workstation the
186. Optim Server Settings ol x General Errors Load Connection Access Startup Security Endpoints archive Retention Status 4 gt Note The Endpoints must also be specified in individual Product Configuration File s available to the Clients Update Product Configuration File s Undo Configuration ox Cancel Apply Help Ready You can include all protocols and endpoints available to the Server by clicking the down arrow in Protocol and selecting Supported Protocols All from the list Endpoints are created for every available protocol When configured this way workstations must query an RPC Locator for the endpoints when connecting to the Server This query introduces a small delay when the server is first selected and may compromise security Note When Supported Protocols All is selected Endpoint displays an asterisk and Network Address displays the computer name Installation and Configuration Guide 169 6 Configure the Optim Server Grid Details 170 Protocol Endpoint Network Address Authentication Click the down arrow to select from a list of available protocols Specify the endpoint or address that corresponds to the specified protocol The format and content depend on the specified protocol Displays the network address of the Server The format and content depend on the specified protocol In selecting a level of security the needs
187. PTIM FEMALE RATES table has the following columns Column Name Data Type and Description AGE INTEGER can contain a null value RATE PER 1000 DECIMAL rate in dollar amount can contain a null value Primary Keys The RATE PER_ 1000 column is the primary key column Relationships The OPTIM_ FEMALE RATES table is a child of the OPTIM SALES to other tables table through its Optim data driven relationship on column AGE H 1 10 OPTIM_STATE_LOOKUP Table The OPTIM STATE LOOKUP table has the following columns Column Name Data Type and Description DIST_CODE CHAR 3 characters cannot contain a null value DISTRICT CHAR 2 characters cannot contain a null value Primary Keys The OPTIM_ STATE LOOKUP table does not have a primary key Relationships The OPTIM_ STATE LOOKUP table is a child of the OPTIM SALES to other tables table through a substring relationship on column DISTRICT using SUBSTR SALESMAN ID 1 2 598 Optim 7 1 H 2 Sample Column Map Exits H 2 Sample Column Map Exits The Samples CMExit subdirectory includes a set of sample exit routines These commented samples show how to use the data areas available for exit routines and provide examples of the type of processing that can be performed using an exit Note Column Map Exits must be compiled and linked and must conform to C programming language calling conventions Sample exit routines included are PSTEXIT C Samples of the th
188. PTUSR47 TEST1 Access Definition Imported OPTUSR1 ARCORD Archive Request Imported OPTUSR MULTARCHIDX Archive Request Imported ROBERTSC NOV4 Archive Request Imported SAMPLE_DE Calendar Imported PSTFXF CUST Column Map Imported TEST18 CURRENCY1 Column Map Imported TEST18 CURRENCY2 Column Map Imported OPTUSR CUST Extract Request Creation Date Date and time the Security Import Process Log was created List of errors Explanatory text for each error if errors were encountered List of imported objects Names of the imported security definitions listed by object type and name Print Print the log by choosing Print from the File menu Each execution of the Security Definition Import clears the log before information for the current execution is written Previous log information is not retained Installation and Configuration Guide 509 Appendix D Optim Security 510 Optim 7 1 Appendix E Security Reports Security Reports Report Process Run or Schedule Using the Report Process you can create a report on the permissions for Functional or Object Security privileges assigned to user and group accounts in your network You can also create a report on the contents of an Archive or Compare File or list Archive Directory entries that meet criteria you supply for more information about these reports see the Archive or Compare User Manual Security permissions allow or deny roles which consis
189. S apia S 599 source format exit input to Age Function 0 600 Export Registry Data oeer 137 Extract Files Samples siaa 603 Extract Uncommitted Data ce 254 F File Access Definition Editor 480 File Access Definitions using secured files ceeeeeeceees 478 Functional Privileges s es 458 G General tab Personal Options 284 285 Caps Ode ajssctuseietas sentences ees 284 data directory ssisisieciainnnmncacds 285 days to keep trace files oo eee 284 Local Optim Server ODBC 285 Product Configuration File 285 SQL LIKE character ceceeee 284 temporary work directory 00 285 unchained mode eccesereeeeeees 329 WAIN ON cascade oo eeceeeceseeeseeseeeteeees 328 Z OS COd6 p pe arenneren 284 General tab Product Options 249 251 abort Scheduler or command line 251 default calendar 0 ccecceeeseeseeees 250 maximum extract TOWS ccceeeeeeees 250 maximum fetch rows ccccceseeeees 249 warn on cascade delete update 250 Optim 7 1 I Import Registry Data ecceeeeeeeeeees 141 Index Buffer Pools ccecceeceeseeseeetees 299 Index Defaults apresen 299 Informix create multiple DB Aliases 122 create drop procedures for IDB Alias sevntyensentitsnaieaconies 99 for Optim Directory cc 85 update DBMS version ossessi
190. SQLID User ID as the default for new synonyms Use an explicit identifier as the default for new synonyms If you select this option you must specify an explicit identifier 1 to 64 characters To select from a list click the browse button Use the options on the Logon tab to set logon and password preferences Installation and Configuration Guide 303 9 Personal Options Personal Options olx General Confirm Display Errors Scheduling Load Create Logon server edit_4 gt Directory gt O uuaa qor922k ALIAS2 O ALIAS3 C optusr4 O anaa SQLOPT O RERRRERK qor922k Undo Ready ZA Optim Directory Select the name of the Optim Directory to display the corresponding logon information If you have access to more than one Optim Directory click to select from a list Grid Details The logon information corresponding to the selected Optim Directory includes the following details DB Alias List of DB Alias names you can access User ID Identifier 1 to 30 characters that allows you to access a particular DB Alias User IDs are usually assigned and maintained by the database administrator Note Ifyou are using Informix you must specify the User ID in uppercase for an ANSI database and in lowercase for a non ANSI database 304 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Always Ask Select to display the logon dialog every time you For Password access a
191. Schema Name for Oracle and Owner ID for an SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix database Tablespace Select a tablespace to store the tables To select from a list click the down arrow Tablespace is not available if you select Drop Sample Tables Display SQL Select this check box to display SQL statements before loading or dropping the tables Note Ifyou are loading or refreshing the sample tables click Proceed to open the Drop Tables dialog Drop Tables The Drop Tables dialog allows you to review a list of the sample tables that are to be dropped within the selected DB Alias Configure First Workstation Drop Tables _ OF x Optim he following Optim Sample Tables will be dropped if they exist If these table names onflict with your database table names then click lt Cancel gt to return to the previous indow You can then skip this step or select another Owner ID For the tables Click lt OK gt to drop these Optim Sample Tables zi DB Alias ALIAS Tables to be Dropped pstuser OPTIM_DETAILS 2 pstuser OPTIM_ORDERS 3 pstuser OPTIM_CUSTOMERS pstuser OPTIM_SALES 5 pstuser OPTIM_SHIP_TO E Ca e Ready Oracle Q0R922K Oracle Q0R922K_ Use the Drop Tables dialog to ensure that the names of the sample tables do not conflict with your other table names If there are conflicts click Cancel otherwise click OK Installation and Configuration Guide 113 5
192. Security Change Security Administrator 147 5 2 4 Enable Disable Optim Server Feature 148 5 2 5 Enable Disable Archive ODBC Interface 149 5 2 6 Specify Product Configuration File 149 SaF DUMIDA oeri nei ee EN RE ate E eed eee E wtih Os 150 6 Configure the Optim Server 0 00 ce eee ee eee eee 151 G1 General Tab i605 ahiccaecidets dakoen a e Ga 154 ee DROS BA rosrorserek a faces EERE ones EE ERARAS SE E RSA 156 G3 Loaf TAD ocercs cari taia maiia upaa eE Eaa EE E 158 DA Connection Tab aes occ epose na e iaat e EEE AEE PEE 160 GS Aco TAD cs ices Sich o e ia e a a E E ER EEE E ERE EA 163 DO S oa Ee se ranee a A eee Ea 164 67 Security Tab cereis riser csee rina bade bes EE E bed 166 Ge Endpomts Tab ois ores cess esta seh OEE EEE oa Ew eo 169 69 Archive TaD socii oid eee eee beech kes Seba 173 6 10 Retention Tap oieee i yop g eshte cake eh aa gee Oo a KEES 175 61l States Wahoo teeta bey be eed eee ee bee E 177 GS mail Tas 2 soos sve eee e aah s esos Adee es be Danas bes 179 613 Came ROR oo 8 ei sobs So eke Meek Gaede be ee ads Sees 182 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 183 7 1 Create Update DB Alias 2 ck cee cee eee nes 185 72 Create Update Optim Directory oc ces e a ease pea een 190 7 3 Access Existing Optim Directory 00 0 eee eee ee 191 viii Optim 7 1 7 4 Configure Security for an Optim Directory
193. Such trademarks may also be registered or common law trademarks in other countries A current list of IBM trademarks is available on the Web at Copyright and trademark information at www ibm com legal copytrade shtml Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States other countries or both Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States other countries or both Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States other countries or both UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries Other company product or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others Contents AWGUE THIS ESUIME soos soe oiseeesstaveneeens ba E OEE 54554 Eee nes xiii Summary of Release fo ocr seed tee eii aia E E eh de xvii Summary Of Release G5 eoeta t See obeyed belek AE E bd eee xix Summary of Release 6 4 v ecce s eed eee keie ees De E OS xxii E Started on ess ccs E E E E EE 1 1 1 Conceptual Overview oie ii ee eee te io a E E 1 LJ Jastaliation PIBGS os os hee oy Dee ed ee eee BAS 4 1 1 2 Configuration PHASE soci belie hae beens Ba es 6 1 2 Planning for Installation and Configuration 10 1 2 1 Installation Requirements
194. Sybase V 11 9 2 robdb3 Task DB DBAAction createnew DBAName AROBDB4 DBMSType SYBASE DBMSVersion 11 9 2 ConnectStr roberts UserID roberts Password robbie DBQualifier robdb4 SPAction UseExisting SPShare True Description Local Sybase V 11 9 2 robdb4 Task DB To perform the tasks from the command line specify PROCNFG FILE C Cre_dba txt 438 Optim 7 1 C 2 Examples C 2 2 Apply Maintenance to Multiple DB Aliases The first step is to create a text file with the appropriate parameters for the tasks For this example the text file is called C Maint_dba txt PSTDirName ORA LOCAL PSTDirUserID roberts PSTDirPassword softech DBAAction useexisting DBAName AUDB_ LOCAL UserID roberts PASSWORD fido Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName ASYB_ LOCAL Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName AROBDB3 Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName AROBDB4 Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName AORA LOCAL Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName AMSSQL_ LOCAL Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName AIFX_ LOCAL Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName AIFX_LOCALNA Task MAINTCAT DBAAction useexisting DBAName APSTDSNY Task MAINTCAT To perform the tasks from the command line specify PROCNFG FILE C Maint_dba txt Installation and Configuration Guide 439 Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks 440 Optim 7 1 Appendix D Optim S
195. TLIOPR Ready 4 Current Owner A read only list of the owners of each ACL in the Secured Input File New Owner Specify a new owner name for an ACL in the Secured Input File Use the browse button to open the Security Users dialog and select an owner see Security Users Shortcut Menu Right click to select from the following shortcut menu commands Commands Copy Name Copies the Current Owner name to the New Owner column for the ACL Available in the Current Owner column only Populate Clear Copies the Current Owner name to the New Owner column for all ACLs Add Copies the Current Owner name to the New Owner column for ACLs without a New Owner name Empty Empties names from the New Owner column for all ACLs Installation and Configuration Guide 505 Appendix D Optim Security Objects Tab Use the Objects tab to review or change the names of security definitions you want to import Import Security Definitions et DEG ca j e o ACD Defaut aaco EMPTY E e a ajaco TEST ACD TEST2 ACD TESTS BJAD ACL _ OPTUSR AD1 ADACL OPTUSR ADSAMP AD ACL _ OPTUSR TEST1 ARCH ACL OPTUSR ARCORD1 ARCH ACL OPTUSRE MULTARCHIDX ARCH ACL OPTUSR4 NOY CALENDA SAMPLE DE o Jooo Object Type Identifies the security definition as an ACD ACL or FAD For ACLs the following abbreviations identify the secured object types AD Access Definition ARCH Archive Request CALENDAR Calendar CM Column Map CMPR
196. Template ACL from the Set Optim Object Security Option dialog e From the main window click Optim Object Template ACL from the Security submenu on the Options menu Installation and Configuration Guide 199 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks For information about editing ACLs see D 2 1 Access Control List Editor on page 471 7 4 5 Set Archive File Security Option The Set Archive File Security Option dialog allows the Security Administrator to enable or disable Archive File Security for the Optim Directory Archive File Security controls access to tables and columns in Archive Files For more information about Archive File Security see Archive File Security on page 446 amp Configure Security Set Archive File Security Option Optim he Configuration program can Enable or Disable the Archive File Security Feature for he current Optim Directory Security can only be enabled or disabled by the Security dministrator Select an option to enable or disable the Archive File Security feature lick lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step gt a Optim Directory Security Feature Security State Security Administrator For this Optim Directory Domain User Name NA optusr3 Security Options for this Optim Directory Enable Disable Previous Proceed _ Skip Cancel Ready Oracle QOR922K 4 Optim Directory displays the direct
197. This display is updated during processing The status bar displays information about the definition being processed Secured Input File Specify a Secured Input File generated by the Security Definition Export Process for details about creating this file refer to D 4 Exporting Security Definitions To select from a list of recent file names click the down arrow or use the browse button You may also copy a name into the box or type a name directly e Ifyou do not provide a fully qualified path the path from Personal Options is used e Ifno path is given in Personal Options the current drive and directory are assumed After a Secured Input File is specified the Import Security Definitions Validation pop up is displayed Type the Password and click OK to access the file amp Import Security Definitions Validati E3 Import File C temp Secdefs txt Password Allow ACL for Indicate if ACLs can be imported without having corresponding secured non existent Optim objects in the Optim Directory Importing ACLs before corresponding Objects secured objects allows the objects to be secured when they are imported Installation and Configuration Guide 503 Appendix D Optim Security 504 Overwrite existing definitions Continue import if error s If secured objects are imported before the corresponding ACLs the objects are unsecured until the ACLs are imported If a corresponding secured o
198. UFFERPOOL clause in the Create statement lt SOURCE gt Select to use the same buffer pool as the index for the source Archive or Extract File Installation and Configuration Guide 299 9 Personal Options Create Aliases Tab Use the Aliases tab to select default options for creating new aliases You can specify a default alias when you use DB2 LUW or DB2 z OS Personal Options splay Errors Scheduing Load Logon Server Edt Streets O OO kes Identifier Specify the default identifier for new aliases based on the identifier from one of the following Object Use the identifier from the corresponding target object as the default for new aliases For aliases the corresponding target object is the table view or alias referenced in the alias Source Use the identifier from the source alias as the default for new aliases Current ID Use the current SQLID User ID as the default for new aliases 300 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Explicit Use an explicit identifier as the default for new aliases If you select this option you must specify an explicit identifier 1 to 64 characters To select from a list click the browse button Create Triggers Tab Use the Triggers tab to select default options for creating new triggers You can specify a default trigger when you use DB2 LUW Oracle Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix Personal Options Identifier Specify the default ide
199. a Column Name Data Type and Description EMPNO Employee number CHAR 6 characters NATIONAL ID National ID such as a social security number SSN CHAR 20 characters NATIONAL ID TYPE National ID type such as USSSN for US Social Security Number CHAR 6 characters ADDR_STREET1 First line of street address VARCHAR 30 characters ADDR_STREET2 Second line of street address VARCHAR 30 characters ADDR CITY City CHAR 20 characters ADDR_ STATE State abbreviation CHAR 6 characters ADDR _ ZIP ZIP code CHAR 6 characters ADDR_COUNTRY Country abbreviation CHAR 3 characters PHONE NUMBER Phone number including area code CHAR 20 characters 606 Optim 7 1 I 1 Content of Data Privacy Tables PHONE COUNTRY Country code for international calls CHAR 20 characters SALARY Person s salary DECIMAL 11 places with 2 decimal places NAME FIRST NAME INITIAL First name CHAR 15 characters Middle initial CHAR 1 character NAME LAST Last name CHAR 15 characters NAME FULL Full name first name middle initial and last name VARCHAR 40 characters BIRTHDATE Birth date DATE GENDER M Male F Female CHAR character EMAIL CREDITCARD Email address CHAR 70 characters Credit card number CHAR 19 characters Installation and Configuration Guide 607 Appendix I D
200. a DB Alias that is configured for Unicode data to connect to a non Unicode database an error results 5 DB2 LUW DB Aliases in an Oracle Sybase ASE or MS SQL Server Optim Directory can have different Unicode formats however Optim cannot connect to both a Unicode enabled DB2 LUW database and a non Unicode enabled DB2 LUW database during the same session DB2 z OS To prevent any loss of data the character set used by the DB2 z OS database client must be compatible with that of the database server Optim enforces this requirement as follows 1 All DB2 z OS DB Aliases in a DB2 z OS Optim Directory must have the same Unicode format as the Directory 2 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database the client character set is automatically set to match the server character set Installation and Configuration Guide 27 1 Getting Started Informix Multi byte Support 28 3 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias that is not configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database an error results 4 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias that is configured for Unicode data to connect to a non Unicode database an error results 5 DB2 z OS DB Aliases in an Oracle Sybase ASE or MS SQL Server Optim Directory can have different Unicode formats however Optim cannot connect to both a Unicode enabled DB2 z OS database and a non Unicode enabled DB2 z OS database during the same session If a DB2
201. abase To create primary keys from within the Configuration program select Create Primary Keys from the Tasks menu on the main window To create primary keys from within Optim select New from the File menu and select Primary Keys from the Definitions submenu on the main window Select this check box to display SQL statements before creating or dropping stored procedures Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Logon Defaults Tab Use the Logon Defaults tab to provide the default User ID and Password required to create refresh stored procedures Create Multiple DB Aliases Optim must use Optim created Procedures to access the System Tables For each database that you want to access The Optim Configuration program can create new Procedures or it can use Procedures created for another Optim Directory For that database Select the databases to be accessed then specify whether to create or use The entries on the Logon Defaults tab allow you to connect to the database while configuring a workstation You must enter the password a second time for verification Note The default logon information applies to all DB Aliases unless you provide explicit logon information on the Databases tab Installation and Configuration Guide 125 5 Configure Workstations Saved Logon Use the Saved Logon Defaults tab to provide the User ID and Defaults Password needed to access the DB Alias Create Multiple DB Aliases _ of x
202. abase a configuration dialog may refer to Packages used to access database tables However for a Sybase ASE or SQL Server database the same dialog refers to Procedures and for a DB2 database it refers to Plans Varying terms are noted in the discussion of a dialog Installation and Configuration Guide 61 4 Configuration Window and Menus 4 1 Main Window and Menus 4 1 1 Main Window 62 The Configuration main window includes the menu bar toolbar Processing Log message bar and status bar Optim Configuration OF x File Tasks Options Help Configure the First Workstation Pro Configure Additional Workstation C Create Update DB Alias Create Update Optim Directory Access Existing Optim Directory Configure Security for an Optim Directory Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Rename an Optim Directory Update the DBMS Version for an Optim Directory Update the DBMS Version for a DB Alias Configure Options Create Primary Keys q Create Copies of DB2 2 05 Relationships Load Drop Sample Data Seki Load Drop Data Privacy Data o use an existing Optim Dire Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables Irkstation or Tasks gt Directory Cre Purge Optim Directory Registry Entry Read Purge DB Alias Note When the Configuration Assistant or other dialogs are ope
203. abase Name DB Alias Name DB Alias Description Procedure Action Procedure Qualifier Grant Auth ID Logon User ID Logon Password Saved User ID Installation and Configuration Guide The Databases tab on the Create Multiple DB Aliases dialog allows you to provide explicit information for each DB Alias Select the check box to create a DB Alias for the database If you do not want to create a DB Alias clear the check box This grid column is locked in position so you can scroll to the left or right and still see the selections for the databases Note Ifa DB Alias for a database exists the grid row is protected and shaded The name assigned to the database when it was created The identifier that allows the software to access the database This name also serves as the high level qualifier for database table names This entry is required and is populated with the database name in uppercase by default Text that describes or explains the purpose of the DB Alias Options to create refresh procedures or use existing procedures To select an option click the grid cell and click the down arrow Note When creating procedures to be shared for access to all Sybase ASE or SQL Server databases on the server this grid cell is protected The first selected entry is displayed as Create Refresh other selected entries to use the shared stored procedures display Use Existing The high level qualifier for stored procedures
204. able Functional Security using the Configuration program for the Functional Security settings to take effect You can also use Functional Security to define Object Association Privileges which determine the ACDs a role can associate with Access Control Lists ACL used by Object Security to secure objects Within each ACD you can define Object Association Privileges for specific object types For example if an ACD denies a role the Associate Archive Requests privilege the role cannot use that ACD in an ACL that secures an Archive Request Installation and Configuration Guide 44 Appendix D Optim Security Object Security 442 To establish Functional Security 1 Using the Configuration program initialize Optim Security and assign a Security Administrator as described in 5 1 4 Optim Security on page 128 2 Edit the Default ACD to map roles to network accounts 3 For each role grant or deny the appropriate Functional Privileges and if Object Security will also be enabled grant or deny the appropriate Object Association Privileges as described in Assigning Privileges on page 457 4 Using the Configuration program enable Functional Security as described in 7 4 3 Set Functional Security Option on page 196 Object Security allows you to control access to specific objects in the Optim Directory using an Access Control List ACL Any Optim object can be secured by associating it with an ACL An ACL lists ro
205. account must have the RESOURCE privilege Note DBA privilege includes RESOURCE privilege In some cases however Informix requires that the user account used to create the stored procedures or tables match the stored procedure qualifier or table owner ID This is true even if the user account has DBA privilege This rule also applies when creating the sample tables or data privacy tables since a GRANT is issued as part of the creation process When you catalog procedures for the Optim Directory and the system tables you can specify a grant authorization ID When this ID is PUBLIC the default value all users are able to run Optim Optionally you can specify a user ID or group name to limit access to specific users To access an existing Optim Directory or a DB Alias a user must have CONNECT privilege Note Both DBA and RESOURCE privileges include CONNECT privilege DB2 LUW The DB2 LUW interface used to validate a user account uses restricted APIs DB2 LUW for Windows 2000 or above provides a Windows Service called DB2 Security Server db2sec exe This program must be started on any machine client or server on which a user account must be validated For client machines this service is necessary only if any connected instance requires client authentication During installation of a DB2 LUW product this service is registered with Windows It is removed during uninstall By default the DB2 Security Server starts auto
206. account for the Archive Process under which it was created based on the filelogon and filemode configuration parameters Valid settings are 1 Present the credentials used to start the prOsvce daemon for physical access to Archive Files 1 userid Present the credentials provided with password the odbcserver parameter for physical access to Archive Files 0 Do not use the ODBC Server Note A 1 userid password setting requires root authorization for the user account used to start the prOsvce daemon The tivoliavail parameter provides the credentials for physical access to the Tivoli resources The filelogon parameter establishes credentials presented for access to the Archive Files managed by Tivoli Valid settings are 1 Present the credentials used to start the prOsvce daemon for physical access to Tivoli resources 1 userid Present the credentials provided with password the odbcserver parameter for physical access to Tivoli resources 0 Do not use Tivoli resources Note A 1 userid password setting requires root authorization for the user account used to start the pr0svce daemon The webserver parameter applies to Optim Amdocs CRM Solution only For details see your Tomcat documentation Optim 7 1 A 4 Securing the Products and Configuration Files Valid settings are 1 Present the credentials used to start the prOsvce daemon for webserver access to Archive Files 1 userid Present the credentials pr
207. account is not permitted to access a column that affects the referential integrity of the data e g a primary key an error message is displayed in the Process Report Optim 7 1 D 3 File Access Definition For a Browse session an account must be permitted access to data in a table and column in a secured Archive File in order to browse the data Accounts that are denied access to data in all tables or columns in a secured Archive File cannot use the file in any Archive process or Browse session A message indicates that the file cannot be opened If an Archive File is associated with a File Access Definition that does not exist the file cannot be used to define or run a process Registering A secured Archive File must have an accompanying Security File in Secured Archive order to be registered Using the Archive Directory Maintenance Files dialog you can export the security information for an Archive File into a Security File The Security File protects the Archive File by requiring a password to register the Archive File During registration the secured Archive File is associated with a new or existing File Access Definition in the target Optim Directory For more information about registering Archive Files and the Archive Directory Maintenance dialog refer to the Archive User Manual Chapter 9 Archive Maintenance Utilities Use the File Access Definition Editor to create and maintain File Access Definitions You can open the
208. ach version Select the specific Optim Directory and DB Alias then enter the appropriate path and name of the Loader executable file for the particular DBMS version 158 Optim 7 1 6 3 Load Tab Load Specifications Specify the complete path and name of the executable to access each DBMS Loader that can be used with a Load Request DB Alias Exception Table Default Creator ID Fully Qualified Path for DBMS Loaders Merge Current Select a specific Optim Directory then click the down arrow to select a specific DB Alias Specify the appropriate loader path for the corresponding DBMS version If you are using DB2 Oracle or Informix you can also specify a default Creator ID for Exception Tables or Violation Tables Specify a default Creator ID for exception tables DB2 and Oracle or violation tables Informix Available only when you select a DB Alias for a DB2 Oracle or Informix database Specify the directory path and program name for the specific DBMS Loader Consult your DBMS documentation for the name of the loader program To select from your system directories click the browse button Click Merge Current User to merge the settings from the Current User User registry to the Local Machine registry for the Server machine Installation and Configuration Guide 159 6 Configure the Optim Server 6 4 Connection Tab Use the Connection tab to provide DBMS connection information for all DB A
209. acter Format Keep Optim Directory Data in Unicode Format Specify Character Set of Optim Directory Data 88 If the Optim Directory is ina DBMS for which Optim supports Unicode except SQL Server or multi byte you must indicate the character format of the Directory If you are creating an Optim Directory in a DBMS for which Optim supports Unicode but not multi byte you are prompted to indicate whether the Optim Directory data is kept in Unicode format Configure First Workstation Keep Optim Directory Data in Unicode F B EG Optim he Optim Configuration Program can configure this Optim Directory so data stored in it e g object names Optim Primary Keys Audit data etc is kept in Unicode format To nable this option both the DBMS client and Database character sets must be UTF 8 his option is required in order For any DB Alias to have the Unicode feature enabled gt his antinn ic alen renuired if Fhe DRMS client character cet ic LITF 8 Canversel this a M Options a Keep Optim Directory Data in Unicode Format Previous Proceed _ Cancel A Note For DB2 LUW databases The Special Considerations for an Optim Directory in UDB dialog is displayed next indicating that DB Aliases for DB2 LUW or DB2 z OS databases in a DB2 LUW Optim Directory must use the same character format as the Directory If you are creating an Optim Directory in a DBMS for which Optim supports Unic
210. ains sample Extract Files JCL Contains the sample JCL file Both the Optim sample database and the samples in the Samples subdirectory are described in this Appendix Installation and Configuration Guide 587 Appendix H Samples H 1 Sample Database Tables and Structure 588 Sample database tables and data are distributed on the installation CD and are loaded during the configuration process Refer to Load Sample Tables on page 112 As a group the database tables include information on customers and orders with shipping instructions The sample tables also include information about sales and inventory Minor differences in data types exist depending upon the DBMS you use to install the sample tables The following diagram shows the basic structure of the sample database 4 l RCST a RSTSI OPTIM_CUSTOMERS CUST_ID C 5 CUSTNAME C 20 ADDRESS C 50 CITY C 15 STATE C 2 ZIP c 5 YTD_SALES N SALESMAN_ID ce CCN N 19 EMAIL c 62 RSC PHONE NUMBER C 10 Set Null RCO Restrict OPTIM_SHIP_TO CUST_ID C 5 SHIP_ID N ADDRESS C 50 CITY C 15 STATE c 2 ZIP C 5 IN_CARE_OF 30 SHIPPING_CHANGE_DT DATE OPTIM_SHIP_INSTR SHIP_ID N SHIP_INSTR_ID N ORDER_SHIP_INSTR 254 SHIP_UPDATED TIMESTAMP LEGEND DBMS Relationship t p Optim Relationship gt Optim Extended gt Relationship OPTIM_SALES SALESMA
211. ally the Product Configuration File and the Personal Options registry entries are created when you configure the workstations Use this task to modify these options Optim Primary Keys are usually created when you configure a workstation or create a DB Alias After you install Optim you can use this task to create primary keys for tables added to the database 67 4 Configuration Window and Menus Options Menu 68 Create Copies of DB2 z OS Relationships Load Drop Sample Data Load Drop Data Privacy Data Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables Purge Optim Directory Registry Entry Purge DB Alias Use this task to copy DB2 z OS relationships into the Optim Directory which reduces the run time when accessing DB2 z OS tables Sample tables are distributed with Optim and are generally loaded when you configure a workstation but you can use this task to load or refresh the sample data independently Data privacy data tables are available to clients who have an Optim Data Privacy License These tables are generally loaded when you configure a workstation if you have a Data Privacy License but you can use this task to load or refresh them Use this task to drop a DB Alias or a Optim Directory You may at times want to remove workstation access to a Optim Directory without dropping the Directory or packages plans or procedures used to access that Directory or disable Optim for a workstation Use this task t
212. alog Click Proceed to create the 6 2 Optim Directory tables and continue the Configuration program task Installation and Configuration Guide 583 Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects G 2 2 Dropping Version 6 0 6 1 Directory Tables After an Optim Directory in an SQL Server database has been converted you can drop the version 6 0 6 1 Directory tables To drop the 6 0 6 1 Directory tables select Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables from the Configuration program Tasks menu Specify Optim Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog to select the name of the Directory version 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory you want to drop Click Proceed to continue Connect to The Configuration program must connect to the database to drop the Database Optim Directory tables Use the Connect to Database dialog to provide the connection information Click Proceed to continue Create Select In the Create Select DB Alias dialog click Skip to continue the process DB Alias of dropping the version 6 0 6 1 tables Do not click Proceed or the Configuration program will drop the DB Alias for your new Optim Directory Drop the 6 0 6 1 In the Drop the 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory Tables dialog select Drop Optim Directory the 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory Tables to make the Directory unavailable Tables to the Optim products version 6 0 6 1 Click Proceed to continue Drop DB Alias Optim Tables Drop the 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory T ables Bi E3 F the O
213. always available The user credentials used to start the process can be the Local System Account a local user or a domain user Only local users or domain users that have previously logged on to the Server machine have a current user hive others use the default user hive HKEY_USERS DEFAULT instead When using the default user hive any changes are only cached in memory for use by the process and are not recorded to the registry Also you cannot make the default user hive your current user hive if you log on to the interactive desktop for the Server While this is not a problem for the Server processes this may be problematic for registry settings needed by the DBMS For example Informix requires certain registry settings that are recorded in the current user hive for the user logged on at the time that the Informix utilities are used SETNET32 To correct this issue once you set up the options you can copy them to the default user hive using the REGCOPY utility You must re run the REGCOPY utility each time you change the options Installation and Configuration Guide 423 Appendix B Server Credentials B 1 6 Oracle OS Authentication If you set up Oracle to allow OS Authentication which is beyond the scope of this document Optim must use the current User ID for the process to be used by Oracle Enter one forward slash for the User ID and leave the Password blank B 1 7 UNIX or Linux File Access The effective U
214. am Files IBM Optim RT BIN 3 Run the Image Locator Diagnostic Tool with the name of the offending module For example PNOIMAGE PN0SQ20 DLL 1 3 2 Oracle Connection Diagnostic Tool The Oracle Connection Diagnostic Tool ORACONN EXE is a utility that determines if Optim was installed correctly when it fails to connect to an Oracle database The syntax of the command follows ORACONN userid password TNSservicename where userid Is the user ID used to connect to the Oracle database The user ID must be defined in the Oracle database password Is the password used to connect to the Oracle database The password must be defined for the specified user ID in the Oracle database TNSservicename Is the name of the service associated with the Oracle database To test the connection to an Oracle database perform the following steps 1 Open a MS DOS window 2 Change to the drive and directory where the Optim software was installed usually C Program Files IBM Optim RT BIN 3 Run the Oracle Connection Diagnostic Tool with the name of the TNS Service to which you wish to connect For example ORACONN internal password beq local Installation and Configuration Guide 31 1 Getting Started 1 3 3 Microsoft Debugging Utility The Microsoft Debugging Utility USERDUMP EXE creates a memory dump for a process Since the output is quite large as much as 50 meg use this tool only at the request of Support To display a
215. am fail Once the installation has been deemed successful the tmp softech directory can be safely deleted Installation and Configuration Guide 393 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux A 4 Securing the Products and Configuration Files This section provides guidelines for obtaining the most protection on UNIX systems when installing and executing Optim This section also describes the program pr0pass used to encrypt passwords for parameters in the configuration files A 4 1 Securing the Products Installation UNIX allows you to restrict read write or execute permission to a user members of a group or members of any other group Thus to fence Optim an administrator might e Create a group for user accounts with permission to execute Optim e Within that group create a user account to be the designated owner of Optim with full access rights e Install Optim while logged on as the owner and create the install directory as a subdirectory of the home directory Under this scenario typical system defaults for the file creation mask allow only the owner to write to the install directory the subdirectories and files within them while user accounts within the group can execute Optim and can write to the temp and data subdirectories that hold data from processing Creating the install directory in the home directory prevents users outside the group from executing Optim An alternative
216. ame or string required to access the Optim String Directory database This value was entered earlier in the process and cannot be changed Note Ifyou are using DB2 the term is Database Name or Alias Oracle uses DB Alias Sybase ASE uses Server Name SQL Server uses System Data Source Name and Informix uses Host Name Syntax is described in the DBMS documentation DB Name The name of the Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix database instance for the Optim Directory This value was entered earlier in the process and cannot be changed Note DB Name is displayed only if the Optim Directory is in a Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix database Always Ask Select this check box to require a password each for Password time you connect to the database If you clear this check box your password is saved in the Windows registry and you need not supply a password on future attempts to connect to the database This completes the process of creating the Optim Directory for the first workstation In the next phase of the process you create DB Aliases that allow Optim to access each database 5 1 3 Create DB Aliases 94 Optim can access several databases simultaneously however each database must have a unique DB Alias stored in the current Optim Directory A DB Alias is given as a high level qualifier for a database table name to provide a single name association for parameters required to connect to the database The next step in the
217. ame to display the Change Company Name dialog Toolbar Display or hide the toolbar a check mark indicates it is selected for display Status Bar Display or hide the status bar a check mark indicates it is selected for display Customize Open the Customize Toolbar dialog to add or Toolbar remove buttons Help Menu Use the Help menu to access online help information or to select the Configuration Assistant In addition if you have internet access you can connect directly to the IBM Web site Installation and Configuration Guide 69 4 Configuration Window and Menus 4 1 3 Processing Log 70 A check mark indicates the toolbar or status bar is selected for display The Processing Log lists the actions performed during the configuration process or when you select any command on the Tasks menu Optim Configuration Jof x File Tasks Options Help Processing Log Configuration starting 02 13 08 14 53 27 Build 2115 Configure the First Workstation Starting the Configure First Workstation process The Specify Product License function was successful The Specify Optim Directory Function was successful The Specify Optim Directory DBMS function was successful The Specify Character Set of Optim Directory Data was acknowledged Connection to database QOR922K successful for user pstuser The Connect to the Oracle Optim Directory PSTDIRECTORY function was successful The Create Optim Directory Function was successful
218. an proceed Error messages can appear in pop up dialogs but usually display in the message bar at the bottom of a dialog Error Text Specify font characteristics for the error message text The default is System 10 point Bold Maroon Error Field Specify font characteristics for the data referenced in an error message The default is System 10 point Bold Underline Maroon Display Lines Specify the maximum number of lines 3 to 9 to display in the message bar for any type of message Hide message Select this check box to hide the message bar when no informational bar when empty warning or error messages are displayed If you clear this check box the message bar appears at the bottom of each editor or dialog even when empty Installation and Configuration Guide 157 6 Configure the Optim Server 6 3 Load Tab Use the Load tab to specify the paths to DBMS loaders Note You can expedite the configuration of the Load settings for the Server by clicking Merge Current User This merges Load settings for the logged on user in the Current User registry with settings for the Server machine in the Local Machine registry amp Optim Server Settings General Errors Optim Directory Select Default in the Optim Directory list to enter the path and name of the Loader executable file for each DBMS type If you have more than one version of a particular DBMS type you can enter the unique loader specification for e
219. and Password Also provide a valid Connection String for the client to connect to the Optim Directory and use the DB Alias Optim 7 1 B 2 DBMS Logon Credentials UNIX or Linux For pstlocal cfg provide a userid and password for Installation and Configuration Guide the pstdir and dbalias parameters Also provide a valid connect string for the client to connect to the Optim Directory and use the DB Alias 427 Appendix B Server Credentials 428 Optim 7 1 Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks Optim provides a Command Line Interface that allows you to perform certain configuration tasks without using the graphical user interface for Optim You can run the Command Line Interface from the command line in a batch file or from another program Command Line You can use the Command Line Interface to Tasks e Create one or more DB Aliases e Update refreshing the DB signature one or more DB Aliases e Apply maintenance to one or more DB Aliases e Apply maintenance to one or more Optim Directories The following sections explain and describe how to perform each of these tasks Guidelines The typical command consists of PROCNFG followed by keywords and associated arguments The following guidelines apply All keywords must be prefixed by a forward slash or a dash and separated from one another by one or more spaces Do not use commas e Keywords must be separated from arguments by an equal sign
220. annot be deleted Installation and Configuration Guide 271 8 Product Options WORM Device 272 Minimum File Retention Interval Select to protect an Archive File from deletion for a specified period You can specify a number of years days or a combination of both When you select Interval the Years and Days boxes become available Years Specify the number of years 0 to 100 to protect an Archive File from deletion The default value is zero 0 Days Specify the number of days 0 to 18300 to protect an Archive File from deletion The default value is zero 0 Note 18300 days equals 50 years None Do not use a minimum retention period allow an Archive File to be deleted from Centera at any time Specify the default minimum retention period for protecting Archive Files ona WORM device from deletion The minimum retention period is measured from the time the Archive Process copies the file to the device After the minimum retention period expires the file can be deleted from the device Allow User to alter Select this check box to enable the WORM Minimum File Device Minimum File Retention options in the Retention Storage Profile Utility allowing users to override the default minimum retention defined in Product Options Interval Select to protect an Archive File from deletion for a specified period after the file is generated You can specify a number of years days or a combination of both When you
221. apply maintenance for Optim Directory access the User ID must match the identifier for Optim Directory tables Before creating or refreshing packages plans or procedures for the Optim Directory tables the Configuration program displays the Create Drop Packages or Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog see page 85 or the Bind Drop Plans dialog see page 87 You can choose to browse the DDL statements generated to create or refresh the packages plans or procedures In addition if the specified Optim Directory tables are not the ones you want to use you can cancel the process After packages plans or procedures are created for the Optim Directory the Configuration program prompts you to add default tables to the Optim Directory If you select the check box the Configuration program verifies that default Calendars and Currency tables are in the Optim Directory If not found these tables are loaded automatically Before completing the task to Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access the Configuration program prompts you to apply maintenance for access to another Optim Directory If you select the check box you can repeat the maintenance process To end the task clear the check box and click Proceed Optim 7 1 7 8 Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access 7 8 Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Specify Optim Directory Connect to Database At times it may be necessary to refresh or update the packages plans or
222. arrow to view a list of the most recently used Extract Files Installation and Configuration Guide 287 9 Personal Options Maximum entries in Menu File Lists Action Definition Menu Behavior Appearance Main Window 258 Specify the maximum number of items 1 to 20 displayed below the File menu commands in an editor For example a list of the most recently opened definitions appears on the File menu in the Access Definition Editor Click the down arrow to select the default mode for opening the action or definition editors from the Actions or Definitions menu in the main window Open Last Opens the last edited request in the selected editor This is the default Open New Opens a new untitled request in the selected editor Options for displaying tooltips and toolbars on dialogs and editors in Optim Balloon Style Controls the appearance of the tooltips Select Tooltips the check box to choose balloon style Clear the check box to choose flat style default Flat Style Toolbars Controls the appearance of the toolbars Select the check box to choose flat style Clear the check box to choose 3D style default Options for displaying the list of active dialogs and editors in the main window As you open each editor or dialog the main window expands to list the active editors and dialogs To recall an active editor or dialog double click the item in the list Maximum visible Specify the maximum number of activ
223. at every Optim Directory and DB Alias accessible from the workstation will be dropped without further prompting Uninstall Optim Are You Sure OL x Optim roceed with caution Every Optim Directory that is accessible to the workstation along ith all of their DB Aliases will be dropped Select the Drop all Optim created database bjects without prompting option then select lt Proceed gt to proceed Select lt Cancel gt o abort the entire uninstall process xj M Options T Drop all Optim created database objects without prompting Previous Proceed _ Cancel 4 Select the check box on the Are You Sure dialog and click Proceed to drop all Optim objects Click Cancel to abort the uninstall process If a password is required to access a particular database you will be prompted for it When the Optim sample database tables are to be dropped you will be prompted to confirm that the correct tables are dropped When the data privacy tables are to be dropped you will also be prompted to confirm that the correct tables are dropped Installation and Configuration Guide 613 Appendix J Uninstalling J 3 Do Not Drop Any Optim Created Database Objects When you select this option and click Proceed all Optim created database objects remain unchanged and intact but the Optim software is removed from the workstation J 4 Cancel the Uninstall Process If you select Cancel on any wind
224. at have a value of SE0003 in the SALESMAN ID column and skips all other rows To use this sample you must specify the exit routine as part of the Age Function in the ORDER_DATE source column of the Column Map as follows AGE 1W SC ORDER_ DATE SRCEXIT PSTEXIT A Destination Format Exit is typically called to format the destination column for example for an Age Function that otherwise would not be supported in a Column Map The sample performs the following operations on the sample database table OPTIM_ ORDERS e Discards rows that have a value of SE012 in the SALESMAN ID column and processes all other rows e Ages ORDER SHIP DATE for rows that have a value of SE0005 in the SALESMAN _ID column and skips all other rows To use this sample you must specify the exit routine as part of the Age Function in the ORDER SHIP DATE source column of the Column Map as follows AGE 1W SC ORDER_ SHIP _DATE SF YY MM DD DSTEXIT PSTEXIT Optim 7 1 H 3 Sample Column Map Procedures H 3 Sample Column Map Procedures A Column Map Procedure is a custom program written in Optim Basic that is referenced to perform special processing or data manipulation that is otherwise beyond the scope of a Column Map The function of a Column Map Procedure is generally the same as that of an exit routine Exit routines however are written outside Optim and must be externally compiled and linked Column Map Procedures are written
225. at is the same as one of the Optim Directory tables for example PSTDBA2 PSTPK2 PSTREL2 PSTPT2 Default Tablespace Select a default tablespace To select from a list of available DBMS tablespaces click the down arrow Tablespace Grid Directory Table The names of the Optim Directory tables 84 Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Tablespace Click a Tablespace cell to select from a list of available tablespaces in the database or leave blank to place the table in the default tablespace Create Drop After the Optim Directory tables are created the Configuration Packages program automatically creates the packages plans or procedures used to access them If you are creating the Optim Directory in an Oracle database the Create Drop Packages dialog is displayed amp Configure First Workstation Create Drop Packages ioj x Optim ptim must use Optim created Packages to access the Optim Directory Tables The ptim Configuration program creates these Packages The Schema Name is the same as he Schema Name for the Optim Directory Tables f Tables Optim Directory Tables Package Specifications Create Refresh Schema Name C Use Existing Joptusra Grant Auth ID Drop PUBLIC T Display SQL Previous Skip Undo Cancel Oracle Q0R922K Ifyou are using SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix the same general dialog is displayed as Create Drop Stored Procedures Howeve
226. ata Privacy Data Tables SPORES The ADDRESS table contains the following columns and data able Column Name Data Type and Description SEQ Unique sequential number INTEGER ADDRESS Street address CHAR 50 characters CITY City CHAR 28 characters STATE State abbreviation CHAR 2 characters ZIPCODE ZIP code CHAR 5 characters ZIPPLUS4 Extended portion of US ZIP code CHAR 4 characters Note Data in the ADDRESS table is copyrighted by the United States Postal Service and is provided with permission COMPANY The COMPANY table has the following columns and data Table Column Name Data Type and Description SEQ Unique sequential number INTEGER DATAVALUE Company name CHAR 40 characters Note Data in the COMPANY table is copyrighted by the United States Postal Service and is provided with permission FIRSTNAME The FIRSTNAME table has the following columns and data Table Column Name Data Type and Description SEQ Unique sequential number INTEGER DATAVALUE First name CHAR 15 characters 608 Optim 7 1 I 1 Content of Data Privacy Tables FIRSTNAME_F The FIRSTNAME F table has the following columns and data for Table females Column Name Data Type and Description SEQ Unique sequential number INTEGER DATAVALUE First name CHAR 15 characters FIRSTNAME_M The FIRSTNAME M table has the following colu
227. ating a DB Alias using TASK DB Always Require Password option for a new DB Alias TASK DB Keyword is ignored for an existing DB Alias TRUE Always require a ON or YES password FALSE Save the password in the OFF or NO registry Optim 7 1 C 1 Syntax and Keywords USERID DBMSTYPE DBMSVERSION DBQUALIFIER Installation and Configuration Guide User account with DBMS permission to connect to database associated with the DB Alias Required if the Always Prompt for Password option is active for the DB Alias or if creating a DB Alias using TASK DB userid If TASK DB and you are creating a new DB Alias or if TASK MAINTCAT the user account must have the authority through System Privileges or Roles to create the tables and to catalog the packages plans or procedures under the appropriate table identifier The DBMS associated with the DB Alias Required if TASK DB DB2MVS SYBASE INFORMIX UDB ORACLE SQLSERVER The version of the DBMS associated with the DB Alias DBMSVERSION must follow DBMSTYPE versionnum Required if TASK DB Database name databasequal Required if TASK DB and DBMS is Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix 435 Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks SPSHARE Indicator for sharing Stored Procedures for multiple Sybase ASE or SQL Server DB Aliases when TASK DB TRUE Stored Procedures are ON or YES shared Notes For Sybase stored proce
228. ation Guide 195 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 7 4 3 Set Functional Security Option Configuring Functional Security 196 The Set Functional Security Option dialog allows the Security Administrator to enable or disable Functional Security for the Optim Directory Functional Security controls access to functions and dialogs in Optim For more information about Functional Security see Functional Privileges Tab on page 458 Configure Security Set Functional Security Option ioj x Optim he Configuration program can Enable or Disable the Functional Security Feature for the urrent Optim Directory Security can only be enabled or disabled by the Security dministrator Select an option to enable or disable the Functional Security feature lick lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step gt Optim Directory Security Feature Security State M Security Administrator For this Optim Directory Domain User Name l NA optusr3 M Security Options for this Optim Directory C Enable Disable Skip Cancel Ready Dracle QOR922K Ui Optim Directory indicates the directory name and Security Feature shows that Functional Security is the option you can enable or disable Security State indicates that security for the option is Enabled or Disabled Security Administrator for this Optim Directory displays the Security Administrator To enable or
229. ation about working with privileges and privilege classes see Assigning Privileges Installation and Configuration Guide 467 Appendix D Optim Security Associate Action Editors Associate Definition Editors Associate Utilities 468 Associate Action Editors privileges are required to associate the ACD with an ACL that secures an Action request which is created in a editor selected from the Actions menu For example an Archive File Request This class includes the following privileges Archive Request Insert Request Compare Request Load Request Convert Request Report Request Delete Request Restore Request Extract Request Table Editor Associate Definition Editors privileges are required to associate the ACD with an ACL that secures a Definition which is created in an editor selected from the Definitions menu For example an Access Definition Request This class includes the following privileges Access Definition Point and Shoot Column Map Primary Key Column Map Proc edure Relationship DB Alias Table Map Associate Utilities privileges are required to associate the ACD with an ACL that secures a Utilities object which is created in an editor selected from the Utilities menu For example a Currency Definition Request This class includes the following privileges Calendar Currency Archive File Collection Storage Profile Optim 7 1 D 2 Access Control List D 2 Access Control List Object Ass
230. ator Diagnostic Tool 30 The Optim CD includes several utilities that help you troubleshoot your installation and configuration activities You run these utilities from the Command Line Interface The Image Locator Diagnostic Tool PNOIMAGE EXE is a utility that can aid in locating missing DLLs The syntax of the command follows PNOIMAGE R Ofilespec imagetolocate where R O imagetolocate Is an optional switch that creates a cross reference list of image relationships Is an optional switch that causes the output to be sent to the location referenced by filespec Normally output is sent to STDOUT Is the name of the image to find The name must include the proper extension DLL or EXE If the image is not in the current directory then it must be fully qualified with the proper path information This utility can be used to determine which DLL could not be loaded when the following Optim System error occurs RetCode ExtCode OpsCode PST FAILED 00001 General logic error ENV ERR BADSPGMLOAD 00231 Load of PST SPGM or Th ExtDLL failed Tokenl Token2 specified module could not be found PNODSQ20 PNODSQ20 Optim 7 1 1 3 Troubleshooting Your Installation To resolve the missing DLL in the above example perform the following steps 1 Open a MS DOS window 2 Change to the drive and directory where the Optim software was installed usually C Progr
231. base he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to configure the Data Dictionary The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to access the Data Installation and Configuration Guide 119 5 Configure Workstations 120 Specify a User ID and Password with authority to connect to the master database on the server and click proceed to open the Create Multiple DB Aliases dialog shown and described on page 121 Note For SQL Server the User ID must have database owner dbo privileges to create or select multiple DB Aliases For Sybase ASE and SQL Server you are prompted to share a single copy of the stored procedures lt gt Configure First Workstation Store Procedures in master Optim must use Optim created Procedures to query the System Tables when accessing the databases on this server The Optim Configuration program can store a separate copy of these Procedures in each database instance or it can store a single copy in master for use by all databases on this server o use a single copy of the Procedures for all databases on this server select the Use a Single Copy Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation If you select the check box to share stored procedures you are prompted to convert existing DB Aliases to use the shared procedures Configure First Workstation Convert Existing DB Aliases F DB Aliases exist on this server that use a separate copies of the Optim Pro
232. been modified and encrypt the argument value of each remote procedure call This level of security requires the most overhead and of the available options offers the most protection Update Product Each workstation to connect to the Server must use a Product Configuration Files Configuration File that includes Server endpoint information The Product Configuration File used by a workstation is specified in Personal Options To update Product Configuration Files with new information entered on the Endpoints tab click Update Product Configuration File s Use the Choose Product Configuration File dialog to list Product Configuration Files to update Choose Product Gonfiguration File CATEMP RT BIN PSTRT CFG lolx cannot UNDO changes made to the Product Configuration File s Installation and Configuration Guide 171 6 Configure the Optim Server Enter the name this server will be known to clients Grid Details Update 172 Note Ifa Product Configuration File to be updated is unavailable from the Choose Product Configuration File dialog the file must be updated manually on the corresponding workstation Enter a name for the Server The name you enter is added to the list of available Servers displayed in action request editors that can use a Server for remote processing Product Configuration File Password Edit Update Specify the complete path to each Product Con
233. berts rtinstalled rt sbin opmusign pwd prOsign s Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to your company ld 8 Note Inthe above example the pr0sign s parameter shown on the third line was generated by the signing script to indicate a user supplied script is being signed 4 Type your company credentials when prompted for that information Your company credentials consist of the company Id Name and Password assigned to your organization when you received Optim All three entries are case sensitive and you must enter them in the format provided to you Press Enter after each prompt to display the next prompt After you specify your company Id for example press Enter to display the Name prompt console E cd users roberts rtinstalled rt sbin opmusign pwd prOsign s Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to your company 1d 105499 Name Sample Company Name Password Note The Name assigned to your company may not match the spelling or punctuation used in your company s actual name Installation and Configuration Guide 415 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux opmusign Signing As in Example 1 shut down the Optim Server if it is running and then Example 2 specify the directories explicitly as indicated on the first line of the following example E Console users roberts rtinstalled rt sbin op
234. bject is never imported the Optim Directory will contain ACLs that do not secure an object orphan ACLs If an object is created with a name that matches an orphan ACL that ACL will be associated with the object To import ACLs for secured objects that do not exist in the Optim Directory select this check box To prevent importing ACLs for secured objects that do not exist in the Optim Directory clear the check box Indicate the action taken when the name of an imported security definition matches a definition already in the current Optim Directory e To overwrite existing definitions in the Directory and select any or all security definitions for import select the check box To prevent overwriting security definitions clear the check box Duplicate definitions indicated by check boxes that are shaded and selected are not imported Indicate processing if an error occurs Errors are written to the Security Import Process Log and displayed on the message bar e To continue processing if an error occurs select the check box To halt processing if an error occurs clear the check box Optim 7 1 D 5 Import Security Definitions Owners Tab Use the Owners tab to review or change the owner name of ACLs you want to import Import Security Definitions OF Xx File Tools Options Help a m Process Owners Objects Current Owner New Owner ak gt 3 A
235. bjects on each corresponding tab Compile error Drop Select this check box to automatically drop any Oracle object that causes a compile type error during the Create Process If you clear this check box and compile type errors occur you must interrupt the Create Process to drop the object before continuing This feature applies to Oracle compile type errors that may occur on certain database objects functions packages package bodies procedures triggers and views The Create Process can create these objects but they may not be functional Select this check box to correct possible problems in the Review SQL dialog before performing the Create Process Replace UDTs Select this check box to replace table type column references to User Defined data Types with base column data types in any generated DDL When you clear this check box references to UDTs are preserved Installation and Configuration Guide 295 9 Personal Options DB2 OS 390 Current Rules DB2 Object Name Highlighting Create Tables Tab 296 in generated DDL This check box is available only when you select a DB Alias for a DB2 Sybase ASE or SQL Server database Note Clear this check box if you want UDT references in the generated DDL Select this check box to require the user i e Create and DDL to create and delete LOB tablespaces AUX tables and unique Indexes When you clear this check box DB2 OS 390 automatically creates and deletes L
236. ble can appear more than once in the Table Editor You can switch from Browse Only mode to Browse or Edit mode by unjoining any duplicate tables selecting Preferences from the Tools menu on the Table Editor and selecting Browse or Edit mode Note Ifthe Force Browse Only check box on the Edit tab in Product Options is selected the controls pertaining to editing data are unavailable Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Audit Tables Dialog If you select the Auditing Active check box on the Edit tab click Audit Tables to display the Audit Tables dialog You can specify a Personal Options list of tables to audit Audit Tables ojx Optim Directory fortimore X Be Defaults VV Enabled Days to Retain Maximum Rows 366 IV Write all Columns 1000 4 Note Auditing is available in Personal Options only if the Auditing Status in Product Options is set to Active User Optim Directory Select the Optim Directory associated with the tables to audit If you have access to more than one Optim Directory and want to specify the tables to audit for those directories click the down arrow Audit results are stored in the PSTAUDIT table which is one of the Optim Directory tables created when you install Optim If you are authorized you can browse or edit the PSTAUDIT table in the same way you browse or edit any other database table However Auditing Status in Product Options must be set to Active User and you
237. box click the browse button and select the data source from the Browse for Data Source dialog Click OK to return to the ODBC Attunity Server Setup Extended Properties dialog 7 Select the Single check box and click Finish 546 Optim 7 1 F 4 Thin Client Installation F 4 Thin Client Installation ODM is shipped with ODBC and JDBC Thin Client packages to provide specific scalable alternatives to a full server installation on each desktop These client options provide the flexibility to implement ODM with the desired combination of desktop drivers but without having to set up a full scale Attunity environment Note An Attunity license is not required to install the ODBC or JDBC Thin Client F 4 1 ODBC Thin Client The ODBC Thin Client is required on each machine that uses ODBC to connect to ODM To install the ODBC Thin Client run the ThinODBC_V4800_Win32 zip installation file located in the ODMi install subdirectory of the Optim installation directory Refer to the Attunity ODBC Thin Client Installation and Guide located in the ODM doc subdirectory of the Optim installation directory for more detailed information on installing and using the ODBC Thin Client F 4 2 JDBC Thin Client The JDBC Thin Client is required on each machine that uses JDBC to connect to ODM To install the JDBC Thin Client run the ASTH4820 win32 exe installation file located in the ODM install subdirectory of the Optim installation direct
238. buted with a sample database consisting of several tables CUSTOMERS ORDERS etc These sample tables allow you to experiment while learning how to use Optim and serve as the basis for training Data privacy data tables are available to clients who have an Optim Data Privacy License These tables allow you to mask company and personal data such as employee names customer names social security numbers credit card numbers and e mail addresses to generate transformed data that is both valid and unique Optim Security allows you to secure objects in an Optim Directory to control access to data in Archive Files and to limit the ability of users to create objects or perform functions by assigning access permissions To use Optim Security you must first initialize and enable security for the Optim Directory and assign a Security Administrator The Security Administrator can enable or disable security and establish default security settings for the Optim Directory Most installations create and use one Product Configuration File that establishes Product Options for your site As part of this step you can modify the Product Options maintained in the file and edit Personal Options for the workstation You can edit Product and Personal Options from within Optim although it is a good idea to establish the directories to store work and temporary files during the configuration process These directories are personal in nature and most use
239. cedures Create Multiple DB Aliases ioj x Optim ptim must use Optim created Procedures to access the System Tables For each jatabase that you want to access The Optim Configuration program can create new rocedures or it can use Procedures created for another Optim Directory for that Jatabase Select the databases to be accessed then specify whether to create or use xj he evicting Procedures Databases Logon Defaults Saved Logon Defaults Stored Procedure Defaults Stored Procedure Specifications jalifier Grant Auth ID loptusr1 PUBLIC T Display SQL Previous Proceed Skip Undo Cancel IMS SOL Server SQLOPT gs_ 7 Note The default stored procedure information applies to all DB Aliases unless you provide explicit stored procedure information on the Databases tab When you enter the necessary information on each tab and click Proceed the Configuration program connects to the database catalogs the stored procedures writes the registry entries and optionally creates primary keys These four steps are repeated automatically for each selected database When complete the next step is to configure security Installation and Configuration Guide 127 5 Configure Workstations 5 1 4 Optim Security Optim Security includes three features Archive File Security Functional Security and Object Security For more information about these security features see Appendix D Opt
240. cedures the Optim en you select this option the existing Optim Procedure s will be dropped from their respective abase instance s and the Procedure qualifier s will be changed accordingly To convert existing DB E Click proceed to open the Create Multiple DB Aliases dialog and enter the database information Create Multiple DB Aliases Optim must use Optim created Procedures to access the System Tables for each database that you Installation and Configuration Guide 121 5 Configure Workstations 122 The Create Multiple DB Aliases dialog includes the following tabs Databases Logon Defaults Saved Logon Defaults Stored Procedure Defaults A list of all databases that reside on the server Enter explicit information for each database for which you want to create a DB Alias Enter default User ID and Password required to create or refresh stored procedures for each DB Alias In some cases this logon may have greater privileges than the Saved Logon Defaults Enter the User ID and Password required to access the database This information is saved to the Windows registry for the workstation being configured Enter the default Procedure Qualifier and Grant Authorization ID required to create refresh stored procedures Note The default values apply to all databases unless otherwise specified on the Databases tab Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Databases Tab Sel Dat
241. cess Optim from the workstation you are using Note If Optim is already installed on your network and you want to access it from the workstation you are using select the option to install Windows Registry Entries and Shortcuts Only To continue click Next 40 Optim 7 1 2 1 Run Setup 2 1 4 Choose Destination Location The Optim software must be installed in a destination directory folder When the Choose Destination Location dialog opens a default Destination Folder is specified If this folder does not exist Setup creates it as part of the installation process IBM Optim Setup Eg Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files Setup will install Optim in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder Files IBM Optim Browse InstallShield lt Back Carcel Destination Displays the full default directory path for installing Folder Optim To change this path click Browse During installation Setup creates subordinate folders such as RT Bin within this directory Note If you are running Setup for a workstation with the Optim software on a file server you must specify a Directory Folder on the server where the software is installed Browse Opens the Choose Folder dialog where you can select a different folder for installing Optim To continue
242. cle and DB2 z OS Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Default Database Use default database Default Use default tablespace Allocation Percent Create Indexes Tab Enter the name of the default database for creating tables To select from a list click the down arrow This option is available only if you are using DB2 z OS A single DB Alias in Optim can identify more than one database in DB2 z OS Select this check box to use the default database for creating tables If you clear this check box the Create Utility attempts to use the source database from the Source File However if the source database does not exist on the target system the Create Utility uses the default database Enter the name of the default tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace for creating tables To select from a list click the down arrow If you select lt Default gt the default set in the database is used Select this check box to use the default tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace for creating tables If you clear this check box the Create Utility attempts to use the tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace in the Source File However if the source does not exist on the target system the Create Utility uses the default Enter a percent 0 to 999 to adjust SQL storage related parameters for the Create Utility The default is 100 Allocation percent is available for creating tables and indexes in Oracle and creating in
243. click in a grid cell and select Test Connection from the shortcut menu A message displays in the Status bar at the bottom of the dialog indicating the success or failure of the test If you selected the Always Ask For Password check box you are prompted to enter the password 9 2 9 Server Tab Use the Server tab to provide credentials that may be used when the optional Server is enabled and tasks are delegated to the Server The Installation and Configuration Guide 305 9 Personal Options Server can be configured to use these credentials for access to the Optim Directory certain DB Aliases or the working files Personal Options Server Select the name of the Server for which to enter User ID Password and Domain information Click the down arrow to select from the list of Servers configured in Product Options or select Default to use the same information for all Servers User ID Enter the User ID used by the Server when performing tasks Note The User ID must have SeBatchLogonRight privileges or be a member of a well known group with the appropriate authority This privilege must be granted at the local level for each Server machine Password Enter the password corresponding to the specified User ID Domain Enter the Domain name used to run actions remotely or for remote input output files Always Ask for Select to display the Server Logon dialog whenever the Server is used Password for remote processi
244. commands s es 517 Report Type ascsssientaiscccatatindicctavtoiais STF Sec rity Report asscisasnensiecaware 517 Report tab Product Options 276 277 blank lines between levels Att blank lines between rows 006 276 character column width 6 276 indent subordinate tables 217 line leneth seerste 276 IMCS per PAGE caraddcioneewdiocavretiicasarerscic 276 minimum spaces between columns 277 TOWS per table oo ceceseeseeeeeeeeeeeees 276 ReSet MeSSaces lt nivivsassiteneeeseiteinuaeline 289 Restore Processing Secured MES sisson 478 S Sample 622 Column Map exits cee 599 600 Column Map procedures 601 603 Database Tables loadin sorpena 8 112 database tables description 2 0 0 588 598 SIrUCIUTE araea 588 Oxtract TilCS Saraan 603 ICL file snaa 603 Scheduling Monitor directory path Tor scssissceciincavaiinns 292 start immediately ceeeeeeeeeees 293 Startup OPtiONS saradan 292 Scheduling tab Personal Options 292 293 Secured files serani ee 478 Security Administrator Optim Security 128 Security Report CAC PING aereete ce eer er erent errerrre er cere 513 CESCHIPUON scrcdrirs meen ea 511 Editing sasra 515 PIOCESSING goitar ankran 523 EE a T a E E AE E TEE 523 Schedule gasii asa 523 Segment MAINS eera 318 SIZO a aula stapiartes eta satis 317 Server Authorizations ccceccesceeseet
245. cord audit information as follows Record an image of all columns in an inserted row Record an image of the primary key column in a deleted row If there is no primary key record an image of all columns Record an image of the primary key columns and any changed columns in an updated row Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor Example Default specifications are propagated to new entries in the list of tables and can be useful when building the list For example if your database includes 100 tables and you want to retain audit information for fifty tables for a period of 90 days information for thirty tables for a period of 1 year information for 5 tables for an indefinite period and do not want to audit processes on the remaining 15 tables build the list of audit instructions in the following way Clear Enabled Enter in the grid names of the 15 tables that are not audited select from a list or type names or patterns Status is Disabled for each entry 3 Select Enabled and set Days to Retain to 0 4 Enter in the grid names of the five tables for which audit information is retained indefinitely select from a list or type names or patterns Status is Enabled and Days to Retain is 0 for the 5 new entries 5 Set Days to Retain to 365 6 Enter names of the thirty tables in the grid select from a list or type names or patterns Status is Enabled and Days to Retain is 365 for the 30 new ent
246. create as many Optim Directories as needed to satisfy your site requirements The configuration phase consists of configuring the first workstation configuring each additional workstation and if licensed configuring the Server component Configure the First Workstation allows you to confirm the Product License Key and create the components shared by all workstations For example only one Optim Directory and one Product Configuration File are needed although you may have more than one of each Typically all users share one Product Configuration File which provides the Product Option settings for your site e Configure Additional Workstation allows you to configure each workstation to share components created when the first workstation was configured You may also specify Personal Option settings for each workstation that are recorded in the Windows registry e Configure the Server on one or more Windows Solaris HP UX or AIX machines Configure First Workstation Product License Key Several steps are involved in configuring the first workstation Each step is briefly described in the following paragraphs Note Before you configure a workstation to use Optim the DBMS client software must be installed and you must define the information necessary to connect to the database You must configure the DBMS client software on each workstation to permit access to individual database instances The 30 character Product License
247. ct Configuration File for the workstation The configuration process opens the Specify Product Configuration File dialog Note Ifyou decide to install Optim on a server or on each workstation all workstations can use one Product Configuration File located on the server You create the Product Configuration File when you configure Product Options for the first workstation Therefore when you configure an additional workstation select Use Existing File and specify the fully qualified name of the original Product Configuration File on the Specify Product Configuration File dialog For more complete information refer to 5 1 5 Configure Options Installation and Configuration Guide 149 5 Configure Workstations 5 2 7 Summary 150 The tasks for Configuring an Additional Workstation are complete e Import registry data or create a Windows registry entry for the workstation to access the Optim Directory e Identify a Product Configuration File for the workstation You must repeat these steps for each workstation you want to use with Optim After you configure the first workstation and any additional workstations you are ready to configure the Server component if licensed for it and carry out the other tasks available from the Tasks menu The following chapters describe how to configure the Server and perform other tasks Optim 7 1 6 Configure the Optim Server The Server option allows users to define tasks on a work
248. ct Name support Archive Files created on Optim z OS Solution a platform that supports long named objects can be used with Optim on distributed systems If an object in the file has a name that exceeds the Optim maximum the name is truncated and displays suffixed with _TRUNC_ For sites using SQL Server or DB2 database management systems Optim now supports database relationships with names up to a length of 128 bytes Litigation Hold You can use Optim s Litigation Hold to protect information in an Archive File for legal inquiry or investigation Litigation Hold prevents deletion of the file and supersedes any retention setting This option is available from the Archive Directory Maintenance dialog for files stored on the Hitachi Content Archive Platform or a Centera backup device Data Privacy Enhancements Optim Data Privacy features now include the Shuffle function Shuffle takes a column value and replaces it with a value for the same column from a different row You can use Shuffle for a single column or multiple columns Modifications have been made to the syntax of the Lookup Hash Lookup and Random Lookup functions Data Privacy functions are now licensed separately Installation Enhancements When configuring Optim steps to create a PST directory or DB alias have been reworked to make these processes easier to use You can now use a task on the configuration menu to drop load or refresh data privacy tables or data
249. cter Company ID IBM a ent this information to you via email or mail You must specify Company Information hen you first install Optim To change Company infomation select the Company ption From the Options menu on the Optim Configuration window m Company Information Name ID ee a Company Name was not specified Provide your Company Name and ID that came with your License Key Contact IBM Optim support for a trial key if you do not have one If this dialog displays you must specify your company Name and ID and click OK to proceed with the signing process Both entries are case sensitive and you must enter both entries in the format provided to you when you received Optim 60 Optim 7 1 4 Configuration Window and Menus This chapter describes the main window for the Optim Configuration program and certain general configuration functions The principal configuration tasks are described in the following chapters Note Before you do any configuration functions you must sign the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit of your own creation You cannot continue with the Configuration process or use Optim until you sign a valid exit using the Sign Optim Exit dialog as described in Chapter 3 Signing an Optim Exit DBMS Terms Optim supports several database management systems Terms used in a configuration dialog reflect the DBMS for the database that is being configured For example for an Oracle dat
250. ctory opt IBM Optim or if the Server will be run under a user account other than root The script contains areas that allow you to modify the following environment variables e Set PSTHOME PSTHOME directory rt to define the directory containing the Server Installation and Configuration Guide 387 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux Set PSTUSER PSTUSER user to identify a user other than root Arguments RTSERVER arguments define the operation to be performed as follows rtserver start rtserver stop rtserver kill rtserver update rtserver list rtserver verify server rtserver verify local 388 Start the Server in the background The stdout and stderr produced by the Server are written to a file named prOsvce out which can be found in the temp directory that is subordinate to the Optim installation directory Stop a running Server instance The Server stops after processes are complete Kill a running Server instance The Server stops abruptly without regard to running processes Re read the Pstserv configuration file after processes have completed Use this command to effect changes to the configuration file without restarting the Server List all processes running on the Server The list includes the PID of the process the name of the computer delegating the process the Optim Directory that is active for the process the type of process archive
251. ctory objects The Conversion Process consists of three steps which must be completed in the order listed 1 Create a new Optim Directory This step can be completed prior to running the Conversion Process if desired using commands available from the Tasks menu Installation and Configuration Guide 565 Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects Version 6 0 6 1 PST Directories on SQL Server 566 Note If you create a new Directory before using the Conversion Process note the following If Object Security is applied to a 6 0 Directory before you convert 5 x objects you can automatically secure converted objects Automatically securing objects may be more convenient than securing each object manually For more information see Automatically Associate an Object with an ACL on page 469 e If Functional Security is enabled for the 6 0 Directory you must have the create privilege for the objects you are converting For more information see Functional Privileges Tab on page 458 2 Export objects from the old PST Directory to an Export File 3 Import objects from the Export File to the new Optim Directory You can complete this step from any workstation having access to the new Optim Directory and Export File If you have upgraded your DBMS or if imported DB Aliases reference a DBMS version that is no longer supported by Optim you must run the Update the DBMS Version for a DB Alias configuration task af
252. d Shortcut Menu Right click the grid to display the following shortcut menu commands Commands Remove Remove the selected role from the ACL Remove All Remove all roles from the ACL Allow All Allow all Object Access ACL Access or both to the role Deny All Deny all Object Access ACL Access or both to the role Installation and Configuration Guide 473 Appendix D Optim Security Command Buttons 474 Clear All Allowed For the role clear all Allow check boxes for Clear All Denied Object Access ACL Access or both For the role clear all Deny check boxes for Object Access ACL Access or both Right click the grid column for an action to display the following shortcut menu commands Allow All action Access Allow access to all roles for the selected action Clear All action Access Clear all Allow and Deny check boxes for all roles for the selected action Deny All action Access Deny access to all roles for the selected action The following command buttons are available on the Access Control List Editor Change Owner Model After Open the Security Users dialog to assign ACL ownership to another user account Available to user accounts permitted to update the ACL who are also the ACL owner or the Security Administrator for the Optim Directory For more information about this dialog see Security Users Note Change Owner is not available for the Default ACL and the Optim Object Template ACL
253. d ACL select the appropriate check boxes 3 Click OK to save the ACL and redisplay the object editor These steps are the minimum required to create or edit an ACL Refer to the following for complete details Optim 7 1 D 2 Access Control List D 2 1 Access Control List Editor Description Owner Access Control Domain Object Type Use the Access Control List Editor to define access permissions for an object and the associated ACL OTHER Access Control List Editor olx Description Owner IBMOPTIM DOM opt Access Control Domain Object Type OTHER Access Control Domain Model After ACL Access Read Update Pfa Change Owner Object Access Update Delete A KI Delete Tech Writers ES Vv JE CLC oe 7 alow we fa GL won TE eT Ee E Cancel Print Help Note Access permissions in the ACL determine the options and actions that are available to you For example the Remove shortcut menu options are not available to roles limited to read access Enter text that describes the ACL up to 40 characters The user account with all access rights to the ACL The owner can always read update or delete the ACL even if the account is included in a role that is denied access to these actions To change the owner click Change Owner Note The Security Administrator is the owner of the Default ACL and Optim
254. d If it is check for the table name on the Personal Options list in the Audit Tables dialog e Ifthe table is on the list and Enabled the table is audited based on the default specifications in Product Options e Ifthe table is on the list and Disabled the table is not audited If the table is not on either list and the Enabled check box under Auditing Defaults in Product Options is selected the table is audited The audit feature is disabled and the table is not audited 267 8 Product Options 8 2 6 Servers Tab Server Name Supported Protocols all NetBIOS over TCP ncacn_nb_tcp 268 When a task requires the movement processing or storage of very large volumes of data the request can be defined at a workstation in the normal way then directed for remote processing on a machine hosting the Server If a workstation on your network is configured as a Server you must provide the appropriate communication protocols so that other workstations can transfer process requests to it Use the Servers tab to specify communication parameters for any Servers on your network Product Options Of x General Database Configuration File Password Edit Servers archive Load Report Protocol Endpoint Network Address 4 ria IOK gt i TCPAP neacn_ip_te 1024 172 16 8 125 Undo Cancel Apply Help A Enter the name of each Server that is the name given each Ser
255. d the node name is displayed in Domain and in the Users grid Users A list of user accounts by Name with Domain and a Description Installation and Configuration Guide 475 Appendix D Optim Security Select Access Control List Model To model an ACL after the ACL for another security definition or Optim object click Model After to open the Select Access Control List Model dialog Select Access Control List Model ioj x Object Name Object Type TEST2 Access Control Domain Use As Model Optim Object Template ACL Existing Access Control List Type Name Access Control Domain 7 TEST EJ OK Cancel Set as Detaut Help Ready Z To select an ACL as a model enter the object Type and Name To apply the ACL for the selected object as a model click OK The roles and permissions from the model are then displayed in the Access Control List Editor Object Name Name of the object with the model ACL Object Type Type of object with the model ACL Use As Model Select an ACL to use as a model using the following Optim Object Option to use the Optim Object Template ACL as Template ACL the model Existing Access Option to use the ACL as the model Type and Control List Name Type Select the object type associated with the model ACL 476 Optim 7 1 D 2 Access Control List Name Type or select the object name associated with the model ACL You can also use the Name browse button to open
256. d for DB Alias access Valid entries are client User ID and Password for the delegating client i e from the Server tab in Personal Options or USERID and PASSWORD from the command line Default server User ID and Password provided with dbalias keyword dbaliaslogon client delfileinterval The interval in minutes for deleting Archive Files with an expired retention period after being recalled from secondary media n A value from 0 to 300 Specify 0 to prevent the deletion of recalled files 10 Default setting delfileinterval 10 filelogon The source of User ID and Password for file access Valid entries are local User ID and Password used to start prOsvce Default client DBMS User ID and Password for the delegating client i e from the Server tab in Personal Options or the server parameter in pstlocal cfg server userid The provided User ID and Password apply for all password delegated processes Specify as the password when a secure password is supplied in a password file See A 4 2 Securing the Configuration Files for more information 364 Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration Note If client or server keyword is used the prOsvce daemon must be started under root authority filelogon local filemode Access permissions for Extract Archive and Control Files Use any combination of the following ALL Read and Write permission for all users RUSR Read Permission for User RGRP Read Permission for
257. d if the account allows it a prompt will confirm that you want to connect without entering a password Click this button to send a test email to your mailbox Note Itis recommended that you send a test email to ensure that the information you entered is sufficient to send an email If you Installation and Configuration Guide 181 6 Configure the Optim Server do not receive the test email make the necessary corrections to the information you entered 6 13 Conclusion After you configure the first workstation any additional workstations and any Servers you are ready to start using Optim Note If you make changes to the configuration of a Server while it is running click Apply then stop and start the Server to effect the changes The remaining sections explain how to use the various other commands available from the Tasks menu of the Configuration program 182 Optim 7 1 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks After you configure the first and any additional workstations you are ready to start using Optim However periodically it may be necessary to perform other tasks that are available from the Tasks menu Optim Configuration File Tasks Options Help Pro For example to expand the number of databases you can create or N Configure the First Workstation Configure Additional Workstation Create Update DB Alias Create Update Optim Directory Access Existing Optim Directory Configur
258. d to load the sample database tables This software is distributed with sample data tables You can use these tables for training and to experiment with sample data before applying the software to your own database tables Generally the sample data is loaded when you configure the first workstation but you also can load or refresh that data by selecting Load Drop Sample Data from the Tasks menu The Load Drop Sample Tables dialog allows you to provide the identifier Creator ID Schema or Owner ID and tablespace for the sample tables before they are loaded E Configure First Workstation Load Drop Sample Tables Load Refresh Sample Tables Drop Sample Tables Table Specifications Schema Name Tablespace fl lt 08 Default gt z I Display SQL Previous _Proceea stp undo cane The Load Drop Sample Tables dialog displays the following DB Alias for sample tables If you do not want to load sample tables for this DB Alias click Skip Select this option to load or refresh sample tables This option is available and selected when Load Drop Sample Table opens Select this option to drop previously loaded sample tables This option is unavailable when not applicable such as when you are initially loading those tables Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Sample Table Schema Name Enter an identifier for the sample tables This Specifications element is labeled Creator ID for DB2
259. datadir archivediridx directory archivedir archivebroidx directory archivedir tracedays n 5 server name address port userid password domain localrtserver name pstdir name dbmstype dbmsver dbqual connectstring dbname userid password dbalias pstdir name connectstring userid password loader pstdir dbalias dbmstype pathtoloader excptntblcid allowlocktbls 0 1 cmmaxshuffleretries n 10 codepage codepgenum db2default dbconnections 0 1n 1 maximum formatnumerics 0 1 maxcommitfreq n 200 maxextractrows n 100000 onlyidxsearch 0 1 orausearraydelete 0 1 reviewdelafterarchive 0 1 reportdir directory unixtempdir reportlevel 0 7 centeraallowaltret 0 1 centeraavail 0 1 centeraretention none default interval infinite Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration centeradays 0 7 centerayears 0 n networkeravail 0 1 tivoliavail 0 1 userid password rmfixedsegsize 0 7 J rmremsegsize 10 7 scriptmaxlines 500 7 scriptprefixout 0 1 scriptshowfullcol 0 144 1 nrn scriptshowfulltb 0 144 1 nrn scriptwarnmissing 0 1 wormdeviceallowaltret 0 1 wormdeviceretention none interval maximum
260. dditional Workstation Specify Optim Directory workstation must have a Registry entry for the Optim Directory it accesses To create his Registry entry the Optim Configuration program prompts you For information equired to access the existing Optim Directory on the Following windows Click lt Proceed gt to continue xj M Optim Directory Specification Create ptim Directory and Registry Entry Create New Registry Entry for Existing Optim Directory isting Optim Directory and Registry Entry The only option available when configuring an additional workstation is selected when the dialog opens To Create New Registry Entry for Existing Optim Directory click Proceed Installation and Configuration Guide 143 5 Configure Workstations Specify Optim The next step in creating the Windows registry entry is to Specify Directory DBMS Optim Directory DBMS Configure Additional Workstation Specify Optim Directory DBMS _ OF x Optim he Optim Configuration program requires the DBMS type and version for the database ontaining the Optim Directory Tables Select the DBMS type and version for the Jatabase then click lt Proceed gt Note Support for some of the listed DBMS versions ay have been discontinued by the vendor a DBMS Specifications Optim Directory Description Type Version orade 7 fai Release 2 9 2 x Previous Proceed _ Undo Canc
261. default name OPTIMDIR is shown You can use this name or enter a different name for the new Optim Directory 1 to 12 characters no embedded blanks e Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry Select this option if you are updating or continuing the configuration of the first workstation This option is available after an Optim Directory and Windows registry entry are created You must enter the name of the existing Optim Directory to use Installation and Configuration Guide 79 5 Configure Workstations Specify Optim Directory DBMS DBMS Specifications 80 Before you can create Optim Directory tables the database instance for the Optim Directory must exist that is it must be configured under a database management system To create an Optim Directory you must identify the DBMS type and version on the Specify Optim Directory DBMS dialog Configure First Workstation Specify Optim Directory DBMS _ OF x Optim he Optim Configuration program can store the Optim Directory Tables in an existing Jatabase To create the Optim Directory Tables select the DBMS type and version for he database then click lt Proceed gt Note Support for some of the listed DBMS ersions may have been discontinued by the vendor z DBMS Specifications Optim Directory Description Type Version Joracle 7 fai Release 2 9 2 x Previous Proceed _ Undo Cancel A When this dialog opens
262. den in the Table Name Pattern list For example if a table or pattern is listed and Disabled status is specified the table is not audited Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor Write All Columns Days to Retain Maximum Rows Select to record information for a columns in updated deleted or inserted rows unless overridden in the Table Name Pattern list If you clear this check box audit information is recorded for changed columns inserted rows and tables that do not have a primary key Specify the maximum number of days 0 to 999 to retain Audit information unless overridden in the Table Name Pattern list Audit information is purged automatically after the specified number of days elapse Specify zero 0 or leave blank to retain Audit information indefinitely Specify the maximum number of audited rows 0 to 999999 to retain for each database table unless overridden in the Table Name Pattern list The oldest rows are deleted to create space to accept new rows Specify zero 0 or leave blank to retain an unlimited number Table Name Pattern Tables for which table specific audit parameters apply If you select the List Active User option for auditing database tables the Product Options list supersedes any list users may specify in Personal Options Table Name Pattern Status Installation and Configuration Guide Specify the fully qualified name of the database table or a pattern that identifies the database
263. derr streams to outfilename appending stderr to stdout Cancel client s processes clientid Specify client name or client process ID or the word ALL idl Provide process ID User ID or endpoint to identify prOsvce or leave blank to cancel clients for all daemons started under the logged on account Validate the contents of a configuration file and exits configuration Valid configuration file name If file name you do not provide a configuration file name the normal server is validated Optim 7 1 A 3 Maintenance and Performance A 3 2 Temporary Files You must shut down all Optim processes before deleting the following files in the tmp directory e Directories with names beginning with Mw _ or closed within those directories or files whether open e Files whether open or closed with names beginning with Mw e Files whether open or closed with names beginning with regss Optim requires that these files not be deleted while any Optim process for example prOsvce prOcmnd etc is running Even though some of these files are of type s they may be safely deleted after all Optim processes are shut down In addition you must shut down all Optim processes before killing watchdog mwrpcss or regss and before stopping mwadm Optim writes log and error files to the tmp softech directory during installation These files may contain diagnostic information should the setup progr
264. describes or explains the purpose of the Optim Directory User ID Identifier up to 30 characters that the DBMS requires to permit access to the Optim Directory You can modify this entry Password Password 1 to 30 characters that corresponds to the specified User ID You can modify this entry The database administrator usually defines User IDs and passwords This password is used only by the DBMS Sybase ASE and SQL Server passwords are case sensitive Optim 7 1 5 2 Configure Additional Workstation Connection String or name that permits a workstation to access String the database The DBMS uses this connection string to recognize the database You can modify this entry e For some database management systems it is possible to define a different Connection String for each workstation to access the same database e For Sybase ASE and SQL Server the Connection String refers to the network name of the computer where the database resides 5 2 2 Create Registry Entry If you elect not to import Optim Directory registry data you must create a new registry entry for each workstation to use the Optim Directory You must identify the Optim Directory and the associated DBMS and provide information to connect to the database Specify Optim The opening dialog for configuring an additional workstation is the Directory Specify Optim Directory dialog Use this dialog to create a Windows registry entry Configure A
265. deviceyears settings or overriding Storage Profile settings for minimum WORM device retention The retention interval cannot exceed the WORM device maximum date of 01 17 2071 maximum The WORM device maximum retention date 01 17 2071 applies wormdeviceretention none wormdevicedays The number of days to retain an Archive File copied to a WORM device This value and the wormdeviceyears value determine the retention period when the wormdeviceretention parameter or overriding Storage Profile setting indicates an interval for WORM device file retention 0 Default The file can be deleted from the WORM device at any time n Number of days up to 999 to retain the file wormdevicedays 60 wormdeviceyears The number of years to retain an Archive File copied to a WORM device This value and the wormdevicedays value determine the retention period when the wormdeviceretention parameter or overriding Storage Profile setting indicates an interval for WORM device file retention 0 Default The file can be deleted from the WORM device at any time n Number of years to retain the file Installation and Configuration Guide 383 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 384 sybaseunchain uncommittedread wormdeviceyears 20 Optim normally runs in chained mode However the connection must be in unchained mode to accommodate a Sybase ASE stored procedure that runs in unchained mode if the stored procedure wi
266. dexes in DB2 z OS Target SQL is generated based on the values of the objects in a Source File If you specify zero 0 the storage related clause in the SQL statement is omitted Using any value other than zero results in a percentage of the source value being used in the target clause Use the Indexes tab to select a default identifier for creating new indexes Specify an allocation percent to adjust SQL storage related parameters for Oracle and DB2 z OS Specify the default tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace for creating indexes Installation and Configuration Guide 297 9 Personal Options Identifier Allocation Percent 298 Personal Options iof x Create Logon Server edit_4 gt ems p sue S Specify the default identifier for new indexes based on the identifier from one of the following Table Use the identifier from a corresponding target table as the default for new indexes Source Use the identifier from the source index as the default for new indexes Current ID Use the current SQLID User ID as the default for new indexes Explicit Use an explicit identifier as the default for new indexes If you select this option you must specify an explicit identifier 1 to 64 characters To select from a list click the browse button Enter a percent 0 to 999 to adjust SQL storage related parameters for the Create Utility The default is 100 Allocation percent is available for creatin
267. different Optim Directory or DB Alias If selected the Password and Verify entries are not required If you clear the check box the logon dialog appears the first time you access a different Optim Directory or DB Alias After you provide a password for an Optim Directory or DB Alias it is not necessary to provide a password again This check box also appears on the Logon dialog Password Enter a password 1 to 30 characters that allows you to access a particular database using the specified DB Alias For security reasons your password displays as a series of asterisks For versions of DB2 earlier than 6 1 passwords are limited to 8 characters Verify Enter the password again for verification For security reasons your password displays as a series of asterisks Connection Connection string used by Optim to access a particular String database using the specified DB Alias Always Fail Select to automatically cancel the logon prompt for a Connection DB Alias that you are not authorized to access or that you choose not to access If you clear this check box a logon dialog displays any time you do not have immediate access to a particular DB Alias You cannot modify the check box associated with the Optim Directory Description Text that describes the purpose of the logon record Test the You can test the DB Alias connection to verify the validity of the DB Connection Alias logon information To perform the test right
268. dify the ACL Del Delete the ACL Optim 7 1 Appendix F Open Data Manager Deployment Strategy Optim Open Data Manager ODM provides access to data in Optim Archive Files for programs that use the Open Data Base Connectivity ODBC and Java Data Base Connectivity JDBC Application Programming Interfaces APIs You can use ODM on the same Windows Solaris AIX HP UX and Linux platforms that are supported by Optim Optim must be installed prior to installing ODM however ODM can be installed during the Optim installation process ODM is implemented using the Attunity Connect product in concert with a custom driver that provides access to Archive Files and Archive File Collections Attunity Connect is a rich peer to peer networking product A full set of Attunity manuals is included with ODM This appendix describes how to install configure and use ODM to provide access to Archive Files To be accessed using ODM Archive File s must be registered in an Optim Directory and be accessible from the ODM Server on which the data source is defined A primary ODM Server resides on an Optim Server machine with one or more ODM data sources for Archive Files or Archive File Collections If JDBC is the sole API used to access archived data a direct connection is made to the primary ODM Server however you must install the Attunity Server Thin Client on each Windows workstation that will use JDBC to access archived data If ODBC is used
269. dirl pstdir2 archiveretentionpolicy 03 00 pstdir3 pstdir4 centeraavail Use Centera with the Archive Retention Policy 0 or blank Do not delete backup files on Centera Default 1 Delete backup files on Centera centeraavail true tivoliavail Use Tivoli with the Archive Retention Policy To use a Tivoli device you must install the Tivoli client and API support on the machine where the Optim Server runs 0 or blank Do not delete backup files on Tivoli Default 1 Delete backup files on Tivoli nodename Identifier to access the Tivoli device Installation and Configuration Guide 369 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux password Password to access the Tivoli device A 2 2 Pstlocal Configuration File for the Command Line Utility 370 Unless a Command Line or ODBC process is specifically directed to a Server the process is executed locally and the settings in pstserv cfg do not apply Use the pstlocal configuration file to provide settings for these local processes An example of pstlocal cfg is in the etc subdirectory to the PSTHOME directory Before using ODBC or the Command Line Utility modify the following parameters to reflect your requirements as applicable In the following syntax defaults are shown in bold text customerid n 000000 customername name xxxxxxx license license key 000000 tempdir directory datadir directory archivedir directory
270. dows Locale is LCID 1033 409 Code Page 1252 4E4 RT Server requests can run on or from a UNIX system that has these locales or their derived locales installed c en_US ISO8859 1 Optim supports storing data in single byte ASCII Unicode and multi byte character sets The default character set is single byte When you create an Optim Directory or DB Alias using a database for which Optim supports Unicode or multi byte characters you are prompted to indicate the character format used for storing data To use DB Aliases with different character sets the Optim Directory must be in Unicode format If you indicate that the DB Alias for the Optim Directory database should share connection information with the Optim Directory the DB Alias must use the same character set as the Directory The Optim Directory and DB Aliases can be configured to support universal character encoding Unicode if character data in your Unicode enabled database is kept in Unicode format Optim supports the Unicode character set for Oracle Sybase ASE Microsoft SQL Server DB2 LUW and DB2 z OS databases Optim 7 1 1 2 Planning for Installation and Configuration If Optim processes data in a Unicode enabled database the Optim Directory must also be in a Unicode enabled database and the Optim Directory and DB Aliases for Unicode enabled databases must be flagged during the configuration process Oracle Unicode enabled Oracle database servers commonly
271. duced tanta doldtetidpiduteticeaniea takdosersenss 7 create drop packages sses 99 CLedte SClECE ssisahiisseasimdieacennnneds 96 create update oo eececeeeeteeeeees 96 185 create update another cece 117 description OF krissiee 94 maintain ACCESS siisissssissesirtisirassaris 205 PULOING kissirt iir ERRI 244 share connection information 102 specify DBMS for sesssesseeseeesreee 97 DB2 bind drop plans for DB Alias prnsinennrmenea 99 for Optim Directory seee 87 Z OS Buffer Pool sisiisirresrissesaas 299 DBMS type and VErSION sais soi saccdesadcsesiyniieiaviesay 7 Default Directories ATCHIVE gissiiieteniotabuaieneanioemennes 315 316 Archive Browse Index Directory 316 Archive Index Directory s es 315 Data Directory stnssriscrantnrctsaeitex 285 617 Index for DBMS loaders ccccceseees 293 Product Configuration File 285 Schedullin p gc c53 viaeevadatiarecedines 292 Temporary Work cccecceeceseeeeeees 285 Trace Piles gxckcocastuedaezcaincenntiareaanee 285 Delete Processing Secured fileren 478 Display tab Personal Options 287 289 column delimiters 0c ceeeeeeeee 287 Large ODeCtS enoe 289 main Window s sessssesesseeessresrrsesrrsesee e 288 maximum fetch rows sssssssssssessessee 287 maximum File menu entries 288 maximum history entries 6 287 menu behavior c cccceceeeteeseeteeee
272. duct Configuration File additional workstations 0 006 140 configure workstations eeeee 149 Toi ger BUC ee reer errerrer rer er ear Mer meme ere meee enrT er 8 identify CXiStinG sssaaa 9 set default directory c cece 285 set default path foro eee 257 switch configuration files 0 02 258 Product License Key eSCription Of jucsc zstescndabelanesseeaccntanieas 7 EXP T NE suzara nE 8 for additional workstations 141 for first workstation c cecceceeteeeees 6 for your COMPANY eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 78 Product Options cceseeteeeeeeees 245 277 ALCHIVE AE E A E A E TS 270 621 Index configuration file ccecceceseereeees 257 CON OUTING siara 246 database defaults 00 0 eects 252 DBMS Loaders o eeceeccecceecsereeeeeeees 274 editing data serso 259 PASS WOU ot 258 TOPOL soosinud nS 276 SELVES cis si hapie fue e 268 set general defaults 0 0 0 0 cece 249 PST Directory Objects converting 565 582 Purge DB Alias eraann 244 Optimi Directory sssmssnrasns 243 R README Tle nerean 46 Registry Data CXPOTE TNE sieis p 137 from first workstation 0 0 0 0 137 importing data sessirnir 142 Removable Media Personal Options 317 318 default segment sizes ceeeee 318 Replace UDTs Personal Option 296 Report Request Editor cee 511 526 Email notification ccceeeeeeeee 522 menu
273. dures are stored in the special Sybase ASE database sybsysprocs For SQL Server stored procedures are stored in the MASTER database Microsoft SQL Server documentation contains a cautionary statement about creating stored procedures in the MASTER database Consider the implications of sharing stored procedures for SQL Server before proceeding FALSE Stored Procedures are not OFF or NO shared DESCRIPTION Optional description for DB Alias TASK DB description 1 to 40 characters delimited by double quotation marks UNICODEDB Store Optim Directory data in Unicode format TRUE or ON Store data in Unicode format FALSE or Do not store data in OFF Unicode format MULTIBYTEDB Use multibyte encoding for the DB Alias TRUE or ON Use multibyte encoding 436 Optim 7 1 C 1 Syntax and Keywords FALSE or Do not use multibyte OFF encoding Optim Directory or The following keywords are interchangeable and are not DBMS DB Alias dependent SPACTION Indicator for Optim Stored Procedures BINDACTION or Optim Bind Files CreateNew Create new Stored Procedures or Bind Files UseExisting Use previously loaded Stored Procedures or Bind Files SPQUALIFIER name Schema Name or Owner COLLECTIONNAME ID of the Stored Procedures or Plan Name of the Bind Files Task The TASK keyword identifies the task to be performed If a task is entered on the command line you must provide the parame
274. dy in the current Optim Directory To select any or all objects and overwrite the existing definitions in the Directory select the check box To prevent overwriting objects clear the check box Optim 7 1 G 1 Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories Run Import There are two ways to run the Import Process e Ifyou want to import all selected objects at one time i e in one import process click Next e Ifyou want to import a group of objects in one import process and import another group in a separate import process click Import Each time you click Import the objects selected in the Optim Definitions list are processed but the Import dialog remains displayed so you can select the next group of objects you want to import For example if you want to import all Access Definitions in one import process import all Table Maps in another import process and import all Calendars in a third import process do the following 1 Select the Access Definitions you want to import in the Optim Definitions list and then click Import After the selected Access Definitions are processed select the Table Maps you want to import and click Import again After the selected Table Maps are processed select the Calendars you want to import and click Import a third time Alternatively you can click Next when you are ready to process the last group of objects you want to import as discussed in the Note following step 4
275. e Create Select Multiple For a Single DB Server Sybase SOL Server Informix Use Existing For any Single Existing DB Alias Name lt select a Yalue gt x Previous Skip Undo Cancel Oracle Q0R922K Create Primary The Create Primary Keys and Select Primary Keys dialogs allow you Keys to create the Optim Primary Keys Refer to Create Primary Keys on page 110 Installation and Configuration Guide 233 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Create Primary After you create the Optim Primary Keys for tables accessed using a Keys for Another particular DB Alias the Configuration program prompts you to create Primary Keys for tables accessed using a different DB Alias To continue click Proceed e Ifyou select Create Primary Keys for another DB Alias the Create Select DB Alias dialog opens to repeat the sequence e Ifyou clear Create Primary Keys for another DB Alias the Configuration program completes the Create Primary Keys process and returns to the main window 234 Optim 7 1 7 14 Create Copies of DB2 z OS Relationships 7 14 Create Copies of DB2 z OS Relationships Specify Optim Directory Create Select DB Alias Not a DB2 for MVS Database Create Copies of DB2 MVS Relationships Create Copies for Another To facilitate use of Optim with DB2 z OS tables copy the DB2 relationships into the Optim Directory to reduce the run time when accessing DB2 tables T
276. e for example SET NLS_LANG AMERICAN AMERICA AL32UTF8 Restart Optim and or the Configuration program after making any changes to the character set Version 9 2 and later Oracle clients 1 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database the client character set is automatically set to match the server character set 2 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias that is not configured for Unicode data to connect to a Unicode database an error results 3 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias that is not configured for Unicode data to connect to a non Unicode database the client character set is automatically set to match that of the server See Section 1 2 4 Character Formats for a list of supported character sets 4 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias that is configured for Unicode data to connect to a non Unicode database an error results 5 Ifthe workstation for the Oracle client uses a non Unicode character set that is not supported by Optim an error results 6 Ifthe character set for the database server is not supported an error results Microsoft SQL Because SQL Server does not differentiate on the basis of Unicode Server characteristics you need not indicate whether an SQL Server Optim Directory or DB Alias is kept in Unicode format However the following rules apply 1 A Optim Directory in an SQL Server database is kept in Unicode format You must indicate whether any DB Aliases for Unicode
277. e operating systems and supported database management systems 2 Installation Setup Using Setup to install Optim 3 Signing an Optim Exit Signing the default exit supplied with Optim or a user defined exit Information on writing a user exit to provide additional security for Optim processes 4 Configuration Window Describes the main window for the and Menus Configuration program and certain general configuration functions 5 Configure Workstations Use these Configuration tasks to prepare your system for Optim Installation and Configuration Guide xiii About this Guide 6 Configure the Optim Server Configure the Optim Server on one or more Windows workstations 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks After you configure the first and any additional workstations you are ready to start using Optim However it may be necessary to perform other tasks that are available from the Tasks menu You can create update or drop DB Aliases and Optim Directories Configure Security enable or disable the Optim Server or ODBC interface apply maintenance update the DBMS version upgrade Optim software configure options create primary keys copy IBM DB2 z OS relationships load or drop sample data and load or drop data privacy data tables if you have an Optim Data Privacy License 8 Product Options Customize Optim for all users You can set general limits for editing and extract
278. e Editor Font for Warning Warning messages indicate serious but not critical conditions A Messages warning message does not interrupt an action but may indicate that you should reevaluate the current action Warning Text Specify font characteristics for the warning message text The default is System 10 point Bold Maroon Warning Field Specify font characteristics for the data referenced in a warning message The default is System 10 point Bold Underline Maroon Font for Error Error messages indicate critical conditions and interrupt the current Messages action A problem presented in an error message must be addressed before the attempted action can proceed Error messages can appear in pop up dialogs but usually display in the message bar at the bottom of a dialog Error Text Specify font characteristics for the error message text The default is System 10 point Bold Navy Error Field Specify font characteristics for the data referenced in an error message The default is System 10 point Bold Underline Navy Display Lines Specify the maximum number of lines 3 to 9 to display in the message bar for any type of message Hide message bar Select this check box to hide the message bar when there are no when empty informational warning or error messages to display If you clear this check box the message bar appears at the bottom of each editor or dialog at all times Installation and Configuration Guide 291
279. e ID SELECT MAX ARCHIVE_ID FROM PST_ARCHIVE_FILES Installation and Configuration Guide 563 Appendix F Open Data Manager 564 Optim 7 1 Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects All PST Directories created prior to version 6 0 of the Princeton Softech products Archive and the Relational Tools require a conversion to be compatible with later versions Additionally any Optim Directory created prior to Optim version 6 2 on an SQL Server database must be converted Use the Configuration program to convert Optim Directories and objects After the Conversion Process your old PST Directory and objects remain intact and can still be used with the Optim products Version 5 x PST PST Directory objects created using version 5 x of Archive or the Directories Relational Tools must be converted into a format suitable for use with version 6 0 or later Use the Conversion Process in the Configuration program to migrate objects from an old 5 x PST Directory to a Directory compatible with version 6 0 or later You can convert and migrate the following objects Access Definitions Table Maps Column Maps Column Map Procedures Primary Keys DB Aliases Relationships Calendars Currency Definitions Storage Profiles process requests Archive File Directory entries and File Access Definitions Note When running setup select the 5 x PST Directory Conversion component to install files required for converting PST Dire
280. e Index Maintenance Maintenance privilege is required for roles that maintain Archive Indexes Optim 7 1 D 1 Access Control Domain Installation and Configuration Guide Browse Calendar Create Currency Export Import Register Archive File Restart Retry Scheduling Editor Storage Profile Archive File Collection Invoke Browse privilege is required for roles that browse Archive Compare Extract or Control Files Invoke Calendar privilege is required for roles that create or edit Calendars Invoke Create privilege is required for roles that create database objects either online or from the command line Invoke Currency privilege is required for roles that create or edit Currency Definitions Invoke Export privilege is required for roles that export Optim objects Invoke Import privilege is required for roles that import Optim objects Invoke Register Archive File privilege is required for roles that register Archive Files whether online or from the command line Invoke Restart Retry privilege is required to restart or retry a process Invoke Scheduling Editor privilege is required to schedule process requests Invoke Storage Profile privilege is required to manage archive media Invoke Archive File Collection privilege is required for roles that create or edit Archive File Collections used with Open Data Manager 465 Appendix D Optim Security Run Untitled Acti
281. e Report Process completed Optim 7 1 E 3 Process a Report Request The elapsed time e A list of any warnings or errors that occur during processing Process Summary The Criteria Type indicates the type of Security Report User Functional or Object For User and Object Security Reports the Server Name is included The Security Criteria lists the criteria entered for each Security Report type e For a User Security Report each User Group is listed e Fora Functional Security Report each selected privilege is listed e For an Object Security Report each Object Type Object Name and User Group is listed Process Details User Security Reports are sorted by user group names Group names are indicated by a G The following details are included Privilege Lists each privilege class above an indented list of associated privileges Role The role name that includes the user or group State The type of permission Allow or Deny None indicates a permission is not defined Functional Security Reports are sorted by privilege The following details are included User Group The users and groups assigned permissions Group names are indicated by a G Role The role name that includes the user or group State The type of permission Allow or Deny None indicates a permission is not defined Object Security Reports are sorted by object type For each object type the report lists object names If an object
282. e Security for an Optim Directory Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Rename an Optim Directory Update the DBMS Yersion for an Optim Directory Update the DBMS Version for a DB Alias Configure Options Create Primary Keys Create Copies of DB2 2 05 Relationships Load Drop Sample Data Load Drop Data Privacy Data Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables Purge Optim Directory Registry Entry Purge DB Alias Biel Es update a DB Alias apply maintenance for DB Alias access or update the version of the DBMS Similarly you can create an additional Optim Directory apply maintenance for Optim Directory access or update the version of the DBMS for an Optim Directory You can also select options to purge a DB Alias or purge an Optim Directory registry entry Installation and Configuration Guide 183 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 184 Other tasks include configuring Product and Personal Options creating primary keys and creating copies of DB2 z OS relationships to be used in Optim You may also load or drop the sample data included with Optim this data provides a starting point for using many features in Optim If you have a Data Privacy License you may also load and drop the data privacy data tables provided with Optim You may also choose to drop a
283. e Server under UNIX or Linux 404 Optim will call the exit at each exit point to verify that the user s request meets your company standards such as verifying that the user has permission to run a given executable The first exit point occurs when the user launches Optim If you use the exit to provide external security that exit point determines whether the user has permission to access the product If the user has the appropriate permissions the user can continue if not Optim will terminate the user s session after displaying an appropriate error message See the Optim Initialization Exit Programmer s Guide for a list of a complete list of the Optim exit points Beginning with Optim release 6 5 a signed exit must exist to use Optim whether the exit is the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit To sign an exit you must specify the company credentials supplied to your organization when you received Optim Your company credentials consist of your Optim supplied company ID Name and Password The Optim setup process will automatically request these credentials during installation so you can sign an exit Note Ifyou have write access to the Optim bin directory and you have the appropriate company credentials you can change from one exit to another at any time following installation by signing a new exit You can change from using the default exit to a user supplied exit or vice versa or you can change from
284. e Specify DB Alias DBMS dialog Configure First Workstation Specify DB Alias DBMS he Optim Configuration program creates a DB Alias for the database based on the DBMS type and version specified when you created the Optim Directory Tables Provide a description for the DB Alias then click lt Proceed gt Note Support for some of the isted DBMS versions may have been discontinued by the vendor Installation and Configuration Guide 97 5 Configure Workstations Connect to The Configuration program requires certain information to configure Database the Catalog Tables DB2 or Informix Data Dictionary Oracle or System Tables Microsoft SQL Server or Sybase ASE You provide these details on the Connect to Database dialog amp Configure First Workstation Connect to Database _ OF x Optim he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to configure the Optim irectory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to create the ptim Directory Tables Optim Directory OPTIMDIR Database Connection Parameters User ID Connection String optusr4 QOR922K Password LEELEE EI e The Database Connection Parameters are populated with previously entered values Modify these values as needed DB Alias Name of the DB Alias you are creating Database Connection User ID Enter the User ID up to 30 characters that the Parameters DBMS requires to allow access to
285. e agreement in order to enable the Next button and continue the installation After you select the option accepting the licensing agreement click Next to indicate that your company agrees to its provisions Other command buttons Back Close this dialog and return to the Welcome panel Cancel Cancel setup 338 Optim 7 1 A l Installation Choose Destination Location The Server must be installed in a directory When the following dialog opens a default path and directory name are provided Optim Server Setup InsteliStiela Directory Name Enter the directory path for installing the Server To change the path type over the path provided or click Browse If you indicate a directory that does not exist setup creates it Setup also creates the subordinate directories RT and Bin Browse Click Browse to open the Choose Folder dialog where you can select a different folder for installing the Server To continue click Next Installation and Configuration Guide 339 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux Shut Down the Server If you are installing the Server for the first time or if you are re installing a current version of the Server on a machine that has no other Server installations simply click Next to continue with setup Optim Server Setup InstaliStiela However if you are installing the Server in the same directory as any running Server or command line process or you
286. e as soon as it is created Do not select this check box if you intend to modify the current Product Options and want to retain the original Configuration File Use the Password tab to change the password needed to access Product Options z Product Options Enter the current password 1 to 8 characters Passwords are case sensitive Initially this password is optim Enter the new password 1 to 8 characters case sensitive For security reasons the password is displayed as a series of asterisks Confirm the new password by entering it a second time For security reasons the password is displayed as a series of asterisks Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor 8 2 5 Edit Tab Use the Edit tab to select audit preferences for editing data and specify other site options for using default values Product Options Installation and Configuration Guide 259 8 Product Options Auditing Status User Supplies Defaults 260 Activate unedited establish auditing to record rows that you edit and store images of rows in an Optim Directory table You can browse these rows the period of time for which they are stored rows and limit the number of rows retained When rows of audit information expire they are automatically deleted When the maximum number of rows is exceeded the oldest rows are deleted to make space for new rows Active Select this option to enable the auditing feature at the site l
287. e click setup exe 3 Open Network Neighborhood open the network drive that contains the contents of the Optim CD you copied and double click setup exe Optim displays the Welcome dialog IBM Optim Setup x Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Optim The InstallShield Wizard will install Optim on your computer To continue click Next Version 6 5 Build 2112 E Cancel After you read the text click Next to continue Installation and Configuration Guide 37 2 Installation Setup 2 1 1 Software License The second dialog prompts you to read the License Agreement Software License Agreement Command Buttons After you read and accept the License Agreement select Accept to indicate that your company agrees to its provisions You must click Next to continue installing Optim Other command buttons Print Prints this dialog Decline Cancels Setup and does not install Optim 38 Optim 7 1 2 1 Run Setup 2 1 2 Customer Information The Customer Information dialog prompts for information to supplement your company License Key IBM Optim Setup x Customer Information Please enter your information User Name fo ptim User Company Name Company Name Company ID fi 23454 Install this application for Anyone who uses this computer all users Only for me Optim User InstallShield lt Back Carcel The following information is needed to proc
288. e dbmstype dbmsver dbqual connectstring dbname userid password dbalias pstdir name connectstring userid password loader pstdir dbalias dbmstype pathtoloader excptntblcid odbeserver 0 1 userid password adminemailnotify emailaddress success information warning error exception n 7 0 1 clear archiveretentionpolicy hh mm pstdirectory centeraavail 0 1 tivoliavail 0 1 nodename password Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration Keywords customerid Optim company identifier n Unique six digit Company ID provided with Optim 000000 The Optim demonstration ID Default customerid 611239 customername Customer name custname Company Name provided with Company ID and license key Up to 40 characters eeceecce The demonstration name Default customername ccccccc license The license key Note The license key is saved in the registry This registry entry is replaced if you connect to an Optim Directory with a more recent key Therefore you can remove this keyword after you start prOsvce the first time license key The 5 part license key provided by IBM demonstration The Optim demonstration key shown in the following key example Default license 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 rtservername The name of the Server daemon as declared to all client machines Processes initiated from a
289. e default text editor is launched displaying the corresponding file Text Editor locale conf File Edit Format Options TRUENDE locale conf Locale conversion file for ta s Server Compone AOPA A AAE AA AEAT Basic format gt is start of comment everything to the right is ignored B lines are ignored Use escape and any character to produce that character line is broken into a series of space delmited words If the word contains space the enclose it in double quotes Normal locale entries are four words The first word is the UNIX Locale name The second word is the WINDOWS Locale name The third word is the WINDOWS LCID The forth word contains W and or U W means the locale could be supported in Windows U means the locale could be supported in Unix via Mainiin a Note InstallShield saves setup information in a file named vpd properties located in your home directory This file contains information about the current Optim installation like Installation and Configuration Guide 345 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux the options that have been installed and the Optim install directory If you manually delete the Optim directory you should also delete this file Sign the Optim Exit When the Sign Optim Exit dialog appears click Yes to sign the default exit included with Optim or cl
290. e defaults apply to all DB Aliases unless you provide explicit stored procedure information on the Databases tab When you specify the necessary information on each tab and click Proceed the Configuration program connects to the first selected database Ifthe connection is successful the update process drops the old stored packages plans or procedures creates new ones and updates the database signature These steps are repeated for each selected database When the process is complete the Complete dialog displays Installation and Configuration Guide 231 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Specify Optim Directory Connect to Database Initialize Security Change Security Administrator Enable Disable Optim Server Feature Enable Disable Archive ODBC Feature Specify Configuration File 232 7 12 Configure Options The Product Configuration File contains the Product Options that apply to all users of Optim at a site Personal Options are recorded in the workstation registry Typically the Product Configuration File and the Personal Options registry entries are created when you configure the first and additional workstations However you modify these options by selecting Configure Options from the Tasks menu Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see page 185 to select the name of the Optim Directory Click Proceed to open the next dialog in the process You can specify different Personal Options f
291. e editors components in list or dialogs 5 to 99 displayed in the main window The default value is 10 If the number of active editors and dialogs exceeds the maximum you can scroll the list If fewer editors or dialogs are in use the bottom of the list is blank Auto size Main Select to automatically resize the main window Window to list as editors and dialogs are added to the list If you clear this check box the main window is sized to display the maximum number of editors and dialogs that can be listed Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Large Object LOB Default Native Select this check box to set the default for the LOB Mode Native LOB Mode check box on the Columns tab of the Table Specifications dialog available through the Access Definition Editor You can use the check box on the Table Specifications dialog when preparing an Access Definition for use with Edit When editing the check box designates whether to start the native application associated with an LOB or to process as a VarChar or VarBinary data type Maximum Specify the maximum length of data to retrieve Non Native LOB from a database for an LOB processed as a Length VarChar or VarBinary data type when using the Table Editor in Edit Select a value from 1 KB through 32 KB Note The setting of the Native LOB Mode check box on the Columns tab of the Table Specifications dialog available through the Access Definition Editor determines whether a
292. e format and you can edit them with a Unicode compatible text editor such as Microsoft NotePad Optim recognizes Byte Order Mark headers in externally generated files and the following encodings e UTF 8 e UTF 16 e UTF 32 e ASCH e Multi byte Also note that you cannot compare Archive Files created before Archive for Servers version 6 0 with files created using a current Installation and Configuration Guide 23 1 Getting Started Optim Server Optim Directories and DB Aliases Unicode Support 24 version of Optim although you can convert early Archive Files and compare data in the resulting Extract Files In addition Report Files created with earlier versions of Optim are not accessible using version 6 x Every locale or its translation that the Server is required to handle must reside on the Server machine In other words the Server must have access to the locale of the delegating workstation A utility prOlocl exe is provided to tell you the locales that are installed on a machine and the locales with which it is compatible As an example of the output in a Windows environment see the following Current operating system Microsoft Windows XP C runtime locales are LC_CTYPE English_United States 1252 LC_COLLATE English_United States 1252 LC_NUMERIC English_United States 1252 LC_MONETARY English_United States 1252 LC_TIME English_United States 1252 Language Environment Variables LC_ALL LANG Win
293. e limitations when deciding the number of days to retain the files tracedays 5 server Connection for Command Line and ODBC processes that are not executed locally but instead are targeted to a Server You can omit this keyword if for the targeted Server file access is limited to a specific Windows user account or the filelogon value is server or local name Name of the Server The target Server must support a tcp ip connection address The tcp ip network address for the target Server in the form 1 1 1 1 port The numeric tcp ip port number for the target Server as a value from 1 to 65534 Installation and Configuration Guide 373 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 374 localrtserver pstdir userid User ID and password needed to logon to a target Server set up to receive file logons from client or for which the filelogon keyword in pstserv cfg is set to client password Specify as the password when a secure password is supplied in a password file See A 4 2 Securing the Configuration Files for more information To use OS Authentication for Oracle specify a forward slash for userid and do not provide a password domain Domain needed to validate User ID and password for access to a Server on Windows Note Ifthe user is validated as a local user on a Server enter the Server name server optuser 172 16 8 76 1024 rt password test dom If processing from
294. e located in the Temporary Work Directory specified using the General tab of the Personal Options dialog You can browse or print these files using a text editor such as Notepad On the Complete dialog click Close to return to the Configuration main window where you can quit the program or prepare to configure the next workstation Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation 5 1 7 Summary The tasks for configuring the first workstation are complete including the following Create an Optim Directory and corresponding Windows registry entries Create a DB Alias for each database within the Optim Directory Create Optim Primary Keys for database tables that did not have DBMS primary keys but did have a unique index Load sample database tables Create and load the data privacy data tables if you have an Optim Data Privacy License Initialize Optim Security and assign the Security Administrator Create the Product Configuration File and modify Product and Personal Options Export registry data to ease the task of configuring additional workstations Installation and Configuration Guide 139 5 Configure Workstations 5 2 Configure Additional Workstation 140 Guidelines After you configure the first workstation you can configure any additional workstations to use Optim This task uses Optim Directory and DB Aliases created while configuring the first workstation However you must create a Windows re
295. e060 ks ceca pews base vee i t 53 Installation and Configuration Guide vii 3 4 Changing a Signed Optim Bx 2 0 52 cce cece ewe caw cee ones 55 3 5 The Sign Optim Exit Dialog 2 0 cdieends ohne eae 56 3 6 Specifying a Company Name andID_ 0 ee eee ee ee 60 4 Configuration Window and Menus 2 000 61 4 1 Main Window and Menus 00 cece eee eee eens 62 ALA Main Window oo es ek ence eee ede aes obs 62 A Ved Meniere oe Sand ede eee bind ee See ee we ood Bee ee 63 41 3 Proc ssing LOR e 5h cctds Weed id aes vn Eae EES 70 4 1 4 Configuration Assistant 2 0 0 ce eee eee eee te 71 Pe Ms WANG so 85s sco nid sk A ean Bis as adh ncaa onde sao Doss Send lesa washes Bak 73 5 Configure Workstations 00 0 cece eee ees 77 5 1 Configure the First Workstation 0 eee eee ee nee 78 5 1 1 Specify Product License Rey nck eke eens 78 5 1 2 Create Optimi Directory uncon Ba eee 78 5 1 3 Create DBASE i orerar aa ei een epee as eo de 94 SLA CPU SOY ei e Hk isin Shape ceases Vw alin EOE RE ts 128 5 1 0 Conteur OPDIS oo iki ks wea eee eee 132 5 1 6 Export Registry Data oc coe kes eo edie eto east 137 Sed UNUMIALY E 6 canbe hk hae hated we rede eee he ee ee LS 139 5 2 Configure Additional Workstation 0 2 00 eee eee ee 140 5 2 1 Import Registry Entries ees csc dae ees is 141 5 22 Create Registry Emy 2 0 0 pees toe eget ectoceuniest 143 5 2 3 Initialize
296. eTalk zone name Endpoint Vines SPP port number from 250 through 511 Example 500 Network Address StreetTalk server name of the form item group organization Endpoint Internet port number Example 2215 Network Address Internet address or local Windows server name Note You can specify a dynamic endpoint for any protocol using an asterisk If Supported Protocols All is specified an asterisk displays automatically Installation and Configuration Guide 269 8 Product Options 8 2 7 Archive Tab Use the Archive tab to allow users to review data to be deleted after it has been archived select available backup devices and set a default minimum file retention period for supported devices amp Product Options p Allow User to Select this check box to enable the Review Archive Delete List check review Delete box on the Archive and Delete Request Editors This check box allows After Archive list users to display and review the names of tables for which data is to be deleted as a function of archiving Available File Select the appropriate check box es to make available one or more Backup Devices backup devices for use with Archive The check boxes are cleared by default Centera Select this check box if Centera is available If you select this check box the Centera Minimum File Retention box becomes available NetWorker Select this check box if EMC NetWorker is available 270 Optim 7 1 8
297. ectivity to the database containing the Optim Directory as well as the database containing data to be processed A Server must have Language Settings for each workstation that accesses it In a purely Windows environment you can use Regional Settings from the Windows Control Panel on the machine hosting the Server to ensure that all needed locales are installed Installations that include one or more UNIX or Linux based Servers translate locales between environments using a file locale conf that is installed with Optim Depending upon the environment the locale conf file is located in IBM Optim RT BIN or PSTHOME etc You may review the list of locale translations in locale conf and if needed add translations for non standard locales See Section 1 2 4 Character Formats for more information When the installation is complete select Optim from the Windows Control Panel to configure the Server You can provide settings unique to the server such as the path and executable file name for each database loader connection strings for all defined DB Aliases and protocols for access to the server If desired you can click Merge Current User to copy the Personal Options settings from the registry of the current user to the Server configuration The Configuration Tasks menu offers a number of commands that allow you to maintain the Optim environment Some tasks are also used to configure the first and additional workstations 1 2 Planni
298. ectories is platform specific e Under Solaris and Linux the location is etc e Under HP UX the location is sbin Under AIX the location is etc rc d Use the link command to create symbolic links as follows ln s actualfile linkname actualfile File to which a symbolic link points In this case specify RT4S linkname Name of a symbolic link used to point to a file In this case point links named S99RT4S and KO7RTAS to RT4S Installation and Configuration Guide 389 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux Solaris or Linux To start up and shut down the Server during Solaris or Linux init processing create symbolic links to the RT4S script in directories etc rc2 d and etc rc1 d as follows 1 Log in as the root user 2 From the console enter the following commands eIn s opt IBM Optim rt sbin rt4s etc rc2 d S99rt4s eIn s opt IBM Optim rt sbin rt4s etc rc1 d KO7rt4s HP UX To start up and shut down the Server during HP UX init processing create symbolic links to the RT4S script in directories sbin rc2 d and sbin rcl d as follows 1 Log in as the root user 2 From the console enter the following commands eIn s opt IBM Optim rt sbin rt4s sbin rc2 d S99rt4s eIn s opt IBM Optim rt sbin rt4s sbin rc1 d KO7rt4s AIX To start up and shut down the Server during AIX init processing create symbolic links to the RT4S script in directories etc rc d rc2 dand etc rc d rc1 d
299. ecurity Functional Security Optim provides three types of security For each Optim Directory you may establish any or all of the following types of security Functional Security Object Security and Archive File Security As the most general level of Optim Security Functional Security allows you to control user access to the interface for functions provided by Optim For example for a specialized administrator role that is intended to create process requests and objects needed to run these requests you can grant unlimited access to functions For members of a role intended only to run the pre defined process requests however you can grant more limited access to functions As a second example you might use Functional Security to grant access to the Archive specific editors Archive Request Delete Request and Restore Request as well as the Archive maintenance utilities to members of a specialized Archive role while denying access to these editors for developers that use Optim functions to create test data Establishing Functional Security requires that you edit the Access Control Domain ACD named Default to define roles and for each role grant or deny Functional Privileges The Default ACD is a security definition i e a type of object in the Optim Directory and is created automatically when Optim Security is initialized Functional Privileges are defined in the Default ACD only After editing the Default ACD you must en
300. ed when you configure Personal Options or in the default Temp directory If needed you can browse or print this file using a text editor such as Notepad 4 1 4 Configuration Assistant Configuration Assistant There are several ways to start a task to configure Optim e You can use the Configuration Assistant available immediately following installation when you select the option to Launch Optim configuration The Configuration Assistant provides Wizard like help to guide you to the appropriate configuration options You may also start the Configuration Assistant from the Help menu in the Configuration program e You can select individual configuration options from the Tasks menu in the Configuration program After you install Optim you are prompted to configure the first workstation Choosing to continue starts the Configuration Assistant If you choose not to configure immediately after installing the software you can select Configure First Workstation from the Tasks menu or select Configuration Assistant from the Help menu The Configuration Assistant presents a series of dialogs to guide you through each step in the configuration process During the process you Installation and Configuration Guide 71 4 Configuration Window and Menus make selections appropriate to your particular site and circumstances The first window is the Welcome dialog Configuration Assistant Welcome he Configuration Assistant will ask
301. ede ek bee tesa 424 B 1 7 UNIX or Linux File Access 00 220 e eee eee 424 B 2 DBMS Logon Credentials lt s 2 000 ss sae edad vee es eee kenik 425 Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks 429 C l Syntax and Keywords sese cic cee indies bate wee eee nae eee 431 tie EEE 55 act ae bi ass eek ede Hh SAS E ews a 438 C 2 1 Create Multiple DB Aliases with one Optim Directory 438 C 2 2 Apply Maintenance to Multiple DB Aliases 439 Appendix D Optim Security 0 0 cee eee eee eee 441 D 1 Access Control Domaini 6 2 ec eo oa ee Oh erea et 447 D 1 1 Access Control Domain Editor 0 00 02 e eee 450 D12 Kole Speciticaiioie co erren ed eee sie e enea 452 DLS User TAD oe cee loosed chew teens E ented 454 DLA Privileges Tals coerce corens Re abd iain i eee E 457 D2 Access Comrol Ligh 2 edna Ua Gee MA e De eee eae 469 D 2 1 Access Control List Editor o eere enisi ee et 471 Ds File Access Definition i os nii whe hee eda nee ede ae 478 D 3 1 File Access Definition Editor 0 2 0 eee eee 480 D 3 2 Defining Access Permissions for Columns 486 D 3 3 File Access Definition Example 002 0 00 492 DA Exporting Security Definitions 2 0002 eee 496 D 5 Import Security Definitions 2 0 0 0 cee eee ees 500 DS mporn Dilog ee ocak eb ey Lane een eee 500 Appendix E Security Reports 0 0 cece eee eee 511
302. eed with the installation User Name Your User ID Company Name Your company name as provided on the notification sent when Optim is shipped to you Company ID Your company identifier as provided on the notification sent when Optim is shipped to you Install this In the lower portion of the dialog indicate whether you would like the application for workstation to share the Personal Options and other information in the same registry or use a separate registry for each user Click Anyone who uses this computer all users to share the registry information or click Only for me to allow each user to have a private copy of the registry information To continue click Next Installation and Configuration Guide 39 2 Installation Setup 2 1 3 Select the Type of Setup The Setup Type dialog prompts you to perform a full install of Optim or to set up registry entries and shortcuts only IBM Optim Setup Ea Setup Type Select the setup type that best suits your needs Click the type of setup you prefer M Description Window Registry Entries and Shortcuts Only Installs Optim on this workstation server or a network drive that you specify Installs Windows registry entries and shortcuts for access to Optim from this workstation InstallShield Select Full Install to install Optim on a particular workstation server or network drive This type of setup includes Windows registry entries and shortcuts to ac
303. eeees 19 Server tab Personal Options 306 307 always ask for password 006 306 Check lOpOn iaa 307 Optim Server simenn armdia 306 User ID Password Domain 306 Servers tab Product Options 268 269 CME POINE epearen aceite aas tals 268 network address ccccecceseeseeteeees 268 Protocol sopriora 268 Server NAME sstssserasrecaavevarearasveasaionensaes 268 Setup COMPpletiN gS srscsseceveernrd ere 46 creating desktop icons ceceeeeeee 45 customer information 39 destination folder cccecceeseseteees 41 for additional workstations 6 9 installing application software 4 Optim 7 1 license agreement n 38 program folder cccecesceeseeeseneeees 44 README DE scscieaaciuicieacawsa 46 select component c cccceceeeeeereees 42 typeof Setup ansinarraiiamncencance 40 Special Characters Caps mode srepiinnisna 284 underscore as SQL LIKE 00 284 SQL Server connection string 2 0 eeceeeeseeseteeeees 143 create multiple DB Aliases 122 create drop procedures for DB Alias seses 99 for Optim Directory s s s 85 update DBMS version 0006 228 Sybase ASE connection string eeceeceseeteeseeeees 143 create multiple DB Aliases 122 create shared procedures for DB Alias sossarna 120 create drop procedures for DB Alias n se 99 for
304. el A The Specify Optim Directory DBMS dialog includes the following details When the dialog opens Optim Directory Description Type and Version is populated with any previously entered information DBMS Optim Provide text that describes or explains the purpose of Specifications Directory the Optim Directory up to 40 characters This is Description useful if you have multiple Optim Directories Type Select the type of DBMS software To select from a list click the down arrow The selected DBMS appears on the status bar of subsequent dialogs in the process Version Select the version of the DBMS software To select from a list click the down arrow 144 Optim 7 1 5 2 Configure Additional Workstation Connect to The Connect to Database dialog allows you to provide database Database connection information for the Optim Directory registry entry Configure Additional Workstation Connect to Database _ OF x Optim he Optim Configuration program remembers the User ID and optionally the Password for future access to the Optim Directory Specify the User ID and Password then click lt Proceed gt Optim Directory OPTIMDIR Database Connection Parameters User ID Connection String optusr1 QOR922K Password LALELE J Optim Directory Schema Name optusr1 Previous Undo Cancel A When configuring the workstation you must provide a User ID Password and Connection String that
305. elease 602 Optim 7 1 H 4 Sample Extract Files e Operating System Build e Operating System Service Pack e Server User ID e Computer Name H 4 Sample Extract Files The following Extract Files are included in the Samples Extract subdirectory CSB4DATA XF These Extract Files contain data from the sample PSTDEMO XF database that has been altered slightly These files are useful for training or learning about features of Compare PSTD_IFX XF These Extract Files duplicate the data in PSTD_MSS XF PSTDEMO XF in DBMS specific format PSTD_MVS XF PSTD_ORA XF PSTD_SYB XF PSTD_UDB XF SAMP_390 XF These Extract Files provide DBMS specific SAMP_DB2 XF copies of the Optim sample database data SAMP _IFX XF SAMP _MSS XF SAMP_MVS XF SAMP_ORC XF SAMP_SYB XF H 5 Sample JCL File The sample JCL file LOADDB2 jcl for running the DB2 z OS loader from an Optim Server is included in the Samples JCL subdirectory Installation and Configuration Guide 603 Appendix H Samples 604 Optim 7 1 Appendix Data Privacy Data Tables Data privacy data tables are available to clients who have an Optim Data Privacy License These tables allow you to mask company and personal data such as employee names customer names social security numbers credit card numbers and e mail addresses to generate transformed data that is both unique and valid within the context of the application Generally these data privacy tables are
306. elete update warning only at run time of a process The corresponding setting in Personal Options is unavailable and set to Runtime Display a cascade delete update warning only when saving the Access Definition The corresponding setting in Personal Options is unavailable and set to Saving Access Definition Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor Abort Scheduler or Command Line Installation and Configuration Guide Always Display a cascade delete update warning at run time of a process and when saving the Access Definition The corresponding setting in Personal Options is unavailable and set to Always Never Do not display a cascade delete update warning The corresponding setting in Personal Options is unavailable and set to Never Select this check box to abort the process when run from the Scheduler or the Command Line Interface and the cascade delete update affects at least one table that is not explicitly included in the process This check box is selected by default 251 8 Product Options 8 2 2 Database Tab Maximum Commit Frequency Sybase Unchained Mode 252 Use the Database tab to manage database activity during Insert Restore and Delete Processes Product Options ojx General Database Configuration File Password Edt Servers Archive Load Report Maximum Commit Frequency M Parallel Processing 200 IV Allow Parallel Processing Sybase Unchained Mode Maximum Database
307. enance and Other Configuration Tasks 7 8 1 Query Method to Apply Maintenance After you specify the Optim Directory and connect to the database the Configuration program displays the Query Method to Apply Maintenance dialog Select the level of maintenance to apply Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Query Method to Apply Mai B Ea he Optim Configuration program can apply maintenance for one or more DB Aliases or or all databases of a particular DBMS type Select the appropriate option button then elect lt Proceed gt to continue to the next step M Options Apply Maintenance to a database for a single DB Alias Apply Maintenance to databases for all DB Aliases Apply Maintenance to databases with a specified DBMS Type and Version Previous Proceed _ Cancel Dracle QOR922K 7 To apply maintenance to create or refresh packages plans or procedures needed to access database tables select one of the following options e Apply Maintenance to a database for a single DB Alias Select this option to apply maintenance to a database referenced by a specific DB Alias in the selected Optim Directory e Apply Maintenance to databases for all DB Aliases Select this option to apply maintenance to databases referenced by each DB Alias in the selected Optim Directory Apply Maintenance to databases with a specified DBMS Type and Version Select this option to apply maintenance
308. encanseiahiarnneeiaeavans 101 CASE SENSITIVE ooo eeceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 142 connection information cee 7 Credentials siscautenscmesteneneeneetsiceceicet 417 for each workstation c ecceeeeee 10 for product options 006 135 258 Product Configuration File 134 Password tab Product Options 258 Installation and Configuration Guide Personal Options 151 182 279 332 ACTIONS deitan aE 319 ALCHIVE sraxcersteiatnd et naa 315 browsing files scrisese 313 COMPUTING serian 280 COMMUN soena Ee 286 creating Objects sssessesrirseiriiaas 295 database arasen 326 DBMS loaders s oneoenosesserorsreserererrene 293 display oerion 287 editing ata ssrsrnsmeissn ena 308 email notification and configuration 330 ettor CefAUlts s ssssssivecsavonsvacoermasraicnvae 290 MBCS Roundtrip Processing 327 printers language options 324 removable media ecceeeeeeeeeees 317 scheduling monitor sssssssesssseseeseeee 292 SCTVETS griener eaaa e T 268 set general defaults 0 ceee eee 284 OVO DOM ian 303 PROCMND sisters ie cies 429 Primary Keys creating for database eee 8 233 select database tables 0ccceee 111 Printer Options cecceseeeteeeeeeees 324 325 Processing Log browse the log file 0 0 00 cee eeeeereee 71 completed actions c cccesesreeteeees 70 Pro
309. ep xj Optim Directory Security Feature Security State DIRECTORY Optim Object Security Disabled m Security Administrator For this Optim Directory Domain User Name Nat optusr3 m Security Options for this Optim Directory Enable M Secure 5 Ibjects When Saved fed Disable Edit Optim Object Template ACL Previous Proceed _ Skip Cancel Oracle Q0R922K Ui Optim Directory displays the directory name and Security Feature indicates Optim Object Security is the option you can enable or disable Security State indicates that security for the option is Enabled or Disabled Security Administrator for this Optim Directory displays the Security Administrator Configuring Object Use the Set Optim Object Security Option dialog to configure Object Security Security by doing the following Enabling or disabling Object Security Installation and Configuration Guide 197 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Automatically Assigning an ACL 198 e Indicating whether selected objects are automatically assigned an ACL when saved Defining the Optim Object Template ACL To enable or disable Optim Object Security select Enable or Disable After configuring Object Security click Proceed If the Security Administrator is not signed on to the workstation the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog is displayed and the password for the Security Administrator must be entered Use
310. eparate process each time ODM accesses an Archive File This configuration is the default for UNIX servers and no special configuration is required To edit the server configuration for Windows 1 In the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer Machines list expand the Windows server list the Daemons list and the IRPCD list to display the Navigator member 2 Right click Navigator and select Edit Workspace from the shortcut menu to open the IRPCD Navigator dialog 3 Select the WS Server tab 4 From the Workspace server mode list select singleClient 5 From the File menu select Save All 536 Optim 7 1 F 1 Installation Edit the ODM UTF 8 users must edit the ODM Server code page By default ODM Server Code Page first translates archived data to match the workstation code page on the primary ODM Server It then translates the code page on the secondary ODM Server if one exists You can use UTF 8 data only if all data passed to ODM is in UTF 8 format including SQL statements To use UTF 8 format you must set the code page on the primary and secondary servers To edit the ODM Server code page 1 In the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer Machines list expand the ODM Server list and the Bindings list to display the NAV member 2 Right click the NAV member and select Edit Binding from the shortcut menu to open the NAV binding editor J melo Bl t te em Runtime Mana gt d
311. eport Request Editor Jof x File Edit Tools Options Help alslo gt 6 S AB alel test report Description General Security Criteria Notify Criteria Type Object v Server Name Local v Object Type Domain and User Group Kl ok gt Access Definition HAD dom pstuser Extract Request everyone Installation and Configuration Guide 521 Appendix E Security Reports Object Type Object Name Domain and User Group E 2 3 Notify Tab 522 Select an object type Enter an object name You can use percent as a wild card character but the pattern must match the object name format For example if an object uses a two part name enter own nam Enter user or group names in the format domain name or everyone to include all group and user names in all domains and nodes Enter one name per line You can use percent as a wild card character but the pattern must use the domain name format For example dom n or Use the Notify tab to specify options and addresses for automatic email notification of the success or failure of the process The process report generated when the process completes is automatically sent as an attachment Optim 7 1 E 3 Process a Report Request E 3 Process a Report Request A Report Request processes in several steps There are a few differences depending on whether you schedule the process or run the Report Requ
312. equest Editor To select the last Report Request you edited Inthe main window select Report Request from the Actions menu to open the Report Request Editor and the last edited Report Request When you select the Open command from the File menu in the main window or an editor the Open dialog is displayed For more information about this dialog see the Common Elements Manual Chapter 2 Main Window Menus and Dialogs 514 Optim 7 1 E 2 Using the Editor E 2 Using the Editor In the Report Request Editor you can create modify or delete Report Requests You can also save Report Requests to the Optim Directory OPTUSR RPT1 Report Request Editor Blelalaj 8 e Report Printer name Description Text to describe the purpose of the Report Request up to 40 characters Tabs Use the Report Request Editor tabs to provide parameters and select options to define Report Requests Each tab in the editor serves a unique purpose General Parameters required by the Report Process including the type of report i e Security the report title output options report file name and printer specifications as applicable Each time you open the editor the General tab is shown first Security Criteria Parameters needed to create a report on permissions for Functional or Object Security privileges The Security Criteria tab is available when Report Type on the General tab is set to Security Installation and Con
313. er ID for the Server may require other privileges depending on whether you are using explicit credentials or client credentials Optim 7 1 B 1 Server Credentials For Windows credentials on the Startup tab of the Optim Server Settings applet are added to the Service Control Manager database At a minimum the user account must have the authority to log on to the local computer as a service You can use the Local Security Policy to grant this authority or you can use the built in Local System Account which has full authority on the local computer For UNIX or Linux the user account under which the Server daemon is started dictates the privileges for the daemon If the daemon is started as part of INIT processing you must log on with the proper User ID before starting the daemon or use the SU substitute user command B 1 2 Credentials to Run Optim Processes Every Optim process initiated by a client whether online from a Request Editor or from the Command Line Interface or the ODBC Interface is run in its own process under the Server This allows you to start individual processes under explicit user credentials and run multiple processes simultaneously without interfering with each other You can choose the credentials used to start these processes Run the process under the user account that was used to start the Server e Run the process under an explicitly designated user account regardless of the initiating account
314. ersions 2 0s eee ee eee F 8 Archive File to XML Convertor 0 00005 e cee sees F 9 Archive File Collections 0000 e cece eens F 9 1 Archive File Collection Subsets F 9 2 PST _ARCHIVE ID Pseudocolumn F 9 3 PST_ARCHIVE FILES Table Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects G 1 Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories G 1 1 Step 1 Create a New Optim Directory G 1 2 Step 2 Export Data from Old Optim Directory G 1 3 Step 3 Import Data into New Optim Directory G 2 Conversion Process for Directory Tables on SQL Server G 2 1 Converting Version 6 0 6 1 Directory Tables in SQL Server 583 G 2 2 Dropping Version 6 0 6 1 Directory Tables Appendix H Samples 0 0 0 eee ee eee eee H 1 Sample Database Tables and Structure H 1 1 OPTIM_ SALES Table 06 ccc cece errre erara H 1 2 OPTIM_ CUSTOMERS Table H 1 3 OPTIM_ORDERS Table 0 5002 c eee eee ees H 1 4 OPTIM DETAILS Table 0005 H 1 5 OPTIM_ITEMS Table 0 ee eee eee H 1 6 OPTIM SHIP TO Table 05 H 1 7 OPTIM_SHIP_ INSTR Table H 1 8 OPTIM MALE RATES Table H 1 9 OPTIM_ FEMALE RATES Table H 1 10 OPTIM_ STATE LOOKUP Table H 2 Sample Column Map Exits 0 0 0 cee eee
315. es InstallShield lt Back Cancel Install and Select this option to install a primary ODM Server only Configure You are prompted for the Attunity License file and both ODM Now the ODM Server and Attunity Studio are automatically installed The ODM Server and Attunity Studio installation files are also copied to your machine If both Attunity Server and Attunity Studio are installed this option is labeled Configure ODM Now Optim 7 1 F 1 Installation Only Copy Select this option to install a primary or secondary the ODM ODM Server This option copies the ODM Server and Files Attunity Studio installation files to your machine To complete the ODM installation you must install ODM manually Automatic ODM After you choose Install and Configure ODM Now or Configure Installation ODM Now from the Setup program the Specify Attunity License File dialog is displayed Enter the path to the Attunity License file or click Browse to select a path IBM Optim Setup x Specify Attunity License File Enter the fully qualified name to the Attunity License File If you do not have access to the file at this time select lt Back then choose Only Copy the ODM Files rs Browse InstallShield lt Back Cancel After you provide the license file path click Next to display the Select Program Folder dialog see 2 1 6 Select Program Folder on page 44 and continue the Optim installation ODM is instal
316. es To select from your system directories click the browse button If you do not specify a directory the Data Directory specified on the General tab is used by default Specify the complete path to the default directory where you want the Server to store Archive Index Files To select from your system directories click the browse button If you do not specify a directory the Archive Directory is used by default Specify the complete path to the default directory where you want the Server to store Archive Index Browse Files To select from your system directories click the browse button If you do not specify a directory the Archive Directory is used by default An Archive Index Browse File is created automatically whenever you join tables while browsing an Archive File The Archive Index Browse File stores primary key and foreign key information to expedite the Installation and Configuration Guide 173 6 Configure the Optim Server retrieval of data and has an abf extension by default Archive Index Browse Files are dynamically updated so it is advisable to select a directory accessible to any user that may browse an Archive File 174 Optim 7 1 6 10 Retention Tab 6 10 Retention Tab A retention policy allows you to automatically delete Archive Files that reside on the Server When Archive Retention is activated the Server scans Optim Directories for Archive Files with a retention policy The Retention tab allows you
317. es 288 null value indicator ceeeeeeeee 287 system MESSAGES nesnese seers eese 289 tooltips and toolbars ceeeeeee 288 E Edit tab Personal Options 308 312 audit tables serenan amona 310 Audit Tables dialog cc cece 311 auditing ACH VE sssr 310 AULO S WItCh sissa 308 default data display cccceeeeees 310 display column attributes 0 00 00 308 display deleted rows ceseeereee 308 display row count n 310 null as default sssiisssssssisiceseririisssissssissss 309 prompt for variables ccceceeee 309 retain selection criteria 0 0 0 0 309 side label display c cesses 309 SINGS yieW sansa 309 Undoilevels scssiswensisicieimiwicniees 310 user supplies defaults 0 0 0 0 309 WAIN ON cascade eee ceeeeeeeseeteeeseeeeees 309 Edit tab Product Options 259 261 Audit Tables dialog 00 0 262 AUCITING StatUS sssrinin 260 force Browse Only cccceceecceereeees 261 null as default sirsie 261 user supplies defaults 0 0 0 0 eee 260 618 Email Notification cccececceseeeereees 330 Errors tab Personal Options 290 291 display Wines seson 291 error messages font ssseseseeeeeeee 291 hide empty message bar s es 291 informational messages font 290 warning messages font seee 291 Exit Routines destination format exit input to Age Function 600 SAMPE
318. es not use DB Aliases however an Archive File cannot have two tables with matching creator IDs and names but different DB Aliases Matching tables are not required to have the same columns The union will include all column names in the matching tables Rows from a table that do not include a column found in another table will use a default value such as NULL a default date specified in the Archive File Collection Editor or an appropriate data type spaces zero etc Column All columns with the same name that are in tables with matching creator Compatibility IDs and names must have compatible attributes If columns have different but compatible attributes a compatible attribute will be used for those columns The column compatibility rules for the Compare Process apply to Archive File Collections For information about comparison compatibility rules refer to the Common Elements Manual 5 3 1 Comparison Compatibility Rules For example columns COLX DECIMAL 8 2 and COLX DECIMAL 10 0 will become COLX DECIMAL 10 2 If a compatible attribute cannot be found e g COLX INTEGER and COLX TIMESTAMP the Archive File Collection Editor will display an error message Unioned Indexes Archive Indexes for unioned tables may also be unioned The following tules apply to unioned indexes e Each Archive File that includes the table must also include the index Installation and Configuration Guide 561 Appendix F Open Data Manager e
319. ess Definition Editor to define a File Access Definition This dialog allows you to select an Access Control Domain to be used as the basis for the File Access Definition select tables to secure using the Table List and define access permissions for each selected table using the Table Access Control list You can also define access permissions for columns in a listed table Open the File Access Definition Editor by selecting New FAD from the Tools menu in the File Access Definitions dialog You can also open that Editor for an existing File Access Definition by double clicking a listing in the File Access Definitions dialog E Untitled File Access Definition Editor File Edit Tools Options Help alslalia s Description Access Control Domain Default ha Table Access Control Column Table AC Type Secure Allow Deny QKI ola Jld rja Default Default mj DO Vv DBMS OPTUSR ADDRESS Explicit 2 Tech Writers DBMS OPTUSR FIRSTNSME None DBMS OPTUSR LASTNAME None Enter text that describes the File Access Definition Type or select the name of an Access Control Domain ACD to use as the basis for the File Access Definition The ACD translates the roles specified in the Table Access Control list into accounts in your Optim 7 1 D 3 File Access Definition network After a File Access Definition is saved you can se
320. ess clears the log file before information for the current execution is written Previous log information is not retained Select Close from the File menu to close the log and return to the Export dialog You can redisplay the log for the current process by clicking Display Output Optim 7 1 G 1 Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories G 1 3 Step 3 Import Data into New Optim Directory The next step in the Conversion Process is to import the objects into the new Optim Directory Convert Optim Directory Objects Step 3 Import Data into a New Opt i ES n Step 3 you will import and convert the data from the old Optim Directory using this ersion of the Optim Configuration Program The Import step allows you to select the Optim Definitions to be converted and imported into the the New Optim Directory An import can be run at any time as long as the file that contains the exported cl aba AWA Ti lich it E To begin this step select the Import Data into a New Optim Directory check box and click Proceed To skip this step leave the check box blank and click Proceed Installation and Configuration Guide 577 Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects Specify Optim Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog to select the name of the new Directory Optim Directory into which objects are imported lt gt Convert Optim Directory Objects Specify Optim Directory he Optim Configuration program stores
321. est immediately The steps are described in the following paragraphs E 3 1 Schedule a Report Process To schedule a Report Process to run once or repeatedly at a specified future time save the Report Request and select Schedule from the File menu e Processing is initiated at the scheduled time you do not review the Report Process as it is performed e If warning conditions exist processing continues without prompting depending on the Stop on Error parameter you specified on the Steps tab of the Scheduling Job dialog e Ifan error occurs during the Report Process processing stops For details on scheduling refer to the Common Elements Manual Chapter 14 Schedule E 3 2 Run a Report Request To process a Report Request immediately select Run from the File menu It is not necessary to save the Report Request before it is run Before processing begins the Report Request is verified If errors exist you can review the details on the message bar at the bottom of the Report Request Editor e After the Report Request has been verified the process parameters are verified If warnings or errors exist you can review the details in the Warnings dialog and choose to continue or cancel the process During processing the Report Request Progress dialog displays the progress of the process and allows you to cancel the process e Ifan error occurs during the Report Process processing stops Installation and Configuration G
322. etup process from the command line using the following command setup silent options lt file name gt For example if setupopts is in the users name directory enter the following setup silent options users name setupopts If you are upgrading or installing on a machine that has one or more Servers installed in another directory you must manually shut down all Server processing To shut down a Server you must log on as the processing user account for each Server and run the following command before manually shutting the Server down rt mw bin mwadm stop Syntax The syntax conventions used to describe setupopts are parameter Parameters can be entered in UPPER lower or Mixed case Defaults are shown in bold text text Variable parameter text is shown in lowercase italics Delimiter for optional keywords or parameters Delimiter for a choice from which you must select one Separates options W LicensePanel selection 1 2 P installLocation installdirectory P ProgramFeature active true false P ODBCFeature active true false P SampleFeature active true false P ODMFeature active true false Installation and Configuration Guide 351 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux W ConfigureODMPromptPanel ConfigureODMChoice 1 2 W ODM LicensePanel ODMLicenseField licensepath W UpdateFilesPanel Update_rtsetenv 0
323. evel Click Audit Tables to open a dialog on which you can select tables to be audited on a site basis Active User Select this option to activate auditing at the site level Inactive and allow users to establish auditing for the workstation Click Audit Tables to open a dialog on which you can select tables to be audited on a site basis This option enables the auditing feature in Personal Options see Auditing Active on page 310 Users can select additional tables to audit but cannot disable auditing for tables audited on a site basis Select this option to disable the auditing feature No users can audit Choose whether to require user supplied values in columns that cannot accept default values This option applies to new rows that a user inserts while editing a database table Note Yes No Optim can provide a default value according to the data type Possible values include blank NULL zero current date current time or current timestamp Select this option to require a user supplied value for every column that cannot accept a default value If you select this option the User Supplies Defaults check box in Personal Options or Edit Preferences for the Table Editor is unavailable See User Supplies Defaults on page 309 for more information Select this option if your site does not require user supplied values for columns that cannot accept a default value Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor User Select thi
324. eviously provide a company Name and ID the Specify Company Name dialog will appear before the Sign Optim Exit dialog See 3 6 Specifying a Company Name and ID on page 60 for more information 54 Optim 7 1 3 4 Changing a Signed Optim Exit 3 4 Changing a Signed Optim Exit After you sign an exit you can sign a different exit or switch between the default exit and a user supplied exit by selecting Options gt Sign Optim Exit from the Configuration main window amp Optim Configuration Joj x File Tasks Options Help License Processing t Sign Optim Exit Configure Company Name 20 43 Build 2116 Toolbar v Status Bar Customize Toolbar Optim Directory Select Tasks gt Configure the First Workstation or Tasks gt Create Update Optim Directory to create a Optim Directory X Specify and Sign User Exit Selecting this option displays the Sign Optim Exit dialog described in 3 5 The Sign Optim Exit Dialog on page 56 Installation and Configuration Guide 55 3 Signing an Optim Exit 3 5 The Sign Optim Exit Dialog 56 Optim will automatically display the Sign Optim Exit dialog anytime you execute the Configuration program if a signed exit does not exist You also can manually display that dialog by selecting Options gt Sign Optim Exit from the Configuration main window Sign Optim Exit olx Optim he Optim Exit validates that a user is authorized to use O
325. extract etc the name of the process request the time the process started and period for which it has been running Verify settings in the pstserv configuration file used to configure the system for running the Server Verify the settings in the pstlocal configuration file which provides settings for local operation using the command line or ODBC Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration A 2 5 RT4S Shell Script The RT4S shell script is used to start or stop the Server from init 1 processing and should be executed as part of the system boot procedure only Generally the RT4S script does not need modification You must change the script however if the Server is installed in a directory other than the default directory opt IBM Optim rt or if the Server will be run under a user account other than root The script contains areas that allow you to modify the following environment variables Set PSTHOME PSTHOME directory rt to define the directory containing the Server Set PSTUSER PSTUSER user to identify a user other than root Symbolic Links A symbolic link allows a filename in one directory to point to a file in another directory To start up and shut down the Server as part of init processing you must create symbolic links to the RT4S script in the following directories e rc2 d where 2 is the run level for startup e rcl d where 1 is the run level for shutdown The location of the rc2 d and rc1 d dir
326. f Configuration 3 Metadata o Ge E Machines Value NAV Primary ODM bindings NAV Select the Properties tab 3 4 Expand the misc list 5 From the codepage list select UTF 8 6 From the File menu select Save All Installation and Configuration Guide 537 Appendix F Open Data Manager F 2 Define the ODM Data Source on the Primary Server A data source definition on the primary server is needed to access archived data You can define a data source for each Archive File and Archive File Collection or specify the Archive File or Archive File Collection in an ODBC or JDBC connection string see F 6 Runtime Connection Information Procedures for defining a data source on a secondary server are described in F 3 Secondary Server Configuration Conventions The conventions used to describe these statements are KEYWORD Keywords are shown in uppercase for emphasis but can be specified in lower or mixed case text Variable text is shown in lowercase italics An optional keyword or argument is shown in bolded square brackets A choice of settings from which only one must be selected is shown in bolded curved brackets Separates options Data Source A data source definition is expressed in XML as follows Definition lt DATASOURCE NAME datasourcename TYPE PST_GDB READONLY true gt lt CONFIG DIRDB pstdirectoryname ARCV_FILE
327. figuration File to be updated To select from your system directories click the grid cell and click the browse button Each time you enter a Product Configuration File you are prompted for the corresponding password The password is set in Product Options When you enter the password for a Product Configuration File the first time the password is saved for future updates to the Product Configuration File For security reasons the password displays as a series of asterisks Click Edit to display the Product Options Editor for the corresponding Product Configuration File Select the check box to include the corresponding Product Configuration File to be updated Click Update to update each selected Product Configuration File with the new endpoint information Optim 7 1 6 9 Archive Tab 6 9 Archive Tab Archive Directory Archive Index Directory Archive Index Browse Directory Use the Archive tab to enter the path to the default Archive Archive Index and Archive Browse Index Directories for the Server Optim Server Settings ol x General Errors Load Connection Access Startup Security Endpoints Archive Retention Status ERE Archive Directory Archive Index Directory Archive Browse Index Directory Defaults Undo Configuration OK Cancel Apply Help Ready Specify the complete path to the default directory where you want the Server to store Archive Fil
328. figuration Guide 515 Appendix E Security Reports Archive Criteria Source File Archive Details Compare Details Formatting Notify 516 Parameters needed to select entries in the Archive Directory for the report The Archive Criteria tab is available when Report Type on the General tab is set to Archive Directory For more information see the Archive User Manual 7 2 2 Archive Criteria Tab Parameters needed to select an Archive or Compare File for the report The Source File tab is available when Report Type on the General tab is set to File For more information see the Archive User Manual 7 2 3 Source File Tab or Compare User Manual 6 2 2 Source File Tab Layout and row display options for the report The Archive Details tab is available when Report Type on the General tab is set to File and the Source File is an Archive File For more information see the Archive User Manual 7 2 4 Archive Details Layout and row display options for the report The Compare Details tab is available when Report Type on the General tab is set to File and the Source File is a Compare File For more information see the Compare User Manual 6 2 3 Compare Details Tab Limits spacing and table heading options for the report The defaults for formatting options are set in Product Options The Formatting tab is available only when Report Type on the General tab is set to File Options for automatic email notification of the s
329. figuration program stores information about each database connection in a DB Alias Select the Create New option to create a single new DB Alias the Create Select Multiple option to create or select multiple DB Aliases From a Single DB ij Berver or the Use Existing option to use an existing DB Alias then click lt Proceed gt to is nanbinue electing lt Skin alen in thnse n an NA en e a DR Alia Although you can select the option to Create New and follow the steps for each database the option to Create Select Multiple saves time by allowing you to set specifications for each database at the same time On the Create Select DB Alias dialog select the option to Create Select Multiple For a Single DB Server Sybase SQL Server Informix and click Proceed 11s Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation The Configuration program opens the Specify DB Alias DBMS dialog i Configure First Workstation Specify DB Alias DBMS he Optim Configuration program can create a DB Alias for an existing database Select a he DBMS type and version for the database that you want to configure then click Proceed gt Note Support for some of the listed DBMS versions may have been discontinued by the vendor forate SY foineteasezie2 _Previous_ ue __ cancel _ Select the DBMS Type and Version and click Proceed The Connect to Database dialog is displayed next amp Configure First Workstation Connect to Data
330. for Avssesiceiseseminaie 83 620 CRC ALND paynet 7579 CS HMNITION OF tsaro 6 export registry data s es 137 maintain ACCESS 00 ceeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeneees 203 purge registry entry cece 243 MEOISUY CMU sornes E 7 specify DBMS sparrannan 80 table identifier cc ee eeeeeees 7 145 typical configuration cc ceeeeeeeeeees 6 Workstation ACCESS s s s 191 Optim Exit Prerequisities for a User Supplied Exit 52 Pe pened eaten came vwiaiwosst 405 Writing a User Supplied Exit 51 405 Optim Exit in UNIX Invalid Credentials Specified dialog 407 Sign Optim Exit Failed dialog 408 409 Signing a User Supplied Exit 413 416 Signing an Exit during Setup 346 347 Signing Methods 406 407 Signing the default Exit after Installation AW icicles N 412 Optim Exit in Windows Changing a Signing Exit owe 55 Sign Optim Exit dialog 0 0 0 0 56 59 Signing an Exit during Configuration 53 54 Specify Company Name dialog 60 Optim Security Access Control Domain 444 450 Access Control List 006 444 469 Assigning Privileges s s s 457 change administrator 128 147 File Access Definition 444 478 Malie sarne 128 147 Object Association Privileges 467 Security Administrator 00 0 0 128 users in multiple roles 0 00 00 eee 458 Opti Server sirike 2 Access defaults ssesissrsiresnorsstiissasss 163 Archive defaults
331. for the registry entry you want to purge the Configuration program prompts you to confirm the Directory name Select the check box and click Proceed to purge the registry entry for the named Optim Directory Next the Configuration program opens a query dialog that prompts you to purge the registry entry for another Optim Directory To purge another select the check box and click Proceed to open the Specify Optim Directory dialog and select another Optim Directory Installation and Configuration Guide 243 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 7 19 Purge DB Alias Specify Optim Directory Create Select DB Alias Confirm Purge DB Alias 244 Select Purge DB Alias from the Tasks menu to delete a DB Alias from an Optim Directory without connecting to the database This task does not drop packages plans or procedures created with the DB Alias nor does it drop sample or other tables accessed using the DB Alias You may purge a DB Alias any time you drop a database for example when a database used for testing applications is dropped after testing is completed You may also purge a DB Alias to make a database temporarily inaccessible to the workstations using Optim Note To reinstate a purged DB Alias refer to 7 1 Create Update DB Alias Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see page 185 to select the name of the Optim Directory in which the DB Alias entry you want to purge is located Click Proceed to open the nex
332. fore it is hashed This parameter helps ensure that certain characters are eliminated so essentially equivalent values will result in HASH_ LOOKUP resolving to the same lookup table row For example if you choose to trim commas from the source value the values Smith John and Smith John will each be hashed to the same value For example you might specify the following before hashing TRIM to remove hyphens TRIM to remove spaces and hyphens TRIM u to convert source value to uppercase TRIM u to remove spaces and hyphens and convert source value to uppercase TRIM to remove right parentheses and backslashes e Option to allow Optim Relationships on views You can now define Optim primary keys and relationships for database views XX Optim 7 1 Summary of Release 6 5 Support for DBMS Optim supports the leading database management systems Oracle Versions IBM DB2 z OS and DB2 LUW Sybase Adaptive Server Enterprise ASE Microsoft SQL Server and IBM Informix Optim 6 5 introduces toleration support for the following new releases of databases e Informix 11 e DB22Z OS 9 1 e DB2 LUW 9 5 e Support for XML columns in Oracle 10g and later carried as LOB Installation and Configuration Guide xxi About this Guide Summary of Release 6 4 xxii Expanded Support for Optim Server Support for DBMS Versions The following enhancements have been made for release 6 4 of Optim Long Obje
333. from accessing an Optim Directory and or DB Alias when performing delegated tasks Optim Directory Select an Optim Directory from the list to display the connection information for the corresponding DB Aliases Grid Details The connection information for the selected Optim Directory includes the following Note The maximum length for a User ID or password varies by DBMS DB Alias User ID Password Verify Connection String Always Fail Connection Description DB Aliases in the selected Optim Directory Identifier 1 to 30 characters that allows the Server to use a particular DB Alias User IDs are usually assigned and maintained by the database administrator Note Ifyou are using Informix you must enter the User ID in uppercase for an ANSI database and in lowercase for a non ANSI database Enter a password 1 to 30 characters that allows the Server to access a database using the specified DB Alias Reenter the password for verification Connection string the Server uses to access a database using the specified DB Alias Select this check box to deny access to the corresponding DB Alias You can use this check box to temporarily deny access to a DB Alias without having to remove the connection string Text that describes or explains the purpose of the logon record Merge Current User Click Merge Current User to merge the Connection settings from the Current User registry to the Local Machine regist
334. fy Personal Options dialog 246 Optim 7 1 8 1 Open the Product Options Editor Within Optim To Configure Product Options within Optim 1 In the main window select Product from the Options menu to open the Enter Product Options Password dialog 2 Specify the case sensitive password to open the Product Options dialog The initial distributed password is optim 3 Specify the necessary details on each tab in Product Options 4 Choose one of the following e Click Cancel to close the Product Options dialog without saving your changes e Click Apply to save your changes and continue using the Product Options dialog e Click OK to save your changes and close the Product Options dialog Installation and Configuration Guide 247 8 Product Options 8 2 Using the Editor The Product Options dialog allows you to customize various features and display options in Optim Several tabs in the Product Options dialog allow you to review and set the options as required Product Options SAMPLE_US ha Tabs The tabs in the Product Options dialog are described briefly in the following paragraphs Detailed information is provided in each section of this chapter General Establish the maximum number of rows that can be read from a table when browsing or editing table data or using Point and Shoot and the maximum number of rows that can be extracted or archived during a single process Also choose a default
335. g a DB Alias seee 99 creating Optim Directory s 87 Browse tab Personal Options 313 314 AULO SWIECH sc acaisesdsadndecerwscerdivavasedeavaias 313 display changed data cee 314 display column attributes 0 0 0 0 313 display row count oo cece eects 314 maximum exclude rows eee 314 side label display cece 313 Buffer Pool index defaults ssntocsiesaioswesidenpiacanie 299 C Cascade Delete Update Option 250 328 Column Map Procedures sample sacannccieinctiandteanes 601 Command Line Interface 429 439 EXAMPlES isseassacasoicenedennseatascaraes 438 439 KY WOLS sssscssetieignsdsaszsneceacieists 432 437 Da n T b S E E 431 syntax guidelines sismes 429 Commit Frequency cccccee ee eeeeceeees 252 Configuration browse SQL etiain 75 command buttons ssseeeeeeeeeee 74 completion files sssssesiaresrenenrs 138 dialog features sieis ioiii ii 73 display SQL isaer a 74 main WndOWsisreesisende userek 62 menu commands sssr eeee 63 planning fOr saienitisi tkn kin 10 processing log sesser 70 73 Tasks ment spinazie 2y TF Configuration Assistant additional workstations eee 140 description Of gacissccisiecicccntesedevstiexiianie 71 first WOrkKStatlON ssciasssscrsesestnsreyeennt 72 Configuration File Product Options 257 258 current Configuration File name ee path to new Configuration File 258 switch to new file when created
336. g large quantities of data by allowing multiple threads to process rows in parallel Allow Parallel Select this check box to enable Maximum Processing Database Connections Maximum Database Increase the maximum number of concurrent Connections database connections for an Archive Extract or Delete Process You can select an even number of maximum database connections from 2 though 32 or Maximum Your selection enables Database Connections on the Archive Extract and Delete Request Editors and Maximum Database Connections in Personal Options see Maximum Database Connections on page 327 MBCS Roundtrip Options for handling characters that could cause round trip conversion Processing issues in a multi byte Optim Directory or DB Alias Optim uses the Unicode character set in dialogs and to process data In some multi byte character sets such as Oracle JA16SJIS multiple characters are mapped to the same Unicode character When these characters are converted from Unicode back to multi byte a round trip the original character may not be returned Archive Extract Select an option for handling round trip conversion Requests issues during Archive or Extract processing Stop Processing Stop processing when a multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Each row of data is checked for characters that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Installation and Configuration Guide
337. g tables and indexes in Oracle and creating indexes in DB2 z OS Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Target SQL is generated based on the values of the objects in a Source File If you specify zero 0 the storage related clause in the SQL statement is omitted Using any value other than zero results in a percentage of the source value being used in the target clause Default Specify a default tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace for creating new indexes based on one of the following Table Create an index in the same tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace as the owning table Source Create an index in the same tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace as the index referenced in the Source File Explicit Create an index in a particular tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace If you select this option you must specify the appropriate default If you select lt Default gt the default set in the database is used Buffer Pool The buffer pool e g BP1 that is to be used when creating an Index You can enter a specific value for the buffer pool or select a value from the list Buffer Pool is displayed only for DB2 z OS The list displays any index buffer pools already specified for this DB Alias i e on the Index Defaults tab of the DB Alias Editor as well as the following lt DEFAULT gt Select to use the default buffer pool specified by DB2 z OS When creating an index Optim does not generate a B
338. g to provide the connection information that allows the Configuration program to connect to the database and then configure Optim Directory tables Configure First Workstation Connect to Database _ Of x Optim he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to configure the Optim irectory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to create the ptim Directory Tables Optim Directory OPTIMDIR Database Connection Parameters User ID Connection String optusr4 QOR922K Password Ready The Connect to Database dialog prompts for the following Database Connection Parameters Optim Directory Previously entered Optim Directory name Database Connection User ID Enter a User ID up to 30 characters that the DBMS Parameters requires to allow access to the Optim Directory database instance Password Enter a password up to 30 characters that corresponds 82 to the specified User ID Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Connection Enter the name or string needed to access the Optim String Directory database Note If you are using DB2 the term is Database Name or Alias Oracle uses DB Alias Sybase ASE uses Server Name SQL Server uses System Data Source Name and Informix uses Host Name Syntax is described in the DBMS documentation DB Name Enter the name of the Sybase ASE SQL Server or Informix database instance for the Optim Directory
339. gistry entry on each additional workstation to permit access to the Optim Directory You may also configure Personal Options for each workstation Note Ifthe configuration at your site requires you may create a separate Product Configuration File for an individual workstation however the typical installation uses one Configuration File that is easily accessible to all users When you configure additional workstations the following guidelines apply Even if you install Optim on a server that allows access to each workstation you must run Setup before configuring each additional workstation This step ensures that the Windows registry for the workstation is properly prepared and desktop icons are created Ifyou run Setup for a workstation with the Optim software on a file server you must identify the server directory in which Optim is installed as the Destination Folder You can start the process of configuring additional workstations in the following ways Start the Configuration Assistant immediately after Setup completes Clear the Configure the First Workstation check box and click Proceed On the next dialog select the Configure Additional Workstation check box e Select Configuration Assistant from the Help menu on the Configuration main window Clear the Configure the First Workstation check box and click Proceed On the next dialog select the Configure Additional Workstation check box Select Configure Addit
340. gs for them have no effect Notes e Ifa user is included in multiple roles in the list the most restrictive permission applies e Unless the AC Type for the Column List entry is None the Column Access Control list includes a Default setting This default cannot be deleted and applies to users for which no explicit permissions are granted Type the name or use the drop down list to select the name of a role defined in the ACD You can also edit a role name To remove a role name use the Remove commands in the shortcut menu The type of access permissions for the role Select one of the following Allow The role is allowed access to the column Deny The role is denied access to the column You must select either Allow or Deny for Default Roles for which both Allow and Deny are blank assume the permission selected for Default Note Ifa role is denied access to any file attachment pseudocolumn in an Archive File the role cannot use the Archive File in a Delete Restore Update or Insert Process 489 Appendix D Optim Security Shortcut Menu Right click the Column Access Control list to display the following Commands shortcut menu commands Remove Remove the selected role from the list This command is not available for Default Remove All Remove all roles except Default from the list Allow all non default Allow access for all listed roles except Default Deny all non default Deny access f
341. haracters The ACD for the role Select the Allow All Functional and Object Association Privileges check box to allow the role all Functional if editing the Default ACD and Object Association Privileges When this check box is selected the Allow All and Allow check boxes are selected and cannot be cleared Also the Allow All Deny All and Clear All command buttons and the shortcut menus are unavailable When the check box is cleared the Allow All and Allow check boxes remain selected but can be cleared The Role Specifications dialog includes the following tabs Users The user and group accounts in the role Functional Access privileges to functions for accounts in the role Privileges Note The Functional Privileges tab is available only from the Default ACD Object Permissions to use the ACD to secure Optim objects Association for accounts in the role Privileges Use the Users tab to add and delete user and group accounts in a role A user or group account from a network domain up to 256 characters for users and up to 85 characters for groups The network domain or UNIX node name that includes the user or group account Type of account If entering the account manually select the correct Type to validate the account The identifier for the user account used to create or last modify the entry The date and time the account was created or last modified Optim 7 1 D 1 Access Control Domain Description
342. hat are fetched to browse or edit table data or for Point and Shoot If you do not specify a value the default value is 1000 A user can establish a lower Maximum Fetch Rows limit by selecting Personal from the Options menu and editing the Display tab 249 8 Product Options Site Defaults Cascade Delete Rule 250 Maximum Specify the maximum number of rows 1 to Extract Rows 999999999 that can be processed during a single Extract or Archive Process If you do not specify a value the default value is 100000 A Row Limit for an Archive or Extract Process cannot exceed this value The site specific default Calendar used to schedule action requests or to age data in a Column Map Calendar Select a site default Calendar To select from a list of available calendars click the down arrow You can select a different calendar on a process request as needed Set options for performing a cascading delete or update on tables that are not explicitly included in an Access Definition or a process Warn on Click the down arrow to choose when to display a Cascade warning if a cascading delete or update may occur Delete Update User Allow the user to determine when to Runtime Saving Access Definition display a warning This is the default setting The corresponding Warn on Cascade Delete Update setting in Personal Options is enabled See Warn on Cascade on page 309 for more information Display a cascade d
343. he Access Control Domains dialog 2 The next step depends on your purpose e To create a new ACD select New ACD from the Tools menu in the Access Control Domains dialog to open the Access Control Domain Editor e To edit an existing ACD double click the grid row to display the desired ACD in the Access Control Domain Editor 3 Optional In the Access Control Domain Editor right click the Role List and select New or Open from the shortcut menu to open the Role Specifications dialog and define or edit roles in the Role Specifications dialog Save the role Save the ACD Optional Edit the ACL for the ACD Click OK to save the ACD N On f These steps are the minimum required to create an ACD Refer to D 1 1 Access Control Domain Editor for complete details Access Control Domains List The Access Control Domains dialog lists all ACDs in the Optim Directory You must use this dialog to open the Access Control Domain Editor needed to create a new ACD or edit an existing ACD From the Access Control Domains dialog you can also list any FADs and ACLs that are based upon a listed ACD which may be useful when maintaining ACDs The list may help you to select an ACD to serve as the basis for a new FAD or ACL or to analyze the potential downstream effect of a change to the ACD Also from the list you can display an Installation and Configuration Guide 447 Appendix D Optim Security Permissions Needed to Create
344. he Configuration program provides an option to copy these relationships to the Optim Directory You can start this process by selecting Create Copies of DB2 MVS Relationships from the Tasks menu or by selecting the Configuration Assistant from the Help menu Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see page 185 to select the name of the Optim Directory Click Proceed to open the next dialog in the process Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog see page 207 to specify the DB Alias for the DB2 z OS database where the relationships are to be copied Click Proceed to open the next dialog If you select a DB Alias for a database that is not a DB2 z OS database the Configuration program displays the Not a DB2 for MVS Database dialog This dialog prompts you to return to the Create Select DB Alias dialog using Previous to select another DB Alias To continue click Proceed If you select a DB Alias for a DB2 z OS database the Configuration program prompts you to confirm that relationships are to be copied using the Create Copies of DB2 MVS Relationships dialog Select the check box and click Proceed to copy the relationships to the Optim Directory After the DB2 z OS relationships are copied to the Optim Directory the Configuration program prompts you to copy relationships for another DB Alias If so the Create Select DB Alias dialog opens allowing you to choose another DB Alias If not the process completes Installation and Configu
345. he Name assigned to your company Password the Password assigned to your company These parameters are positional so you must enter them in the order shown above The install directory parameter install_directory rt is required the remaining parameters Id Name and Password are optional If you specify a Name you also must specify the company s Id If the company s Name contains spaces type the name in double quotes such as Sample Company If you specify a Password you also must specify the company s Id and Name The following examples show three different ways of using the opmusign script to sign a user supplied exit following Optim installation In all three examples the path for the Optim installation directory is users roberts rtinstalled Do the following to sign your user supplied exit after installation 1 2 Shut down the Optim Server if it is running Change to the users roberts rtinstalled rt directory Notice the rt subdirectory appended to the install directory this is required Run the opmusign script in the rt sbin subdirectory and specify the present working directory In the following example the user specified the system variable pwd to indicate that users roberts rtinstalled rt is the present working directory The pwd variable has the same effect as specifying the directory s full path Optim 7 1 A 5 The Optim Exit in UNIX Console cd users ro
346. he Sign Optim Exit Dialog e Sign the Default Optim Exit Use this option to sign the default Optim Exit The default exit allows all requests by all users within the security limitations defined for each user or user group via the security functionality included in Optim If you select this option you must specify your company Password to sign the default exit Signing the default exit will overlay any previously signed exit If you are replacing a user supplied exit you must have permission in that exit to sign the new exit This is the default option when the State entry is Unsigned e Sign the User Supplied Exit Use this option to sign a user supplied exit See the Optim Initialization Exit Programmer s Guide for information on how to write an exit If you select this option you must specify your company Password to sign the user supplied exit Before you sign a user supplied exit you must copy it to the rt bin directory where you installed Optim This step will overlay any previously signed exit rendering Optim unusable until you sign the new exit State This display only entry identifies the current state of your exit Code Meaning Unsigned A signed exit does not exist or was not found This is the standard status after the initial installation of an Optim release You must sign a valid exit to use Optim Valid A signed exit exists No action is required in response to this status unless you want t
347. he data to convert by typing SQL SELECT statements or using a batch file You can also create a file that includes an XML schema describing Archive File data The Archive File to XML Convertor requires Java JRE release 1 4 or later To open the Archive File to XML Convertor run the atoxml jar executable file located in the ODM java subdirectory of the Optim installation directory For batch and command line documentation refer to the Archive File to XML Convertor online help available from the Help menu Interactive Tab Use the Interactive tab to type an SQL STATEMENT that specifies the data to convert iem Optim Archive File To XML Convertor Of x Fie Help Interactive Batch Parameters Server flocalhost 2551 Data Source sample Root Name froot Generate p Mode j I Schema Element Maximum Rows fio Rowset Name rows M XML C Attribute Execute I zonis Messages Parameters Server The machine name of the ODM Server followed by a colon and the port number If the default port number 2551 is used the port number can be omitted Data Source The data source for the Archive File Installation and Configuration Guide 557 Appendix F Open Data Manager Generate Mode Execute SQL Select Messages Output 558 Maximum Rows Root Name Rowset Name Schema XML Element Attribute The maximum number of row
348. he latest release notice and revision history is included Optim Archive Select Optim Archive ODBC Interface to install version 3 51 of the ODBC Interface Open Data Base Connectivity ODBC Application Programming Interface API Selecting this component registers the Optim ODBC Interface driver with ODBC on your workstation Note If your workstation has an earlier version of ODBC installed selecting this component will upgrade the API to ODBC version 3 51 42 Optim 7 1 2 1 Run Setup Optim ODM Interface Sample Files 5 x PST Directory Conversion Select Optim ODM Interface to install Open Data Manager ODM which is typically used with integrated applications such as Optim Oracle E Business Suite Solution ODM requires a product license If you select this option see Appendix F Open Data Manager for ODM installation instructions Select Sample Files to install sample Extract Visual Basic and Column Map Exit files see Appendix H Samples for further information 5 x PST Directory Conversion is selected by default to install files required for converting PST Directory objects created using version 5 x into a format suitable for use with Optim version 6 0 and later See G 1 Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories on page 567 for details Clear the check box unless you are upgrading from an earlier version of Optim To continue click Next Installation and Configuration Guide 43 2 Installation Setup
349. he left or right and still see the selected databases Database Name Name assigned to the database when it was created DB Alias Description Text that describes or explains the purpose of the DB Alias Procedure Qualifier Enter a high level qualifier for stored procedures If blank the entry on the Stored Procedure Defaults tab is used Procedure Action Select options to create refresh procedures or use existing procedures To select an option click in the grid cell and click the down arrow Grant Auth ID Enter an identifier for authorized users to maintain stored procedures Specify a User ID Group Name or Public If blank the entry on the Stored Procedure Defaults tab is used Logon User ID Specify an identifier up to 30 characters required to logon to the DB Alias to create refresh stored procedures If blank the entry on the Logon Defaults tab is used Installation and Configuration Guide 229 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Logon Password Enter a password up to 30 characters required to logon to the DB Alias to create refresh stored procedures If blank the entry on the Logon Defaults tab is used Display SQL Select this check box to display SQL statements before dropping or creating stored procedures Logon Defaults Tab Use the Logon Defaults tab to specify the User ID and Password needed to create refresh stored procedures Update the DBMS Version for a DB Alias Update Multiple DB A
350. heck box is applicable to SQL Server and Sybase ASE DB Aliases only When Replace is specified in a Load Request data loaded to the affected tables is truncated unless the particular table is partitioned in which case the truncate action will fail Select this check box to issue the SQL Delete statement when the SQL Truncate statement fails Note The SQL Delete statement may be significantly more resource intensive than the SQL Truncate statement Loader Parameters Additional Loader Parameters Force at Run Time Use to prime New Request Installation and Configuration Guide Define additional loader parameters as required to append to the list created by Optim for loading data with a DBMS loader See DBMS documentation for valid operands Select to force the use of the additional loader parameters defined in Product Options in place of any additional loader parameters specified in a particular Load Request Select to populate new Load Requests with the additional loader parameters defined in Product Options These parameters may be edited in the individual Load Requests as necessary 275 8 Product Options 8 2 9 Report Tab Limits Spacing 276 Use the Report tab to set formatting defaults for the Report Process B Product Options Set default limits for the output of the Report Process Rows per Table Specify the maximum number of rows 1 to 99999999 that can be reported on during a s
351. ications dialog without adding any users or groups to the role To list groups for a specific user right click the user name and select Display Groups for User from the shortcut menu To redisplay all group accounts in the domain click Refresh Select a single user or group account by clicking the name or select multiple user or group accounts by holding the Ctrl or Shift key while clicking the names To select all accounts in a list click Select All To deselect all accounts in a list click Deselect All Click Add to add the selected accounts to the role and redisplay the Role Specifications dialog Both the Functional Privileges tab and the Object Association Privileges tab are divided into two grids one for privilege classes and the second for privileges that are included in the selected privilege class If Allow All Functional and Object Association Privileges for the Default ACD or Allow All Object Association Privileges for this Role is selected the role is granted all privileges in all privilege classes To grant or deny selected privileges to a role you must clear this option By selecting Allow All or Deny All for a privilege class you select corresponding check boxes for the associated privileges For example you can allow accounts in a role to secure action requests by selecting Installation and Configuration Guide 457 Appendix D Optim Security Privilege Classes Grid Privileges Grid Users in Multiple Role
352. ick No to skip this step then click Next Optim Server Setup gt InstallShield You must sign the default exit or a custom exit supplied by you to use Optim but you can only sign the default exit during setup See A 5 The Optim Exit in UNIX for detailed information on the Optim default exit and user supplied exits Note If you want to sign a custom user supplied exit you must run a script file called opmusign following installation as described in A 5 7 Signing a User Supplied Exit in UNIX If you select Yes on the Sign Optim Exit dialog to sign the default exit setup will open a separate terminal window to sign the default exit Terminal prOsign d setup home roberts rtinstalled rt Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to your company ld E 346 Optim 7 1 A l Installation Specify your Type your company credentials when prompted for that information Company ID Name Your company credentials consist of the company Id Name and and Password Password assigned to your organization when you received Optim All three entries are case sensitive and you must enter them in the format provided to you Press Enter after each prompt to display the next prompt After you specify your company Id for example press Enter to display the Name prompt Window Edit Options Help prOsign d setup home yroberts rtinstalled rt Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to
353. ies Default number of times the Column Map Shuffle Function will refetch a replacement value until a value that does not match the source row is found a retry The Shuffle Function retry parameter overrides this default Using a high retry value with columns that contain many duplicate values will increase the processing time For these columns it may be best to use a retry value of zero n Enter a value from 0 1000 Enter 0 to allow a replacement value to match the source The default is 10 cmmaxshuffleretries 10 dbconnections Number of database connections for Archive Delete or Extract Processing Multiple database connections allow processing of multiple rows concurrently to improve performance when processing large quantities of data Valid entries are 0 Use one database connection for processing Default In Use the specified number from 2 to 32 of database connections 1 maximum Use the maximum number of connections supported by the Server dbconnections 1 maximum formatnumerics Format of numeric values displayed in process reports 0 Do not format numbers in process reports i e display as nnnnnn Default 1 Format numbers in process reports i e display as nnn nnn formatnumerics 0 Installation and Configuration Guide 377 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux maxcommitfreq maxextractrows onlyidxsearch orausearraydelete reviewdelafterarchiv e re
354. ies the specification for Fetch Buffer Size or Delete Buffer Size by the value for Maximum Database Connections Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor You can select a value from 64K to 1024K in increments of 32 Use the default value unless you are processing tables larger than 10 000 rows Fetch Buffer Size of the buffer used when rows are fetched from Size the database The default is 512K Delete Buffer Size of the buffer used when rows are deleted from Size the database The default is 512K 8 2 3 Configuration File Tab Use the Configuration File tab to review the path for the current Configuration File and set new Configuration File preferences amp Product Options Current Directory path and name of the Configuration File that Optim is Configuration File currently using Name Path to New Specify the directory path for a new or different Configuration File To Configuration File select an existing Configuration File from your system directories click the browse button To create a new Configuration File specify the directory path and file name and then click Create If you do not Installation and Configuration Guide 257 8 Product Options Switch to New File when Created 8 2 4 Password Tab Current Password New Password Confirm New Password 258 specify a full directory path with the file name the current drive and directory are used Select this check box to apply the new Configuration Fil
355. ilure 330 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Send Test eMail Email Transport Activate Collaboration Data Object Transport Set from one of these known Email Servers Exchange Server Name or Internet SMTP Outgoing Server s Name Email Enter an email address to which notification is sent with Addresses a process report at the completion of the process Enter one address per line Right click a grid row and select Send Test eMail to validate the email address Click this button to display the Email Transport dialog so that you may activate and configure the Collaboration Data Object CDO transport to send email If you don t click this button email is sent using the Simple Mail Protocol Transport SMTP Note You must use the CDO transport if the email client on the server requires logon credentials to send an unattended message or requires user input when SMTP is used to send a message Also select the CDO option if the server uses a Microsoft Outlook client version 2000 or later to send messages through a Microsoft Exchange server Email Transport 27 x IV Activate Collaboration Data Object Transport Uncheck to use Simple Mail Transport Protocol Set From one of these known Email Servers custom has Exchange Server Name or Internet SMTP Outgoing Server s Name Port if not standard Sender s mailbox From address Email account logon Logon domain Email account password Send Test Email L
356. im Directory from this workstation you can use the Connect to Database dialog to specify a User ID and Password different from those used to create the Optim Directory You can modify these entries when you configure Personal Options Connect to The name of the Optim Directory is displayed and the Connect to Database Database dialog is populated with values entered when you created the Optim Directory E Configure First Workstation Connect to Database _ OF x Optim he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to configure the Optim irectory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to create the ptim Directory Tables Optim Directory OPTIMDIR Database Connection Parameters User ID Connection String optusr4 QOR922K Password eccceeee Previous Proceed _ Undo Cancel A Optim Directory Name of the Optim Directory to which the registry entry applies Database Connection User ID Enter the User ID up to 30 characters that the Parameters DBMS requires to allow access to the Optim Directory database instance Note For security and other reasons it may be desirable to specify a user account with privileges that differ from those required to configure the workstation Password Enter the password up to 30 characters that corresponds to the specified User ID Installation and Configuration Guide 93 5 Configure Workstations Connection The n
357. im Directory or DB Alias use a percent sign for the name For example o pr0pass a pstdir myuserid mypassword prOpass a dbalias myuserid mypassword This example would provide a password for the following parameters in the configuration file pstdir pstdirl Oracle 8 0 schema connectstr myuserid pstdir pstdir2 Oracle 8 0 schema connectstr myuserid dbalias pstdirl dbaliasl connectstr myuserid dbalias pstdirl dbalias2 connectstr myuserid dbalias pstdir2 dbalias3 connectstr myuserid But would not provide a password for these parameters in the configuration file pstdir pstdir3 Oracle 8 0 schema connectstr otherid dbalias pstdirl dbalias3 connectstr otherid Protecting the By default the owner and the root user have write access to the Password File password file and can use the commands prOpass a or pr0pass d to update the password file To allow other members of the group to update the password file you must use the chmod command to change permissions to the password file For example the following command adds write permission to the group for the pstpass file chmod gtw lt installdir gt etc pstpass This allows members of the group to maintain passwords for their accounts However if members of the group other than the owner have write permission anyone in the group can delete a password or the Installation and Configuration Guide 401 Appendix A Install and Configure
358. im Security Once security has been initialized for an Optim Directory it cannot be undone however the Security Administrator can enable or disable the Optim Security features for the Directory by selecting the Configure Security for an Optim Directory option from the Tasks menu in the Configuration main window If you do not wish to establish security for the Directory click Skip To initialize security at a later time use the Configure Security for an Optim Directory option For more information about enabling disabling and configuring the Optim Security features see 7 4 Configure Security for an Optim Directory on page 192 Click Skip or Cancel to exit the security configuration process Security will not be initialized and the Security Administrator will not be changed Specify Domain Connection Information Use the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog to identify the Security Administrator Enter the Domain User Name and Password for the Security Administrator or click Browse to select a user from the Security Users dialog If you select a user you must Installation and Configuration Guide 129 5 Configure Workstations enter the user password when you return to the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog Configure Securty Specify Domain Connection Information Enter the Password for the specified Domain and User Name Click lt OK gt to validate the connection information and return to the previ
359. im Security To use Optim Security security must be initialized for the Directory Initialize Security Change Security Administrator Security Administrator for this Optim Directory 128 Use the Initialize Security dialog to assign a Security Administrator for the Optim Directory and initialize security If security has been initialized for the Directory this dialog is replaced by the Change Security Administrator dialog which is similar to Initialize Security but with no initialize option Configure First Workstation Initialize Security Optim he Configuration program can initialize the Security Features and assign a Security dminstrator Once initialized Security can only be enabled or disabled by the Security dministrator Click lt Change gt to specify a different Security Administrator Select the nitialize option to Initialize the security features Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action xj e gSkin gt to hynass this sten Optim Directory Security State OPTIMDIR Not Initialized M Security Administrator for this Optim Directory Domain User Name NAtoptusr4 Change M Initialize the Security Feature For this Optim Directory T Initialize Proceed Skip Cancel Oracle Q0R922K Optim Directory displays the Directory name and Security State indicates that security is Not Initialized The Security Administrator is assigned to the Optim Directory
360. im Security on page 128 2 Using the Configuration program enable Archive File Security as described in 7 4 5 Set Archive File Security Option on page 200 3 Edit the Default ACD and any additional ACDs to map roles to network accounts Installation and Configuration Guide 443 Appendix D Optim Security Access Control Domains Access Control List File Access Definition 444 4 Create and edit each FAD using roles in the appropriate ACD 5 Reference the appropriate FAD in each Archive Request used to create secured Archive Files The Access Control Domain is a security definition that serves as the foundation for all levels of Optim Security Each Optim Directory for which Optim Security is initialized contains an ACD named Default that cannot be deleted Depending upon the needs of your facility you may create additional ACDs or use only the Default ACD Each ACD includes a list of roles Each role represents a logical grouping of user and group accounts in your network Typically you might assign names of roles to convey the capabilities of the accounts represented by the role Examples of role names might be GUEST NORMAL and SUPER User and group accounts are mapped to one or more roles as appropriate The role specifications in the Default ACD are referenced for Functional Security if enabled for the Optim Directory Also the role specifications in the Default or other ACD a
361. im Server Setup When you click Next setup displays information about the shell scripts and configuration files to help you select files to modify You can scroll the display to read information about each file Optim Server Setup Installation and Configuration Guide 343 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux For new installations a working version and a sample version of each shell script and configuration file are installed The sample version of each file has the file extension sam For upgrade installations only the sample scripts and files are installed and existing samples are automatically renamed with the extension bak This feature prevents overwriting of your working scripts and files and allows you to compare existing versions with new sample versions When you click Next you are prompted to edit each shell script and configuration file Optim Server Setup InsteliiStielia The RTSETENV shell script is included in a user profile or login script to define the operating environment for the Server This script sets up the Server daemon or command line environment on login A UNIX environment requires certain environment variables to create default settings For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to A 2 3 RTSETENV Shell Script The RTSERVER shell script contains a series of useful commands that allow you to manipulate the Server process This scr
362. im and the ODM Server prior to starting the installation Use the following procedure to shut down both Optim and the ODM Server rtserver stop irpcdshutdown mwadm stop Notes e Do not use mwadm stop prior to invoking irpcdshutdown otherwise you may not be able to restart Optim To shut down Optim only do not invoke mwadm stop Installation and Configuration Guide 533 Appendix F Open Data Manager F 1 4 Attunity Studio Configuration Attunity Studio is used to configure the ODM Server environment from a Windows machine Adding an ODM To add an ODM Server to Attunity Studio Server to Attunity 1 Open Attunity Studio from the Attunity folder in the Studio Windows Programs list 2 In the Configuration explorer right click Machines and select Add Machine from the shortcut menu to open the Add machine dialog 534 Optim 7 1 F 1 Installation 3 In the Add machine dialog enter the Host name IP address or localhost for the machine hosting Attunity Studio fj Aad machine Add machine Define new machine TOEL 4 Use the default Port 2551 5 If anonymous logon is not allowed enter the User name and Password needed to connect to the machine Installation and Configuration Guide 535 Appendix F Open Data Manager Edit Windows An ODM Server on a Windows machine must be configured to run a Workspace Server s
363. in TAD as edni emie i geome baad Pa ee Gene Steeda 286 92 3 Display Tab occ esc ea E a hae Meee teks Vee eas 287 2A Eros TaD oop betas Sse heineue hits anced anlage ented 290 9 2 5 Scheduling Tab ic cick di eattlete ate iw EES 292 PO TAD ecrini tani Abia duh eters E ia EE D EAE E 293 O20 Create TAD eed ia capes doe teh clea eee eee 294 BE Loron TAD soci coh tri manaa aae eE E REEE ane 303 2S Soner TA eae ve ee he eed EE E E 305 TAB ie titre bad Gah enie aei EEEE Ai EEA 308 O21 Btowse TaD v2 creienre kaiene eE eia ee E 313 BN AKINE Tabee e eaa e a aa a E 315 9 2 13 Removable M dia Tab csc ca ene sees 317 2 PA CMON TAU ooh ik ed a nee be dete ae ace 318 21S Pater TAD sie cast eea doen ge ek eee a eR 324 2 AG Database TAB ooo oid ences west iwi ghee ete ees ein 326 O27 Nouy Tae ii 046 cinthcetohchaede nb bebe E ons 330 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 333 Pool e O lt 6 coco a ve ees Cee tone Se eae wie vs 335 ALl TR Up ids i hereon Maecenas boy bag yes Piel eee a 335 A12 Command Line Installation 0022000 351 A2 Coniigurion oie lee eke eke deeb Beene shen 358 A 2 1 Pstserv Configuration File 02 200 360 A 2 2 Pstlocal Configuration File for the Command Line Utility 370 A235 RISETENY Shell Soipl ereere c 0ce nots ese ea es 386 A24 RTSERVER Shell Setipt cc 00 5 ds kirane eoe ss 387 A25 RTAS Shell Script i cca ccd coe ea Vea eee x 389 A 2 6 LO
364. in null RATING CHAR up to 4 characters cannot contain null UNIT_PRICE DECIMAL dollar amount cannot contain null ON_HAND_INVENTORY INTEGER cannot contain null Primary Keys The ITEM_ID column is the primary key column Relationships The OPTIM_ITEMS table is a parent of the OPTIM_ DETAILS table to other tables through a foreign key on column ITEM_ID Installation and Configuration Guide 595 Appendix H Samples H 1 6 OPTIM_SHIP_TO Table The OPTIM_SHIP_TO table contains order shipping information The OPTIM_SHIP_TO table has the following columns Column Name Data Type and Description CUST_ID CHAR up to 5 characters cannot contain null SHIP_ID SMALLINT cannot contain null ADDRESS VARCHAR up to 50 characters can contain a null value CITY VARCHAR up to 15 characters can contain a null value STATE CHAR 2 character abbreviation can contain a null value ZIP DECIMAL can contain a null value IN_CARE OF VARCHAR up to 30 characters can contain a null value SHIPPING CHANGE DT DATE cannot contains nulls has default value Primary Keys The SHIP_ID column is the primary key column Relationships The OPTIM_SHIP_TO table is a parent of the OPTIM_ SHIP INSTR to other tables table through an Optim relationship on column SHIP_ID The OPTIM_SHIP_TO table is a child of the OPTIM CUSTOMERS table through its Optim relationship on column CUST_ID 596 O
365. information about each database that contains a a Optim Directory in a named registry entry Select the name of a Optim Directory from he list of existing registry names then click lt Proceed gt to continue 578 Optim 7 1 G 1 Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories Connect to The Configuration program must connect to the database in order to Database access the new Optim Directory tables The entries in the Connect to Database dialog are populated with values entered when the Directory was created Convert Optim Directory Objects Connect to Database he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to access the Optim Directory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to perform the belected task Connection String The name or string needed for the server to access the Optim Directory database Password Enter the password up to 30 characters that corresponds to the specified User ID Installation and Configuration Guide 579 Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects Import Optim Directory Definitions Optim Directory Export File Name Optim Definitions Continue Import if Errors Overwrite Existing Definitions 580 After the workstation is connected to the database you can import the objects using the Import Optim Directory Definitions dialog Convert Optim Directory Objects Step 3 Import Optim Directory Defi B EG Optim
366. ing rows of data specify database options for commit frequency and locking tables identify the Product Configuration File and define the password to access Product Options 9 Personal Options Personal use customization of Optim for each workstation You can customize confirmation prompts display features and message text specify database logon and password information set defaults for the schedule browse and create utilities and establish default preferences for browsing and editing database tables xiv Optim 7 1 Appendix A Install and Prepare your system to use the Optim Configure the Server under Server on a Sun Solaris server under UNIX or Linux SPARC Hewlett Packard HP UX server IBM AIX server or a Red Hat Application Server under Linux and modify the corresponding configuration files and shell scripts Appendix B Server Credentials Credentials used with the Optim Server Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks Perform certain configuration tasks while bypassing the graphical user interface for Optim Appendix D Optim Security The three types of Optim Security Functional Security Object Security and Archive File Security as well as the security definitions i e Access Control Domains ACDs Access Control Lists ACLs and File Access Definitions FADs used to establish Optim Security Appendix E Security Reports Create a report on the
367. ing users The user account under which the Server runs The user account under which Optim processes run At installation the default is to run the Server under the Local System Account and Optim processes under the credentials from the initiating workstation The Local System Account is a special account for Services only that has full access to the local machine However the Local System Account cannot access mapped network drives You can provide other Server credentials on the Startup tab and the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet and the Server tab of Personal Options For UNIX or Linux you can specify Server credentials using the filelogon parameter of the pstserv configuration file pstserv cfg and the server parameter of the pstlocal configuration file pstlocal cfg Note For information about the Optim Server Settings applet see Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server for details about Personal Options see 9 2 9 Server Tab on page 305 and for information about UNIX and Linux configuration files see A 2 Configuration on page 358 B 1 1 Credentials to Run the Server 418 Credentials to run the Server are determined by the following Windows The Startup tab of the Optim Server Settings applet If not using the Local System account you provide the credentials in User ID Password and Domain UNIX or Linux The User ID under which the Server prOsvce daemon is executed After startup the Us
368. ingle Report Process Lines per Page Specify the maximum number of lines per page 1 to 999 for the report Line Length Specify the maximum number of characters per line 1 to 999 for the report Character Column Specify the maximum number of characters per Width column 1 to 999 for the report Set default spacing preferences for the output of the Report Process Blank Lines Specify the number of blank lines to insert Between Rows between each row in the report Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor Minimum Spaces Between Columns Blank Lines Between Levels Spaces to Indent Subordinate Tables Installation and Configuration Guide Specify the number of blank spaces to insert between each column in the report Specify the number of blank lines to insert between each level of related tables when Show Joins is enabled and related tables are joined Archive File Report only Specify the number of blank spaces to indent rows from each subordinate joined table in the report Archive File Report only 277 8 Product Options 278 Optim 7 1 9 Personal Options You can use Personal Options to customize Optim for use at each workstation For example you can e Specify default data directories set user defined database logon and password information and select other options to customize display features and message text Provide defaults for the Schedule and Create utilities and the Load Edit and B
369. install the Optim Archive ODBC Interface feature ODBCFeature active tru P SampleFeature active Install sample Extract Files true false P Install sample Extract Files Do not install the sample Extract Files SampleFeature active tru P ODM Feature active Installation and Configuration Guide Install the Optim Open Data Manager ODM interface feature which is used only with integrated applications such as Optim Oracle E Business Suite Solution ODM requires a product license If you select this option refer to Appendix F Open Data Manager for ODM configuration instructions true false P Note Install the Optim ODM interface feature Do not install the Optim ODM interface feature ODMFeature active fals If you set P ODMFeature active true you must define a value for W ConfigureODMPromptPanel ConfigureODM Choice 353 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux W ConfigureODMPromptPanel C onfigureODMChoice If the Optim ODM feature is installed indicate when it is configured 1 Configure ODM now This option prompts you for the Attunity license file and automatically installs the ODM Server 2 Configure ODM later This option copies the ODM Server installation files to your machine To complete the ODM Server installation you must install the ODM Server and register the Attunity license manually W ConfigureODMPrompt Panel ConfigureODMCh
370. ion process using the default text editor The RTSERVER shell script contains a series of useful commands that allow you to manipulate the Server process This script does not need modification For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to A 2 4 RTSERVER Shell Script 0 Do not edit RTSERVER during installation 1 Edit RTSERVER during installation If you are not installing from a graphical interface this option will cause an error W UpdateFilesPanel Update_rtserver 0 Installation and Configuration Guide 355 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux W UpdateFilesPanel Update_rt4s Edit the RT4S shell script during the installation process using the default text editor The RT4S shell script is used to start or stop init 1 processing for the Server This script should be executed only as part of the system boot procedure Generally the script does not need modification unless the Server is installed in a directory other than the default directory opt IBM Optin or the Server will be run under a user account other than root For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to A 2 5 RT4S Shell Script 0 Do not edit RT4S during installation 1 Edit RT4S during installation If you are not installing from a graphical interface this option will cause an error W UpdateFilesPanel Update_ rt4s 0 W UpdateFilesPanel Update_pstserv Edit the pstserv configuration fi
371. ion credentials Regardless of the exit you use i e the default exit or your own exit you must sign that exit before you can use Optim After the exit is signed Optim will invoke the exit at initialization and call it at various exit points in the program to determine whether Optim should continue with what it was about to do An exit point is a point within a program at which an exit routine can take control to do some external function The exit allows you to Installation and Configuration Guide 49 3 Signing an Optim Exit 50 e See what is being done by a given user at various points in a program s logic e Ensure that the user s request meets your company standards and e Change the request if needed to pass your company standards or forbid the request altogether Optim will call the exit at each exit point to verify that the user s request meets your company standards such as verifying that the user has permission to run a given executable The first exit point occurs when the user launches Optim If you use the exit to provide external security that exit point determines whether the user has permission to access the product Ifthe user has the appropriate permissions the user can continue if not Optim will terminate the user s session after displaying an appropriate error message See the Optim Initialization Exit Programmer s Guide for a complete list of the Optim exit points Beginning
372. ion if pstlogon is server Specify as the password when a secure password is supplied in a password file See A 4 2 Securing the Configuration Files for more information To use OS Authentication for Oracle specify a forward slash for userid and do not specify a password pstdir ORA806 Oracle 8 0 OPTUSER DO806 rt password dbalias DB Alias information Use dbalias for each DB Alias that the Server can access for Command Line and ODBC processes Note that a DB Aliases is created from a Windows machine using the Configuration program and the DB Alias information is not verified until a connection is required in a process pstdir Name of the Optim Directory that includes the DB Alias A pstdir entry for the referenced Optim Directory is required name Name of the DB Alias connectstring Information needed by the DBMS to connect to the database typically the system name and port ID Enter if the database designated by the DB Alias includes the Optim Directory Installation and Configuration Guide 375 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 376 loader allowlocktbls userid password User ID and password for DBMS logon Provide this information if dbaliaslogon is server Specify as the password when a secure password is supplied in a password file See A 4 2 Securing the Configuration Files for more information To use OS Authentication for Oracle
373. ion was configured You may also configure Personal Options for the workstation 65 4 Configuration Window and Menus 66 Create Update DB Alias Create Update Optim Directory Access Existing Optim Directory Configure Security for an Optim Directory Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine A DB Alias is required for each database to which Optim connects Use this command to create any DB Aliases that were not created when configuring the first workstation or to update existing DB Aliases In most cases your site will use a single Optim Directory that is created when the first workstation is configured Use this task as a step in re locating the Optim Directory or when an upgrade to Optim requires a new Directory A workstation must have a Windows Registry entry for the Optim Directory This registry entry is created when the workstation is configured however additional entries are required for any additional Directories that may be accessed by the workstation Use this task which replicates the steps described in 5 2 2 Create Registry Entry on page 143 to create additional registry entries You can initialize Optim Security using the Configure the First Workstation Create Update Optim Directory and Configure Options tasks however you must use Configure Security for a Optim Directory task to both initialize Optim Security and enable the sec
374. ional Workstation from the Tasks menu on the Configuration main window If you exported registry data after configuring the first workstation you can save time by importing it to additional workstations You are prompted to import Optim Directory registry data when configuring each additional workstation If you choose not to import registry data Optim 7 1 5 2 Configure Additional Workstation you must first enter the Product License Key and select the option to Create a new Registry Entry for Existing Optim Directory 5 2 1 Import Registry Entries If you intend to configure several workstations you can save time by importing Optim Directory registry data and the Product License Key from a file Note Before you can import registry data you must export the data to a file You can export the data during the process of configuring the first workstation or you can select Export Registry Data from the File menu on the Configuration main window You can import registry data during the process of configuring an additional workstation or you can select Import Registry Data from the File menu The Import Optim Directory Registry Data dialog allows you to import registry entries and license information Configure Additional Workstation Import Optim Directory Registry Data Bife E3 Optim he table on the left is initialized with the Optim Directory Registry Entries in the pecified file The table on the right indicates the en
375. ionality included in Optim The default exit is intended for clients who do not need to use a user supplied exit although it may also be used as a temporary solution while you create your own customized exit If you use the default exit Optim user security will function as it did prior to release 6 5 If you implement a user supplied exit that exit will augment the extensive security functionality already included in Optim Note A user supplied exit may also be used do other functions such as manage user accounts monitor user activity force inactive sessions to timeout audit product use and override user authorization credentials Regardless of which exit you use i e the default exit or your own exit you must sign that exit before you can use Optim After the exit is assigned Optim will invoke that exit at initialization and call it at various exit points points in the program to determine whether Optim should continue with what it was about to do An exit point is a point within a program at which an exit routine can take control to do some external function The exit allows you to e See what is being done by a given user at various points in a program s logic Ensure that the user s request meets your company standards and e Change the request if needed to pass your company standards or forbid the request altogether Installation and Configuration Guide 403 Appendix A Install and Configure th
376. iple characters are mapped to the same Unicode character When these characters are converted from Unicode back to multi byte a round trip the original character may not be returned Optim provides a Product Option on the Database tab and a Personal Optim 7 1 1 2 Planning for Installation and Configuration Option on the Database tab that determine how to handle round trip conversion issues when processing data in a multi byte database To prevent any loss of data the character set used by the database client must be compatible with that of the database server Optim enforces this requirement as follows 1 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias configured for multi byte data to connect to a multi byte database the client character set is automatically set to match the server character set 2 Ifthe client uses a DB Alias that is not configured for multi byte data to connect to a multi byte database an error results 3 When connecting to an Optim Directory the client may establish a connection check the database character set drop the connection and re establish it with a new language setting Note Because Oracle stores character LOBS in UCS2 a 16 byte Unicode format multi byte character LOBS may not be stored correctly in a multi byte database For more information refer to your Oracle documentation Installation and Configuration Guide 29 1 Getting Started 1 3 Troubleshooting Your Installation 1 3 1 Image Loc
377. ipt does not need modification For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to A 2 4 RTSERVER Shell Script The RTA4S shell script is used to start or stop the Server from init 1 processing This script should be executed only as part of the system boot procedure Generally the script does not need modification unless the Server is installed in a directory other than the default 344 Optim 7 1 A l Installation directory opt IBM Optim or the Server will be run under a user account other than root For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to A 2 5 RT4S Shell Script The pstserv configuration file pstserv cfg is used to configure the system to run the Server daemon Before you run the Server daemon you must modify the file to reflect your site requirements For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to A 2 1 Pstserv Configuration File The pstlocal configuration file pstlocal cfg is used to configure the system for running the Command Line Utility or using the ODBC interface For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to A 2 2 Pstlocal Configuration File for the Command Line Utility e The locale conf file provides locale conversion information between platforms You can use this file to provide additional locale conversion information For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to A 2 6 LOCALE CONF Conversion File If you choose to update a file th
378. irectory you will continue to Step 2 of the Convert Optim Directory Objects Task elect lt Proceed gt to continue to the next step Previous Proceed _ Cancel From this point the task is similar to creating an Optim Directory when configuring the first workstation These steps are described briefly in the following paragraphs For further details refer to 5 1 2 Create Optim Directory on page 78 The first step in creating a new Optim Directory is to provide the name of the Optim Directory The Configuration program prompts for this information by presenting the Specify Optim Directory dialog You must select Create New Optim Directory and Registry Entry and specify a Directory name Note The name of the new Directory must be different from the name of the old Directory You must then specify the database in which to create the new Optim Directory tables On the Specify Optim Directory DBMS dialog specify the type and version of DBMS software and optionally provide a description of the Optim Directory The Configuration program must connect to the database in order to create the new Optim Directory tables and packages plans or procedures To enable this connection you must enter a valid User ID Installation and Configuration Guide 569 Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects Create Optim Directory Tables Create Drop Packages Keep Optim Directory Data in Unicode Format Connec
379. is setting is required in order to copy an Archive File to Tivoli or to process such a file Note If this setting is used prOsvce must be started under root authority See A 4 1 Securing the Products tivoliavail 1 rmfixedsegsize The default maximum segment size for Archive Files on fixed drive i e hard disk 0 Fixed drive software determines default segment size Default n Size in megabytes up to 9999 MB rmfixedsegsize 0 rmremsegsize The default maximum segment size in megabytes for Archive Files on a removable device e g floppy disk zip drive 10 Default n Size in megabytes up to 9999 MB rmremsegsize 10 scriptmaxlines Maximum number of lines in a Column Map Procedure that are included in the Process Report 500 Include up to 500 lines Default n Maximum number of lines to include up to 9999 lines scriptmaxlines 500 scriptprefixout Option for Column Map Procedure name in Process Report 0 Do not include name Installation and Configuration Guide 381 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux scriptshowfullcol scriptshowfulltbl scriptwarnmissing Include Column Map Procedure name Default If a Local Column Map Procedure is used in process a name is generated in the form tablename columename n to be included in the report Use scriptshowfullcol and scriptshowfulltbl to format the generated name scriptprefixout 1 Format for column name used to ge
380. istrative Tools double click the Attunity Server Daemon IRPCD and specify the account on the Log On tab 530 Optim 7 1 F 1 Installation F 1 2 UNIX Installation To install the ODM Server in a UNIX environment select Open Data Manager Interface from the select components dialog of the Server Setup program You can install the ODM Server as part of the Server installation or copy the ODM Server installation files to your machine for use at a later time Optim Server Setup Configure ODM Now This option prompts you for the Attunity license file and automatically installs the ODM Server Configure ODM Later This option copies the ODM Server installation files to your machine To complete the ODM Server installation you must install the ODM Server and register the Attunity license manually Installation and Configuration Guide 531 Appendix F Open Data Manager Automatic ODM After you choose Configure ODM Now from the Setup program the Server Installation next dialog prompts you for the Attunity license Enter the path to the Attunity License file or click Browse to select a path Optim Server Setup InstallShield After you provide the license file path click Next to continue the Optim installation When the ODM installation is complete a terminal dialog is displayed indicating the ODM installation was successful Press Enter to close the dialog Manual ODM To install the ODM Server manually you must run
381. ject definitions in the 6 0 6 1 Directory Click Proceed to continue Drop DB Alias Optim Tables Drop the current Optim Directory olx To drop the current Optim Directory SQLS select the Drop Current Optim Directory SQLS a checkbox Caution Dropping the Current Optim Directory will drop all DB Aliases and Optim definitions defined for that Optim Directory Select Proceed to continue to the next step xl m Options I Drop Current Optim Directory SALS The Configuration program must connect to the database in order to drop the DB Aliases object definitions and stored procedures Use the Connect to Database dialog to provide the connection information for the Directory Click Proceed to continue Installation and Configuration Guide 585 Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects 586 Optim 7 1 Appendix H Samples The installation CD provides sample data and files to be used with Optim Sample database tables are not generally loaded until configuration but when you install Optim you can choose to install sample files For more information see Sample Files on page 43 If you install the sample files the installation creates a subdirectory entitled Samples in the IBM Optim RT subdirectory The Samples subdirectory contains the following CMExit Contains sample exit routines for Column Maps CMProc Contains files for creating sample Column Map procedures Extract Cont
382. kages plans or procedures Configure First Workstation Share Connection Information for Curren l E3 hen using this DB Alias you can share the connection and logon information with the ptim Directory To share the connection information select the Share Connection information For this Database checkbox Select lt Proceed gt to continue to the next tep xi M Options I Share Connection Information For this Database a Previous Proceed _ Cancel To access the Optim Directory and the DB Alias using a single connection select the check box If you clear the check box the Connect to Database dialog opens and you can specify a User ID and Password for the new DB Alias Note Ifthe connection is shared a change to the stored procedures e g dropping the stored procedures or failing to perform maintenance after an installation may prevent your connecting to the Optim Directory Define Character Format 102 If the Optim Directory is in Unicode format and you are creating a DB Alias for a DBMS for which Optim supports Unicode except SQL Server or multi byte you must indicate the character format of the DB Alias If the DB Alias uses a single connection with the Optim Directory the Optim Directory and DB Alias must use the same character format Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation An Optim Directory in multi byte format supports multi byte DB Aliases onl
383. l have administrative privileges for the workspace 17 From the File menu select Save All 552 Optim 7 1 F 5 ODM Security Secondary Server Secondary servers require credentials to access the primary server Access to the These credentials are assigned to the NAV user profile on the secondary Primary Server server To provide credentials for secondary server access 1 O a A O 9 In the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer expand the secondary server list and the User list to display the NAV member Right click the NAV member and select Edit User from the shortcut menu to open the user profile editor Select the Authenticators tab Click Add to open the Add Authenticator dialog In Resource type select Remote machine In Resource name type the primary server name and preceded by a colon the port number for the Attunity daemon on the primary server For example machinename port In User name type the user ID with privileges to access the primary server In Password and Confirm password type the password for the user ID Click OK 10 From the File menu select Save All Installation and Configuration Guide 553 Appendix F Open Data Manager F 6 Runtime Connection Information 554 Connection Parameters The Attunity Connect Guide and Reference manual located in the AC_DOC pdf file in the ODM doc subdirectory of the Optim installation directory specifie
384. le 398 Optim 7 1 A 4 Securing the Products and Configuration Files Commands The following command line actions are available to help you edit an encrypted password file prOpass l List the type name and user id for passwords in the file prOpass h Display the help for the prOpass program or prOpass a Add a password entry The password is type name userid password encrypted until passed to the DBMS or system for validation type A valid password type filelogon tivoliavail odbcserver pstdir webserver dbalias server user Note User is not a parameter in a configuration file it refers to any system user id Specify the user parameter type for any parameter referring to a system user account name The name of the configuration file parameter If type is pstdir the default indicates any Optim Directory If type is dbalias use the form pstdir dbalias The default indicates any Optim Directory or DB Alias as in pstdir or dbalias e Names not associated with other types are system use for the name value to prevent an error userid The user id used to verify that the password matches the parameter name To protect changes to the password file or the configuration file the two keywords must match Installation and Configuration Guide 399 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux password The password tha
385. le 816 bin sqlldr Installation and Configuration Guide 367 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux odbcserver Start mode for ODBC Server process Use this parameter to prevent your having to start the ODBC Server pr0coms separately Note that the pstlocal cfg file governs the ODBC Server other parameters and settings in pstserv cfg do not apply to the ODBC Server 0 or blank Do not start the ODBC Server Default 1 Start the ODBC Server using the User ID and Password used to start prOsvce userid Start the ODBC Server using the specified User ID and password password Specify as the password when a secure password is supplied in a password file See A 4 2 Securing the Configuration Files for more information To use OS Authentication for Oracle specify a forward slash for userid and do not specify a password Note If odbcserver true userid password is used the daemon must be started under root authority odbcserver false adminemailnotify Option to email logged messages reported to the Server syslog Provide the email address and severity level You can also provide options for resending messages emailaddress The email address to receive the message If an address contains a space the entire string for this attribute must be in quotes success Send email notification for all processing messages including success For example startup and termination informatio
386. le List the Default setting for tables not listed uses the Default AC Type The Default AC Type assigns access permissions to the Default setting and any other tables that use Default In the Table Access Control list the Default setting for users not included in the ACD and roles not specified in the list is assigned Allow access The Guest role is assigned Deny access 492 Optim 7 1 D 3 File Access Definition Restricted Table For the CUSTOMERS table only the Optim Administrator role is allowed access All other users and roles are denied access OPTUSR FIRST File Access Definition Editor File Edit Tools Options Help alslalala 8 Description Access Control Domain EST2 Table List Table Access Control Column gt Table AC Type Secure afola AK ria gt 1 Defautt Defautt Oo 2 gt Explicit D S _ DBMS OPTUSR ORDERS Defaut M 4 Inthe Table List the AC Type for CUSTOMERS is Explicit The access permissions apply to this table only Inthe Table Access Control list the Optim Administrator role is assigned Allow access and the Default setting representing users not included in the ACD and roles not specified in the list is assigned Deny access Installation and Configuration Guide 493 Appendix D Optim Security Restricted Column For the ORDERS table all users except the Guest role are allowed access but
387. le during the installation process using the default text editor The pstserv configuration file pstserv cfg is used to configure the system to run the Server daemon Before you run that daemon you must modify the file to reflect your site requirements For detailed information needed to edit this file see A 2 1 Pstserv Configuration File 0 Do not edit pstserv during installation 1 Edit pstserv during installation If you are not installing from a graphical interface this option will cause an error W UpdateFilesPanel Update_ pstserv 0 356 Optim 7 1 A l Installation W UpdateFilesPanel Update_pstlocal Edit the pstlocal configuration file during the installation process using the default text editor The pstlocal configuration file pstlocal cfg is used to configure the system for running the Command Line Utility or using the ODBC interface For detailed information needed to edit this file see A 2 2 Pstlocal Configuration File for the Command Line Utility 0 Do not edit pstlocal during installation 1 Edit pstlocal during installation If you are not installing from a graphical interface this option will cause an error W UpdateFilesPanel Update_ pstlocal 0 W UpdateFilesPanel Update_locale Edit the locale conf file during the installation process using the default text editor The locale conf file provides locale conversion information between platforms You can use this file to provide additi
388. lect a different ACD by modifying the associated ACL Table List Default and names of tables for which the File Access Definition explicitly controls access Select an entry in the list to display or define corresponding access permissions in the Table Access Control list The Default setting applies to archived data in tables not otherwise listed and cannot be deleted gt Identifies the active entry to select an entry click the row Table The fully qualified table name You cannot save a File Access Definition if any table name is not fully qualified Type the fully qualified three part name or use Add table from the shortcut menu to select a table name from a database or an Archive File To remove a table name select the row number and press Delete or use the Remove commands in the shortcut menu Any security settings for tables or columns that are not in the secured Archive File have no effect AC Type The type of access permissions associated with the table Access permissions are displayed in the Table Access Control list Select one of the following Explicit Table specific access permissions apply Default The access permissions for Default apply None Access permissions do not apply All users are allowed to access the table Notes If AC Type is None The Column Secured check box and Table Access Control list are unavailable and any user account is allowed full access If for Default the Default AC
389. led at the end of the Optim installation process and Command Prompt dialogs requiring no entries are displayed Manual ODM To install a primary ODM Server manually you must run the ODM Installation installation script and register the Attunity license A primary server installation includes the ODM Server and Attunity Studio To install a secondary ODM Server manually you must run the ODM Server installation file A secondary server installation includes the ODM Server only Installation and Configuration Guide 529 Appendix F Open Data Manager To install a primary ODM Server on a Windows machine 1 Copy the Attunity license file to a directory on your machine 2 From a Command Prompt access the ODM install subdirectory of the Optim installation directory 3 Type the following command ODMINSTALL 4 When prompted to confirm the Attunity Server installation click OK 5 When prompted type the path to the Attunity license file and click OK To install a secondary ODM Server on a Windows machine Run the ODM Server installation file AS4820 win32 exe located in the ODM install subdirectory of the Optim installation directory By default the Attunity daemon runs under the Local System account If access to needed resources requires network credentials the daemon logon must be changed to an appropriate network account To change the logon account open the Services dialog from the Control Panel Admin
390. les and grants or denies privileges for each role to read update delete or execute where appropriate the object and the ACL For example you might define an ACL to allow members of a role to read and execute but not edit a specific Archive Request Optim can also be configured to secure objects automatically so that a default ACL which can be edited is defined when the object is saved to the Optim Directory Note When Object Security is enabled the size of the fully qualified name for a Primary Key and a Relationship is restricted as described in the Common Elements Manual Object Security and Object Names The roles in an ACL are defined in an ACD associated with the ACL If Functional Security is enabled a member of a role that is granted an Object Association Privilege in an ACD for an object type e g Associate Access Definition privilege can use the ACD to define roles in an ACL for that object type Object Association Privileges are not required to use Object Security however these privileges must be defined to secure objects if both Functional and Object Security are enabled Once an object is associated with an ACL it is considered to be secured although Object Security must be enabled for the security defined in the ACL to be effective ACDs and File Access Definitions Optim 7 1 are automatically associated with an ACL whether or not Object Security is enabled using the Configuration program T
391. lias dialog opens to restart the process Otherwise the process completes and returns to the main window Installation and Configuration Guide 237 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 7 17 Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables Specify Optim Directory Connect to Database Create Select DB Alias Load Drop Sample Tables Load Drop Data Privacy Tables 238 At times it may be necessary to drop a DB Alias or an Optim Directory Use Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables to guide you in performing one or both tasks The following guidelines apply e When you drop a DB Alias Optim can no longer access data in that database and any Optim objects that refer to the DB Alias are invalid However you can recreate the DB Alias and restore access to the database and Optim objects When you drop an Optim Directory the DB Aliases and other Optim objects stored in the Directory cannot be recovered Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see page 185 to select the name of the Optim Directory that stores the DB Alias you want to drop or to specify the Optim Directory you want to drop Click Proceed to open the next dialog Optim must connect to the database to drop the Optim Directory tables and packages plans or procedures Use the Connect to Database dialog see page 205 to specify the connection information Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog see page 207 to specify a DB Alias you want to drop Click Proceed to drop
392. liases f EG Optim ptim will drop the Optim created Procedures created For the previous DBMS version It will hen create new Procedures to access the System Tables for each selected database Databases Logon Defaults Stored Procedure Defaults Logon Specifications User ID optusr4 Password Verify Password steko aooo T Display SQL Skip Undo Cancel Dracle QOR9 7 The entries on the Logon Defaults tab allow you to connect to the database while configuring workstations Enter your password twice the second time is for verification Note The default logon information applies to all DB Aliases unless you provide explicit logon information on the Databases tab 230 Optim 7 1 7 11 Update DBMS Version for a DB Alias Stored Procedure Use the stored procedure Defaults tab to specify the procedure Defaults Qualifier and Grant Auth ID required to drop and create stored procedures E Update the DBMS Version for a DB Alias Update Multiple DB Aliases Biel EG Optim ptim will drop the Optim created Procedures created for the previous DBMS version It will hen create new Procedures to access the System Tables for each selected database Databases Logon Defaults Stored Procedure Defaults Procedure Specifications jalifier Grant Auth ID optusr4 PUBLIC T Display SQL _ Proceed skp undo canei Oracle QOR9 h Note The stored procedur
393. liases in any Optim Directory required to perform delegated tasks Note You can expedite the configuration of the Connection settings for the Server by clicking Merge Current User This merges the Connection settings for the logged on user in the Current User registry with settings for the Server machine in the Local Machine registry optim Server Settings x General Errors Load Connection Access Startup Security Endpoints Archive Retention status e4 gt PSTDIRECTORY optusr6 Merge Current User Undo _Confguraton Lo cores vey tee Settings on the Connection tab and the Security tab are related on the Security tab you choose Server or Client to specify the source of the User ID and Password information for Optim Directory and DB Alias access e Ifyou select Server on the Security tab the appropriate User ID and password entered on the Connection tab are used the User ID and password from the workstation originating the task are not used e Ifyou select Client on the Security tab the User ID and password from the workstation originating the task are used 160 Optim 7 1 6 4 Connection Tab Note The Connection String information you enter on the Connection tab is used regardless of whether you select Server or Client on the Security tab Leave the connection string blank or select the Always Fail Connection check box to prevent the Server
394. list of running processes and process IDs enter USERDUMP p To dump processes associated with a single process ID or image binary file name enter USERDUMP k lt ProcessSpec gt lt TargetDumpFile gt To dump processes associated with multiple process IDs or image binary file names enter USERDUMP m k lt ProcessSpec gt lt ProcessSpec gt d lt YargetDumpPath gt To dump Win32 GUI processes that appear to hang enter USERDUMP g k d lt ZargetDumpPath gt where k Optionally causes processes to be killed after being dumped lt ProcessSpec gt Is a decimal or Ox prefixed hex process ID or the base name and extension no path of the image file used to create a process lt TargetDumpFile gt Is a legal Win32 file specification If not specified dump files are generated in the current directory using a name based on the image file name d lt ZargetDumpPath gt Is the directory in which the dump files are to be created The default is the current directory 32 Optim 7 1 1 3 Troubleshooting Your Installation For example to dump the main Toolbox process if that is the one that is hanging perform the following steps 1 Open a MS DOS window 2 Enter USERDUMP p to get a list of processes and process IDs Look for the process PROTOOL EXE 3 Enter USSERDUMP nnnnn where nnnn is the process id for PROTOOL EXE The program will take about 10 or 20 seconds to produce the dump file
395. ll be triggered in a command line process to Insert Restore or Delete Sybase ASE data active Processes must run in unchained mode inactive Processes must run in normal chained mode Default defaultactive The Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is available and selected by default Insert Restore and Delete Processes run in unchained mode unless the Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is cleared defaultinactive The Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is available and cleared by default Insert Restore and Delete Processes run in normal mode unless the Run in Unchained Mode check box in Personal Options is selected sybaseunchain active Option to enable extracting of uncommitted rows from the database during an Archive or Extract Process You can extract uncommitted rows from specific tables in the Access Definition or all tables Selecting this option for tables with known performance problems may increase the speed of your Archive or Extract Processes active Automatically extract uncommitted rows from each table in the Access Definition during all Archive or Extract Processes inactive Automatically extract only committed rows from each table in the Access Definition during all Archive or Extract Processes Default defaultactive The Uncommitted Read option on the Access Definition Editor is available and selected by default Uncommitted rows are extracted unless
396. llation process you create entries in the Current User registry Note When you add or delete an Optim Directory or DB Alias using the Configuration program you should also apply the new settings to the Server Configuration You can keep Local Machine registry entries for the Server separate from those for the user by entering information in the Optim Server Settings dialog Settings on the Optim Configuration dialog pertain only to the Server component not to the currently logged on user Note If workstations are processing setting changes are saved when you click Apply but are not applied until all processing completes The Server rejects new connections until the current connections terminate and the new settings are applied Scheduled processes are similarly rejected when settings are pending Scheduled processes are retried until the Stop Time entered in the Scheduling Editor Credentials For information about user credentials required to run the Server refer to Appendix B Server Credentials Installation and Configuration Guide 153 6 Configure the Optim Server 6 1 General Tab Optim Server Temporary Work Directory Data Directory Create a subdirectory within the Data Directory for clients Maximum Processes 154 Use the General tab to name the Server and provide paths to required directories The name 1 to 15 characters of the Server If you do not provide a name the computer name is the defa
397. loaded when you configure the first workstation but you also can load them independently or when you configure an additional DB Alias You can use the data privacy data tables to e Prevent internal privacy breaches by de identifying or masking the data available to developers quality assurance testers and other personnel Improve privacy compliance initiatives by substituting customer data with contextually accurate but fictionalized data e Protect confidential customer information and employee data in your application development and testing environments e Ensure valid test results by propagating masked elements across related tables to ensure the referential integrity of the database If you have an Optim Data Privacy License the data privacy data tables are available on the installation CD in a privacy xf extract file that is loaded during the configuration process See Load Drop Data Privacy Tables on page 115 Installation and Configuration Guide 605 Appendix I Data Privacy Data Tables 1 1 Content of Data Privacy Tables The Privacy Extract file privacy xf includes the tables described in this section The tables include lookup information on companies and individuals that can be used for data masking or data privacy processing Minor differences in data types exist depending upon the DBMS you use to install the data privacy tables PERSON Table The PERSON table contains the following columns and dat
398. ls assigned to your company 1d 105499 Name Sample Company Name Password j Note The Name assigned to your company may not match the spelling or punctuation used in your company s actual name Installation and Configuration Guide 411 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux opmdsign Signing Example 2 opmdsign Signing Example 3 Run Setup Again 412 As in Example 1 shut down the Optim Server if it is running and then specify the directories explicitly as indicated on the first line of the following example as a Console n users roberts rtinstalled rt sbin opmdsign users roberts rtinstalled rt prOsign d Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to your company ld J Do steps 1 and 2 in Example 1 i e shut down the Optim Server if it is running and then change to the users roberts rtinstalled rt directory Then run the opmdsign script in the rt sbin subdirectory but specify all of the parameters explicitly enclosing the company name in double quotes as shown below Console ley If you have the installation CD or image available run Setup again When the following dialog appears clear the check boxes for all listed components as indicated below to skip the install step and proceed to the Sign Optim Exit dialog Optim 7 1 A 5 The Optim Exit in UNIX Optim Server Setup A 5 7 Signing a User Supplied Exit in UNIX
399. lumn from the shortcut menu to select a column name from a database or an Archive File To remove a column name select the row number and press Delete or use the Remove commands in the shortcut menu Any security settings for tables or columns that are not in the secured Archive File have no effect Optim 7 1 D 3 File Access Definition AC Type The type of access permissions associated with the column Access permissions are displayed in the Column Access Control list Select one of the following Explicit Column specific access permissions apply Default The default access permissions apply None Access permissions do not apply All users are allowed to access the table Notes If AC Type is None The Column Access Control list is unavailable and any user account is allowed full access If for Default the Default AC Type is unavailable for other entries in the Column List Installation and Configuration Guide 487 Appendix D Optim Security Shortcut Menu Right click a row in Column List to display the following shortcut Commands menu commands Remove Column Remove the selected column name from the list This command is not available for Default Remove All Columns Remove all column names except Default from the list Add column Display submenus and select a source From Database table or From Archive File for a column selection list Use the list to add one or more column names to the
400. m Directory registry data you must follow the flow in the configuration process to create a registry entry When you configure an additional workstation and do not import registry data you must provide the Product License Key and information needed to create a new Windows registry entry for the additional workstation The registry entry allows Optim to connect to the Optim Directory from the workstation The last step in configuring each additional workstation is to identify an existing Product Configuration File created when you configured the first workstation You may modify Product and Personal Options if desired After you complete the installation and configuration for a Windows workstation that is to use Optim you can choose to configure the Server on it Alternatively you can install the Server from a console and use the Command Line Interface to configure the Server in the appropriate UNIX or Linux environment See Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux for complete information On a Windows machine the Optim Server Settings dialog available from the Windows Control Panel allows you to configure and establish network connectivity between delegating workstations and machines hosting the Server In addition the workstations and any machine Installation and Configuration Guide 9 1 Getting Started Control Panel Merge Current User Maintenance Tasks hosting the Server must have conn
401. matically when Windows starts You can start it manually using the Service dialog from the Windows Control Panel or you can enter the following command at the Command Line Interface NET START DB2NTSECSERVER Installation and Configuration Guide 17 1 Getting Started 18 You can stop the service manually using the Service dialog or you can enter the following command at the Command Line Interface NET STOP DB2NTSECSERVER If you want to start the service manually at system startup use the Service dialog in the Windows Control Panel to change the service startup options When you create a DB Alias or apply maintenance to an existing DB Alias the DB2 LUW client software on the workstation must be at the same or higher level as the target database Any version of the DB2 LUW client can connect to a version of the DB2 LUW database that is one version lower or two versions higher Note IBM does not support a DBMS client server configuration that includes an out of service version For example DB2 UDB version 7 clients connecting to a DB2 UDB version 8 server are no longer supported because version 7 has been withdrawn from service To create an Optim Directory the following authorizations are needed CONNECT CREATETAB IMPLICIT SCHEMA BINDADD CREATE NOT FENCED ROUTINE To create a DB Alias the following authorizations are needed CONNECT BINDADD IMPLICIT SCHEMA CREATE NOT FENCED ROUTINE To create and load
402. mation about defining Object Association Privileges see Object Association Privileges Tab The ACL for a security definition ACD or FAD is created automatically at the time the definition is saved ACLs for other objects may be created automatically at the time the object is created and saved or manually Automatically created ACLs can be edited at any time by an authorized user The initial ACL for a security definition references a Optim Administrator role for the owner and grants full access to the ACL for that role The initial ACL for other objects is modeled after the Optim Object Template ACL if one was created at the time Optim Security was configured for your installation If the Optim Object Template ACL does not exist or the owner of the object is not granted object association privilege for the ACD that forms the basis for the Template ACL the owner creator of the object is prompted to define the required ACL Installation and Configuration Guide 469 Appendix D Optim Security Manually Associate an Object With an ACL Remove an ACL Create or Edit an ACL 470 Note Only the Security Administrator can define the Optim Object Template ACL using the Configuration Program or selecting from the Security submenu to the Options menu in the main window See 7 4 4 Set Optim Object Security Option on page 197 for further information You can create an ACL manually by selecting Edit ACL from either the Tools menu i
403. mns and data for Table males Column Name Data Type and Description SEQ Unique sequential number INTEGER DATAVALUE First name CHAR 15 characters LASTNAME The LASTNAME table has the following columns and data Table Column Name Data Type and Description SEQ Unique sequential number INTEGER DATAVALUE Last name CHAR 15 characters Installation and Configuration Guide 609 Appendix I Data Privacy Data Tables 610 Optim 7 1 Appendix J Uninstalling To remove Optim from a workstation use the Add Remove Programs utility in the Windows Control Panel as follows Select Add Remove Programs from the Windows Control Panel Select IBM Optim from the list of programs on the Add Remove Programs dialog Add or Remove Programs ioi x Sort by Name hd 6 Change or Remove Programs A Add New Programs Ta og Add Remove Windows Components a Set Program Access and Defaults Currently installed programs I Show updates 7 Wizard PF Hummingbird Exceed f IBM Optim 6 5 0 ve it from your computer click Intel Matrix Storage Manager amp J2SE Development Kit 5 0 Update 6 amp J2SE Runtime Environment 5 0 Update 6 B Java 2 Runtime Environment SE v1 4 2_03 5 Java TM 6 Update 3 F LiveUpdate 1 6 Symantec Corporation Size Size Size Size Size Size Size al 95 40MB 14 96MB 283 00MB 152 00MB 136 00MB 111 00MB 2mp Z
404. mns when you insert a new row If you clear this check box Optim provides a value based on the column data type Other than NULL possible values include blank zero current date current time and current timestamp To specify the character for the NULL value indicator use the Display tab on the Personal Options dialog Note Site management may set Product Options to restrict the use of this feature Select to require a user supplied value for every column that cannot accept a default value If you clear this check box Optim provides a value based on the column data type Possible values include blank zero current date current time or current timestamp Note Site management may set Product Options to restrict use of this feature Select to request a prompt for default values associated with substitution variables in an Access Definition You can use substitution variables in selection criteria to specify data to browse or edit Select to apply selection criteria each time a table is self referenced in the Table Editor Clear the check box to remove as the default selection criteria when the table is self referenced Note A table can only be self referenced when the Table Editor is in Browse mode Installation and Configuration Guide 309 9 Personal Options Auditing Active Audit Tables Display Row Count Undo Levels Default Data Display 310 Select to activate the Audit option for tracking database cha
405. mode the connection must be in unchained mode for the procedure to work The Sybase Unchained Mode setting in Product Options see Sybase Unchained Mode on page 252 enables or disables this check box If enabled select the check box to run Insert and Delete Processes in Unchained Mode or clear the check box to run all actions in normal mode 329 9 Personal Options 9 2 17 Notify Tab Use the Notify tab to provide default options and addresses for automatic email notification of the success or failure of a process The process report generated when a process completes is automatically sent as an attachment Note Before using email notification the desired email program must be installed For Windows the email client must be defined as the default and set up to interface with MAPI For UNIX or Linux a valid copy of SENDMAIL must be configured correctly In an Action Request Editor you can click Get Site Defaults on the Notify tab to populate it with the defaults specified in Personal Options Personal Options OF x Edit Browse Archive Removable Media Actions Printer Database Notify all Email Addresses 4 optusr4 company com Email Transport Undo Grid Details The Notify tab contains the following details Send For each email address you list click to select an option to send a message as determined by the outcome of the process You can select Always Success or Fa
406. mp or if you want to direct process information to another location Note All installations of Optim must point to the same location ORACLE HOME The location of Oracle ORACLE HOME opt oracle TNS_ADMIN The location of file tnsnames ora TNS ADMIN opt oracle Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration RTORACLELIB DB2CODEPAGE RTDB2PROFILE SYBASE RTSYBASELIB INFORMIXDIR INFORMIXSERVER INFORMIXSQLHOSTS A 2 4 RTSERVER Shell Script The location of the Oracle API shared objects RTORACLELIB ORACLE HOME 1lib The code page for DB2 DB2CODEPAGE 1252 The location of the DB2 environment script db2profile RTDB2PROFILE opt db2ad81 sqllib The location of Sybase ASE SYBASE opt sybase The location of the Sybase ASE API shared objects SYBASE opt sybase syb12 0CS 12_0 lib The location of Informix INFORMIXDIR opt informix The name of the Informix server when the product was configured The location of Informix SQLHOSTS INFORMIXSQLHOSTS INFORMIXDIR sqlhosts The RTSERVER shell script is located in the sbin directory that is subordinate to the Optim installation directory This shell script contains commands that may be useful to manipulate the Server process Generally the RTSERVER script does not need modification You must change the script however if the Server is installed in a directory other than the default dire
407. mple if Use _ as SQL LIKE Character is selected you can type PSTDEMO M __P in the pattern box on the Open an Access Definition dialog to list only Access Definitions with a name beginning with M and ending with P for the Identifier PSTDEMO If you clear this check box the underscore represents the underscore character Select to convert all lowercase characters to uppercase when you specify string literals in selection criteria relationships and Column Maps If you clear this check box characters display in uppercase or lowercase exactly as entered In an Optim process you can use an Extract File created using the Optim z OS Solution Optim uses a code page to convert the mainframe file format from EBCDIC to ASCII In the z OS Code Page list select a default value to be used if the Extract File does not contain a code page number Specify the number of days 2 to 30 to retain trace files in the temporary work directory The default value is 5 Trace files are useful for Optim to track processing Trace file names are prefixed with PRO followed by letters indicating the trace file type and ended with a numeric extension for example PROTOOL 123 The extension on the name of the trace file distinguishes one trace file from another of that type Trace files are sequentially numbered 001 through 999 followed by A00 through Z99 as necessary If more than 3 599 trace files of a single type are created and stored within the s
408. musign users roberts rtinstalled rt prdsign s Please wait Please enter the Optim credentials assigned to your company ld 8 opmusign Signing Do steps 1 and 2 in Example 1 i e shut down the Optim Server if it is Example 3 running and then change to the users roberts rtinstalled rt directory Then run the opmusign script in the rt sbin subdirectory but specify all of the parameters explicitly enclosing the company name in double quotes as shown below sbin opmusign pwd 000000 Sample Company Name 000000 416 Optim 7 1 Appendix B Server Credentials This appendix provides information about credentials used with the Optim Server Server feature of Optim The Server can be installed and run on a machine using supported versions of Windows Solaris HP UX AIX or Linux therefore this appendix addresses credentials for all supported platforms Credentials uniquely identify a user and include e User ID e Password e Domain for Windows only The following types of credentials are used with the Server e Credentials needed to run the Server and to start Optim processes e Credentials needed by the DBMS to access the Optim Directory and use the DB Alias Installation and Configuration Guide 417 Appendix B Server Credentials B 1 Server Credentials Credentials required by the Server include a User ID Password and Domain for Windows only You must provide Server credentials for the follow
409. must have database SELECT authority for the PSTAUDIT table Installation and Configuration Guide 311 9 Personal Options You can specify a Personal Options list of tables to audit However the list specified in Product Options takes precedence over the list that you specify in Personal Options Table Enter the name of the database table or pattern that Name Pattern identifies the tables to audit Table names consist of dbalias creatorid tablename When you specify a pattern for like named tables you can use percent to represent one or more characters Use underscore _ to represent a single character Note An option on the General tab in Personal Options allows you to use the underscore as an SQL LIKE character Status Enable or disable the Audit option for individual tables Click to display a down arrow and select Enabled or Disabled for each table in the list If the status indicates Superseded by Product List the table is ignored because of a conflict with the parameters set in Product Options You cannot enable or disable the audit option for that table but you can modify the table name or remove it from the list The Edit Process audits tables based on a number of specific parameters beginning with the parameters specified on the Edit tab in the Product Options dialog Refer to 8 2 5 Edit Tab on page 259 for more information about the Audit option 312 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor 9 2 11 Browse
410. n the main window is inactive and cannot be used except to view the most recent entries in the Processing Log The Configuration main window includes the following Menu bar The menus for the Configuration program Toolbar Buttons to select Online Help Contents or What s This Help Processing Log A list of actions performed by the Configuration program Message bar Basic information to help you select a task or know the outcome of a selected task Optim 7 1 4 1 Main Window and Menus 4 1 2 Menus File Menu Status bar Messages about a specific command or the current action The status bar appears at the bottom of the main window and each dialog To use the Configuration program select a command from any menu on the main window menu bar The File menu in the main window lists commands to view or edit information regarding the Optim Directory convert Optim Directory objects when upgrading or exit the Configuration program In addition you can select commands to export or import registry data for a particular Optim Directory Fie Tasks Options Help Export Registry Data Import Registry Data Convert Optim Directory Objects Optim Directory Exit Select any of the following commands Export You can save time by exporting Optim Directory Registry Data registry data to a file and saving the file to a directory that is easily accessible for configuring other workstations While configuring the fi
411. n LOB is processed as Native or Non Native An LOB truncates when the size of the LOB exceeds the Maximum Non Native LOB Length setting and appears in the Table Editor as a protected cell with a cross hatched pattern Reset Messages Click Reset Messages to reset system messages Message dialogs provide information or warnings You can also choose not to display the message again Reset Messages resets the option to display these message dialogs when appropriate Installation and Configuration Guide 289 9 Personal Options 9 2 4 Errors Tab Use the options on the Errors tab to set preferences for the display of error messages Personal Options The default fonts for message text and data fields are shown in each of the font message boxes To open the Windows Font dialog to select font attributes click the command buttons for text or fields To modify the font for text messages click Text To modify the font for data fields noted in message text click Field Font for Informational messages are not critical for example messages that ask Informational whether information should be saved when a dialog is closed Messages Info Text Specify font characteristics for the informational message text The default is System 10 point Bold Black Info Field Specify font characteristics for the data referenced in an informational message The default is System 10 point Bold Underline Maroon 290 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using th
412. n Send email notification for information or more severe messages warning Send email notification for warning or more severe messages error Send email notification for error or more severe messages Default exception Send email notification for exception messages 368 Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration n A number of days from 0 to 999 after which a message is resent for a persistent error or warning Specify 0 to resend messages immediately 0 or blank Do not resend messages Default 1 Resend a notification for a persistent error or warning clear Clear messages to be resent when the Server starts adminemailnotify admin company net error 0 false admin2 company net success 7 true archiveretentionpolicy Option to scan Optim Directories for Archive Files with an expired retention period If the retention period has expired the Server will delete the Archive File Archive Index File Archive Index Browse File Archive Directory entry and Archive Files on backup devices To delete backup files you must use the centeraavail or tivoliavail parameters NetWorker backups cannot be deleted hh mm The time of day to scan the Optim Directories Use 24 hour time format for example 1 30 p m is 13 30 Midnight is 00 00 Enter to use the default 00 01 pstdirectory The Optim Directories to scan Separate multiple entries with a comma or space Enter for all Directories archiveretentionpolicy 01 00 pst
413. n client e filelogon server userid password e odbcserver true userid password e tivoliavail true userid password webserver true userid password for Optim AMD users only Before running a process for which one or more of these settings apply prOsvce validates the incoming user account and password The process is then run under the credentials supplied in the configuration file If prOsvce must run a process under root authority it is advisable to Installation and Configuration Guide 397 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux include the filelogon server userid password rather than filelogon client or filelogon local and the limitaccess parameters in the configuration file to protect your system from processing that because it uses root credentials has access to all files on the system A 4 2 Securing the Configuration Files If the administrator has set up file permissions as described in A 4 1 Securing the Products only the owner members of the group that includes the owner and the root user can view read the configuration files and only the owner or the root user can update write the configuration files The user account used to start prOsvce must have read access to the pstserv cfg file while the Command Line Utility prOcmnd and the ODBC Server pr0coms must have read access to the pstlocal cfg file For details about the configuration files refer to A 2 1 Pstserv
414. n for Access Control List allows you to limit the ACL list to names that match the specified criteria You can use the percent wild card to represent one or more characters or use the _ underscore wild card to represent a single character The underscore must be selected as the SQL LIKE character on the General tab of Personal Options After you specify a Pattern click Refresh to redisplay the list based on your criteria Installation and Configuration Guide 477 Appendix D Optim Security D 3 File Access Definition Permissions Needed to Create an FAD Using Secured Archive Files 478 Use a File Access Definition to control access to data in one or more Archive Files created by running an Archive Request that references the FAD The archived data is protected according to the settings in the FAD which can be changed as the security requirements for your site change When settings in the FAD are changed the changes apply to the previously archived data as well as to data archived in the future A File Access Definition allows you to control access to data in specified tables and columns or use a default setting to control access to tables and columns for which access is not granted explicitly You can define access permissions by creating an access list for a table column or the default All users are allowed unlimited access to archived data to which an access list does not apply File Access Definition specifications
415. n the object editor or the shortcut menu in the Open dialog to display the Access Control List Editor You can also use these options to edit an ACL Settings in the Optim Object Template ACL if the Template ACL exists are used to populate the Access Control List Editor If there is no Optim Object Template ACL the editor is blank You cannot delete the ACL for an object for which security is required To delete an ACL you must be the ACL owner or in a role that is allowed Delete permission for the ACL To remove the ACL for an object select Delete ACL from the Tools menu in an object editor or right click the object name in the Open dialog and select Delete ACL from the shortcut menu You can also click Delete on the Access Control List Editor This section explains how to create or edit an Access Control List To create or edit an Access Control List 1 In the object editor select Edit ACL from the Tools menu to open the Access Control List Editor 2 The next step depends on your purpose To change the ACD used as the basis for roles listed in the ACL select a name from the Access Control Domain drop down list To select an existing ACL to use as a model for the ACL displayed in the Access Control List Editor click the Model After button to display the Select Access Control List Model dialog To list a Role select a role name from the Role drop down list in the grid To Allow or Deny access to the object or associate
416. nal options s sssssssesseseeee 136 set product options s sessssesssesssseeee 135 share connection information 102 task SUMIMNATY eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 139 Configure Options for additional workstations 149 Optim 7 1 for first workstation cccccccceeeeeees 132 personal Options ecceeeseeeeeeees 136 process SLEDS rusiskai 232 product options sssssssseseseeseseeseees seee 135 Configure Security for an Optim Directory 192 Configure the Server PEOCESS SICPS srerrorieer nni 151 Confirm tab Personal Options 286 before deleting siressa 286 before losing DDLs eeeee 286 before overwriting files 6 286 Convert PST Directory Objects 565 582 Create additional Optim Directory 190 copies of DB2 relationships 235 create drop packages cceseeeeeees 85 create drop procedures ceee 85 create select DB Alias ccceeeees 96 primary Keys aserrean 233 TESISUCY CHUY serate 143 Create tab Personal Options 294 303 compile error drop eeeeseeeeeeeees 295 DB Alias sunnan 295 DB2 OS 390 current rules 296 Limits t A 296 Object Name Highlighting 296 replace UDTS isea 296 set alias defaults ssrierassesrariraarss 300 set index defaults cceeeeeeeeeees 297 se
417. names for the Server are pstserv cfg Configures prosvce the Server daemon pstlocal cfg Configures local command line and ODBC functionality The appropriate Configuration file is loaded and validated when prosvce ODBC or the Command Line Utility starts up You can also use pr0svce v to validate pstserv cfg or pr0cmnd v to validate pstlocal cfg To reload the configuration file for prosvce while it is running use prOsvce u from a console under the user account for the daemon or use prOsvce u userid from root After all clients have logged off the file is read reloaded and validated A console message and system log verify the file has been loaded Note Usepr0Osvce L or use pr0Osvce L userid from the root account to determine if the system is waiting to reload Shell Scripts The installed shell scripts are RTSETENV Defines the operating environment for the Server Installed in the PSTHOME directory and designed to be included in a user profile or login script to set up the environment for the Server or command line on login RTSERVER Provides commands that allow you to manipulate the Server process Installed in sbin subordinate to the PSTHOME directory 358 Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration RT4S Used to start or stop the Server from init processing Installed in sbin subordinate to the PSTHOME directory RT4S should be executed only as part of the system boot procedure Conventions The following conven
418. nd complete the process Optim 7 1 7 10 Update DBMS Version for an Optim Directory 7 10 Update DBMS Version for an Optim Directory When you select Update the DBMS Version for an Optim Directory from the Tasks menu the first dialog cautions that you should select this task only when the Optim Directory resides in a database that has been upgraded to a new version This task prompts you to 1 Select the Optim Directory to update and select the new DBMS version 2 Drop the old packages plans or procedures and create new ones for the Optim Directory 3 Update the database signature for the Optim Directory When the process completes the database signature is updated automatically Specify Optim The first step in updating the DBMS version for an Optim Directory is Directory to specify the name of the Directory Click the down arrow to select from a list and click Proceed Update the DBMS Version for an Optim Directory Specify Optim Dire B EG he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains Optim Directory in a named registry entry Select the name of a Optim Directory From he list of existing registry names then click lt Proceed gt to continue M Optim Directory Specification Create New Optim Directory and Registry Entry Name m Create New Registry Entry For Existing Optim Directory Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Ent
419. nditions cause them to become active Most configuration dialogs include the following e An information read me box provides details and directions to guide you through a step in the configuration process e Dialog specific elements prompt for information needed to perform a selected configuration task When a dialog opens these elements are populated with default entries or other useful information whenever possible and the most likely options are pre selected e Command buttons control the logical flow from one dialog to the next The status bar at the bottom of most configuration dialogs displays one or two boxes when you are connected to a database The first box indicates the location of the Optim Directory The second box is displayed if you are also connected to a DB Alias and indicates the corresponding information for the DB Alias Each box indicates a DBMS type and a connection string separated by a dash For Informix Sybase ASE and MS SQL Server the connection string is followed by the database name The letters NA following an Informix database type indicate a Non ANSI database Skip Undo Cancel Oracle Q0R92 DB2MVS pstd 4 Optim Directory location DB Alias location Installation and Configuration Guide 73 4 Configuration Window and Menus 74 Command Buttons DBMS Terms Display SQL The most common command buttons include Previous Return to the previous dialog This button is not
420. nerate name for local Column Map Procedure 0 144 1linrn Use full column name Use first 4 characters and last 4 characters in column name Default Use indicated number of characters from beginning Jn and end rn of column name scriptshowfullcol 1 3 3 Format for table name used to generate name for local Column Map Procedure 0 144 1linrn Use full table name Use first 4 characters and last 4 characters in table name Default Use indicated number of characters from beginning In and end rn of table name scriptshowfulltbl 1 6 6 Report option for missing Column Map Procedures 0 Exclude warning of missing Column Map Procedure Include warning of missing Column Map Procedure Default scriptwarnmissing 1 wormdeviceallowaltret 382 Indicator for minimum WORM device retention settings Indicates whether users can override configuration specifications fora WORM device using a Storage Profile Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration 0 Use the WORM device default Any Storage Profile or wormdeviceretention settings for retention will cause the process to fail 1 Use wormdeviceretention settings or overriding Storage Profile settings for minimum WORM device retention Default wormdeviceallowaltret 1 wormdeviceretention Default minimum retention setting for Archive Files copied to a WORM device none No minimum retention period Default interval Use any wormdevicedays and worm
421. nfigure First Workstation Load Drop Data Privacy Tables oy x Optim e Configuration program can create or refresh the Optim Data Privacy Tables or drop em if they already exist Select an option to create refresh or drop the Data Privacy ables Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step DB Alias ALIAS2 Load Refresh DP Tables Drop DP Tables Table Specifications Schema Name Tablespace PSTDEMO lt 05 Default gt x I Display SQL Previous Proceed J skp Undo Cancel The Load Drop Data Privacy Tables dialog displays the following DB Alias for the data privacy tables If you do not want to load data privacy tables for this DB Alias click Skip Select this option to load or refresh data privacy tables This option is available and selected when Load Drop Data Privacy Table opens Select this option to drop previously loaded data privacy tables This option is unavailable when not applicable such as when you are initially loading those tables Schema Name Enter an identifier for the data privacy tables This element is labeled Creator ID for DB2 Schema Name for Oracle and Owner ID for an SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix database Tablespace Select a tablespace to store the tables To select from a list click the down arrow Tablespace is not available if you select Drop DP Tables Select this check box to display SQL statement
422. ng DB Alias and you specify a valid connection string or qualifier for packages plans or procedures that differs from the one associated with the DB Alias you are prompted to update the DB Alias e Ifyou attempt to create a DB Alias for a database that has the same signature as an existing DB Alias the Configuration program displays a warning message e For Sybase ASE or SQL Server if you intend to convert existing DB Aliases to use shared stored procedures select the Create Select Multiple option e For SQL Server if you selected to create select multiple DB aliases the User ID must have database owner dbo privileges Optim 7 1 7 1 Create Update DB Alias After you create the DB Alias you can create Optim Primary Keys and Load the Sample Tables included with Optim If you have a Data Privacy License you may also load and drop the Data Privacy Data Tables provided with Optim The Configuration program then prompts you to create or update DB Aliases for other databases and repeats the process Otherwise the process completes and returns to the main window Installation and Configuration Guide 189 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 7 2 Create Update Optim Directory Optim supports using one or several Optim Directories however each workstation can use only one Optim Directory at a time In other words a workstation cannot access information in one Optim Directory while using Optim with a different O
423. ng calls When selected Password is not available 306 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Check Logon Click Check Logon to verify that the Server can log on with the information provided Optim Server Logon Dialog If you select the Always Ask for Password check box or if the default logon information is incorrect the Optim Server Logon dialog is displayed E Optim Server Logon olx Optim Server WDO User Id optusr4 Password detoktotok Domain DOM X Always Ask for Select to display the Optim Server Logon dialog whenever the Server Password is used for remote processing calls Save as Default If you select the Save as Default Logon check box the information you Logon enter in this dialog overrides the default settings specified on the Server tab in Personal Options Installation and Configuration Guide 307 9 Personal Options 9 2 10 Edit Tab Use the options on the Edit tab to set preferences for browsing and editing data Personal Options M E Vv E E M E E E v EA Auto Switch Select to automatically switch subordinate tables in a stack of two or more joined tables to display related rows When you select a row in a table and no related rows exist in the subordinate table Optim automatically switches to display the next table in the stack that has a related row Display Column Select to display column attributes data type length and nullable Attributes attribute f
424. ng enhancements have been made for release 6 5 of Optim Optim Functionality Enhancements e Signed exit for initialization and termination processing Beginning with Optim release 6 5 an electronically signed exit is required to use Optim whether the exit is the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit To sign an exit you must enter the company credentials supplied to your organization when you received Optim Your company credentials consist of a supplied company ID Name and Password The Optim setup process will automatically request these credentials during installation so you can sign an exit The Optim default exit is shipped with Optim and allows all requests by all users within the security limitations defined for each user or user group using the security functionality included in Optim In addition Optim introduces exit points that allow your custom exits to monitor and control the use of Optim Benefits include data protection information collection for auditing the use of Optim and adherence to government regulations When information is passed to a user written exit the exit can allow or disallow the Optim function Performance Enhancements You can route generated process reports to a TXT file The file will open automatically at the end of processing using an application such as Notepad Buffersize options allow you to set the buffer size to use when fetching or deleting rows from the databa
425. ng for Installation and Configuration 10 Before you install Optim you must e Decide whether to install on each workstation or on a file server accessed by each workstation e Decide upon the installation directory e Determine if any database for which you must create a DB Alias supports Unicode data choose the database instance for the Optim Directory and determine a User ID and password for each workstation to access the Optim Directory Optim 7 1 1 2 Planning for Installation and Configuration e Decide whether Functional Security Object Security or Archive File Security is to be established for your facility and if so broadly identify the network users and groups for which access is allowed or denied e Choose an appropriate table identifier Creator ID Schema Name or Owner ID and database location tablespace segment filegroup or dbspace for creating Optim Directory tables e Name a directory folder for the Product Configuration File Ensure that previously installed releases of Optim particularly the Scheduler are not operating If licensed decide where to install the Server 1 2 1 Installation Requirements Optim is a Windows application The following software and environment requirements apply Software Requirements Operating System Client Microsoft Windows XP Professional Windows 2000 Professional and Server Service Pack 4 Windows 2003 Server Server Windows XP Professional Window
426. nges when you edit data If you select this option click Audit Tables to specify the tables you want to audit If you prefer not to use this option clear the check box Note Site management may set Product Options to restrict the use of this option Click to open the Audit Tables dialog on which you can specify a list of tables to audit Note Auditing is available in Personal Options only if the Auditing Status in Product Options is set to Active User Specify the default number of rows to display for each joined table in the Table Editor Use row count to manage the display area when you join several tables in the Table Editor Specify the default number of times 1 to 20 you can undo a commit to any row in the Table Editor You can specify the maximum number of undo levels or commit points per row Use undo commands to restore data in the Table Editor to a prior commit point For example if you change three columns in a row and commit that row you can undo the changes using one undo level If you set Undo Levels to 5 and you commit 7 times on a particular row you can undo only the last 5 committed changes to that row or return to the original row Select the default mode for adding tables to the Table Editor Click the down arrow to select Browse Browse Only or Edit mode for each table opened or joined in the Table Editor In Browse or Edit mode a table can appear only once in the Table Editor In Browse Only mode a ta
427. node where the accounts of the user and group names in the report are defined The User Security Report lists Functional Security permissions for specified users and groups The report lists each privilege class and permissions for the associated privileges as well as the role to which a permission applies Ifa user is a member of a group for which Functional Security is defined the group is included You can use wildcards for criteria Enter user or group names in the format domain name or everyone to include all group and user names in all domains and nodes Enter one name per line You can use percent as a wild card character but the pattern must use the domain name format For example dom n or The Function Security Report lists Functional Security permissions assigned to each user and group for selected privileges as well as the role to which they apply The tab is divided into two grids one for privilege classes and one for privileges that are included in the selected privilege class For a Installation and Configuration Guide 519 Appendix E Security Reports Privilege Classes Privileges 520 description of Functional Security privilege classes and privileges see Functional Privileges Tab on page 458 OPTUSR RPT1 Report Request Editor test report Create New Definitions E j bs C S e a S Use the Privilege Classes grid to display associated privileges in the P
428. ntifier for new triggers based on the identifier from one of the following Object Use the identifier from a corresponding target object as the default for new triggers For triggers the corresponding target object is the table referenced in the trigger Source Use the identifier from the source trigger as the default for new triggers Installation and Configuration Guide 301 9 Personal Options Current ID Use the current SQLID User ID as the default for new triggers Explicit Use an explicit identifier as the default for new triggers If you select this option you must specify an explicit identifier 1 to 64 characters To select from a list click the browse button Create Synonyms Tab Use the Synonyms tab to select default options for creating new synonyms You can specify a default synonym when you use Oracle or Informix lt gt Personal Options 302 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Identifier Specify the default identifier for new synonyms based on the identifier from one of the following Object Source Current ID Explicit 9 2 8 Logon Tab Use the identifier from a corresponding target object as the default for new synonyms For synonyms the corresponding target object is the table synonym function package package body procedure sequence trigger or view referenced in the synonym Use the identifier from the source synonym as the default for new synonyms Use the current
429. ntifier is used as a qualifier for the names of plans packages or procedures needed to access these tables The plans packages or procedures are created as part of the configuration process Note When you create the Optim Directory the Configuration program also creates the Windows registry entry needed to access the Optim Directory Create DB Alias es Optim requires a DB Alias for each database instance it accesses You may define one or more DB Aliases at installation or use the Configuration program to add DB Aliases later The same information specified for the Optim Directory is needed for each DB Alias that is DBMS Type and Version User ID Password Connection String and Identifier for the packages plans or Installation and Configuration Guide 7 1 Getting Started Create Optim Primary Keys Load Sample Database Tables Load Data Privacy Data Tables Initialize and Enable Optim Security Create Product Configuration File Export Registry Data procedures to be included as part of the DB Alias definition Meaningful DB Alias names are desirable because Optim references tables using a three part name dbalias ownerid tablename Many Optim processes require primary keys Often database tables do not have DBMS primary keys In this step you can create Optim Primary Keys for any table that does not have one but does have a unique index You may choose this option for each DB Alias Optim is distri
430. nts If this occurs you must shut down Automount and restart it The temporary directory used by the setup program may be full The default temporary directory is var tmp To change the temporary directory you can run the setup program with the following parameters setup is tempdir your_tmp_dir where your_tmp_ dir is the name of the temporary directory If the setup program still fails to start the InstallShield Wizard you can run the setup program in console mode with the following parameters setup console is javaconsole The default destination directory used by the setup program is opt IBM Optim To change the destination directory in console mode you can run the setup program with the following parameters setup console is javaconsole P Main installLocation your_dest_dir where your_dest_dir is the name of the destination directory Installation and Configuration Guide 337 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux To change the temporary directory in console mode you can run the setup program with the following parameters setup console is javaconsole is tempdir your_tmp_dir where your_tmp_ dir is the name of the temporary directory Software License Agreement The next dialog prompts you to read the License Agreement Optim Server Setup re License Agreement InstaliiShielia Command Buttons You must accept the terms of the licens
431. nue import if error s Tools Menu The following commands are available from the Tools menu Select All Definitions Deselect All Definitions Show Process Log Installation and Configuration Guide Select check boxes for all listed security definitions This command is especially useful when you want to import all or most security definitions Clear the check boxes for all listed security definitions including shaded and or selected check boxes Display the Security Import Process Log generated by the last execution of Security Definition Import 501 Appendix D Optim Security Process Tab Use the Process tab to identify the Secured Input File select security definitions for import and provide parameters for Security Definition Import processing The tab is populated with defaults you have specified amp Import Security Definitions Jof x File Tools Options Help A l m Process Owners Objects Definitions Import Progress ORS Access Control Domain H RH Access Control List w L File Access Definition Curent a Access Control Domains Access Control Lists File Access Definitions 300 Import errors encountered bo gt Secured Input File I Allow ACL for non existent Optim Objects C Stemp Secdefs txt 7 LJ IV Overwrite existing definitions I Continue import if error s Definitions The Import Security Definitions Utility populates the list
432. o Cancel Ready Oracle Q0R922K Ui The only available option is to use an existing DB Alias Specify the name of the DB Alias you want to use To select from a list click the down arrow Click Proceed to open the Connect to Database dialog Connect to The Configuration program must connect to the database to apply Database maintenance to the Data Dictionary Catalog Tables or System Tables depending on the DBMS you are using When the Connect to Installation and Configuration Guide 207 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Drop Old Packages Create Drop Packages Apply Maintenance to Another 208 Database dialog opens the User ID Password Connection String and DB Name are populated with previously entered values The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to create or refresh database packages plans or procedures You can modify these values as needed and click Proceed to continue The Configuration program displays the Drop Old Packages Plans or Procedures dialog If you select this option and click Proceed you can drop old packages plans or procedures before creating new ones If you do not select this option you can create refresh the appropriate packages plans or procedures The following guidelines apply e Ifyou share stored procedures with other users then any one authorized user can drop old packages plans or procedures for all users e Ifyour qualifier is not
433. o Next After connection information is updated in the registry the What to do Next dialog instructs you to use the Only Rename the Windows Registry Entry option to update the registry for each workstation that accesses the Optim Directory Click Proceed to display the Complete dialog and complete the process Rename Optim Directory What to do Next ou have successfully renamed a Optim Directory This task must now be run on every other workstation and server that accessed the Optim Directory using the old name When run on a server the task must also be run by launching the Configuration Program from te Optim 5 Server Settings applet However on these machines the 7 9 2 Only Rename the Windows Registry Entry Specify Registry After selecting the option to rename a registry entry the Specify Entry to Rename Registry Entry to Rename dialog is displayed The option to Rename Optim Directory Registry Entry is selected Specify the Name of the Installation and Configuration Guide 219 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Connect to Database Confirm the Optim Directory Name Connect to Database 220 Optim Directory you want to rename in the registry To select from a list click the down arrow Rename Optim Directory Specify Registry Entry to Rename _ OF x Optim he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database that contains Optim Directory in a named registry entry Select the
434. o establish Object Security 1 Using the Configuration program initialize Optim Security and assign a Security Administrator as described in 5 1 4 Optim Security on page 128 2 Using the Configuration program enable Object Security as described in 7 4 4 Set Optim Object Security Option on page 197 e Indicating whether selected objects are automatically assigned an ACL when saved e Defining the Object Template ACL 3 Edit the Default ACD and any additional ACDs to map roles to network accounts Archive File Archive File Security allows you to control access to data in Archive Security Files For example you might use Archive File Security to prevent any access to data in a specific table or column for most users while granting access to members of selected roles for the same data Each secured Archive File is associated with a File Access Definition FAD which is a security definition that lists tables and columns for which access privileges are defined and for each listed role grants or denies privileges to access the archived data Establishing Archive File Security requires an ACD the Default ACD or one you create for the purpose used as the basis for roles in the FAD In addition you must use the Configuration program to enable Archive File Security To establish Archive File Security 1 Using the Configuration program initialize PST Security and assign a Security Administrator as described in 5 1 4 Opt
435. o purge a workstation registry entry to accomplish these goals You may want to purge a DB Alias when you drop a database or to make a database temporarily inaccessible to workstations using Optim Note Many basic tasks are also available when you select Configuration Assistant from the Help menu See 4 1 4 Configuration Assistant for details Use the Options menu to edit or view license or company name information sign a user exit customize the toolbar and view or hide the Optim 7 1 4 1 Main Window and Menus toolbar or status bar by selecting either command from the menu Select any of the following commands License Sign Optim Exit Company Name File Tasks Options Help License Sign Optim Exit Configure Company Name Processing L Toolbar v Status Bar Customize Toolbar After the initial installation you may need to change the license key A new license key may be required for example to activate additional functions or increase the number of users or servers for Optim Select License to display the Specify Product License Key dialog After you update the license key you must store the key in the Optim Directory by connecting to the Directory Select this option to display the Sign Optim Exit dialog to sign and activate a new exit whether it is the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit IBM generates a license key for a specific Company Name and Company ID Select Company N
436. o use a different exit Installation and Configuration Guide 57 3 Signing an Optim Exit 58 Corrupt The existing signed exit was not the one expected by Optim The two most common reasons for this status are e an install was done on top of an existing install that already contained a signed exit e the existing exit was tampered with If you receive this status you must re sign a valid exit to use Optim Not Authorized The current user does not have permission to access the Configuration program so Optim will terminate the user s session after displaying an appropriate error message If the user requires access to the Configuration program contact your Optim Administrator to have the user s access permissions changed Company Information There are three items listed under this heading company Name ID and Password Each company is assigned a unique company Name ID and Password when it receives Optim These entries are your company credentials for accessing Optim When you install Optim on a Windows machine you normally enter your company Name and ID during setup although this may not be the case in some instances See 3 6 Specifying a Company Name and ID on page 60 for more information Name Optim will automatically display the company name assigned to your organization here Your Optim supplied name may not match the spelling or punctuation used in your company s actual name You cann
437. ocate and display Archive File names that contain specific data Click the down arrow to select the default backup device from a drop down list of available backup devices Note The drop down list includes the backup devices selected on the Archive tab in Product Options If no backup devices are selected in Product Options this option is unavailable The default backup device is automatically selected when you create a new Storage Profile Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor 9 2 13 Removable Media Tab Use options on the Removable Media tab to set default values for segment size when creating Archive Files whether or not using a Storage Profile Definition and Extract Files When an Archive or Extract File is larger than the space limitation for the target media the file must be segmented to span more than one volume lt gt Personal Options Installation and Configuration Guide 317 9 Personal Options Default Segment Sizes MB Fixed Enter the segment size 0 9999 MB to use when the target destination is a fixed drive i e hard disk To specify no limit enter a value of 0 zero Notes e This value also applies to Archive Files copied to a backup device because Archive Files are created on disk before being copied to a backup device The maximum segment size when the target is a Centera Server is 2 GB Removable Enter the segment size 1 9999 MB to use when the target destination is a rem
438. ociation Privileges Automatically Associate an Object with an ACL An Access Control List ACL governs the ability of a role to perform actions such as read update or delete on both an object and the associated ACL Each Access Control Domain File Access Definition and secured Optim object has an ACL Note that ACLs for objects other than security definitions have no effect unless the Security Administrator has enabled Object Security When you secure an object access to any associated Local objects is governed by the ACL for the parent object Local objects are not secured individually they are secured with the object in which they are embedded Use the Access Control List Editor to set access permissions for an object and the associated ACL In general an ACL is based upon a specific ACD which defines the roles referenced by the ACL Roles that are not in the ACD or not included in the ACL are denied all access to the object and ACL However the owner of the ACL always retains full access to the ACL regardless of permissions granted or denied by the ACL In order to create an ACL when Functional Security is enabled a user must be a member ofa role to which the ACD grants Object Association Privileges for the object type Object Association Privileges are defined on the Object Association Privileges tab in the Role Specifications dialog Use the tab to identify object types that the role can use with the ACD For more infor
439. ode and multi byte you are prompted to indicate the format in which the Directory should store data single byte Unicode or multi byte Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Note The character sets of the DBMS client and the database server must match your selection onfigure First Works Character Set of Optim Director he Optim Configuration Program can configure this Optim Directory to keep character data stored in it e g object names Optim Primary Keys Audit data etc in one of hree formats Single byte ASCII Unicode UTF 8 or Multi byte MBCS Select the option that corresponds to the character set of the database for the Optim Directory Installation and Configuration Guide 89 5 Configure Workstations 90 Information on Unicode Format UTF 8 If you select Unicode format in the Specify Character Set of Optim Directory Data dialog you are prompted to acknowledge the following DBMS character set requirements for Unicode Both the DBMS client and database character sets must be Unicode The Optim Directory must be in Unicode format if it includes DB Aliases for databases of different character sets a combination of single byte Unicode or multi byte Configure First Workstation Information on Unicode Format UTF 8 ou have selected the option to configure this Optim Directory so its character data is ept in Unicode format To enable this option both the DBMS client and
440. oduct Configuration File used by the workstation Options allow you to use the underscore as an SQL LIKE character select the uppercase or lowercase default for selection criteria establish the number of days to keep Trace Files specify a default code page value and choose whether to warn a user when a cascading delete or update may occur Confirm Choose to display a confirmation prompt before definitions are deleted files overwritten or DDL lost 282 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Display Errors Scheduling Load Create Logon Server Edit Browse Archive Removable Media Actions Printer Installation and Configuration Guide Choose options for data displays when editing data or using Point and Shoot including the maximum number of rows fetched and the maximum number of entries in history and menu file lists Also set options to determine the default settings for Large Objects for the Access Definition Select font characteristics for informational warning and error messages and the number of lines to display in the message bar Select options for using the Scheduling Monitor Provide the complete path and name of the executable used to access each DBMS Loader Specify default options for creating database objects Review logon information for each DB Alias in a selected Optim Directory Connection and password information is stored in the workstation registry Provide User ID pas
441. og Drop DB Alias Optim Tables Drop the Optim Directory _ OF x Optim o drop the Optim Directory OPTIMDIR select the Drop Optim Directory OPTIMDIR heckbox Caution Dropping the Optim Directory will drop all DB Aliases and Optim efinition defined for that Optim Directory Select lt Proceed gt to continue to the next tep x M Options E Drop Optim Directory OPTIMDIR cma 7 To retain the Optim Directory tables and objects in it click Skip Create Drop When you drop an Optim Directory all objects stored in that Directory Packages are deleted For this reason the packages plans or procedures used to access the Optim Directory are no longer useful and should be dropped The Create Drop Packages Bind Drop Plans or Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog prompts you to do this Drop Another After you drop the Optim Directory the Configuration program opens Optim Directory the Drop Another Optim Directory dialog Select the check box to restart the process for another Optim Directory 242 Optim 7 1 7 18 Purge Optim Directory Registry Entry 7 18 Purge Optim Directory Registry Entry Purge a Pre 6 0 Optim Directory Entry Specify Optim Directory Confirm Purge Optim Registry Entry For security or other reasons you may want to purge the Windows registry entry for an Optim Directory from a workstation but not drop the Directory or packages plans or procedures used
442. oice 2 Note Ifyou choose to configure ODM now W ConfigureODMPromptPanel ConfigureODM Choice 1 you must define a value for W ODMLicensePanel ODMLicenseField W ODMLicensePanel ODMLicenseField If you choose to configure ODM now W ConfigureODMPromptPanel ConfigureODMChoice 1 enter the fully qualified name to the Attunity Licence File If the directory contains spaces enclose it in double quotes Note Ifyou do not have an Attunity license file enter W ConfigureODMPromptPanel ConfigureODM Choice 2 W ODMLicensePanel ODMLicenseField opt ODM license txt 354 Optim 7 1 A l Installation W UpdateFilesPanel Update_rtsetenv Edit the RTSETENV shell script during the installation process using the default text editor The RTSETENV shell script is included in a user profile or login script to define the operating environment for the Server This script sets up the Server daemon or command line environment on login The operating environment requires certain environment variables to create default settings For detailed information needed to edit this file refer to A 2 3 RTSETENV Shell Script 0 Do not edit RTSETENV during installation 1 Edit RTSETENV during installation If you are not installing from a graphical interface this option will cause an error W UpdateFilesPanel Update_ rtsetenv 0 W UpdateFilesPanel Update_rtserver Edit the RTSERVER shell script during the installat
443. ole in the FAD that is granted the necessary access to archived data To use Optim Security you must initialize security for the Optim Directory assign a Security Administrator and enable the security features your site will use To initialize Optim Security and assign a Security Administrator use one of the following Tasks menu options in the Configuration program e Configure the First Workstation e Configure Security for an Optim Directory e Create Update Optim Directory e Configure Options To enable or disable the security features select Configure Security for an Optim Directory from the Tasks menu in the Configuration program For more information see 7 4 Configure Security for an Optim Directory on page 192 This chapter explains how to do the following e Create edit and maintain ACDs e Create roles e Define ACLs Define FADs Optim 7 1 D 1 Access Control Domain D 1 Access Control Domain Create a New ACD or Select an ACD to Edit Use the Access Control Domain Editor to create and maintain Access Control Domains There are different ways to open the editor depending upon whether you want to create a new Access Control Domain or select an Access Control Domain to edit This section explains how to create or edit an Access Control Domain To create or edit an Access Control Domain 1 In the main window select Access Control Domains from the Security submenu on the Options menu to open t
444. om the initiating clients as follows Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet select Server for the File Input Output option clear the Only files local to this Server may be accessed check box and provide explicit credentials in User ID Password and Domain UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the filelogon parameter to server and provide an explicit User ID and password Note The Server credentials must have specific rights as specified in B 1 3 Server Privileges for Explicit or Client Credentials Run Under Client Credentials You can run processes under the credentials from the workstation used to initiate the process The process is run with the same rights as if it were run on the initiating machine as a LOCAL request Require the use of initiating credentials on the Server as follows Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet select Client for the File Input Output option UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the filelogon parameter to client Also on each initiating machine you must provide the credentials for the Server Windows On the Server tab in Personal Options enter the credentials for all Default or individual Servers UNIX or Linux In pstlocal cfg specify the credentials on each server parameter Note The Server credentials must have specific rights as specified in B 1 3 Server Privileges for Explicit or Client Credentials Installati
445. on program If you want to sign a user supplied exit you must compile and create the load library opmexit dll You must then copy the DLL to the rt bin directory before you run the Configuration program Note If you use the Configuration program to sign a user supplied exit Optim will immediately call that exit to authorize all future requests This means that the new exit could theoretically prohibit the current user from executing any other requests such as running the Configuration program if that user does not have permission to do so in the new exit Each time you execute the Configuration program it checks for the existence of a signed exit If one is not found the Sign Optim Exit dialog displays and you must sign either the default Optim exit or a user supplied exit to use Optim See 3 5 The Sign Optim Exit Dialog on page 56 for further information Installation and Configuration Guide 53 3 Signing an Optim Exit Sign Optim Exit he Optim Exit validates that a user is authorized to use Optim A default Optim Exit at allows access to all actions by all users is supplied with Optim and can be used if our company security policies allow The Optim Exit must be signed To sign an exit ou must enter the unique Password that was included when you received your If you click Cancel without signing an exit Optim displays a warning message and the Configuration program terminates Note Ifyou did not pr
446. on and Configuration Guide 421 Appendix B Server Credentials B 1 3 Server Privileges for Explicit or Client Credentials Whether using explicit credentials or client credentials the Server credentials require certain privileges For Windows the Server credentials must allow logon as a user and the creation of a process request as that user To establish these permissions you must access the Local Security Policy and grant the following privileges to the user e Actas part of the operating system SeTcbPrivilege e Increase quotas SeIncreaseQuotaPrivilege e Replace a process level token SeAssignPrimaryTokenPrivilege e Bypass traverse checking SeChangeNotifyPrivilege Note These privileges are automatically granted to the Local System Account Also the overriding User ID specified on the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet and the client credentials must have the following privilege Note that in some installations you can give this privilege to everyone in the Local Security Policy instead of specifying credentials for each client user Log on as a batch job SE_BATCH_ LOGON NAME For UNIX or Linux Super User Server credentials are required to change the effective User ID and Group ID During startup if the filelogon parameter is set to client or server the effective User ID that started the daemon must be a Super User zero B 1 4 UNC Network Share Access Windows
447. on column SALESMAN ID e The OPTIM MALE RATES table through an Optim data driven relationship on column AGE when SEX M 590 Optim 7 1 H 1 Sample Database Tables and Structure e The OPTIM FEMALE RATES table through an Optim data driven relationship on column AGE when SEX F e The OPTIM STATE LOOKUP table through an Optim substring relationship using SUBSTR SALESMAN ID 1 2 H 1 2 OPTIM_CUSTOMERS Table The OPTIM_ CUSTOMERS table contains customer names ID numbers and addresses The OPTIM_ CUSTOMERS table has the following columns Column Name Data Type and Description CUST_ID CHAR up to 5 characters cannot contain null contains a check constraint CUSTNAME CHAR up to 20 characters cannot contain null ADDRESS VARCHAR up to 50 characters cannot contain null CITY VARCHAR up to 15 characters cannot contain null STATE CHAR up to 2 characters cannot contain null ZIP CHAR up to 5 characters can contain a null value YTD_SALES DECIMAL dollar amount cannot contain null has a default value SALESMAN _ID CHAR up to 6 characters can contain a null value CCN INTEGER 19 characters cannot contain null EMAIL VARCHAR2 up to 62 characters cannot contain null PHONE NUMBER CHAR up to 10 characters can contain a null value Installation and Configuration Guide 591 Appendix H Samples Primary Keys The CUST_ID column is the
448. onal locale conversion information For detailed information needed to edit this file see A 2 6 LOCALE CONF Conversion File 0 Do not edit locale conf during installation 1 Edit locale conf during installation This option will cause an error unless installing from a graphical interface W UpdateFilesPanel Update_ locale 0 W View_Readme Value Installation and Configuration Guide Open the readme txt file using the default text editor The readme txt file contains installation notes and information 0 Do not open readme txt during installation 1 Open readme txt during installation If you are not installing from a graphical interface this option will cause an error W View Readme Value 0 357 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux A 2 Configuration Configuration files and shell scripts are installed with the Executable Files when you install the Server in a supported UNIX environment These objects establish defaults for the Server and must be customized to reflect your network environment Use a text editor e g vi emacs CDE Text Editor textedit or xedit to modify these files Configuration Files Configuration files are ASCII text files and are installed in the etc directory that is subordinate to the PSTHOME directory PSTHOME is an environment variable set during installation that points to the directory in which the Server is installed The configuration file
449. one or more columns have separate access permissions as indicated by Column Secured setting OPTUSR FIRST File Access Definition Editor File Edit Tools Options Help alsialia 8 Description Access Control Domain LS E o Table List Table Access Control Default DEMS OPTUSR CUSTOMERS Explicit 7 3 gt DBMS OPTUSR ORDERS Defaut M The AC Type for the ORDERS table is Default which for this File Access Definition allows access to all users and roles except the Guest role The Column Secured setting indicates that one or more columns in the table have defined access permissions To view a list of the secured columns right click the ORDERS row and select List Columns 494 Optim 7 1 D 3 File Access Definition As shown by the Table Access Control dialog the Default AC Type grants all users Allow access All users that can access the table are allowed to access columns not specified in the Column List Table Access Control DBMS OPTUSR ORDERS E However only the Optim Administrator role can access the ORDER_ID column All other users and roles are denied access B Table Access Control DBMS OPTUSR ORDERS Inthe Column List the AC Type for ORDER ID is Explicit The access permissions apply to this column only Inthe Column Access Control list the Optim Administrator role is assigned Allow access
450. onfiguration program must connect to the database to configure the Optim irectory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to create the ptim Directory Tables Optim Directory OPTIMDIR Database Connection Parameters User ID Connection String optusr4 QOR922K Password Previous Proceed _ Undo Cancel 4 DB Alias Name of the DB Alias Database Connection User ID Enter the User ID up to 30 characters that the DBMS Parameters requires to allow access to the Optim Directory database instance Note For security and other reasons a User ID with privileges different from those required to configure the server may be desirable Password Enter the password up to 30 characters that corresponds to the specified User ID Connection String or name that allows the workstation to access String the Optim Directory database The DBMS uses this connection string to recognize the database This value was entered earlier in the process and cannot be edited 108 Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation DB Name Name that identifies the database for the DB Alias This name is assigned when the database is created Note The database name applies to Sybase ASE SQL Server and Informix and refers to a particular database for a given server that is referenced by the DB Alias Always Ask Select this check box to require a password each time for Password you connect to the
451. onfigure Workstations You can also specify the tablespace for tables individually or as a group and browse the DDL generated to create the Optim Directory tables amp Configure First Workstation Create Optim Directory Tables ioj x Optim he Optim Directory tables are used to store Optim Objects that contain information For very database with which you want to use Optim Each Optim Directory table can be loaded into a different Tablespace which can be separate from your application tables pecify a default Tablespace and optionally a Tablespace name to override the default gt ine a Ontim Directory Table TF vou are using the dudik antion For Edit TRM recommends a Directory Table Specifications Directory Table Tablespace Schema Name Joptusra PSTARCVFDAT2 PSTARCVFILE2 Ercan PSTARCVSEG2 chee cs Benet PSTARCVTBL2 lt DB Default gt z PSTAUDIT2 PSTAUDITX2 xl T Display SQL Previous Proceed _ Undo Cancel Oracle QOR922K 7 The Create Optim Directory Tables dialog displays the following details Directory Table Schema Name Enter an identifier for the Optim Directory Specifications tables The label is Creator ID when creating the Optim Directory for a DB2 database Schema Name for an Oracle database and Owner ID for a Microsoft SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix database For an Oracle database the Schema Name must not be SYS or any name th
452. ons Security Tasks 466 Run Untitled Actions privileges are required to process new action requests not saved prior to processing i e requests for which Untitled is displayed in the dialog heading The Run command in a respective action editor will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Archive Request Insert Request Compare Request Load Request Convert Request Report Request Delete Request Restore Request Extract Request Security Tasks privileges are required to export or import secured Archive Files modify a FAD or run a Security Report This class includes the following privileges Export Secured Export a secured Archive File Archive File Import Secured Import a secured Archive File Archive File Modify File Use the Archive File Migration Security with Process to change a FAD Migrate Report Security Runa Security Report Privileges Optim 7 1 D 1 Access Control Domain Object Association Privileges Tab Use the Object Association Privileges tab to indicate the types of object for which the role will have Object Association Privileges Object Association Privileges allow the role to use roles defined in the the ACD as the basis for an ACL that protects objects of the indicated type Role Specifications A E Associate Defintionedtors mir al Compare Request Convert Request For more inform
453. ons Select check boxes for all listed security definitions This command is especially useful when you want to export all or most definitions Installation and Configuration Guide 497 Appendix D Optim Security Run Export Export Errors 498 Deselect All Definitions Clear the check boxes for all listed security definitions including shaded and or selected check boxes Show Process Log Display the Security Export Process Log generated by the last execution of Security Definition Export To export security definitions choose Run from the File menu Notes The Run command will not be available until you have specified security definitions for export a Secured Output File and a password During Security Definition Export processing the Export Progress pane displays the number of security definitions of each type that are exported and the number of errors encountered The status bar displays information about the current security definition that is processed When Security Definition Export processing is finished the status bar displays the message Ready If errors occur during Security Definition Export processing for example a dropped definition is selected for export an error message is displayed Definitions for which processing errors occur are also represented visually by a red X Errors and diagnostic information are written to the Security Export Process Log Optim 7 1 D 4 Exporting Securit
454. ons on page 132 for additional information Optim 7 1 7 13 Create Primary Keys 7 13 Create Primary Keys If you add tables to a database you may use the Configuration program to create Optim Primary Keys for tables that do not have DBMS primary keys but do have unique indexes When you create Optim Primary Keys you must specify the Optim Directory and the DB Alias for the database where the tables reside Optim Primary Keys are usually created when you configure the first workstation or when you create a DB Alias After you install Optim you can create these primary keys by selecting Create Primary Keys from the Tasks menu or by selecting Configuration Assistant from the Help menu Specify Optim Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see page 185 to select the Directory name of the Optim Directory Click Proceed to open the next dialog in the process Create Select Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog to specify the DB Alias for the DB Alias database where you want to create Primary Keys Create Primary Keys Create Select DB Alias _ OF x Optim he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database connection in DB Alias Select a DB Alias from the list of existing DB Alias names then click lt Proceed gt to continue Selecting lt Skip gt will also skip those functions that require a DB lias xl M Database Alias Specifications a Greate New For any Single DB Alias Nam
455. or all columns in a selected table Column attributes are useful when you insert a row or modify column data in the Table Editor Display Deleted Select to display rows that you delete in Deleted status in the Table Rows Editor Deleted rows appear dimmed To hide deleted rows clear this check box Single View Select to disable the Join capability when the first item in the Table Editor is a view Browsing and editing is more efficient using single 308 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Side Label Display Warn on Cascade Display NULL as Insert Default User Supplies Defaults Prompt for Variables Retain SelCrit for Self Ref Rels view mode because relationship information is bypassed However to browse or edit related data you must clear the check box Select to show column names and values side by side for a single row To show column names and values for multiple rows Columnar Display clear this check box Select to display a warning that rows in other tables may be deleted or column values set to NULL when you delete rows in a table The Delete Confirmation dialog displays the names of affected tables including tables that are not shown in the Table Editor Column values may be set to NULL if the relationship between the tables is using the SET NULL delete rule Note Be certain you want to disable this feature before clearing this check box Select to specify NULL as the default value for nullable colu
456. or all listed roles except Default Selecting Columns from a Table Use the File Access Definition Table Column Selection dialog to select and add one or more names of columns from the table specified in the Table Access Control dialog to the Column List Source displays the fully qualified table name To open this dialog right click the blank row at the bottom of the Column List and do one of the following e Select Add column from the shortcut menu and then select From Database table from the submenu Select Add column from the shortcut menu and then select From table in Archive File from the submenu to first specify an Archive File containing the table File Access Definition Table Column Selection iof x Source DBMS OPTUS SALES SALESMAN _ID_ SALESMAN_NAME Gk Cancel Help Ready 490 Optim 7 1 D 3 File Access Definition Click a column name to select it To select multiple columns hold the Ctrl or Shift key while clicking the column names To select all columns in the table click Select All Click OK to add the names of selected columns to the Column List and re display the Table Access Control dialog Selecting Columns from a Table in an Archive File When you select Add table from the Column List shortcut menu and select From table in an Archive File from the submenu the Open dialog is displayed to allow you to select an Archive File In the Open dialog select the
457. or another database or server clear the check box Installation and Configuration Guide 187 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 188 Create Select DB On the Create Select DB Alias dialog specify the DB Alias name amp Create Update DB Alias Create Select DB Alias _ OF x Optim he Optim Configuration program stores information about each database connectionin DB Alias Select the Create New option to create a single new DB Alias the Create Select Multiple option to create or select multiple DB Aliases From a Single DB erver or the Use Existing option to use an existing DB Alias then click lt Proceed gt to antinue Selectina Skin mill alen skin Fhace Functions that renuire a MR Alias Database Alias Specifications Create New For any Single DB Alias Name fl C Create Select Multiple For a Single DB Server Sybase SQL Server Informix C Use Existing For any Single Existing DB Alias Name z Previous Proceed _ Skip Undo Cancel Oracle Q0R922K y From this point the task is similar to creating a DB Alias when configuring the first workstation For details see 5 1 3 Create DB Aliases on page 94 You specify the DB Alias DBMS and then connect to the database User ID Password and Connection String You also create or update the DB Alias packages plans or procedures The following guidelines apply Ifyou update an existi
458. or each database Therefore the Configuration program may prompt you to connect to the database before proceeding The Connect to Database dialog prompts for the User ID Password and Connection String needed to connect to the database for which Personal Options are specified If Optim Security for the Optim Directory is not initialized the Initialize Security dialog is displayed Use this dialog to assign a Security Administrator and initialize Optim Security for the Directory For more information about this dialog and initializing Optim Security see 5 1 4 Optim Security on page 128 If Optim Security for the Optim Directory is initialized the Change Security Administrator dialog is displayed Use this dialog to change the Security Administrator for the Directory For more information about this dialog see 7 4 2 Initialize Security or Change Security Administrator On the Enable Disable the Optim Server Feature dialog specify whether to enable or disable the current machine as a Server If the site is not licensed for the Server Enable is not available On the Enable Disable the Archive ODBC Feature dialog specify whether to enable or disable the ODBC driver If the site is not licensed for Archive Enable is not available In order to create the Product Configuration File you must provide the fully qualified name of the file The Specify Product Configuration File dialog prompts for this information Refer to 5 1 5 Configure Opti
459. or sign the default exit Signing Required Unlike the Optim Security feature which you must initialize once per After Each Install Optim Directory you must sign an exit each time you install Optim on a machine Moreover when you upgrade to a new Optim release you must sign a valid exit for each Optim installation before you can use Optim The same is true if you reinstall Optim Anytime you replace a signed exit executable i e opmexit dll libopmexit so or libopmexit sl with another version of that exit you must sign the updated exit to use Optim This is true even if the executable was previously signed e g in another installation or copied from a backup of a signed exit A 5 3 Signing an Exit in UNIX Unlike in Windows UNIX does not include a Configuration program to sign an exit There are however three ways to sign the default exit in UNIX and two ways to sign a user supplied exit in UNIX The three ways to sign the default exit in UNIX are 1 The Optim Setup program which allows you to sign the default exit as part of the installation process as described earlier in this appendix If you want to sign a user supplied exit you must manually run a script file after installation is completed 2 The opmdsign script file located in the rt sbin directory You can run this script at any time following installation to switch to the Optim default exit The letter d in the script s name indicates that it is
460. orer expand the primary server list and the User list to display the NAV member 2 Right click the NAV member and select Edit User from the shortcut menu to open the user profile editor E Properti H Name NAM Path Primary ODM users NAV 3 Select the Authenticators tab 4 Click Add to open the Add Authenticator dialog Add Authenticator 5 In Resource type select Data source 6 In Resource name type the data source name or use the browse button to select a name 7 In User name type the user ID with Archive File Security privileges for the data source Installation and Configuration Guide 549 Appendix F Open Data Manager 8 In Password and Confirm password type the password for the user ID 9 Click OK 10 From the File menu select Save All Providing Administrative authorization for an ODM Server controls the ability to Administrative modify the server Perform this step on the primary and secondary Authorization for servers the ODM Server i To provide administrative authorization 1 In the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer right click the ODM Server name and select Administration Authorization from the shortcut menu to open the administration authorization editor Ef Design Primary ODM Attunity Studio Fie Edit Navigate Search Window Help mele leeos 5 ff Decion fF Configuration
461. ork drive 3 See Section A 1 1 Run Setup to begin installation 334 Optim 7 1 A l Installation A 1 Installation A 1 1 Run Setup Installing the Server takes only a few minutes and can be performed using a graphical interface or from the command line The graphical interface option uses the setup program to guide you through the installation process To use this option see A 1 1 Run Setup Note A graphical workstation is required to run the setup program and a defined DISPLAY environment variable must point to the workstation To ensure that you have the proper environment for running setup open a terminal session and issue the following command echo SDISPLAY The command should return a valid identifier for your graphical workstation If not see your System Administrator The command line option uses a setup options file setupopts in which you define your installation settings To use this option see A 1 2 Command Line Installation You can begin Optim Server installation from a graphical interface in one of two ways 1 Mount the Optim Server CD From File Manager or a console window navigate to the CD ROM drive and start setup 2 Ifyou copied the contents of the Optim Server CD to a network drive navigate to the drive from File Manager or a console window and start setup When you launch setup a prompt for options and arguments displays Action Run Please enter the following information
462. ory Installation and Configuration Guide 547 Appendix F Open Data Manager F 5 ODM Security 548 Credential Definition Providing Archive File Security Credentials This section describes a method for securing an ODM environment that uses a primary and secondary server Using a secondary server is required for ODBC users only Securing an ODM environment requires the following e Providing Archive File Security user credentials on the primary server for each data source Securing the Attunity daemon on both servers e Providing administrative authorization for both servers e Providing user credentials for secondary server access to the primary server All credentials specified for Attunity authentication are operating system credentials of the machine performing the authorization For UNIX or Linux groups as well as individual users are supported For Windows groups are not supported and all credentials are based on local users however Attunity daemon access can be qualified by domain name see page 551 Archive File Security user credentials for each data source are assigned to the NAV user profile on the primary server You can also provide Archive File Security credentials in an ODBC or JDBC connection string For more information see F 6 Runtime Connection Information Optim 7 1 F 5 ODM Security To provide Archive File Security user credentials 1 In the Attunity Studio Configuration expl
463. ory name and Security Feature indicates Archive File Security is the option you can enable or disable Security State indicates that security for the option is Enabled or Disabled Security Administrator for this Optim Directory displays the Security Administrator To enable or disable Archive File Security select Enable or Disable and click Proceed If the Security Administrator is not signed on to the workstation the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog is displayed and the password for the Security Administrator must be entered 200 Optim 7 1 7 5 Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server 7 5 Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server Specify Optim Directory Enable Disable Optim Server Feature To change the status of a machine to or from that of a Server select Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server from the Tasks menu The Configuration program displays the Specify Optim Directory dialog The option to Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry is selected Specify the name of the Optim Directory you want to use To select from a list click the down arrow To continue click Proceed On the Enable Disable Optim Server Feature dialog specify whether to enable or disable the current machine as a Server Enable Disable the Optim Server Feature Enable Disable Optim Ser OX he Configuration program can configure machines running Windows NT 2000 xP to be n Optim Server When enabled
464. ot change this entry ID Optim will automatically display the company ID assigned to your organization here You cannot change this entry Optim 7 1 3 5 The Sign Optim Exit Dialog Password You must specify the Password assigned to your company to sign any exit whether it be the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit This entry is case sensitive and you must enter it in the format provided to you when you received Optim This entry is required unless you selected the Leave the Currently Signed Exit Intact option Click OK to sign After you specify your company password to sign an exit click OK to the selected Exit complete the signing process and close the Sign Optim Exit dialog Note You must sign a valid exit to use Optim If you click Cancel instead of OK and a signed exit does not already exist Optim will display a warning message and the Configuration program will terminate Installation and Configuration Guide 59 3 Signing an Optim Exit 3 6 Specifying a Company Name and ID The first time you execute the Configuration program on a workstation or server the Specify Company Name dialog will appear if you did not previously specify your company Name and ID In that case this dialog will appear before the Sign Optim Exit dialog because a company Name and ID are required to sign an exit amp Specify Company Name olx Optim ptim requires a 1 to 40 character Company Name and 6 chara
465. ou may also run the opmdsign script file at any time following setup to sign the default exit Before you do that however make sure that no Optim processes are running The syntax for opmdsign is as follows opmdsign install_directory rt Company Id Name Password Parameter Identifies install_directory rt the rt subdirectory appended to your install directory Installation and Configuration Guide 409 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux Company Id the six digit Id assigned to your company Name the Name assigned to your company Password the Password assigned to your company These parameters are positional so you must enter them in the order shown above The install directory parameter install_directory rt is required the remaining parameters Id Name and Password are optional e Ifyou specify a Name you also must specify the company s Id Ifthe company s Name contains spaces type the name in double quotes such as Sample Company e Ifyou specify a Password you also must specify the company s Id and Name The following examples show three different ways of using the opmdsign script to sign the default exit following Optim installation In all three examples the path for the Optim installation directory is users roberts rtinstalled opmdsign Signing Do the following to sign the default exit after installation Example 1 1 Shut down the
466. ous window Click OK to return to the Initialize Security dialog Security Users The Security Users dialog allows you to select a user from an available domain Select a Server Name and a Domain to list Users in the domain After selecting a user click Select to return to the Specify 130 Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Domain Connection Information dialog which will display the selected Domain and User Name amp Security Users toca S I m OIR fu Notes Ifyour site does not use a Server Local is displayed in Server Name Ifa UNIX or Linux Server Name is selected the node name is displayed in Domain Installation and Configuration Guide 131 5 Configure Workstations 5 1 5 Configure Options In the following steps you can e Designate a machine as a Server if this feature is licensed Enable the ODBC interface for the machine if Archive is licensed e Specify a Product Configuration File to record Product Options that in most cases apply to all Optim users at a site e Configure Personal Options that are stored in the Windows registry on a particular workstation Note Both the Product Configuration File and the registry entries are created during the configuration process Enable Disable On the Enable Disable Optim Server Feature dialog choose to enable Optim Server or disable the current machine as a Server Featu
467. ovable device e g zip drive Note The naming convention for a segmented file is filename_ ext filename_2 ext filename_n ext filename ext The name of the last segment is the file name specified in the process request For example when creating an Archive File named c arch archtest af that requires three segments the segments are named as follows c arch archtest_1 af segment 1 c arch archtest_2 af segment 2 c arch archtest af segment 3 9 2 14 Actions Tab Use the options on the Actions tab to select preferences for printing Column Map procedures displaying tabs in Action Request Editors 318 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor updating the Progress dialog formatting numeric values and retaining process reports Personal Options Column Map Procedure Max Print Lines Specify the maximum number of lines to route to a process report If the number of lines exceeds this maximum a warning message indicates the output is incomplete Warn if Missing Clear this check box to suppress the warning Function message generated in the process report when a Load CmStartTable CmEndTable or UnLoad function is omitted from a Column Map Procedure Note The CmTransform function must be included in a Column Map Procedure Installation and Configuration Guide 319 9 Personal Options 320 Prefix Output with Name Select the check box to include the name of the Column Map procedure with the print
468. ovided with password the odbcserver parameter for webserver access to Archive Files 0 Do not use webserver access Note A 1 userid password setting requires root authorization for the user account used to start the pr0svce daemon When setting up user accounts and file permissions note that both prOsvce and the user account running prOsvce must be able to access the file that keeps information on active daemons in order to perform an action against prOsvce for example to shutdown or delete pr0svce This file is maintained in the directory designated by the PSTINFO environment variable See A 2 3 RTSETENV Shell Script for more information regarding the PSTINFO environment variable Execution If the configuration file includes filelogon local or odbcserver tivoliavail or webserver parameters without explicit credentials the process assumes the authority of the user account used to start prOsvce Thus if you start prOsvce from the root user the request will run under root credentials If you start prOsvce under a user account in the group the request will run under the credentials for the user account As a general rule you will want to avoid running pr0svce under root authority However as noted earlier you must run the prOsvce daemon under root authority when certain parameters in pstserv cfg or pstlocal cfg i e the configuration file are set The parameters and settings that require root authority are e filelogo
469. ow the Configuration program exits and a confirmation is displayed Uninstall IBM Optim The Configuration Program was canceled 7 Continue Yes No e Click Yes to close the confirmation dialog and continue the uninstall process e Click No to cancel the uninstall process 614 Optim 7 1 Index A Access Control Domain definition ssucunniennunnaewns 444 SANOT siia r 450 lIS casessanossauassacoisapetanasaaianodvans araawecaa rate 447 Tole specifications ccc cece 452 Access Control List defino sesyen S sak CCILO dernie d 469 Actions tab Personal Options 319 323 Column Map Procedure 000 319 format numeric values eceeeees 322 maximum database connections 327 monitor update frequency 322 TEpPOrt retention sigsiciscerasedionmuiciaryrs 322 Show aging tabs sissirsrerisesissitsssisiisiiss 322 show currency tab 322 Age Function destination format exit 600 source format exit s es 600 Allocation Percent index defaults issiririipsiiririiiitissriiessaiss 298 table defaults scccisisicstcoimiocescenpiasoriaris 297 Apply Maintenance add default tables c ec eeeeeeeeees 204 all DB Aliases ssirisiiisstirsridsiviiririiissans 209 DB Alias Access sses 205 Optim Directory Access s es 203 Query Method jasdavseisrevsarieiarcartecenancavers 206 specific DB Alias ceececseeseeeeees 207 specific DBMS scssccisscsdesiccsscecssersencasers 212
470. ox Cancel If you use the SMTP email transport keep this check box cleared default and select OK A popup will ask you if you want to connect without entering a password If you use the CDO email transport select this check box to enable the dialog and continue entering information Click to select an account from the list and populate the remainder of the Email Transport dialog with information for the selected account Type an exchange server name or internet address Installation and Configuration Guide 331 9 Personal Options Port if not Type a port name or leave blank default port standard Sender s mailbox Type the sender From email address From address Email account Type the email logon name logon Logon domain Type the domain name Email account Type the password A blank password is valid if the account allows it a password prompt will confirm that you want to connect without entering a password Send Test Email Click this button to send a test email to your mailbox Note Itis recommended that you send a test email to ensure that the information you entered is sufficient to send an email If you do not receive the test email make the necessary corrections to the information you entered 332 Optim 7 1 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux Reinstalling in IBM AIX environment Installing from a Network Drive This appendix provides information needed
471. pecified number of days file names are reused beginning with the first Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Temporary Work Directory Data Directory Product Configuration File Local Optim Server ODBC Connections Only Note Storage space limitations should be considered when deciding the number of days to retain the files Specify the complete path to the default directory in which you want to store internal work files and trace files To select from your system directories click the browse button Specify the complete path to the default directory in which you want to store Archive Extract Control Compare and Export Files and other process files To select from your system directories click the browse button The Data Directory serves as the default you can specify a different directory path and file name on any process request Specify the complete path to the Product Configuration File The file name has a cfg extension To select from your system directories click the browse button The Product Configuration File is created when you install Optim To improve ODBC response times select the name of the Server that runs on this machine The ODBC Server will run locally and the Server will not be contacted if an ODBC connection specifies this Server name or if the ODBC interface selects an Archive File with this Server name in its Archive Directory entry Note Do not use this setting if accessing archived da
472. pen Data Manager F 7 ODM Data Type Conversions The following data type conversions occur when Archive File data is accessed by ODM 556 When code page translation of archived data to UTF 8 is required character column length may be extended 1 5 times for NCHAR data or 3 times for single byte character data up to 32k However if the total row size is greater than 32k ODM may encounter errors when joining or sorting data VARBINARY columns are converted to BINARY columns The BINARY column data is padded with binary zeros to match the VARBINARY column maximum data length For DB2 LUW the data is padded with ASCII spaces x 20 For MONEY DECIMAL or NUMERIC columns if scale 0 these data types are converted to int2 or int4 If precision lt 31 and both scale gt 0 and scale lt precision these data types are converted to NUMERIC p s otherwise they are converted to BINARY DOUBLE NCLOBs are converted to CLOBs For Oracle NUMERIC columns without precision are converted to BINARY DOUBLE Timestamps including TZ and LZ are converted to ODBC timestamps For Oracle and Informix time intervals are converted to VARCHAR 30 For DB2 LUW LONGVARCHAR LONGVARBINARY and LONGVARGRAPHIC columns are converted to CLOBs or BLOBs Optim 7 1 F 8 Archive File to XML Convertor F 8 Archive File to XML Convertor Use the Archive File to XML Convertor to convert Archive File data to XML format You can identify t
473. portdir 378 System wide commit frequency n A number from 1 to 999 999 200 Default setting maxcommitfreg 200 Maximum number of rows to extract n A number from 1 to 999 999 999 100000 Default setting maxextractrows 100000 Use of Archive Indexes in Search and Restore processes Valid entries are 0 Search Archive indexes first and native file system if necessary 1 Search Archive indexes only Default onlyidxsearch 1 Use the Oracle array delete feature with a Delete Process When the feature is used rows not found are listed as deleted in the Delete Process Report Valid entries are 0 Do not use Oracle array delete 1 Use Oracle array delete Default orausearraydelete 1 Allow users to list rows to be deleted after Archive Process 0 Do not allow users to list rows to be deleted after Archive Process 1 Allow users to list rows to be deleted after Archive Process Default reviewdelafterarchive 1 Directory or location for saved reports Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration directory As you must use a Window workstation to view reports specify a path accessible from such a workstation unixtempdir The UNIX or Linux temporary directory Default reportdir users RTuser DDRIVE OUTDIR REPORTS reportlevel Maximum number of reports to retain for each type of process e g Extract Processes Archive Processes Valid entry is 0 200 A value of 0 default disables the report retention feature
474. present in every dialog Proceed Perform any tasks initiated by the current dialog using the information provided close the dialog and open the next dialog in sequence Skip Skip one or more logically related dialogs or tasks This button is not present in every dialog and is sometimes unavailable Undo Restore the dialog to its initial status This button is not present in every dialog Cancel Close the current dialog and return control to the Configuration main window This button is present in every dialog Optim supports several database management systems Terms used in a configuration dialog reflect the DBMS for the database that is being configured For example when configuring an Oracle database a configuration dialog refers to Packages to access database tables However when configuring a Sybase ASE or SQL Server database the same dialog refers to Procedures and for a DB2 database it refers to Plans Varying terms are noted in the discussion of a dialog In some instances a particular DBMS may require a unique dialog When this happens both the common dialog and the DBMS unique dialog are illustrated and discussed If the Configuration program creates data definition language statements or DDL the pertinent dialog includes a check box Display SQL To review DDL statements before they are executed select this check box To execute a task without review clear the check box Note The Configuration program creates a
475. privilege This class includes the following privileges 463 Appendix D Optim Security 464 Invoke Definition Editors Invoke Options Invoke Utilities Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Create Update DB Alias Drop Optim Directory DB Alias Update DBMS Version for DB Alias Invoke Definition Editor privileges are required to create or edit an Optim object e g an Access Definition The respective Definitions menu item will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Access Definition Point and Shoot Column Map Primary Key Column Map Proc edure Relationship DB Alias Table Map Invoke Options privileges are required to edit Product Options or use dialogs for securing Optim functions objects and Archive Files The respective Options menu item will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Access Control Domain Export Security Definitions File Access Definition Import Security Definitions Product Options Invoke Utilities privileges are required to open the utilities dialogs The respective Utilities menu item will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Archive Invoke Archive Directory Directory Maintenance privilege is required Maintenance for roles that maintain Archive Files or the Archive Directory Archive Index Invoke Archiv
476. procedures needed to access database tables Generally you apply maintenance for DB Alias access only when you are installing a new version of Optim or to recreate packages plans or procedures To refresh or update the packages plans or procedures for database tables select Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access from the Tasks menu The first step in applying maintenance for DB Alias access is to Specify an Optim Directory see page 185 You must select an Optim Directory name and click Proceed to open the next dialog When applying maintenance for DB Alias access the Configuration program must connect to the database to access Optim Directory Tables Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Connect to Database OO x Optim he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to access the Optim irectory Tables The User ID you specify must have DBMS authorization to perform the elected task Optim Directory DIRECTORY Database Connection Parameters User ID Connection String Joptusr3 QOR922K Password eeccceee Previous Proceed _ Undo Cancel A On the Connect to Database dialog you must specify the User ID Password and Connection String that allows the workstation to connect to the database to access Optim Directory tables Note The User ID you specify must have the authorization to perform this maintenance task Installation and Configuration Guide 205 7 Maint
477. process to configure the first workstation involves creating a DB Alias for each database and creating the packages plans or procedures to access tables in those databases The Configuration program prompts you to e Create a DB Alias for the database instance housing the Optim Directory Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Create DB Alias e Create Optim Primary Keys for tables that have unique indexes if DBMS primary keys have not been created e Create and load the sample tables if desired e Create and load the data privacy data tables if you have an Optim Data Privacy License The Configuration program then provides an option to create DB Aliases for other databases and repeats the process If you have several SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix databases on one server you can use the Create Multiple option to create a DB Alias for each database on the server from a single dialog After you create the Optim Directory you are prompted to create a DB Alias for the database in which it resides Configure First Workstation Create Update DB Alias for this Databa j E3 Optim F you plan to use Optim to access user tables in QOR922K other than the Optim irectory Tables select the Create Update DB Alias for this Database checkbox elect lt Proceed gt to continue to the next step M Options I Create Update DB Alias for this Database Previous Proceed _ Cancel
478. ptim A default Optim Exit a hat allows access to all actions by all users is supplied with Optim and can be used if our company security policies allow The Optim Exit must be signed To sign an exit ou must enter the unique Password that was included when you received your xl nmnans IM and License Kew at anw time wouran sion a different evit hw selertinn M Optim Exit For this Machine ate Leave the Currently Signed Exit Intact Valid Sign the Default Optim Exit Overlays any previously signed exit Sign the User Supplied Exit Exit must exist in the rt bin directory M Company Information Name ID Passwords OPTIMDEMO 105499 a The Sign Optim Exit dialog includes the following options Optim Exit for this Machine There are three options under the heading Optim Exit for this Machine Click on the option you want to use e Leave the Currently Signed Exit Intact Use this option to leave the currently signed exit in place You must have permission to execute the Configuration program to use this option This option is available only if an exit was previously signed in which case the word Valid will appear to the right of this option under State If you select this option the Password field is disabled and clicking OK or Cancel has the same effect i e the existing exit remains in effect This is the default option when the State entry is Valid Optim 7 1 3 5 T
479. ptim 7 1 H 1 Sample Database Tables and Structure H 1 7 OPTIM_SHIP_ INSTR Table The OPTIM SHIP INSTR table contains detailed information for order shipping The OPTIM SHIP_INSTR table has the following columns Column Name Data Type and Description SHIP ID SMALLINT can contain a null value SHIP INSTR ID DECIMAL can contain a null value ORDER SHIP INSTR VARCHAR up to 254 characters default value FEDERAL EXPRESS SHIP_UPDATED TIMESTAMP cannot contain null has default value Primary Keys The SHIP_INSTR_ID column is the primary key column Relationships The OPTIM_SHIP_INSTR table is a child of the OPTIM_SHIP_ TO to other tables table through its Optim relationship on column SHIP_ID H 1 8 OPTIM_MALE_RATES Table The OPTIM MALE RATES table contains insurance rates based on age The OPTIM MALE RATES table has the following columns Column Name Data Type and Description AGE INTEGER can contain a null value RATE PER 1000 DECIMAL rate in dollar amount can contain a null value Primary Keys The RATE PER_ 1000 column is the primary key column Relationships The OPTIM_ MALE RATES table is a child of the OPTIM_ SALES to other tables table through its Optim data driven relationship on column AGE Installation and Configuration Guide 597 Appendix H Samples H 1 9 OPTIM_FEMALE_RATES Table The OPTIM FEMALE RATES table contains insurance rates based on age The O
480. ptim Directory Each Optim Directory must have unique DB Aliases for the databases used with Optim and unique identifiers for the packages plans or procedures associated with the databases In most cases a site uses only one Optim Directory that is created when the first workstation is configured However you may create an additional Optim Directory as a step in re locating the Optim Directory or when a new Directory is required by an upgrade to Optim For example if a site were to have an Optim Directory in an Oracle database and decided to move it to a DB2 database the administrator could export a copy of the Optim objects in the Oracle database to an external file The administrator would then create the second Optim Directory in the DB2 database and import the Optim objects before dropping or disabling the original Optim Directory Creating an additional Optim Directory is similar to creating an Optim Directory when configuring the first workstation First you create the Optim Directory Then you create DB Aliases and configure the databases to be used with Optim when linked to the Optim Directory Next you create or specify the Product Configuration File and modify Personal and Product Options as needed You can also initialize Optim Security for the Optim Directory For complete information on creating an Optim Directory refer to 5 1 2 Create Optim Directory on page 78 190 Optim 7 1 7 3 Access Existing Optim Directory
481. ptim Directory SQL8 was originally created in 6 0 or 6 1 and you would like to a rop the old 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory Tables select the Drop the 6 0 6 1 Optim irectory Tables For SQL8 checkbox NOTE Selecting this option will ONLY drop the the ptim Directory Tables created in 6 0 or 6 1 It will NOT drop an Optim Directory Table gt reated after A 1 Select lt Proreed tn continue ta the neyt chen M Options I Drop the 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory Tables for SQL8 cma Connect to The Configuration program must re connect to the database to drop the Database Optim Directory tables Use the Connect to Database dialog to provide the connection information Click Proceed to continue 584 Optim 7 1 G 2 Conversion Process for Directory Tables on SQL Server Drop Optim Directory Tables Create Drop Stored Procedures Drop the Current Directory Connect to Database Before you drop an Optim Directory and Optim Directory tables the Configuration program displays the table identifier and prompts you to review the generated SQL using the Drop Directory Tables dialog Click Proceed to drop the 6 0 6 1 Directory tables and continue Use the Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog to drop the stored procedures SQL Server uses to access tables in the 6 0 6 1 Directory Click Proceed to continue In the Drop the Current Directory dialog select Drop Current Directory to drop all DB Aliases and ob
482. r i Design IRPCD Navigator Attunity Studio Fie Edt Navigate Search Window Help EIRIC Fol ff Dein fff Configuration 3 Metadata isl E O Machines Primary OOM S Bindings E Daemons eg IRPCD ACURLSVC iB Navigator H Uren SPrpeties 3 ts Bb FO Property Value Name Navigator anes TF Allow anonymous login I7 Cached password Encryption methods id Domain name 3 Select the Daemon Security tab 4 In the Administrator privileges section select Selected users only 5 Click Add User to open the Add User dialog To adda group click Add Group Installation and Configuration Guide 551 Appendix F Open Data Manager 6 Type the user ID or group name that will have administrative privileges for the daemon 7 Click OK 8 In the Machine access section clear the Allow anonymous login check box 9 For Windows only Use Domain name to qualify user names with a domain name 10 Select the WS Security tab 11 In the Workspace users section select Selected users only 12 Click Add User to open the Add User dialog To adda group click Add Group 13 Type the user ID or group name that will have user privileges for the workspace 14 In the Administrator privileges for the workspace section select Selected users only 15 Click Add User to open the Add User dialog To adda group click Add Group 16 Type the user ID or group name that wil
483. r if DB2 LUW is the DBMS for the Optim Directory the Configuration program displays the Bind Drop Plans dialog shown and described in Bind Drop Plans The Create Drop Packages dialog includes the following details Tables Description of the tables for which packages plans or procedures are being created Package Create Refresh Option to create new or refresh existing Optim Specifications Directory packages plans or procedures This option is always available when creating an Optim Directory and is the default selection when the dialog opens Installation and Configuration Guide 85 5 Configure Workstations 86 Display SQL Use Existing Drop Qualifier Grant Auth ID Option to use existing packages plans or procedures This option is available only if packages or procedures already exist for the Optim Directory Option to drop existing Optim Directory packages plans or procedures This option is available only if packages or procedures already exist for the Optim Directory Previously entered high level qualifier needed to access Optim Directory tables The label is Collection Name for DB2 Schema Name for Oracle and Owner ID for SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix Enter an identifier for authorized users You may specify a User ID a Group Name or Public When this ID is Public all users can run Optim Select this check box to display SQL statements before creating or dropping packages plans
484. r optional parameters or settings Delimiter for a choice from which you must select one Delimiter for a choice from which you may select any or none Separates options 359 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux A 2 1 Pstserv Configuration File 360 The pstserv configuration file is used to configure the system for running prOsvce the Server daemon An example of pstserv cfg is in the etc subdirectory to the PSTHOME directory Before you run prOsvce modify the following parameters to reflect your site requirements as applicable In the following syntax defaults are shown in bold text customerid n 000000 customername custname xxxxx license XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 rtservername servername localcomputername tempdir directory datadir directory datadirclient 0 1 archivedir directory datadir archivediridx directory archivedir archivebroidx directory archivedir maxprocesses n 48 tracedays n 5 limitaccess 0 1 allowdir path pstlogon client server dbaliaslogon client server delfileinterval n 10 filelogon client local server userid password filemode lt ALL RUSR RGRP ROTH WUSR WGRP WOTH RALL WALL gt SYSTEM endpoint tcpportnumber 1024 pstdir nam
485. r this check box you must provide explicit credentials as follows User ID Enter the appropriate User ID If these Server credentials are used to access files external to the Server the User ID must have the following privileges e Actas part of the operating system SeTcbPrivilege e Increase quotas SeIncreaseQuotaPrivilege e Replace a process level token SeAssignPrimaryTokenPrivilege e Bypass traverse checking SeChangeNotifyPrivilege For more information about these privileges refer to B 1 3 Server Privileges for Explicit or Client Credentials on page 422 Password Enter the password corresponding to the User ID Domain Specify the domain Check Logon Click Check Logon to verify that the Server can log on with the credentials provided This button is available if the Use Local System account check box is cleared Start Stop Service This button is available if Start as Service is selected and applied Installation and Configuration Guide 165 6 Configure the Optim Server 6 7 Security Tab Use the Security tab to choose the source of the logon information for the Server Optim Server Settings Select options to indicate the source of the logon information when the Server requires access to Optim Directories DB Aliases and Input and Output files Optim Directories Server Select to use the User ID and password provided on the Connection tab for Server access to the Optim Directory Client Selec
486. ral Confirm Display Errors Scheduling Load Create Logon Server Edit_4 gt NULL value indicator M Main Window po Maximum visible components in list Delimiter for variable length column values 1 IV Auto size Main Window to list Maximum Fetch Rows 500 m Large Object LOB a Default Native LOB Mode Vale MSE Maximum Non Native LOB Length 4 KB Maximum entries in Menu File Lists 5 Reset Messages Action Definition Menu Behavior OpenLast Appearance Tl Balloon Style Tooltips P Flat Style Toolbars Enter a character to represent a NULL value The question mark 7 is the default Although you can choose any character to represent a NULL value an infrequently used character is best Enter a character to delimit variable length column values that have trailing blanks The semi colon is the default Although you can choose any character as a delimiter an infrequently used character that differs from the NULL value indicator is best Specify the maximum number of rows from a single table that can be displayed when you browse or edit table data or use Point and Shoot You can enter a number from 1 through the site maximum specified on the Product Options dialog The default value is 500 Specify the maximum number of recently selected items 1 to 20 displayed in a drop down list For example the Extract File box in a request editor where you can click the down
487. ration Guide 235 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 7 15 Load Drop Sample Data Specify Optim Directory Create Select DB Alias Load Drop Sample Tables Load Drop Sample Data for Another DB Alias 236 Sample tables are distributed with Optim Generally you load this sample data when you configure the first workstation however you can load it independently or when you configure an additional workstation You can load refresh or drop sample data by selecting the Load Drop Sample Data option which guides you through the process You can start this process by selecting Load Drop Sample Data from the Tasks menu or by selecting the Configuration Assistant from the Help menu A DB Alias is required to access the sample tables The DB Alias used as a high level qualifier for the table names provides a single name association for parameters needed to connect to the database The DB Alias and other Optim objects created when the sample tables are created are stored in an Optim Directory Use the Specify Optim Directory dialog see page 185 to select the name of the Optim Directory Click Proceed to open the next dialog Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog see page 207 to specify the DB Alias for the sample tables Click Proceed to open the next dialog After you select the DB Alias for the sample tables the Configuration program opens the Load Drop Sample Tables dialog If you are creating or refreshing
488. re Configure First Workstation Enable Disable Optim Server Feature _ Oy x he Configuration program can configure machines running Windows NT 2000 XP to be n Optim Server When enabled the Windows Control Panel will contain an entry to onfigure the Optim Server console Select an option to enable or disable the Optim erver feature Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step zj a Optim Directory DOCORA92 M License Information Server License Status Server State for this Machine Licensed fenbled st M Enable Disable Server Feature for This Machine Enable Disable Previous Proceed _ Skip Cancel Oracle Q0R922K Ui If the site is not licensed for the Server Enable is not available Refer to Chapter 6 Configure the Optim Server for information needed to configure the Server 132 Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Enable Disable Archive ODBC Feature On the Enable Disable Archive ODBC Feature dialog choose to enable or disable the ODBC driver for the current machine olx Configure First Workstation Enable Disable Archive ODBC Feature Optim he Configuration program can configure workstations to use the Archive ODBC interface When enabled the ODBC Data Source Administrator will contain an entry For he Optim Archive File Driver Select an option to enable or disable the Optim Archive
489. re Gf Archive is licensed specify a Product Configuration File and configure Product and Personal Options Click Proceed to continue Optim 7 1 5 2 Configure Additional Workstation 5 2 3 Initialize Security Change Security Administrator On the Initialize Security dialog assign a Security Administrator for the PST Directory and initialize security If security has been initialized for the Directory this dialog is replaced by the Change Security Administrator dialog which is similar to Initialize Security but with no initialize option For information about initializing Optim Security and assigning a Security Administrator see 5 1 4 Optim Security amp Configure Additional Workstation Initialize Security he Configuration program can initialize the Security Features and assign a Security A Sinatra Once initialized Security can only be enabled or disabled by the Security Installation and Configuration Guide 147 5 Configure Workstations 5 2 4 Enable Disable Optim Server Feature On the Enable Disable Optim Server Feature dialog indicate whether to enable or disable the current machine as a Server amp Configure Additional Workstation Enable Disable Optim Server Feat E3 he Configuration program can configure machines running Windows NT 2000 XP to be lan Optim Server When enabled the Windows Control Panel will contain an entry to onfigure the Optim Server console Select an option to enable
490. re dialog next This dialog allows you to disable the Archive ODBC interface feature Drop DB Alias Optim Tables Enable Disable Archive ODBC Feature i l Eg he Configuration program can configure workstations to use the Archive ODBC interface When enabled the ODBC Data Source Administrator will contain an entry for he Optim Archive File Driver Select an option to enable or disable the Optim Archive ile Driver Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step Click Proceed to disable the Archive ODBC feature or click Skip to advance to the next step without disabling the Archive ODBC feature If the site is not licensed for Archive this dialog is not displayed Installation and Configuration Guide 241 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks 7 17 1 Drop the Optim Directory If you do not drop another DB Alias the Configuration program opens the Drop the Optim Directory dialog Select the check box to drop the Optim Directory Connect to Optim must connect to the database in order to drop the Optim Database Directory tables and packages plans or procedures Use the Connect to Database dialog see page 205 to specify the connection information Drop Optim Before you drop an Optim Directory and Optim Directory tables the Directory Tables Configuration program displays the table identifier and prompts you to review the generated DDL using the Drop Optim Directory Tables dial
491. re referenced by Access Control Lists used to secure objects and File Access Definitions used to secure Archive Files and assigned privileges to access the object or Archive File The Access Control List is an Optim object that serves as the basis for Object Security ACL parameters govern the ability of a role to perform actions such as read update or delete on both the object and the ACL for the object Each ACD File Access Definition and secured Optim object has a unique ACL The File Access Definition is the basis for Archive File Security All Archive Files generated by running an Archive Request that references an FAD are secured by the FAD Optim 7 1 Security Diagram The following diagram illustrates the features of Optim Security Default ACD Allow Invoke Archive Request Editor Allow Create Archive Request Allow Associate Archive Request Archive Request Editor Archive Request ACL Archive Request FAD Role Allow Run Association Allow Invoke Restore Request Editor Allow Create Restore Request Allow Associate Restore Request Restore Request Editor Restore Request Functional Security Object Security File Access Definition A x Z Archive Files A ACL Access to archived data as tables Role Allow Run permitted by FAD columns The Default ACD an object in the Optim Directory is the linchpin for the three levels of Optim Security In the Default ACD arbitra
492. reating Optim Primary Keys Configure First Workstation Select Tables _ Or x Optim following tables have a unique index but do not have a Primary Key defined Drag a remove tables from the list of Primary Keys to be created then dick lt OK gt to create tim Primary Key s or lt Cancel gt to return to the previous window DB Alias 4 MANISHAP AP_INVOICES_ALL rs rf The Select Tables dialog includes DB Alias DB Alias associated with the list of tables Selected Tables List of tables selected for creating primary keys To remove a table from the list drag the table name to Excluded Tables Creator ID Identifier for the table Creator ID in DB2 Schema Name in Oracle and Owner ID for SQL Server Sybase ASE and Informix Table Name Name of the table Index Name Name of the unique index Excluded Tables List of excluded tables available for creating primary keys To select an excluded table drag the table name to Selected Tables Creator ID Table Name Index Name Installation and Configuration Guide Identifier for the table Creator ID in DB2 Schema Name in Oracle and Owner ID for SQL Server Sybase ASE or Informix Name of the table Name of the unique index TII 5 Configure Workstations Load Sample Tables Load Drop Sample Tables DB Alias Load Refresh Sample Tables Drop Sample Tables 112 When the process completes you are prompte
493. rectory 7 9 Rename an Optim Directory At times you may rename an Optim Directory For example upgrading from version 5 x to version 6 x requires that you create a new Directory and convert Optim objects created before the upgrade as described in Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects Once the new Directory is created and the old Directory is deleted you can rename the new Directory to use it in place of the old Directory To delete a Directory see 7 17 Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables To rename the new Directory you must replace the name in the Directory itself and in the Windows registry on each workstation that accesses the Directory Select Rename an Optim Directory from the Tasks menu to change the name in the Optim Directory and workstation registry or once the Optim Directory is changed to re name a registry entry or register the re named Directory on a workstation Overview When you select Rename an Optim Directory from the Tasks menu the Overview dialog provides an overview of the task To continue click Proceed Rename Optim Directory Overview _ OP x Optim his task allows you to rename a Optim Directory that was created with a 6 x version of ptim Since connection information for the Optim Directory is stored in the Windows egistry the Windows Registry is also updated If there are other workstations that iccess this Optim Directory then this task must be run on those workstations to update x
494. red for acceptable performance will depend on the number of Optim components that are open for example dialogs Optim Server ODBC server as well as the number of open tables the number of rows being read and the size of their column data It will also depend on the memory demands of all other applications and services active on the system In all cases it will be greater than the minimum amount of memory suggested by the Windows system requirements Virtual Memory Since Windows is a virtual memory operating system it can access more memory than actual physical memory It does this by writing pages sections of memory that are not currently referenced to a page file on disk When a page is referenced that is not in memory Windows loads it back into physical memory To do this it must make room for the page by swapping it with another page which in turn is written to the page file Therefore the more physical RAM a workstation has the less swapping needs to be done and performance improves greatly The amount of virtual memory page file space required will depend on the memory usage of all applications services and processes that are running Having a small amount of physical memory RAM means a slower system since time is spent swapping to and from a page file However having an insufficient amount of disk space allocated for virtual memory can cause one or more applications or even Windows itself to hang or terminate
495. ree types of exit routines standard source format and destination format PSTEXIT dll Compiled versions of the three sample exit routines PSTEXIT h Required header files PSTCMEXIT h PSTEXIT mak A sample make file Note For complete information about Column Map Exits refer to the Common Elements Manual Appendix B Exit Routines for Column Maps Sample Standard A Standard Exit routine is called to derive the value for a destination Exit column in a Column Map This sample performs two operations on the sample database table OPTIM CUSTOMERS as follows e Discards rows that have a value of zero 0 in the YTD SALES column and processes all other rows e Assigns a value of SE003 to the SALESMAN ID column for all customers in Florida rows with FL in the STATE column To reference this sample in a Column Map you must specify EXIT PSTEXIT in the source column for the destination column SALESMAN ID Installation and Configuration Guide 599 Appendix H Samples Sample Source Format Exit Sample Destination Format Exit 600 A Source Format Exit is typically called to format the source column for example for an Age Function that otherwise would not be supported in a Column Map The sample performs the following operations on the sample database table OPTIM_ ORDERS e Discards rows that have a value of SE012 in the SALESMAN _ID column and processes all other rows e Ages ORDER_DATE for rows th
496. rid that displays the roles in the ACD and includes the following Role Modified By Modified Date Description The role name The identifier for the user account used to create or last modify the entry The date and time the role was created or last modified Text that describes the role 451 Appendix D Optim Security Shortcut Menu Right click the Role List grid to display the following shortcut menu commands New Open the Role Specifications dialog to create a new role Open Open the Role Specifications dialog to view or edit the selected role Delete Delete the selected role from the ACD A confirmation prompt is displayed if Personal Options are set to provide it Note The Open and Delete commands are not available for roles that are denied update access D 1 2 Role Specifications The Role Specifications dialog allows you to create or edit a role within an ACD From the dialog you can identify the user and group accounts that are members of the role and assign access permissions For roles in 452 Optim 7 1 D 1 Access Control Domain the Default ACD you can also grant or deny access to functions in Optim for a role Role Specifications olx Role Name Description Access Control Domain Defaut I Allow All Functional and Object Association Privileges for this Role Users Functional Privileges Object Association Privileges Modified By Modified Date Description 4 4
497. ries 7 Set Days to Retain to 90 8 The fifty remaining tables are not entered in the grid The default status for these tables is Enabled and audit information for each table is retained for 90 days Installation and Configuration Guide 265 8 Product Options Select Table To Be Audited Dialog Pattern 266 When you select Add Tables or Replace Table from the shortcut menu the Select Table to be audited dialog is displayed This dialog is also displayed when you use the Join command from the Table Editor Select Table to be audited olx DB Alias Database Table Creator ID Table Name 4 pid Oracle DBMS OPTUSR4 CUSTOMERS Oracle DBMS OPTUSR4 CUSTOMERS2 Oracle DBMS OPTUSR4 CUSTOMERSX Oracle DBMS OPTUSR4 DETAILS Oracle DBMS OPTUSR4 DETAILS2 Oracle DBMS opTusr4 DETAILSAC Oracle DBMS OPTUSR4 FEMALE_RATES xl Enter pattern for Table DBALIAS CREATORID TABLE oEMS OPTUSRA O Cancel Refresh Help Show Only 5 G all I Find Tables Related to Table Parents Levels to Search Alias DBMS AMS CUSTOMERS z H children a F all Levels C Tables Matching Table Pattern Both H C yi Yo Yo z pes ia P Select All Matching Display Synonyms Select Table The Select Table to be audited dialog provides a list of tables for the selected database DB Aliases for a
498. rily named roles are linked to network accounts used as logons when performing tasks The Default ACD selectively grants and denies Functional Security privileges for roles in order to provide appropriate access to the interface and functions For example a member of a role expected to run an Archive Request online must be allowed the Invoke Archive Request Editor privilege while a member of a role expected to create a secured Archive Request must be allowed the Create Archive Request and Associate Archive Request privileges Secured objects including ACDs and File Access Definitions have an ACL that grants and denies read update delete and execute permissions to a subset of roles defined in the Default ACD At your option these roles can be defined in a specialized ACD rather than the Default ACD In the illustration ACLs for the Archive and Restore Installation and Configuration Guide 445 Appendix D Optim Security Archive File Security Configure Security Chapter Contents 446 Requests must grant run execute permission to roles expected to run these requests A File Access Definition FAD defines the security rules for data in one or more Archive Files created by an Archive Request that references the FAD The FAD in the diagram may grant access to archived data in selected tables and columns and deny access to data in others The logon account used to run the Restore Request must be represented by a r
499. rity and Object Security Installation and Configuration Guide 47 2 Installation Setup 48 Optim 7 1 3 Signing an Optim Exit Optim includes a mechanism that allows you to use a custom exit to apply an additional layer of security to Optim beyond the extensive security already included in the product to meet any security requirements mandated by your company or government regulations This additional security layer is accomplished through a client supplied exit that identifies who can use Optim and the executables that each user can run Client supplied exits are called user supplied exits in Optim to differentiate them from the default exit supplied with Optim The Optim default exit allows all requests by all users within the security limitations defined for each user or user group using the security functionality included in Optim The default exit is intended for clients who do not need to use a user supplied exit although it may also be used temporarily until you create your own customized exit If you use the default exit Optim user security functions as it did prior to release 6 5 If you implement a user supplied exit that exit will augment the extensive security functionality already included in Optim Note A user supplied exit may also be used for other functions such as managing user accounts monitoring user activity forcing inactive sessions to timeout auditing product use and overriding user authorizat
500. rity Definition Import processing the Import Progress pane displays the number of security definitions of each type that are imported and the number of errors encountered The status bar displays information about the current security definition that is processed When Security Definition Import processing is finished the status bar displays the message Ready If the Import Security Definitions Utility encounters errors processing continues according to the specification for the Continue import if error s option Errors are displayed on the message bar and represented visually by a red X beside each security definition in error Errors are written to the Security Import Process Log after Import Processing is finished You can review and print the Security Import Process Log for diagnostic information about errors If some objects fail to be imported due to errors check the specifications and try Export and Import again Optim 7 1 D 5 Import Security Definitions Import Process Log When Security Definition Import Processing finishes select Show Process Log from the Tools menu to display the Security Import Process Log Security Import Process Log olx File Options Help Security Import Process Log Created on 2 19 2008 at 16 38 23 Access Control Lists Imported Optim Object Template Access Control List Imported OPTUSR47 4D1 Access Definition Imported OPTUSR47 4DSAMP Access Definition Imported O
501. river Enable Disable the Optim Archive ODBC Interface Feature Enable B EG he Configuration program can configure workstations to use the Archive ODBC interface When enabled the ODBC Data Source Administrator will contain an entry For he Optim Archive File Driver Select an option to enable or disable the Optim Archive ile Driver Click lt Proceed gt to perform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step xl Optim Directory DIRECTORY License Information Archive License Status Archive ODBC Driver State for this Machine l Licensed Enabled Enable Disable Archive ODBC Interface Feature for This Machine Enable Disable Previous Proceed _ Skip Cancel Oracle Q0R922K 7 If the site is not licensed for Archive Enable is not available Optim 7 1 7 7 Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access 7 7 Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access At times it may be necessary to refresh or update the packages plans or procedures needed to access the Optim Directory tables Generally you apply maintenance for Optim Directory access when installing a new version of Optim However if you drop the Optim Directory tables for some reason you must apply maintenance to recreate the necessary packages plans or procedures To refresh or update the packages plans or procedures for the Optim Directory tables select Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access from the Tasks men
502. rivileges grid You can also use the Privilege Classes grid to select all associated privileges for reporting or clear all associated privileges selected for reporting To select a row in the Privilege Classes grid click a row indicator cell or either a Report All or Clear All cell The grid arrow indicates the class of privileges displayed To include all associated privileges in the report select Report All To remove all selections in the Privileges grid select Clear All Use the Privileges grid to select privileges to include in the report To include a privilege select Report Optim 7 1 E 2 Using the Editor Shortcut Menu Right click the Privileges Classes grid to display the following shortcut Commands menu commands Report All Classes Select Report All for all privilege classes Clear All Classes Select Clear All for all privilege classes Right click the Privileges grid to display the following shortcut menu commands Report All Select Report for all privileges Clear All Clear Report for all privileges Object Report The Object Security Report lists Object Security permissions assigned to specified users or groups for specified Optim objects and the ACL that secures each object You can use wildcards for criteria The report is sorted alphabetically by object type Note The Object Security Report allows you to view permissions for ACLs for which you do not have read access OPTUSR RPT1 R
503. rmissions of the user account that created them If any of the required permissions are revoked the packages become invalid when executed When you create the packages for the Optim Directory and the Data Dictionary you can specify a grant authorization ID When this ID is PUBLIC the default value all users are able to run Optim Optionally you can specify a user ID or group name to limit access to specific users Optim 7 1 1 2 Planning for Installation and Configuration SQL Server Sybase ASE In SQL Server the user must have a LOGIN at the database server level and a user account for the database instance being accessed This is true for both creating and accessing an Optim Directory and a DB Alias If shared global stored procedures are used for DB Aliases the user account used to create the stored procedures must have database owner privileges dbo When you catalog the procedures for the Optim Directory and the system tables you can specify a grant authorization ID When this ID is PUBLIC the default value all users are able to run Optim Optionally you can specify a user ID or group name to limit access to specific users To create the Optim Directory in Sybase ASE the following must be true 1 You must connect to the database as the System Administrator SA a user account with SA role a user account with dbo alias Note The account used to connect to the database may be different from the Owner ID
504. rovided directory Name of the directory for Extract Compare Control Export and other process files If this directory does not exist the shell script creates it datadir PSTHOME data Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration archivedir Directory for Archive Files for which the process request does not provide a complete path If the directory does not exist the shell script creates it Archive Files are stored in the Data directory datadir by default archivedir PSTHOME archive archivediridx Archive Index Directory for Archive Index Files for which a complete path is not provided If the directory does not exist the Shell script creates it Archive Index Files are stored in the Archive Directory archivedir or the Data directory datadir by default archivediridx PSTHOME archiveidx archivebroidx Archive Browse Index Directory for Archive Browse Index Files for which a complete path is not provided If the directory referenced by the keyword does not exist the Shell script creates it To expedite the retrieval of data an Archive Browse Index File is created when a user browses archived data and joins tables By default Archive Browse Index Files are stored in the Archive Directory archivedir or the Data directory datadir archivebroidx S PSTHOME archivebro tracedays Number of days to retain trace files in the temporary work directory n A value from 2 to 30 The default is 5 Consider storage spac
505. rowse Processes Personal Options are recorded in the Windows Registry of the workstation Note Product Option settings site level supersede any conflicting Personal Option settings user level For more information refer to Chapter 8 Product Options Installation and Configuration Guide 279 9 Personal Options 9 1 Open the Personal Options Editor You can use the Configuration program to configure Personal Options or you can set options from within Optim Using the Configuration program To configure Personal Options using the Configuration program 1 Open the Configuration program 2 In the main window select Configure Options from the Tasks menu 3 Specify a PST Directory and click Proceed 4 Click Skip on the Initialize Security Change Security Administrator Enable Disable the Optim Server Feature and Enable Disable the Archive ODBC Feature dialogs to open the Specify Product Configuration File dialog 5 Select Create New File or Use Existing File verify the name of the Configuration File and click Proceed 6 On the Modify Product Options dialog click Proceed to open the Modify Personal Options dialog 7 Click the Personal Options button to open the Personal Options dialog 8 Specify the necessary details on each tab in Personal Options 9 Choose one of the following To close the Personal Options dialog without saving your changes click Cancel To save your changes and
506. rs specify a directory on their workstation When you configure the first workstation you create the Optim Directory and the Configuration program creates a registry entry that allows Optim to connect to the Optim Directory from that workstation If you are planning to configure one or more additional workstations you can export the Optim Directory registry entries and the Product License information to a file You can save time by importing this file when you configure each additional workstation Optim 7 1 1 1 Conceptual Overview Configure Additional Workstations Run Setup Import Registry Data Configuration Process Product Configuration File Configure the Server After you complete the full installation and configuration for the first workstation you must configure any other workstations that are to use Optim Note Before configuring a workstation to use Optim you must configure the DBMS client software on the workstation to permit access to individual database instances Even if you decide to install Optim on a file server you can run Setup before configuring each additional workstation to create application shortcuts Next select the Configure Additional Workstation option for each workstation If you exported registry settings to a file when you configured the first workstation you can import these settings to configure each additional workstation However if you do not choose to export and import Opti
507. rst workstation you are prompted to export registry data or you can select Export Registry Data from the File menu on the Configuration main window See 5 1 6 Export Registry Data on page 137 for more information Installation and Configuration Guide 63 4 Configuration Window and Menus 64 Import Registry Data Convert Optim Directory Objects Optim Directory Exit To configure a workstation you can import Optim Directory registry data and the Product License Key from a file of information exported from another workstation You are prompted to import Optim Directory registry data when configuring each workstation after the first or you can select Import Registry Data from the File menu on the Configuration main window See 5 2 1 Import Registry Entries on page 141 for more information All Optim Directories created prior to version 6 0 of Archive and the Relational Tools require a conversion to be compatible with later versions Additionally any Optim Directory created prior to Optim version 6 2 on an SQL Server database must be converted See Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects for more information Connect to or disconnect from an Optim Directory or modify a connection Close the Configuration main window Optim 7 1 4 1 Main Window and Menus Tasks Menu Select commands from the Tasks menu to configure and maintain the Optim environment You can choose to perform these tasks a
508. ry Name Installation and Configuration Guide 221 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Specify Optim You must specify the version of the DBMS you want to use to update Directory DBMS the Optim Directory Update the DBMS Version for an Optim Directory Specify Optim Dire Hi EG he Optim Configuration program will update the DBMS of the selected database Select he new DBMS version for the target database then click lt Proceed gt Note Support or some of the listed DBMS versions may have been discontinued by the vendor DBMS Specifications Optim Directory Description Type Jor acle aL Click the down arrow to select a version The version you select must be different from the current version If not an error message displays Click Proceed to connect to the database Connect to When you update information for the Optim Directory the Database Configuration program must connect to the database to access the Optim Directory Tables On the Connect to Database dialog see page 205 you must specify the User ID Password and Connection String that allows the workstation to connect to the database If the connection is successful the next step is to drop the old packages plans or procedures and create new ones for the updated DBMS 222 Optim 7 1 7 10 Update DBMS Version for an Optim Directory Create Drop The Configuration program displays the
509. ry for the Server Installation and Configuration Guide 161 6 Configure the Optim Server component machine This action does not overlay information previously entered into the Optim Server Settings dialog This action only merges new settings from the Current User If the settings are the same this command is unavailable 162 Optim 7 1 6 5 Access Tab 6 5 Access Tab Limit Access Directory Use the Access tab to restrict access to all Server directories and subdirectories except those you specify Access to the Server data directory Archive Directory and Archive Index Directory is enabled by default Optim Server Settings _ oO x Errors Load Connection Access startup Security Endpoints Archive Retention Status Email wt gt IV Limit access to the Data Archive Archive Index Temporary and the following directories and their subdirectories Directory Program Files BM Optim Bin temp Configuration ox Cancel Apply Help The Limit access to only the Data Archive Archive Index and the following directories and their subdirectories check box is intended to restrict access to Server files and directories and is selected by default When this check box is selected access to the Server data directory Archive Directory and Archive Index Directory is enabled You can allow access to additional files and directories by entering each one in the Directory grid
510. s Binary data is encoded as base64 data and written as single long lines Null columns are omitted in attribute mode and indicated by xsi nil true in element mode Note that because of a limitation in the Attunity interface null large objects are given zero length they are not marked explicitly as null Installation and Configuration Guide 559 Appendix F Open Data Manager e Characters in the first column of the following table are translated to the entity reference in the second column Character Entity Reference s amp quot amp amp amp amp apos lt amp lt gt amp gt 560 Optim 7 1 F 9 Archive File Collections F 9 Archive File Collections An Archive File Collection is a list of Archive Files that can be logically unioned together as a single data source for ODM access For example ODM uses an Archive File Collection to provide access to data in multiple Archive Files even if all files do not include a specific table or column or if the attributes of data in a column vary from file to file ODM processes Archive Files in the order they are listed in the Archive File Collection Editor For information about creating Archive File Collections refer to the Archive User Manual 9 4 Archive File Collections Unioned Tables Tables with matching creator IDs and names in separate Archive Files will be unioned To be processed a table need not exist in every Archive File ODM is not case sensitive ODM do
511. s Allow All for the Associate Action Editors Privilege Class on the Object Association Privileges tab Accounts in the role can then secure an action request with an ACL that uses the ACD Note You can define Functional Privileges from the Default ACD only Use the Privilege Classes grid to display associated privileges in the Privileges grid You can also use the Privilege Classes grid to allow or deny all privileges in either a single class or all classes To select a row in the Privilege Classes grid click a row indicator cell or either an Allow All or Deny All cell The grid arrow indicates the class of privileges displayed You can also allow or deny all privileges in all privilege classes using the Allow All and Deny All buttons for the Privilege Classes grid or selecting corresponding commands from the shortcut menu To remove all selections in the Privilege Classes grid click or select Clear All Use the Privileges grid to allow or deny privileges within a privilege class You can allow or deny a privilege by selecting the corresponding Allow or Deny check box If both the Allow and Deny check boxes are cleared the role is denied the privilege You can also allow or deny all privileges in the class using the Allow All and Deny All buttons for the Privileges grid or selecting corresponding commands from the shortcut menu To remove all selections in the Privileges grid click Clear All When a user is a member of more
512. s such as Oracle JA16SJIS multiple characters are mapped to the same Unicode character When these characters are converted from Unicode back to multi byte a round trip the original character may not be returned Note To avoid round trip issues with multi byte data do not use multi byte characters in your source data that will result in ambiguous conversions from Unicode Optim provides a Product Option on the Database tab and a Personal Option on the Database tab that determine how to handle round trip conversion issues when processing data in a multi byte database amp Configure First Workstation Round Trip issues with Multi byte Format fe E3 Optim he code units between U 4dc0 and U 4dff contain the Yijing Hexagram Symbols hich are not on any legacy code page These symbols should not be used as input on ny Optim window such as DBMS Object Names e g Tables Columns Keys etc or ptim Object Names e g Archive Requests Access Definitions etc since they may gt nt he converted correctly hetwieen LITF 14 the character set used on iitindauis and M Options T 1 Acknowledge Round Trip Issues with Multi byte Format Previous Proceed _ Cancel 4 Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Register Optim Directory The Configuration program creates a Windows registry entry that the workstation uses to access the Optim Directory For subsequent access to the Opt
513. s 2000 Professional and Server Service Pack 4 Windows 2003 Server Sun Solaris version 7 8 9 or 10 HP UX version 11i or higher AIX 5L version 5 1 5 2 5 3 only DB2 and Oracle RedHat Linux 3 0 AS 4 0 AS Installation and Configuration Guide 11 1 Getting Started 12 DBMS HP UX Considerations Solaris Considerations Solaris and HP UX Considerations Optim supports the following database management systems DBMSs You must ensure that the version of the DBMS client software is the same as or higher than that for the DBMS server software Informix 7 31 9 30 Not supported under AIX Dynamic Server While Optim will work with Informix 7 31 the client software must be at least Informix 9 2 or greater IBM has tested the product with the following versions and found that the product functions properly in an upward compatible manner as long as no new functionality introduced in the DBMS release is exploited 9 4 Toleration Mode Only 10 1 Toleration Mode Only SQL Server 7 0 8 0 2000 9 0 2005 SQL Server does not run on any supported UNIX platforms Optim requires ODBC 3 50 or later to access a SQL Server database Oracle 8 1 7 81 9 1 9i 9 2 9i 10 1 10g 10 2 10g Sybase ASE 12 5 15 Not supported under AIX DB2 7 2 8 1 8 2 9 1 You can use Optim to move data to the DB2 z OS 7 1 or 8 1 mainframe platform using an Extract File created either with Optim or the Optim z OS Solution
514. s before creating or dropping the tables Installation and Configuration Guide 115 5 Configure Workstations Note If you are loading or refreshing the data privacy tables click Proceed to open the Drop Tables dialog Drop Tables The Drop Tables dialog allows you to review the list of the data privacy tables that are to be dropped within the selected DB Alias Configure First Workstation DropTables e following Optim Data Privacy Tables will be dropped if they exist If these table ames confiict with your database table names then click lt Cancel gt to return to the tables Click lt OK gt to drop these Optim Data Privacy Tables PSTDEMO PERSON PSTDEMO ADDRESS PSTDEMO COMPANY PSTDEMO FIRSTNAME 5 PSTDEMO FIRSTNAME_F al P Use the Drop Tables dialog to ensure that the names of the data privacy tables do not conflict with your other table names If there are conflicts click Cancel and specify a different schema name for the tables otherwise click OK 116 Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation During the process that drops data privacy tables and loads refreshes tables the Configuration program displays the Insert Request Progress dialog PRIVAGY TABLES Insert Request Mi E3 M Totals Rows to be processed 237710 Rows Inserted 1722 Rows Updated 0 Rows with Errors 0 Current Table Rows Inserted 1700 Rows Updated 0 Failed Rows 0 cespe
515. s option to allow users to supply a value for any column that cannot accept a default value If you select this option users can modify this selection in Personal Options or Edit Preferences in the Table Editor Null as Default Choose whether to use the NULL character as the default value for nullable columns This option applies to new rows that a user inserts while editing a database table Note Optim can provide a default value based on the column data type Other than NULL possible values include blank zero current date current time and current timestamp Yes Select this option to display the NULL character as the default value for nullable columns when editing data If you select this option users cannot modify this selection in Personal Options or Edit Preferences in the Table Editor See Display NULL as Insert Default on page 309 for more information No Select this option if your site prefers not to display the NULL character as the default value for nullable columns while editing data User Select this option to allow users to display the NULL character as the default value for nullable columns while editing data If you select this option users can modify this selection in Personal Options or Edit Preferences in the Table Editor Force Browse Only Select this check box to force all new and existing Edit Definitions to be in Browse Only mode When you select this check box edit options on the Edit tab in Personal Op
516. s session Contains 5 Generated SQL statements BIND TXT Contains DB2 Bind report E S TXT Optim Key s created Log of messages generated during this session 582 Optim 7 1 G 2 Conversion Process for Directory Tables on SQL Server G2 Conversion Process for Directory Tables on SQL Server The Conversion Process for a version 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory on an SQL Server database is part of the normal Directory maintenance performed after installing a new version of Optim After performing the conversion you can keep or drop the old Directory G 2 1 Converting Version 6 0 6 1 Directory Tables in SQL Server To convert version 6 0 6 1 Optim Directory tables in an SQL Server database use the Create Update Optim Directory or Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access options available from the Configuration program Tasks menu After selecting an Optim Directory and completing the Connect to Database dialog see page 569 a pop up warns you that new Directory tables will be created and the old tables will still be available to your 6 0 6 1 release Directory SQL8 was found in 6 0 format Tables in this Directory are not compatible with this release In order to upgrade new tables must be created Then data from the old tables will be copied into the new tables Your old tables will remain intact and usable by a 6 0 or 6 1 release a Click OK to continue the Conversion Process and open the Update Directory Tables di
517. s the format and contents of the connection strings for ODBC and JDBC An Archive File or Archive File Collection specified in the connection string overrides the corresponding specification in the ODM data source definition If an Archive File or Archive File Collection is not identified in the data source you must specify an Archive File or Archive File Collection in the connection string The following are special connection parameters that can be used when connecting to an ODM data source from ODBC or JDBC DSNCONFIG datasourcename1 ARCV_FILE archivefilename ARCV_GUID gggggg ARCV_ID n COLLECTION archivefilecollection PST_AF_SUBSET AF_IN n n AF_DATE_RANGE yyyy mm dd hh mm ss yyyy mm dd hh mm ss AF_ID_RANGE x y PSTTRACE COMP nn COMP nn amp datasourcename 2 DSNPASSWORDS datasourcename domainname user D password amp datasourcename2 QPTDPNAME primaryservername daemonportnumber Note For additional connection parameters refer to Attunity documentation DSNCONFIG The ODM data source name datasourcename ARCV_FILE The fully qualified Archive File name archivefilename ARCV_GUID The Archive File GUID S8888S ARCV_ID n The Archive File ID number COLLECTION The Archive File Collection name archivefilecollection Optim 7 1 F 6 Runtime Connection Information PST_AF_SUBSET AF IN AF DATE RANGE AF ID RANGE PSTTRACE COMP nn
518. s to convert to XML The name of the root XML tag The name of the XML tag in which the data is placed Select this check box to include XML schema of the Archive File data with the output XML Select this check box to include Archive File data with the output XML Select this check box to generate an XML tag for each data value Select this check box to generate lt row gt tag attributes for each data value Click to begin the conversion process Type an SQL SELECT statement to specify selection criteria for the data Displays messages for the conversion process Displays the XML output Optim 7 1 F 8 Archive File to XML Convertor Batch Tab Use the Batch tab to specify the data to convert by using a batch file or typing batch parameters IBM Optim Archive File To XML Convertor for x File Help Interactive Batch Messages Open File Click to select a batch input file Messages Displays message for the conversion process Execute Click to execute the batch process Input Type the batch parameters if a batch input file is not used Conversion Issues The following issues arise in the conversion of archived data to XML Characters that are not legal in XML including characters less than x 20 except for carriage return linefeed and tab are replaced by a A diagnostic is written when this occurs CLOBs character large objects are written as single long line
519. se Optim multiplies the buffersize specification by the value set for maximum database connections You can select a value from 64K to 1024K in increments of 32 It is recommended that you use the default value unless you are processing tables larger than 10 000 rows To help you monitor performance Archive Extract and Delete Statistics Reports indicate whether file compression is set on your operating system for the directory used to store process files Installation and Configuration Guide xix About this Guide e Archive File Maintenance Facility The Archive File Maintenance Facility is a command line driven utility that selectively deletes rows from Optim Archive Files while maintaining referential integrity within the file The command to perform Archive File Maintenance is AFMF Specify the selection criteria identifying the rows to be removed in a command file The AFMF command can be run only in a Windows environment This feature may help your site adhere to government regulations You may have to satisfy a requirement for example that all records of deceased persons be deleted from storage e Data Privacy Optim data privacy capabilities generate and propagate valid masked values appropriate for application testing This release includes a new parameter TRIM in the HASH LOOKUP function Use TRIM to specify a list of characters to be trimmed from the source value or to convert the source value to uppercase be
520. se Optim See the Optim Initialization Exit Programmer s Guide for more information on creating a user supplied exit Installation and Configuration Guide 51 3 Signing an Optim Exit 3 2 Prerequisites to Signing a User Supplied Exit If you want to use your own user supplied exit the following requirements apply The exit load linked module name must be appropriate for your platform as shown below Platform Linked Module File Name Windows opmexit dll AIX Solaris Linux libopmexit so HPUX libopmexit sl e You must copy the exit file to the bin directory before you run the Configuration program in Windows The exit file must exist in the bin directory and be signed on every Optim installation Thus each time you install Optim in a directory a signed exit must exist in the bin directory Signing Required Unlike the Optim Security feature which you must initialize once per After Each Install Optim Directory you must sign an exit each time you install Optim on a machine Moreover when you upgrade to a new Optim release you must sign a valid exit for each Optim installation before you can use Optim If you install a new version of Optim over a previous version you have to re copy your exit into the bin directory and resign it or sign the default exit The same is true if you reinstall Optim Anytime you replace a signed exit executable i e opmexit dll libopmexit so or libopmexit sl with
521. select components c cecceceeees 341 trace days sceseccocacoeieacsiennaeancs 363 373 User Defined Types Replace UDTs Personal Option 296 624 User ID Chedemtials seg scree tonte sates shire esata tan 417 DB Alias access rasipani 108 Optim Directory access cceceeees 93 required authority sssiissssirsisuiisseissisis 82 WwW Warn on Cascade cccccecssseeeeeees 250 328 Windows Registry access to Optim Directory 06 7 EXPOTtINgG Entries cicissiacsrcesssianddartancersaasdie 8 IMPOFtiNg ENtKIES oo ee eee cece ete eee 9 Merge Current User 10 159 162 Optim 7 1 Program Number Printed in USA
522. select from your system directories click the browse button Note Ifyou do not provide the full directory path and file name the file is saved to the Data Directory identified in Personal Options Installation and Configuration Guide 137 5 Configure Workstations Export Excluded from Export Selected for Export Complete 138 Select one or all check boxes to export e Product License information e Optim Directory Logon information DB Alias Logon information List of Optim Directories not selected for exporting registry data Name Name of each available Optim Directory Description Text that describes or explains the purpose of the Optim Directory List of Optim Directories selected for export Name Name of each selected Optim Directory Description Text that describes or explains the purpose of the Optim Directory Move an item from one list to the other by dragging the name Also to rearrange listed items drag the line number to the new position After you make your selections click OK to export the registry data When you finish the configuration process opens the Complete dialog This dialog describes the files that may be created during the process SQL TXT Contains the DDL statements generated to carry out various functions BIND TXT Contains the DB2 Bind Report KEYS TXT Contains a list of the Optim Keys created PROCNFG LOG Contains the Configuration Processing Log These files ar
523. ser ID and Group ID for a process determine the directories files or mount points that can be accessed By default the user that creates a file has read and write privileges any other group or user has read privileges only Filemode You may want files created by the Server to be available to other users Parameter to run the same job and overlay the same file The filemode parameter in pstserv cfg allows you to grant file access to other users The filemode parameter changes the default file mode for any file created by the Server and allows you to limit read or write privileges for a user group or other Daemon Startup A directory created during the daemon startup tracks the daemon Directory system wide so that you can shut the daemon down from a different process This directory includes a file for each daemon started In production environments there is usually one file The default creates an rt4s subdirectory under the system tmp directory However the daemon is often run under a fenced user that does not have privileges in the tmp directory To overcome this you can set the PSTINFO environment variable before starting the daemon Specify the complete path to a directory to which the user starting the daemon can write In general you must pre create the directory to give it specific user rights 424 Optim 7 1 B 2 DBMS Logon Credentials B 2 DBMS Logon Credentials DBMS logon credentials needed to acce
524. server on which the file resides and click Refresh Use Look In to select the directory or path containing the file and double click a listed file Name or enter the File Name and click Open The names of columns in the selected table are listed in the File Access Definition Table Column Selection dialog Source indicates the fully qualified name of the table Note The selected Archive File must contain a table with a fully qualified name that matches the name in Table on the Table Access Control dialog Installation and Configuration Guide 49 Appendix D Optim Security D 3 3 File Access Definition Example The following example File Access Definition includes three types of access a default a restricted table CUSTOMERS and a restricted column ORDERS ORDER ID The roles specified in the example are part of the PSTUSER Access Control Domain The ACD validates the roles and associates them with users in your network Default Access For the first entry on the Table List Default all roles and users except the Guest role are allowed to access tables in the Archive File that are not listed in Table List OPTUSR FIRST File Access Definition Editor File Edit Tools Options Help alslalalal 8 S Description Access Control Domain A E o Table List Table Access Control Default Default DBMS OPTUSR CUSTOMERS _ Explicit D DBMS OPTUSR ORDERS Default In the Tab
525. ses 48 tracedays Number of days to retain trace files in the temporary work directory Specify n A value from 2 to 30 Consider storage space limitations when deciding the number of days to retain the files 5 Default setting tracedays 5 limitaccess Client access to data directories Settings are 0 or blank Client can see all directories on this machine in Browse dialogs 1 Limit client access to the Temporary tempdir Data datadir Archive archivedir Archive Index archivediridx Archive Browse Index archivebroidx directories and any directories specified in the allowdir parameter Default limitaccess 0 allowdir Option to add a directory to the limitaccess list Use allowdir for each additional directory A valid entry is path A proper directory path you need not create the directory first allowdir dir subdir Installation and Configuration Guide 363 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux Note Allowing access to the root directory is equivalent to setting limitaccess to 0 pstlogon The source of DBMS User ID and Password for Optim Directory access Valid entries are client User ID and Password for the delegating client i e from the Server tab in Personal Options or PSTDIRUSERID and PSTDIRPASSWORD from the command line Default server User ID and Password provided with pstdir keyword pstlogon client dbaliaslogon The source of DBMS User ID and Passwor
526. settings on the Product Options Database tab Optim uses the Unicode character set in dialogs and to process data In some multi byte character sets such as Oracle JA16SJIS multiple characters are mapped to the same Unicode character When these characters are converted from Unicode back to multi byte a round trip the original character may not be returned Archive Extract Select an option for handling round trip conversion Requests issues during Archive or Extract processing Stop Processing Stop processing when a multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Ignore all round Continue processing when a trip Failures multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Default Installation and Configuration Guide 327 9 Personal Options Cascade Delete Rule 328 Insert Load Convert Requests Select an option for handling round trip conversion issues during Insert Load or Convert processing Stop Processing Stop processing when a multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Ignore allround Continue processing when a trip Failures multi byte character is encountered that could cause an incorrect round trip conversion Default Select the Ignore all round trip Failures option if the database does not contain data with characters that could cause round trip errors or if
527. sing Optim running on a Windows platform However a process can be initiated on any platform using the Command Line Interface Installation and Regardless of the configuration you choose you must first install Optim Configuration on a Windows machine that has connectivity to your database i e the Sequence First Workstation Following this installation you will Configure the First Workstation to create the Optim Directory and any DB Aliases needed to access your databases If the First Workstation is to be used as a Server you can also configure it for this You can then install and configure any additional Windows based workstations or Servers using the Configure Additional Workstation task and if needed following the steps for Server configuration If you are implementing the Server on a UNIX or Linux based machine you can follow the directions in Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux once the Windows installations are complete and Optim Directory and DB Aliases are configured Several steps are involved in installing Optim This overview explains these steps discusses the software and environmental requirements for using the application software and describes the information you must prepare for the installation and configuration process Installation and Configuration Guide 3 1 Getting Started 1 1 1 Installation Phase The installation process unloads Optim from the installation CD
528. ss speed memory etc Valid values are from 10 to 48 The default value is 48 When the server reaches the maximum an error message Server too Busy is displayed Typically one validation process called a Mirror is created each time a Request Editor that requires the Server is opened When the request is run a Mirror and the request process simultaneously Therefore two processes run for each request For example if a workstation delegates two requests to the Server simultaneously four processes are used Optim 7 1 6 1 General Tab Days to keep Trace The number of days 2 to 30 to retain trace files in the temporary work files directory The default value is 5 Trace files are useful for tracking the processing performed using Optim Trace file names are prefixed with PRO followed by letters indicating the trace file type ended with a numeric extension for example PROTOOL 123 The extension on the name of the trace file distinguishes one trace file of that type from another Trace files are sequentially numbered 001 through 999 followed by A00 through Z99 as necessary If more than 3 599 trace files of a single type are created and stored within the specified number of days file names are reused beginning with the first Installation and Configuration Guide 155 6 Configure the Optim Server 6 2 Errors Tab 156 Font for Informational Messages Use the Errors tab to assign default font information
529. ss the Optim Directory and use the DB Alias include a User ID Password and Connection String If using the Server you can provide the DBMS logon credentials in two places The Connections tab of the Optim Server Settings applet The Logon tab of Personal Options The location used to maintain DBMS logon credentials depends on the settings on the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet or the pstlogon or dbaliaslogon parameters in the pstserv configuration file pstserv cfg for UNIX or Linux Optim Directory To use the Optim Directory information from the Server Access Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet select Server for the Optim Directories option UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the pstlogon parameter to server To use the Optim Directory information from each initiating client Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet select Client for the Optim Directories option UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the pstlogon parameter to client DB Alias Access To use the DB Alias information from the Server Windows On the Security tab of the Optim Server Settings applet select Server for the DB Aliases option UNIX or Linux For pstserv cfg set the dbaliaslogon parameter to server Installation and Configuration Guide 425 Appendix B Server Credentials Maintain DBMS Logon Credentials 426 To use the DB Alias information from
530. stalled Optim Click Finish to exit the wizard M View the README TXT file M Launch Optim configuration lt Back Cancel Click Finish to display the README TXT file in a separate text editor window and launch the Configuration program Notes To postpone reading the README TXT file clear the View the README TXT file check box before you click Finish 46 Optim 7 1 2 3 Configuration Overview e To postpone the configuration of your installation clear the Launch Optim configuration check box before you click Finish 2 3 Configuration Overview As noted above the first step in the Configuration process is to sign a valid exit i e the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit After you do that the Configuration program will create the Optim Directory establish connectivity to databases for Optim and perform other maintenance tasks The remainder of this manual describes the Configuration program and Tasks and explains how to Configure the First Workstation which includes creating the Optim Directory and associated DB Aliases configuring options and exporting registry data Configure Additional Workstations which includes importing registry data creating a registry entry and specifying a Product Configuration File Configure the Optim Server Use other commands available from the Tasks menu Initialize and enable Optim Security which includes Archive File Security Functional Secu
531. station and direct resource intensive data processing functions to a machine more suited to the task When a task requires the movement processing or storage of very large volumes of data the request can be defined at the workstation in the normal way then directed for remote processing on the machine hosting the Server If this machine is the machine on which the database is running network traffic associated with the movement of data is eliminated You can also install the Server on a machine dedicated to the Server function In addition a Server is required to process from a database residing in a UNIX environment and to support access to archived data using IBM s Open Data Manager Note Ina UNIX environment the Server is installed from a console and configured using the Command Line Interface See Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux for complete information To configure the Server option on a Windows workstation you must first install Optim and run the Configuration program to configure the workstation and enable it as a Server Refer to 7 5 Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server on page 201 After you activate the workstation as a Server you must configure it using the Optim Server Settings Control Panel applet Installation and Configuration Guide 151 6 Configure the Optim Server Control Panel Tabs 152 Double click the Optim icon in the Windows Control Panel to run the
532. sword and domain information to be used by the Optim Server Server when running actions remotely Select options for browsing or editing database tables Select display options for browsing Archive Extract Control or Compare Files Set defaults for emphasizing differences between rows when browsing Compare Files Identify the default Archive Directory and Archive Index Directory and select options that apply when archiving data Provide default segment size values Set options for displaying tabs in Action Request Editors printing Column Map procedures and retaining reports Set printer font and language preferences for printing a request or definition 283 9 Personal Options 9 2 1 General Tab Use _ as SQL LIKE Character Caps Mode zIOS Code Page Days to keep Trace files 254 Database Select options for handling multi byte round trip conversion errors cascade deletes and database connections For Sybase ASE you can also specify whether to run in Unchained mode Notify Specify default options and a list of addresses used for sending an email message when a request is processed or only if a request succeeds or fails Use the General tab to identify the Temporary Work Directory Data Directory and the directory for the Product Configuration File used by the workstation and other defaults Select to use the underscore character to represent any single character in a pattern For exa
533. t and set up to interface with MAPI For UNIX or Linux a valid copy of SENDMAIL must be configured correctly Optim Server Settings ol x Errors Load Connection Access Startup Security Endpoints Archive Retention Status Email w lt i gt M Activate Administrator Email Notification Email Address Minimum Severity user company com Do not send duplicates for 7 day s I Clear send history when Optim Server starts Email Transport Defaults Undo Configuration aa Cancel Apply Help Ready Activate Select this check box to activate email notification The other options Administrator on this tab are unavailable unless this check box is selected Email Notification Note Deselecting the check box does not clear the Email tab settings Email Address Enter an email address to which to automatically send notification A message is sent to the email address only if the specified Minimum Severity is reached Installation and Configuration Guide 179 6 Configure the Optim Server Minimum Severity Do not send duplicates for day s Clear send history when Optim Server starts Send Test eMail Email Transport 180 For each email address you list select the minimum severity needed to send a message The severity levels are ranked from least severe Success to most severe Exception Click the down arrow to display a drop down list with the
534. t any time amp Optim Configuration x File Tasks Options Help Pro Sel Dire Cre Read Configure the First Workstation Configure Additional Workstation Create Update DB Alias Create Update Optim Directory Access Existing Optim Directory Configure Security for an Optim Directory Enable Disable this Machine as an Optim Server Enable Disable the ODBC Interface for this Machine Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Rename an Optim Directory Update the DBMS Version for an Optim Directory Update the DBMS Version for a DB Alias Configure Options Create Primary Keys Create Copies of DB2 2 05 Relationships Load Drop Sample Data Load Drop Data Privacy Data Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables o use an existing Optim rkstation or Tasks gt Directory Purge Optim Directory Registry Entry Purge DB Alias Select any of the following commands Configure the First Workstation Configure Additional Workstation Installation and Configuration Guide Confirm the Product License Key after installation and create the components shared by all workstations Typically all users on all workstations share one Product Configuration File that contains the Product Options for your site although you may have more than one of each Configure each additional workstation on which Optim is installed to share components created when the first workstat
535. t dialog Use the Create Select DB Alias dialog see page 207 to specify a DB Alias to purge Click Proceed to open the next dialog After you select a DB alias to purge the Configuration program prompts you to confirm the selected DB Alias is to be dropped This option is selected when the dialog opens Click Proceed to continue Next the Configuration program opens a query dialog that prompts you to purge another DB Alias To purge another DB Alias select the check box and click Proceed to open the Create Select DB Alias dialog on which you can select another DB Alias Optim 7 1 8 Product Options Each workstation using Optim must reference a Product Configuration File The path to the appropriate Product Configuration File is specified in Personal Options You must use the Product Options dialog however to create a Product Configuration File Note A password is required to open the Product Options dialog Generally Product Options parameters enforce site and system requirements Use the Product Options dialog to e Name the Product Configuration File Establish password security for Product Options Limit the amount of data that can be processed at one time Define defaults and user control over certain activities e Provide connection information for machines hosting the Optim Server Server e Specify general parameters for editing or archiving e Customize loader parameters and enforce loader requiremen
536. t does not verify that they exist Drop existing packages plans or procedures This option is available only if packages plans or procedures already exist and can be dropped When enabled enter the high level qualifier for packages plans or procedures Refers to Collection Name to access DB2 Catalog Tables Schema Name to access the Oracle Data Dictionary and Owner ID to access System Tables in SQL Server or Sybase ASE or Informix Note For Sybase ASE and SQL Server the sp_ prefix is displayed when stored procedures are shared and Use One Copy for all Databases on this Server is selected Enter an identifier for authorized users You can specify a single User ID a Group Name or Public Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Use One Copy for all Databases on this Server This check box is displayed for Sybase ASE and SQL Server only Select the check box to use common stored procedures for databases on a Display SQL Always Require a Password single server For Sybase ASE stored procedures are stored in the special Sybase ASE database sybsysprocs For SQL Server stored procedures are stored in the MASTER database Note Microsoft SQL Server documentation includes a caution regarding the creation of stored procedures in the MASTER database Consider the implications of sharing stored procedures for SQL Server before proceeding Select this check box to display SQL statements before crea
537. t matches the user id Note If you do not enter a password on the Command Line prOpass prompts for one prOpass d Delete a password entry type name userid type A valid password type filelogon tivoliavail odbcserver pstdir webserver dbalias server user name The name of the configuration file parameter Note Use the wildcard character as described for adding a password entry userid The user ID used to verify that the password matches the parameter name To protect changes to the password file or the configuration file the two keywords must match Examples The following examples demonstrate using the Add command for the prOpass program and indicating encrypted passwords in the configuration file 1 To encode the password for the Optim Directory PSTDIR1 create a password as follows prOpass a pstdir pstdirl myuserid mypassword In the configuration file for PSTDIR1 specify the password as a question mark pstdir pstdirl Oracle 8 0 schema connectstr myuserid 400 Optim 7 1 A 4 Securing the Products and Configuration Files 2 To encode the password for the DBALIAS specify both the Optim Directory to which it belongs and the DB Alias name prOpass a dbalias pstdirl dbaliasl myuserid mypassword And in the configuration file specify dbalias pstdirl dbaliasl connectstr myuserid 3 To encode a single password for a specific user account to access any Opt
538. t of user and group accounts privileges such as the ability to open a dialog run a process or modify a specific object Security Reports allow you to see which users and groups have permissions for these privileges and the roles to which the permissions apply For more information about security privileges see Appendix D Optim Security Depending on your specifications you can create a report that will e List the Functional Security permissions assigned to specified users and groups e List all Functional Security permissions for selected privileges e List the Object Security permissions for specified users and groups that apply to specified objects and the ACL that secures each object The Report Process runs on the workstation not on the Optim Server Specifications for a Report Process are stored as a Report Request Use the Report Request to provide the report criteria and processing options The Report Process Report dialog displays the report You can process a Report Request immediately by selecting Run from the File menu or you can schedule the request for processing at a later time by selecting Schedule from the File menu Installation and Configuration Guide 511 Appendix E Security Reports Naming A fully qualified Report Request name is in the form identifier name Conventions where identifier Identifier assigned to the Report Request name 1 to 8 characters name Base name assigned to the Report Req
539. t relationships with names constraints up to 64 characters After changing this option you must exit Optim before the change takes effect You cannot create a DBMS relationship based on an Optim relationship with a name that exceeds the DBMS restrictions Select Use Oracle Array Delete to use the Oracle array delete feature during a Delete Process This option is selected by default Note If your site audits Delete processing be aware that Array Delete may report rows as being successfully deleted that do not exist in the database and therefore were not actually deleted by the process The Oracle array delete feature is performed during a Delete Process only when the following are true Installation and Configuration Guide 253 8 Product Options Allow Optim PK Rels on DB Views Extract using Uncommitted Read 254 e Compare Row Contents is not selected in the Delete Request Editor e Both the table in the source file and database have a unique primary key e The table has no file attachments to be deleted Select this check box to allow users to define Optim Primary Keys and Relationships for database views Default Set an option to enable extracting of uncommitted rows from the database during an Archive or Extract Process You can extract uncommitted rows from specific tables in the Access Definition or all tables Selecting this option for tables with known performance problems may increase the speed of
540. t synonym defaults cece 302 set table defaults ceeeceeeeeeees 296 set trigger defaults 00 0 0 ecceeeeeeees 301 Credentials sarosane E 417 427 DBMS logon credentials 425 427 DB Alias access ecesceeeeeees 425 MAIN tAINING sssriiscirnrers iser 426 Optim Directory access 425 Server credentials 00 418 424 Linux file access 0eeeeeeeees 424 Oracle OS Authentication 424 registry ACCESS sinini i 423 Server privileges c ceeee 422 tO TUN PLOCESSES ssrasescerissaneorsesrsna 419 Installation and Configuration Guide to run the Server seses 418 UNC network share access 422 UNIX file access 20 0 cece 424 Customer Information Dialog 04 39 D Data Privacy Tables CESCrIPLIONS sxeuced sazersereerienerzenace 606 609 loading penmcarennenn ennenen 114 237 Database sample tables scisissccxsscereveaxdnsersncansneanent 588 Database Permissions c cceeseeeeeeees 14 Database tab Product Options 252 256 allow insert action delete option 253 allow parallel processing 00 293 allow user to lock tables 00 233 Extract using Uncommitted Read 254 maximum commit frequency 252 maximum database connections 255 Sybase unchained mode 06 252 DB Alias configure first workstation 04 94 CLC ALS se
541. t to Database 570 Password and Connection String on the Connect to Database dialog This User ID must have authorization to create tables and catalog stored procedures or bind packages After the workstation is connected to the database you can create the Optim Directory The Configuration program names the tables automatically but you can specify the identifier Creator ID Owner ID or Schema Name and the database tablespace for each table The Create Optim Directory Tables dialog prompts you for the information needed to create these tables Before creating packages plans or procedures for the Optim Directory tables the Configuration program displays the Create Drop Packages Create Drop Stored Procedures or Bind Drop Plans dialog depending on the DBMS selected for the Directory You can choose to browse the SQL statements generated to create or refresh the packages plans or procedures If you are creating a new Optim Directory in a DBMS for which Optim provides Unicode support you are prompted to indicate whether the DBMS is configured to store unicode data The Configuration program creates a Windows registry entry used to access the Optim Directory For subsequent access to the Directory from this workstation you can use the Connect to Database dialog to specify a User ID and Password different from those used to create the Directory After you have created the new Optim Directory the Conversion Process displays the
542. t to use the User ID and password for Server access to the Optim Directory as provided in Personal Options for the delegating workstation In Personal Options you can also require a password each time or deny access Refer to 9 2 9 Server Tab on page 305 for more information DB Aliases Server Select to use the User ID and password provided on the Connection tab for Server use of DB Aliases 166 Optim 7 1 6 7 Security Tab Client Select to use the User ID and password for Server use of DB Aliases as provided in Personal Options on the delegating workstation In Personal Options you can also require a password each time or deny access Refer to 9 2 9 Server Tab on page 305 for more information File Input Output Server Select to use the Service Logon on the Startup tab This setting applies only when Server credentials are used for file access Client e Select this option to use User ID password and domain specified on the Server tab in Personal Options on the delegating workstation for Server local disk and network share access Refer to 9 2 9 Server Tab on page 305 for more information The delegating credentials must have the following privilege Log on as a batch job SE BATCH LOGON NAME Note that in some installations you can give this privilege to everyone in the Local Security Policy instead of specifying credentials for each user Use this Logon If files are accessed using Server credentials yo
543. ta on a backup device Installation and Configuration Guide 285 9 Personal Options 9 2 2 Confirm Tab Confirm Definition Deletion Confirm File Overwrite Confirm Loss of DDL in Convert 286 Use the Confirm tab to choose whether a confirmation dialog is displayed before the execution of a process that results in loss of data Personal Options Confirm Display alel l Select to display a confirmation dialog before you delete a definition or process request from the Optim Directory Selecting this check box helps prevent deleting a request or definition accidentally Select to display a confirmation dialog before you overwrite an existing file Archive File Extract File Control File Compare File or Export File Note Ifyou select this check box a confirmation dialog opens before you run a process However this confirmation does not display for a process request that is scheduled or run using the Command Line Interface Select to display a confirmation dialog during a Convert Process that can result in the loss of DDL statements The confirmation dialog is not displayed for a scheduled process request Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor 9 2 3 Display Tab NULL value indicator Delimiter for variable length column values Maximum Fetch Rows Maximum entries in History Lists Use the Display tab to select preferences for displaying information Personal Options OO x Gene
544. ted data review logical application paths resolve data problems modify data to test all possible scenarios and ensure that one or more related tables contain expected data Compare allows you to compare before and after images of relationally intact sets of data from a set of tables You can identify and analyze changes to related rows to resolve referential integrity issues or identify similarities and differences between two independent databases and verify database changes Scheduler allows you to schedule process requests to be executed in unattended mode Optim 7 1 1 1 Conceptual Overview The Configuration program allows you to configure the first and additional workstations to use Optim You can also establish security and perform various tasks to maintain the system environment The Server allows you to process resource intensive tasks away from the workstations to reduce network traffic and improve efficiency to process data that resides in a UNIX or Linux environment or to use Optim Open Data Manager to access archived data e Open Data Manager ODM provides Archive File access for programs that use the ODBC and JDBC APIs Workstations or You can install Optim on individual workstations or on a file server for File Server multiple users to share Note Installing Optim on a file server is different from installing the optional Server Sites that consider installing Optim on a file server would generally
545. teees 252 CXMLACLTOWS autaizeianbssartscsntstanlantedsumiais 250 fetChiTOWS sira 249 287 History lists sasssa 287 MENU NITIES apron 288 visible components s sssssesssseseessee 288 MBCS Roundtrip Processing 0 255 Messages GLTOMS asrrein rn AEI 291 informational ccecccceeceeeeeeeees 290 limit lines to display ccceeeeee 291 TOSCUUIN GD solanei 289 Set font Style riseam eana 290 show or hide sisicessaiacaiiataaiaadiabtacenceiance 291 Wating S sspe ES 291 Microsoft Debugging Utility 0 0 0 0 32 Multi byte Support ssssssssesessseeeseereresr eere 28 N Notify tab Personal Options 05 330 Send Test eMail eee 182 332 O Object Name Highlighting 0 0 0 0 296 ODBC Interface Enable Disable cccce 133 149 Installation cc ccceeeeesceeseeeneees 42 353 Open Data Manager ODM e eee 527 Archive File Collection 0006 561 Archive File to XML Convertor 557 Attunity Studio 0 cccceeeeseeteeeees 534 data SOUTCE ssacar aron aR 538 data type conversion sessssseseessee 556 installation 528 JDBC Thin Client 0 cccceeeeeeeees 547 ODBC Thin Client suissseisieisiarssss 547 runtime connection cceeeereeees 554 secondary Server 2 0 eeeeceeseeeeteeeeeeees 542 SCCULILY srpen 548 Optim Directory add default tables 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeee 204 create additional ccceceeseseenee 190 create tables
546. ter converting the PST Directory PST Directory tables created with the Princeton Softech products versions 6 0 6 1 in an SQL Server database must be converted to accommodate Unicode support in later versions of Optim The Directory conversion process will copy data in 6 0 6 1 Directories to new Directory tables The new and old Directories will have the same name and PST object definitions After the Directory is converted you can still use the old Directory tables with the Princeton Softech products version 6 0 6 1 or you can drop the 6 0 6 1 Directory Optim 7 1 G 1 Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories G1 Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories The Configuration program presents a series of dialogs that provide instructions to guide you through each step of the Conversion Process During the process you make selections appropriate to your particular site and circumstances Note Refer to 4 1 5 Dialogs on page 73 for details on options that are common to the configuration dialogs To begin the process select Convert Optim Directory Objects from the File menu The first window is the Overview dialog B Convert Optim Directory Objects Overview he objects in any Optim Directory created with a 5 x version of Optim must be onverted to work with the current version of Optim Optim Directories created with an earlier version must first be upgraded to 5 x Converting Optim Directory Objects is Click Proceed
547. ters on the same line When using a parameter file the TASK keyword signals the end of a list of parameters for a task keywords on lines following a TASK keyword are processed in the next task if any or are ignored if no new TASK keyword is found TASK The task identifier as follows DB Create or update a single DB Alias MAINTPST Apply maintenance to a single Optim Directory MAINTCAT Apply maintenance to a single DB Alias Installation and Configuration Guide 437 Appendix C Command Line Maintenance Tasks C 2 Examples C 2 1 Create Multiple DB Aliases with one Optim Directory The first step is to create a text file with the appropriate parameters for the tasks For this example the text file is called C Cre_dba txt PSTDirName ORA LOCAL PSTDirUserID roberts PSTDirPassword softech DBAAction createnew DBAName AUDB_LOCAL DBMSType UDB DBMSVERSION 6 ConnectStr sample UserID roberts Password robbie SPAction createnew Description Local UDB V 6 1 Sample Task DB DBAAction createnew DBAName ASYB LOCAL DBMSType SYBASE DBMSVERSION 11 9 2 ConnectStr roberts UserID roberts Password robbie DBQualifier roberts SPAction createnew SPShare True Description Local Sybase V 11 9 2 roberts Task DB DBAAction createnew DBAName AROBDB3 DBMSType SYBASE DBMSVersion 11 9 2 ConnectStr roberts UserID roberts Password robbie DBQualifier robdb3 SPAction Useexisting SPShare True Description Local
548. tes the number of bytes to use from the end of the column name For example if the column name is SALESMAN _ID and you specify 0 for From Left and 2 for From Right the subset of the column name used is ID Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Note You can specify 0 for From Left and 0 for From Right to indicate that no part of the name is used However you must use part of either the table name or the column name Column Map Max Shuffle Retries Installation and Configuration Guide Default number of times the Column Map Shuffle Function will refetch a replacement value until a value that does not match the source row is found a retry The Shuffle Function retry parameter overrides this default Enter a value from 0 1000 Enter 0 to allow a replacement value to match the source The default is 10 Note Using a high retry value with columns that contain many duplicate values will increase the processing time For these columns it may be best to use a retry value of zero 321 9 Personal Options Action Display Defaults Show Currency Select to display the Currency tab in the Convert Tab Page Insert and Load Request Editors Show Age Tab Select to display the Age Function and Global Pages Aging tabs in the Convert Insert and Load Request Editors Note You can override these selections with commands available from the Options menu in each Action Request Editor Monitor Update Frequency
549. that exceed the specified row limit When an Extract Archive or Control File is first opened for browsing system resources are allocated for creating a cache for temporary storage of excluded rows and rows in error Therefore browsing a very large file can consume a large amount of system resources This limit is reevaluated when a table is joined to another table because the resulting subset may contain less rows The default value is 100 000 rows When a table is browsed that contains rows in excess of the Maximum Exclude Rows value a message displays to remind you of the specified limit Note If you never expect to use the Exclude Rows or Only Show Rows in Error features set this limit very low to optimize system performance Select options to identify changed data when browsing a Compare File Italicize Changed Columns Select to italicize data that differs between Source 1 and Source 2 Bold Changed Columns Select to display the data that differs between Source and Source 2 in bold type Color for Changed Columns Click the down arrow to select a color to identify data that differs between Source and Source 2 Initially Display These Rows Select rows to display by default when browsing a Compare File All Different Duplicate Equal or Only unmatched rows Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor 9 2 12 Archive Tab Archive Directory Archive Index Directory Archive Browse Index Directory Use the op
550. the DB Alias or click Skip to open the Drop Optim Directory dialog which you can use to drop the specified Optim Directory including all DB Aliases and other objects stored in it The Load Drop Sample Tables dialog prompts you to specify the identifier Creator ID Schema Name or Owner ID for the sample tables to be dropped Refer to Load Drop Sample Tables on page 112 If you have an Optim Data Privacy License the Load Drop Data Privacy Tables dialog prompts you to specify the identifier Creator ID Schema Name or Owner ID for the data privacy tables to be dropped Refer to Load Drop Data Privacy Tables on page 115 Optim 7 1 7 17 Drop DB Alias or Optim Tables Drop Packages Before dropping packages plans or procedures used to access the database the Configuration program displays the Create Drop Packages Bind Drop Plans or Create Drop Stored Procedures dialog as appropriate E Drop DB Alias Optim Tables Create Drop Packages ioj x Optim he Optim Configuration program can drop the Optim created Packages For the Data ictionary The Package Schema Name must match the name used when you created he Packages If the Packages are used by another Optim Directory click lt Skip gt DB Alias Tables DBMS Data Dictionary Package Specifications Greate Refresh Schema Name C Use Existing pplusts Grant Auth ID o Drop I Display SQL _ Proceed skp Undo canei Oracle QOR922K
551. the NAV binding editor Ef Design NAV Attunity Studio Fie Edit Navigate Search Window Help to SE E C Machines S Pimay ODM Bindings NAV Daemons Users Value Name NAV Path Piimary ODM bindings N D Properes e u ae O Pi P Cortxeon 13 Maladie ES ml version 1 0 encoding binding name NAV gt lt datasources name NAV gt lt datasource neme afdsni type PST_GDB readonly true gt lt config dirdb ora817 arev_file C rtdata migrate af gt lt datasource gt lt datasources gt lt environment name NAV gt lt misc gt lt debug gt lt queryProcessor gt lt optimizer gt lt transactions gt lt odbe gt lt oledb gt lt tuning gt lt conma gt lt tempFeatures gt lt environment gt lt binding gt 3 Select the Source tab 4 Edit the lt datasource gt statement to name the data source 5 Edit the lt config gt statement to identify an Archive File or Archive File Collection and the Optim Directory in which it is registered From the File menu select Save All Installation and Configuration Guide 541 Appendix F Open Data Manager F 3 Secondary Server Configuration An ODM Server must be installed on each workstation that uses ODBC to access ODM data sources Each data source defined on the primary server must be redefined on the secondary server This section discusses how to define a data so
552. the Secure Selected Objects When Saved option to automatically assign an ACL to an object when it is saved The ACL is modeled after the Optim Object Template ACL For more information about using the Optim Object Template ACL see Optim Object Template ACL Note Secure Selected Objects When Saved is available only when Enable is selected To automatically assign an ACL to an object select Secure Selected Objects When Saved When Secure Selected Objects When Saved is selected the browse button is available Click the browse button to open the Select Optim Object Types dialog which allows you to select the types of Optim objects that are automatically assigned an ACL when they are saved To secure objects with an ACL when saved 1 In Security Options for this Optim Directory select Enabled 2 Select Secure Selected Objects When Saved 3 Click the browse button to open the Select Optim Object Types dialog 4 In the Optim Objects List select the check box for each object type you want to automatically assign an ACL when saved 5 Click OK to return to the Set Optim Object Security Option dialog Note If Secure Selected Objects When Saved is selected objects are automatically assigned an ACL when Object Security is either enabled or disabled Optim 7 1 7 4 Configure Security for an Optim Directory Select Optim Object Use the Select Optim Object Types dialog to select object types that Types are assigned an ACL
553. the Table List and re display the File Access Definition Editor Installation and Configuration Guide 485 Appendix D Optim Security D 3 2 Defining Access Permissions for Columns 486 Table Column List Permissions for columns are defined using a method similar to that for tables To define access permissions for one or more columns in a table right click the table name on the Table List and select List Columns from the shortcut menu The Table Access Control dialog is displayed Table Access Control Loli File Edit Options Help Table Dems OPTUSR ORDERS z Column List Column Access Control Column Default ORDER D Explicit CUST_ID None ORDER_DATE None FREIGHT_CHARGES None ORDER_SALESMAN None ORDER_POSTED_DATE None ORDER_SHIP_DATE None The table for which column access permissions are defined Use Table to select other names from the Table List in the File Access Definition Editor and define column access permissions Default and names of columns in the Table for which the File Access Definition explicitly controls access Select an entry in the list to display or define corresponding access permissions in the Column Access Control list The Default setting applies to archived data in columns not otherwise listed and cannot be deleted gt The arrow indicates the active entry To select an entry click the row Column The column name Type the name or use Add co
554. the command line or if using ODBC to access Archive Files created on a Server you may improve response times by providing the name of the Server to be considered the Local Server for ODBC connections If the ODBC connection or the Archive File Server name matches the localrtserver specification the connection is made directly to bypass the Server and speed access to the Archive File There is no default value Note Do not use localrtserver if accessing archived data on a backup device name Name of the Server to be considered the Local Server for ODBC connections localrtserver servernam Connection information for an Optim Directory Use pstdir for each Optim Directory that can be accessed for processing initiated from the command line Note that the Optim Directory is created from a Windows machine using the Configuration program and that connection to the Directory is not verified until required by a client name Name of the Optim Directory dbmstype Database Management System as DB2 ORACLE SYBASE or INFORMIX Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration dbmsver DBMS version in the form n n dbqual Creator ID Schema Name or Owner connectstring Information defined to the DBMS client to connect to the database dbname Name within connection Provide name if DBMS is Informix or Sybase ASE and pstlogon is client or specify if pstlogon is server userid User ID and password for DBMS logon Provide password this informat
555. the database s for which you want to apply aintenance then click lt Proceed gt Note Support for some of the listed DBMS ersions may have been discontinued by the vendor undo ea Specify the DBMS Type and Version and click Proceed to open the Apply Maintenance to DB Alias dialog To continue select the DB Alias connect to the database and create drop packages plans or procedures Note The steps are the same as those previously described to apply maintenance for all DB Aliases Installation and Configuration Guide 211 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Apply Maintenance to Another DBMS Type After you apply maintenance to the database in the selected DBMS the Configuration program opens the Apply Maintenance to Another DBMS Type dialog and prompts you to confirm maintenance for a different database DBMS Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Apply Maintenance to Anot B Ed o apply maintenance For catalog access in another DBMS select the Apply A laintenance for Another DBMS Type checkbox Select lt Proceed gt to continue to the E ext step E On this dialog you can do the following To apply maintenance for another DBMS select the check box and click Proceed to open the Specify DB Alias DBMS dialog To end the task clear the check box and click Proceed on each subsequent dialog until the Complete dialog displays 212 Optim 7 1 7 9 Rename an Optim Di
556. the group that includes User ROTH Read Permission for all users outside Group WUSR Write Permission for User WGRP Write Permission for the group that includes User WOTH Write Permission for all users outside Group RALL Read permission for all users WALL Write permission for all users SYSTEM The system default typically Read and Write permission for the User and Read Only for Group and Other Default filemode system e When filelogon is local the user account under which the pr0svce daemon is started is User When filelogon is client the user that creates a file is User e When the filelogon value is server the explicitly supplied user account is User endpoint The TCP port that prOsvce monitors for RPC connections from clients Valid settings are tcpportnumber A numeric value from 1024 to 65534 1024 The default setting endpoint 6736 Installation and Configuration Guide 365 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux 366 pstdir Connection information for an Optim Directory Use pstdir for each Optim Directory that can be accessed on behalf of a client Note that the Optim Directory is created from a Windows machine using the Configuration program and that connection to the Directory is not verified until required by a client name dbmstype dbmsver dbqual connectstring dbname userid password Name of the Optim Directory Database Management System as DB2
557. the sample tables or data privacy tables the following authorizations are needed CONNECT CREATETAB IMPLICIT SCHEMA When the plans are bound for the Optim Directory and the System Catalog you can specify a grant authorization ID When this ID is PUBLIC the default value all users will be able to run Optim Optim 7 1 1 2 Planning for Installation and Configuration DB2 z OS Optionally you can specify a user ID or group name to limit access to specific users To create a DB Alias for DB2 z OS the following authorizations are needed GRANT CONNECT TO userid GRANT BINDADD TO userid GRANT CREATE ON COLLECTION TO userid To create and load the sample tables or data privacy tables for DB2 z OS you will need the following authorizations GRANT CONNECT TO userid GRANT USE OF TABLESPACE lt tb space gt TO lt userid gt GRANT USE OF BUFFERPOOL lt bpname gt TO lt userid gt 1 2 3 Required Server Authorizations Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 2003 Server On a Windows machine the Optim Server can be run as a process or a service When it is run as a process the Server uses the credentials of the current user ID When it is run as a service and an explicit user ID is used the Server requires the user ID to have the following privileges e Actas part of the operating system e Bypass transverse checking e Increase quotas e Log on as a batch job e Replace a process level token You must access the Local Sec
558. this option is cleared Optim 7 1 A 2 Configuration defaultinactive The Uncommitted Read option on the Access Definition Editor is available and cleared by default Uncommitted rows are not extracted unless this option is selected uncommittedread inactive Installation and Configuration Guide 385 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux A 2 3 RTSETENV Shell Script Environment Variables 386 This file is the script designed to be included in a user profile or login script to define the operating environment for the Server The RTSETENYV script sets up the Server daemon or command line environment on login A sample is in the PSTHOME directory The UNIX operating environment requires certain environment variables to create default settings as applicable PSTHOME directory PSTINFO directory ORACLE_HOME directory TNS_ADMIN directory RTORACLELIB directory DB2CODEPAGE n RTDB2PROFILE directory SYBASE directory RTSYBASELIB directory INFORMIXDIR directory INFORMIXSERVER server INFORMIXSQLHOSTS directory PSTHOME The location of Optim PSTHOME opt IBM Optim PSTINFO The location of process information files for Optim all installations If this environment variable is not set it defaults to the following PSTINFO var tmp rt4s Set this variable if you do not have access to var t
559. three layers of default settings for the creation of database objects in addition to target system defaults The default settings determine the values displayed in the Object List for the Create Utility and can be overridden at the object level by editing the list At the broadest level DB Alias settings establish defaults for creating objects in the associated database If desired you can provide Personal Options settings as described in the following text for a user or group of users that override some or all DB Alias settings A third level of optional defaults apply at the processing level to override Personal Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Options and DB Alias settings Use the options on the Create tab to set second level defaults for the Create Utility Personal Options olx General Confirm Display Errors Scheduling Load Create Logon Server Edit Browse Archive Rem 4 gt Object Name Highlighting Limits Confident Uncertain 1000 m Blue z o Yelow z JZ DBZ UDB for 2 05 Current Rules DB2 Tables indexes Synonyms Triggers Default Database Allocation Percent IF Use default database Default Tablespace lt DEFAULT gt ad IV Use default tablespace DB Alias Specify the DB Alias that identifies the database in which you want to create database objects To select from a list click the down arrow Specify default options for creating different types of database o
560. ting requests or definitions T Book Antiqua T Bookman Old Style Century Gothic Comic Sans MS a a Note The available languages in the Script drop down list are determined by the selected font Installation and Configuration Guide 325 9 Personal Options 9 2 16 Database Tab Use the options on the Database tab to set preferences for handling database connections multi byte round trip conversion errors and cascade deletes For Sybase ASE you can specify whether to run in Unchained mode gt Personal Options Edt a Never x s Unchained Mode Stop Processing Run in Unchained Mode 326 Optim 7 1 9 2 Using the Editor Parallel Processing Maximum Specify the default number of concurrent database Database connections for an Archive Delete or Extract Connections Process Increasing database connections improves performance when processing large quantities of data by allowing multiple threads to process rows in parallel To increase the maximum number of connections select an even number from 2 through the site maximum as specified in Product Options Note For performance reasons you can only select an even number of maximum database connections MBCS Roundtrip Options for handling characters that could cause round trip conversion Processing issues in a multi byte Optim Directory or DB Alias The availability of these options is governed by the MBCS Roundtrip Processing
561. ting or dropping packages plans or procedures You can choose to require a password on the initial connection to the database for each session Configure First Workstation Always Require a Password for Current E3 Optim he Optim Configuration Program can configure this DB Alias so all users will have to nter a password on the initial connection to this database for each session When this ption is selected users will not be permitted to store their password in the Windows egistry Once selected this option cannot be changed To enable this option select x he T lhuaws Penuire a Passwinrd For thic Makahacel checkhny Select Proceed tn M Options T Always Require a Password for this Database cma Ready Oracle Q0R922K Ui If you select this option a user of Optim must provide a password at the beginning of each session Once you select this option you cannot change it To continue click Proceed Installation and Configuration Guide 101 5 Configure Workstations Share Connection Information If you wish to conserve the number of database connections and the new DB Alias represents the database in which the Optim Directory resides you may want to use only one connection for accessing both the Optim Directory and the data in the database For this reason the Configuration program displays the Share Connection Information for Current Database dialog after creating the pac
562. tion After the Optim Directory is open the Archive File or Archive File Collection is validated The fully qualified Archive File name The Archive File GUID This value is expressed between curved brackets The Archive File ID number The Archive File Collection name Subsets an Archive File Collection to specific Archive Files Use one of the following parameters 539 Appendix F Open Data Manager 540 PSTTRACE COMP nn AF_IN 1 n AF DATE RANGE yyyy mm dd hh mm ss yyyy mm dd hh mm ssy AF _ID_ RANGE yy Archive Files to include where n is an Archive File name GUID or Archive File ID Ifa specified Archive File cannot be found the process will fail A range of Archive File creation dates You must include the time of day hh mm ss You can use zeros for the time e g 00 00 00 A range of Archive File IDs where x is the start and y is the end An optional attribute for turning on the Optim Trace file This attribute should be used at the direction of Optim support Do not use commas in the PSTTRACE attribute Optim 7 1 F 2 Define the ODM Data Source on the Primary Server To define an ODM data source 1 In the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer Machines list expand the primary ODM Server list and the Bindings list to display the NAV member 2 Right click the NAV member and select Edit Binding from the shortcut menu to open
563. tions and the Edit Preferences on the Table Editor are unavailable For example the option for Undo Levels is unavailable because Undo entries are not created in Browse Only mode Installation and Configuration Guide 261 8 Product Options Audit Tables Dialog Optim Directory Auditing Defaults 262 If you select Active or Active User on the Edit tab of the Product Options dialog click Audit Tables to display the Audit Tables dialog Specify default parameters that apply to all processed tables and a list of tables for which one or more defaults are overridden Audit Tables olx Optim Directory DOCORA92 Auditing Defaults IV Enabled Days to Retain Maximum Rows 366 m 1000 4 M write all Columns Table Name Pattern DEMS OPTUSR4DETAILS Enabled DBMS OPTUSR4 CUSTOMER Enabled Specify the Optim Directory for which audit parameters are defined If your site has more than one Optim Directory click the down arrow to select from a list Audit results are stored in the PSTAUDIT table in the Optim Directory If authorized you may browse or edit the PSTAUDIT table in the same way you browse or edit any other database table However Auditing Status in Product Options must be set to Active or Active User and you must have database SELECT authority for the PSTAUDIT table Specify the defaults for the auditing option at your site Enabled Select to audit processing for all tables unless overrid
564. tions are used in shell scripts and cfg files e One parameter per line e Blank lines and leading and trailing blanks within a line are ignored e Use double quotes or the escape character to pass a special character to processing Enclose a string that includes in double quotes e g text here To include a double quote within a quoted string use the escape character e g Precede a special character that is not in a quoted string with the escape character e g e References to environment variables are in the form environmentvariablename An environment variable that does not exist equates to a NULL string co 99 For example AAAS NOT_EXIST BBB is treated as AAABBB e Parameters and keywords are not case sensitive Directories file names User IDs and passwords are case sensitive e Keywords shown as 0 zero in the following text can also be entered as f or false while keywords shown as 1 can be entered as t or true e Comments are allowed after an entry and must begin with Syntax The syntax conventions used to describe the configuration files shell scripts and commands are parameter text O G lt gt Installation and Configuration Guide Parameters and keywords can be entered in UPPER lower or Mixed case Variable text is shown in lowercase italics Delimiter to group a series of qualifiers Delimiter fo
565. tions on the Archive tab to set preferences for an Archive Process Personal Options olx Errors Scheduling Load Create Logon Server Edit Browse Archive Remo4 gt El El El Archive Directory Archive Index Directory Archive Browse Index Directory Directory for Generated Subset Extract Files Data Directory Temporary Work Directory IV Only Use Index to Perform Search File Backup Device I Automatically Trim Search List Specify the complete path to the default directory where you want to store Archive Files To select from your system directories click the browse button If you do not specify a directory the Data Directory specified on the General tab is used by default Specify the complete path to the default directory where you want to store Archive Index Files To select from your system directories click the browse button If you do not specify a directory the Archive Directory is used by default Specify the complete path to the default directory where you want to store Archive Index Browse Files To select from your system directories click the browse button If you do not specify a directory the Archive Directory is used by default An Archive Index Browse File is created automatically whenever you join tables while browsing an Archive File The Archive Index Browse Installation and Configuration Guide 315 9 Personal Options Directory for Generated Subset Ex
566. tions used by Optim To a hange these options at any time select Product Options from the Options menu on BI he main window The name of the Product Configuration File specified in the preceding dialog is displayed If you click Product Options you are prompted for a password to open the Product Options dialog Note You must have a password to review and change Product Options Optim is distributed with the case sensitive password optim You can change this password when configuring the first workstation For a detailed description of the Product Options dialog refer to 8 2 Using the Editor on page 248 After you modify Product Options and return to the Modify Product Options dialog click Proceed to open the next dialog in the process Installation and Configuration Guide 135 5 Configure Workstations Modify Personal The Modify Personal Options dialog is similar to the Modify Product Options Options dialog Configure First Workstation Modify Personal Options he Configuration program allows you to configure personal options used by Optim To hange these options at any time select Personal Options From the Options menu on he main window Click Personal Options to open the Personal Options dialog A detailed description of this dialog is provided in 9 2 Using the Editor on page 282 After you modify Personal Options and return to the Modify Personal Options dialog click Proceed to open the next dialog
567. to access archived data a secondary ODM Server must be installed on each Windows workstation that will use ODBC to access archived data A secondary server references the data source on a primary server You can use Attunity Studio which is included with your ODM installation to administer the primary and secondary servers from a single Windows machine Attunity documentation is located in the ODM doc subdirectory of the Optim installation directory Installation and Configuration Guide 527 Appendix F Open Data Manager F 1 Installation The Optim installation CD for Windows includes installation files for the ODM Server and Attunity Studio The Optim installation CD for UNIX or Linux includes installation files for the ODM Server only Note If installing Attunity Server or Attunity Studio in a Windows environment you must remove any older versions before installation F 1 1 Windows Installation 528 To install ODM select ODM Interface on the Select Components dialog of the Optim Setup program You can choose to install ODM as part of the Optim installation or copy the ODM installation files to your machine for use at a later time IBM Optim Setup x Install Attunity and Configure ODM Now Setup needs the Attunity license file to install the Attunity software and configure ODM If you do not have access to the license file select Only Copy the ODM Files Install and Configure ODM Now Only Copy the ODM Fil
568. to access that Directory For example when you remove an Optim Directory from a multi user environment you can purge the Optim Directory registry entry from each workstation In addition you can disable Optim for any workstation simply by purging the registry entry When you select Purge Optim Directory Registry Entry from the Tasks menu the Configuration program opens a dialog explaining the process and prompting you to confirm that you want to purge the registry entry for access to the Optim Directory rather than drop the Optim Directory Select the check box to purge the registry entry Note To reinstate a purged Optim Directory refer to 7 3 Access Existing Optim Directory After you confirm that you want to purge an Optim Directory entry the Configuration program prompts you to indicate the version of the registry entry you want to purge Select Purge a pre 6 0 Optim Registry Entry to purge an Optim Directory registry entry created before version 6 0 To purge an Optim Directory registry entry created with version 6 0 or later leave this option blank Click Proceed to open the next dialog After you confirm the version of the Optim Directory entry you want to purge the Configuration program opens the Specify Optim Directory dialog see page 185 Use this dialog to provide the name of the Optim Directory for the Windows registry entry you want to purge Click Proceed to open the next dialog After you select the Optim Directory
569. to continue Installation and Configuration Guide 567 Appendix G Converting PST and Optim Directory Objects G 1 1 Step 1 Create a New Optim Directory The next dialog prompts you to create a new Optim Directory This Directory will store objects exported from the old Directory Convert Optim Directory Objects Step 1 Create a New Optim Direct BIE ES n Step 1 you must either create a new Optim Directory or use an existing Optim Directory that was created with this version of the Optim Configuration Program The ew Optim Directory will ultimately house the converted data The old Optim Directory ill not be modified nor will it be used by this version of Optim To create anew Optim 7 III III III If you created the new Optim Directory earlier leave the check box blank and click Proceed to display the Export Data from an Old Optim Directory dialog discussed in G 1 2 Step 2 Export Data from Old Optim Directory 568 Optim 7 1 G 1 Conversion Process for 5 x Optim Directories Specify Optim Directory Specify Optim Directory DBMS Connect to Database To create a new Optim Directory however select the Create a New Optim Directory check box and click Proceed to display the Information on Creating a New Optim Directory dialog Convert Optim Directory Objects Information on Creating a New Opti Eifel E3 Optim ou have requested to Create a new Optim Directory After you Create the Optim
570. to the target workstation and additional workstations or servers You begin the installation phase by using the Setup program to load the application software at the first workstation In Setup you must enter your company name and the identification number indicated in the email sent when Optim is shipped to you You must also designate a destination directory for the application software In a Windows installation Setup launches a command line application to shut down any Optim applications that are running See Command Line Application Display in Section 2 Installation Setup for information needed to change the display setting for a command line application Depending on your license agreement after you install and configure Optim you may have access to one or more of the following components e Archive allows you to identify and archive sets of relationally intact data before removing selected data from your database You can browse search or restore selected subsets of archived data Move allows you to identify and extract migrate and process sets of relationally intact data You can create test databases that are referentially complete subsets of a production database copy sets of related data from a production database to a work area before revising and moving data to the production database or migrate subsets of data that require data transformations as part of the migration e Edit allows you to edit and browse rela
571. tract Files Only Use Index to Perform Search Automatically Trim Search List File Backup Device 316 File stores primary key and foreign key information to expedite the retrieval of data and has an abf extension by default Archive Index Browse Files are dynamically updated For this reason it is advisable to select a directory accessible to any user that may browse an Archive File Select either Data Directory or Temporary Work Directory to specify the location in which to store automatically generated subset Extract Files Note Both directories are specified on the General tab When search criteria is used to locate Archive Files containing specific data Optim initially searches for matching rows in the corresponding Archive Index Files If a match for the search criteria cannot be determined from the Archive Index information or index information is not defined Optim must check the Archive File to resolve the search This check box is cleared by default to direct the Archive Process to automatically search Archive Files when a match cannot be determined from Archive Index Files When you select this check box you direct the Archive Process to search Archive Index Files only Use shortcut menu commands Resolve and Resolve All to complete the search when a match cannot be determined from Archive Index information Select to automatically exclude all files other than possible matches when you use the Search command to l
572. tries to import Drag entries etween the two tables until the desired entries are present in the right table ptionally modify the User ID Password and Connection String for each Optim irectory Renictrsy Entry in the rinht table File Name 7 Hi IV Import License Information Excluded From Import Selected for Import Descriptic ORAS2UNI Previous Proceed _ Cancel 4 Installation and Configuration Guide 141 5 Configure Workstations File Name Import License Information Excluded from Import Selected for Import 142 The Import Optim Directory Registry Data dialog includes the following Enter the name of the file that contains the Optim Directory registry data you want to import Select this check box to import license information if available in the specified file List of available Optim Directories not selected for importing registry data Move an item from one list to the other by dragging the name Also to rearrange listed items drag the line number to the new position Name Name of each available Optim Directory Description Text that describes or explains the purpose of the Optim Directory List of Optim Directories selected for import Move an item from one list to the other by dragging the name Also to rearrange listed items drag the line number to the new position Name Name of each selected Optim Directory Description Text that
573. ts Installation and Configuration Guide 245 8 Product Options 8 1 Open the Product Options Editor You can configure Product Options using the Configuration program or you can set options within Optim Using the Configuration program To Configure Product Options using the Configuration program 1 Open the Optim Configuration component 2 In the main window select Configure Options from the Tasks menu 3 Specify an Optim Directory and click Proceed 4 Click Skip on the Initialize Security Change Security Administrator Enable Disable the Optim Server Feature and Enable Disable the Archive ODBC Feature dialogs to open the Specify Product Configuration File dialog 5 Select Create New File or Use Existing File verify the name of the Configuration File and click Proceed to open the Modify Product Options dialog 6 Click Product Options to open the Enter Product Options Password dialog 7 Specify the case sensitive password to open the Product Options dialog The initial password is optim 8 Enter the necessary details on each tab in Product Options 9 Choose one of the following To close the Product Options dialog without saving your changes click Cancel To save your changes and continue using the Product Options dialog click Apply To save your changes and close the Product Options dialog click OK to return to the Modify Product Options dialog 10 Click Proceed to open the Modi
574. ts Optim uses the Unicode character set in dialogs and to process data Optim supports the following DBMS character sets Oracle ALI6UTF16 AL32UTF8 AR8ISO8859P6 AR8MSWIN1256 BLT8MSWIN1257 CDN8PC863 CL8ISO8859P5 CL8MSWIN1251 EE8ISO8859P2 EE8MSWIN1250 EL8ISO8859P7 EL8MSWIN1253 IW8ISO8859P8 IW8MSWIN1255 JAL6SJIS NEE8ISO8859P4 N8PC865 TR amp MSWIN1254 US7ASCI US8PC437 UTF8 UTF16 VN8MSWIN1258 WE8DEC WES8ISO8859P1 WES8ISO8859P9 WES8ISO8859P 15 WE8MSWINI1252 WE8PC850 WE8PC860 WES8PC863 Installation and Configuration Guide 21 1 Getting Started Sybase ASE cp437 cp850 cp1250 cp1251 cp1252 cp1253 cp1254 cp1255 cp1256 cp1257 iso_ 1 iso 2 iso 4 iso_5 iso 6 iso_7 iso 8 iso_9 romans UTF8 UTF16 DB2 z OS 437 850 860 863 865 1252 UTF8 UTF16 22 Optim 7 1 1 2 Planning for Installation and Configuration DB2 LUW 437 850 860 863 865 936 949 950 964 970 1252 1363 1370 1383 1386 UTF8 UTF16 SQL Server 1252 UTF8 UTF16 Informix 1252 Directories The names of all directories and files referenced by generated or used and Files with Optim must consist of ASCII characters This requirement applies to the installation directories for Optim as well as the Optim directories e g Temporary Work Directory Data Directory and other directories that are identified in Personal and Product Options or when configuring the Server All text files generated by Optim are in Unicod
575. ts to Accounting Applications NA Refresh NA NA Add Cancel Help ZA Server Name Select Local or the name of the Server with the domain connection appropriate for the account you want to add to the role If your site does not use a Server Local is displayed and cannot be changed Domain Select the name of the domain for the user and group accounts you want to add to the role The domains are within a network that includes the designated Server Name Note Ifthe Server is on a UNIX platform you do not need to specify a Domain The node name is displayed in Domain at the top of the dialog and in the Users and Groups grids Users The user accounts in the domain including the Name Domain and Description Groups The group accounts in the domain including the Name Domain and Description 456 Optim 7 1 D 1 Access Control Domain Shortcut Menu Command Command Buttons D 1 4 Privileges Tabs Assigning Privileges Right click the Users grid to display the following shortcut menu command Display Groups for User Display only groups that include the selected user The following command buttons are available on the Security Users and Groups dialog Select All Select all members in the grid Deselect All Clear all selections in the grid Refresh Redisplay all groups in the domain Add Add the selected users and groups to the role and open the Role Specifications dialog Cancel Return to the Role Specif
576. ty dialog is displayed e Optim Security is initialized the Change Security Administrator dialog is displayed 7 4 2 Initialize Security or Change Security Administrator Use the Initialize Security dialog to assign a Security Administrator and initialize Optim Security for the Directory After security is initialized the Set Archive File Security Option dialog is displayed For more information about the Initialize Security dialog and initializing Optim Security see 5 1 4 Optim Security on page 128 Use the Change Security Administrator dialog to change the Security Administrator for the Optim Directory If you do not want to change the Installation and Configuration Guide 193 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Changing the Administrator 194 Administrator click Skip to proceed to the Set Archive File Security Option dialog amp Configure Security Change Security Administrator _ OF x Optim he Configuration program can change the Security Administrator For the current Optim irectory The Security Admistrator can only be changed by the Security Administrator lick lt Change gt to specify a different Security Administrator Click lt Proceed gt to erform the action or lt Skip gt to bypass this step zl a Optim Directory Security State DIRECTORY Initialized Security Administrator For this Optim Directory Domain User Name Nat optusr3 Change Skip Cancel
577. u Specify Optim The first step in applying maintenance for Optim Directory access is to Directory provide the name of the Optim Directory The Configuration program prompts for this information by presenting the Specify Optim Directory dialog see page 79 You must select Use Existing Optim Directory and Registry Entry select an Optim Directory name and click Proceed to open the next dialog Connect to When applying maintenance for Optim Directory access the Database Configuration program must connect to the database to create or refresh the packages plans or procedures On the Connect to Database dialog you must provide the User ID Password and Connection String that the workstation needs to connect to the Optim Directory Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access Connect to Database ijel Ea Optim he Optim Configuration program must connect to the database to apply maintenance o the Optim Directory Tables The User ID must match the Schema Name of the Optim irectory Tables i Optim Directory DIRECTORY Database Connection Parameters User ID Connection String optusr3 QOR922K Password le eeeceee Optim Directory Schema Name optusr3 Previous Proceed _ Undo Cancel A Installation and Configuration Guide 203 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Create Drop Packages Add Default Tables Apply Maintenance to Another 204 On this dialog when you
578. u must indicate the for accessing files source of those credentials Only files local Select Only files local to this Server may be to this Server accessed to restrict Server access to local files may be accessed Clear the check box to provide Logon information needed for Server access to files Installation and Configuration Guide 167 6 Configure the Optim Server User ID Enter the appropriate User ID If these credentials are used to access files external to the Server the User ID must have the following privileges e Act as part of the operating system SeTcbPrivilege e Increase quotas SeIncreaseQuotaPrivilege e Replace a process level token SeAssignPrimaryTokenPrivilege e Bypass traverse checking SeChangeNotifyPrivilege e Log on as a batch job SE_BATCH_ LOGON NAME Password Enter the password corresponding to the User ID Domain Specify the domain Check Logon Click Check Logon to verify that the Server can log on with the credentials provided 168 Optim 7 1 6 8 Endpoints Tab 6 8 Endpoints Tab Use the Endpoints tab to specify protocols to be used by workstations connecting to the Server for remote procedure calls The protocol Named Pipe ncacn_np and endpoint PIPE RTSERVER are entered by default This is usually the most efficient method for workstations in the domain to connect to the Server To add access for a workstation outside the domain you must add the additional protocol
579. u must type your company s name in all lowercase letters otherwise the Invalid Credentials Specified dialog will appear Optim Server Setup If the Invalid Credentials Specified dialog appears click Next to redisplay the Sign Optim Exit dialog Then repeat the signing process by typing your company credential in the proper format If needed refer to the company credential you received along with Optim to determine the proper format for this information Installation and Configuration Guide 407 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux A 5 5 The Sign Optim Exit Failed Dialog 408 As noted above the Invalid Credentials Specified dialog displays errors pertaining to the company credentials specified during the signing of an exit The Sign Optim Exit Failed dialog will notify you about any other exit related errors For example if the Optim module used to challenge an exit s signing is corrupted or missing the Sign Optim Exit Failed dialog will appear Optim Server Setup Installonvelid It is important to understand that this dialog only notifies you that there was an unspecified error in the signing process Detailed information about the actual error will appear in a separate text editor window after you click Next Optim will extract the appropriate error information from a prOsign txt file as shown in the following example In the above example the signing process failed because
580. uccess or failure of the process Optim 7 1 E 2 Using the Editor Tools Menu In addition to the standard commands on the File Edit and Tools Commands menus you can select the following commands from the Tools menu Convert to Local Convert a named Report Request to a local Report Request A local Report Request is saved with the Archive Request Available only when the Report Type on the General tab is set to File Edit Joins Open the Edit Joins dialog to select joined tables in the report Available when Show Joins is selected on the Archive Details tab and the Report Type on the General tab is set to File E 2 1 General Tab Use the General tab to select the report type Report Type Select the type of report File Report on data in a Source Archive or Compare File For more information see the Archive User Manual 7 2 1 General Tab or Compare User Manual 6 2 1 General Tab Archive Directory Report on selected Archive Directory entries and the properties of associated Archive Files For more information see the Archive User Manual 7 2 2 Archive Criteria Tab Security Report on Functional or Object Security permissions Report Title The Report Title is not available for Security Reports Output Options The Output Options are not available for Security Reports You can save and print a report from the Report Process Report dialog Installation and Configuration Guide 517 518 Appendix E Security Reports
581. uest 1 to 12 characters A logical set of naming conventions can identify the use for each Report Request and be used to organize them for easy access Chapter Contents This chapter explains how to create maintain and process a Report Request including how to e Select the type of Security Report e Provide criteria and values for the report e Run save and schedule a Report Request 512 Optim 7 1 E 1 Open the Report Request Editor E 1 Open the Report Request Editor Use the Report Request Editor to create or edit requests for Security Reports You can store these requests in the Optim Directory There are different ways to open the editor depending on whether you want to create a new Report Request or edit an existing a Report Request E 1 1 Create a New Report Request You can create a Report Request from the main window or from the Report Request Editor From the Main To create a Report Request Window 1 In the main window select New from the File menu 2 Select Report from the Actions submenu to open the Report Request Editor 3 On the General tab select Security in the Report Type list and provide an optional title for the report 4 On the Security Criteria tab enter criteria for a Security Report 5 In the Report Request Editor select Save from the File menu to open the Save a Report Request dialog 6 In the Pattern box type a unique name for the new Report Request and click Save
582. uest Editor The Default ACD governs Functional Privileges Subordinate ACDs can determine Object Association Privileges only Important Before Functional Security is first enabled the Security Administrator must define Functional Privileges for all users If Functional Privileges are not defined before Functional Security is enabled users will be unable to access any functions in Optim Role Specifications olx Role Name Description E uests ad Access Control Domain Defaut I Allow All Functional and Object Association Privileges for this Role Users Functional Privileges Object Association Privileges m Privilege Classes Functional Privilege Classes Allow Deny Allow All Deny All Create New Actions oO Create New Definitions r riz Clear All m Privileges Create New Actions Privileges Allow All m Deny All 0 xj Clear All Archive Request Compare Request Convert Request Installation and Configuration Guide 459 Appendix D Optim Security 460 The Functional Privileges by privilege class are described below Create New Actions Create New Definitions Create New Actions privileges are required to create or make copies of action requests e g an Archive Request The New command and the ability to save a copy of a request in a respective request editor will be unavailable to roles that are denied a pri
583. uide 523 Appendix E Security Reports E 3 3 Report Process Report 524 The Report Process generates a Report Process Report that provides general information and statistics about the Report Process The formatting of the Report Process Report is determined by the Report Type The following is a sample Function Security Report amp File Options Help Request Name Client User ID Time Started Time Finished Elapsed Time Process Status Process Summary Criteria Type Security Criteria Privilege lt gt OPTUSR RPT1 Report Process Report olx OPTUSR RPT1 optusr 2 19 2008 11 19 47 2 19 2008 11 19 47 00 00 00 no errors no warnings Function Create New Actions Archive Request Create New Actions Compare Request Create New Actions Convert Request Process Details Privilege Create New Actions Archive Request User Group NA adm NA Guest NA priasass01 na privbrau01 OPTIM DOMitw NA Tech Writers G OPTIM DOM adm1 OPTIM DOMITech Writers G Role OPTIM Administrator Guests Tech Writers OPTIM Administrator Tech Writers Tech Writers OPTIM Administrator Tech Writers Privilege Create New Actions Compare Request The Report Process Report displays the following information e Name of the Report Request or Untitled if you did not save the request e User ID of the user requesting the Report Process e Date and time the Report Process started e Date and time th
584. ult Note The Server name must be added to the Product Configuration File for your site The complete path to the default directory in which you want the Server to store internal work files and trace files To select from system directories click the browse button This directory must be unique to the Server and different from the Temporary Work Directory specified in Personal Options The complete path to the default directory in which you want the Server to store process files for which an explicit directory path is not provided To select from your system directories click the browse button This directory must be unique to the Server and different from the Data Directory specified in Personal Options Select Create a subdirectory within the Data Directory for clients to automatically create a subdirectory in the Server data directory when each workstation first connects to the Server The new subdirectory becomes the default data directory for the workstation The name of the new subdirectory is determined by the Windows Logon name from the workstation For example if this option is selected and the data directory is D DATA when user JOHN connects to the Server the subdirectory D DATA JOHN becomes the default data directory for JOHN Use Maximum Processes to limit the number of simultaneous processes that can run on the Server Specify the limit according to the capacity of the Server machine CPU disk space network acce
585. under Local System Account cannot be logged on to the network See B 1 4 UNC Network Share Access Windows for more information e Oracle OS Authentication will run under the user that started the service Windows or daemon UNIX or Linux Oracle requires a known User ID established by an administrator therefore you cannot use the Local System Account for Windows Informix Loader which uses credentials for the currently logged on user also requires a known User ID For more information see B 1 6 Oracle OS Authentication e For UNIX or Linux mount points for networked shares or file access are allowed according to the effective User or Group accounts for the process Therefore all processes can use files available to the User account under which the Server daemon is started For more information see B 1 7 UNIX or Linux File Access Run Under Explicit Credentials 420 You can run processes under an explicit user account to control network access and DBMS logons that use the account for the process for Oracle OS Authentication and Informix Loader You can use the Server to access Optim Directories DB Aliases and network shares that individual clients cannot access and simply restrict the users that can log on to the Server machine You must require that the credentials in the Optim Server Settings applet Windows or Optim 7 1 B 1 Server Credentials pstserv cfg UNIX or Linux be used instead of credentials fr
586. upports Unicode and multi byte for the DB Alias DBMS you Set of DB Alias are prompted to indicate the format in which the DB Alias should store Data data single byte Unicode or multi byte Note The character sets of the DBMS client and the database server must match your selection lt gt Configure First Workstation Specify Character Set of DB Alias Data he Optim Configuration Program can configure this DB Alias to keep character data in one of three Formats Single byte ASCII EBCDIC Unicode UTF 8 or Multi byte MBCS Select the option that corresponds to the character set of the database For he DB Alias Note The character sets of both the DBMS client and Database server Aan h n nn Pro q NN nthe ney n 104 Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Information on If you select Unicode format in the Specify Character Set of DB Alias Unicode Format Data dialog you are prompted to acknowledge that the DBMS client UTF 8 and database character sets must be Unicode lt gt Configure First Workstation Information on Unicode Format UTF 8 ou have selected the option to configure this DB Alias so character data is kept in Inicode format To enable this option both the DBMS client and Database character kets must be UTF 8 To confirm this option select the I Acknowledge the DBMS aracter Set Requirements checkbox Select lt Proceed gt to continue to the next Installation and Configuration Guide 105
587. uration Guide Create Security Definitions privileges are required to create or make copies of security definitions e g an Access Control Domain The New command and the ability to save a copy of a security definition in a respective security definition editor will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Access Control Domain File Access Definition Create Utility Definitions privileges are required to create or make copies of utility definitions e g a Storage Profile The New command and the ability to save a copy of a utility definition in a respective utility editor will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege This class includes the following privileges Calendar Currency Archive File Collection Storage Profile Editor Options privileges are required to create database objects e g create tables drop tables or modify SQL statements This class includes the following privileges Create Indexes Create Indexes During Primary During Primary Key Index Analysis privilege is Key Index required to create new indexes Analysis from the Primary Key Index Analysis dialog Create Indexes Create Indexes During During Relationship Index Analysis Relationship privilege is required to create new Index Analysis indexes from the Relationship Index Analysis dialog Create Tables Create Tables During Create During Create privilege is required to create
588. urce on the secondary server by creating a shortcut from the primary server Before configuring the secondary server you must define it to Attunity Studio following the procedures in F 1 4 Attunity Studio Configuration To define data sources on the secondary server 1 In the Attunity Studio Configuration explorer Machines list expand the secondary ODM Server list the Bindings list and the NAV list to display the Data sources member 2 Right click the Data sources member name and select New data source shortcut from the shortcut menu to open the New data source shortcut dialog New Joxi New data source shortcut Select machine for target data source a C New Machine Add the new machine to the Configuration explorer Machine from Configuration explorer x Machine defined in current binding remote machines list z 3 Select Machine from Configuration explorer and then select the primary server from the corresponding list 542 Optim 7 1 F 3 Secondary Server Configuration 4 Click Next until the New data source shortcut dialog is displayed Bi New lel E New data source shortcut Select shortcut target datasource H Select a data source from the server PJarosni PST_GDB e T Alias in binding AFOSNI lt Back Ners C Fris Cancel 5 Select the data source from the list and click Finish Installation and Configuration Guide 543 Appendix F Open Data
589. urity A role must have Read access in addition to Update access to the object in order to update the object Update Controls the ability to save an object If access is denied the Save command will not be available from the object editor Note Roles denied update access can use the Save As command to rename an object Optim 7 1 D 2 Access Control List Delete Controls the ability to delete an object If access is denied the Delete command is not available from the object editor and the Open dialog Execute Controls the ability to run a process This option is available only for objects created with editors listed in the Actions menu If access is denied the Run command is not available from the Request Editor and the Execute command is not available from the Table Editor ACL Access Possible access to the ACL Use each set of Allow and Deny check boxes to define access permissions for the role If both the Allow and Deny check boxes are cleared accounts in the role are provisionally denied the privilege but may be granted the privilege as members of another role Read Controls the ability to view the ACL A role must have Read access in addition to Update access to the ACL in order to update the ACL Update Controls the ability to modify the ACL Delete Controls the ability to delete the ACL Not available for ACDs or File Access Definitions or for Optim objects that are secured automatically when save
590. urity Policy to grant these privileges to the user You can access the Local Security Policy as follows Note You must be logged on to the Windows machine with a user ID that has administrator rights 1 From the Control Panel access the Local Security Policy applet Administrator Tools gt Local Security Policy 2 From the Local Security Policy window select the menu entry Installation and Configuration Guide 19 1 Getting Started Policies gt User Rights 3 On the User Rights Policy window select the following entry in the left pane Security Settings gt Local Policies gt User Rights Assignments 4 Repeat the following steps for each of the five privileges listed above e Select a privilege from the right pane of the Local Security Settings window e Ifthe user or group is not already listed in the Assign To list box select the Add button to add the user or group to the list e Ensure that the Local Policy Setting check box is checked for the user or group 5 Select the OK button to apply the changes and close the Local Security Policy Setting window UNIX Server For UNIX Super User Server credentials are required to change the effective user ID and group ID During startup if the filelogon parameter is set to client or server the effective user ID that started the daemon must be a Super User zero 20 Optim 7 1 1 2 Planning for Installation and Configuration 1 2 4 Character Forma
591. urity features or to update your security settings Use this task to change the Optim Server status of a machine Use this task to enable or disable the ODBC interface access to Archive Files for a previously configured workstation Optim 7 1 4 1 Main Window and Menus Apply Maintenance for Optim Directory Access Apply Maintenance for DB Alias Access Rename an Optim Directory Update DBMS Version for an Optim Directory Update DBMS Version for a DB Alias Configure Options Create Primary Keys Installation and Configuration Guide Generally you must apply maintenance for Optim Directory access to refresh or update the packages plans or procedures needed to access the Optim Directory tables when you upgrade Optim or if you drop the Optim Directory for some reason You must apply maintenance for DB Alias access when upgrading Optim or to refresh packages plans or procedures for database access To rename an Optim Directory you must replace the name in the Directory itself and in the Windows registry on each workstation that accesses the Directory Use this task to change the name in the Optim Directory and workstation registry or once the Optim Directory is changed to re name a registry entry or register the re named Directory on a workstation Use this task when the database for the Optim Directory has been upgraded to a new version Use this task when a database has been upgraded Typic
592. used to sign the default exit 3 The prOsign program The two ways to sign a user supplied exit in UNIX are 1 The opmusign script file located in the rt sbin directory You can run this script at any time following installation to switch to a user supplied exit The letter u in the script s name indicates that it is used to sign a user specified exit 2 The prOsign program 406 Optim 7 1 A 5 The Optim Exit in UNIX As indicated above you can use the pr0sign program to sign either the default exit or a user supplied exit Before you run the pr0sign program however you must ensure that the environment is set up The opmdsign and opmusign scripts will both set up the environment and call prOsign You must sign an exit for each installation of Optim on a UNIX server If you copy a signed exit from one installation to another you must sign the exit again at the target installation A 5 4 The Invalid Credentials Specified Dialog After you sign an exit if any of the company credentials you specified are incorrect an Invalid Credentials Specified dialog will appear This usually happens if you typed your company credentials in the wrong case i e uppercase verses lowercase or vice versa or you typed your company Name in a format other than the one specified for your company For example if the company name assigned to your organization consists of all lowercase letters such as abc company yo
593. user account must have the following permission CREATE PROCEDURE When you catalog the procedures for the Optim Directory and the system tables you can specify a grant authorization ID When this ID is PUBLIC the default value all users are able to run Optim Optionally you can specify a user ID or group name to limit access to specific users The Informix utility program SELNET 32 includes an environment variable named IFX_ AUTO FREE This variable must not be set If the IFX_AUTO_FREE variable has a value the Optim Configuration program fails during the creation of the Optim Directory with the error 481 SQL State 37000 Invalid Statement Name To avoid or correct the error ensure that the IFX_AUTO_ FREE variable is not set Optim uses the ODBC module ISQLT09A DLL to connect to an Informix server This module is installed as part of the Informix Client SDK 2 2 This SDK must be installed on the workstation for Optim to communicate with an Informix database You can download the Informix Client SDK for free from the Informix web site To create and access an Optim Directory and a DB Alias the user account be defined on the server that is the operating system The Optim 7 1 1 2 Planning for Installation and Configuration user account must be configured in upper case for an ANSI database and in lower case for a non ANSI database The server is not case sensitive To create the Optim Directory or a DB Alias a user
594. uter Optim Directory The name of the Optim Directory in which the request resides Action The type of action that is running Request Displays the fully qualified name of the request that is running or Mirror to indicate the validation processing associated with the action that is running Started The date and time the action started Duration The duration of the connection Installation and Configuration Guide 177 6 Configure the Optim Server Automatically Select this check box to automatically update refresh the display Update Display whenever a connection is established or broken and update the Duration column in the grid every minute Refresh Select Refresh to update the display on demand Refresh is unavailable when the Automatically Update Display check box is selected Note You can right click on a row and choose Cancel Request to cancel the specific connection with the workstation or Cancel all for Client to cancel all connections with the workstation 178 Optim 7 1 6 12 Email Tab 6 12 Email Tab The Email tab allows you to automatically send logged messages generated by the Server to the listed email addresses The Server sends messages that are reported to the Windows Event Log for Windows or the syslog for UNIX or Linux Note Before using administrator email notification the desired email program must be installed For Windows the email client must be defined as the defaul
595. vailable databases are listed on the left To list tables in a database double click the DB Alias or overtype the DB Alias in the Pattern box e Objects referenced by the selected DB Alias are listed in the Database Table grid in alphabetical order by Creator ID and Table Name The type of object table view alias synonym DBMS and fully qualified name are provided Use a pattern to limit the list of objects in the Select Table to be audited dialog After you specify a pattern click Refresh to redisplay the list based on your criteria Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor Audit Summary During an Edit Process Optim audits tables according to the following parameters If Active If Active User If Inactive Installation and Configuration Guide Check for the table name on the Product Options list in the Audit Tables dialog Ifthe table is on the list and Enabled the table is audited e Ifthe table is on the list and Disabled the table is not audited If the table is not on the list and the Enabled check box under Auditing Defaults in Product Options is selected the table is audited Check for the table name on the Product Options list in the Audit Tables dialog e Ifthe table is on the list and Enabled the table is audited e Ifthe table is on the list and Disabled the table is not audited Check the Edit tab in the Personal Options dialog to determine if the Auditing Active check box is selecte
596. ver when it was configured with the corresponding connection information as follows Optim generates endpoints for all possible protocols client machines connect via RPC Locator Service where possible Endpoint Integer from 1 through 254 Example 100 Network Address Windows computer name Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor NetBIOS over IPX ncacn_nb_ipx NetBEUI over NetBIOS ncacn_nb_nb TCP IP ncacn_ip_tcp Named Pipe ncacn_np SPX ncacn_spx DECnet ncacn_dnet_nsp Apple Talk DSP ncacn_at_dsp Banyan Vines SSP ncacn_vns_spp Internet Information Server IIS ncacn_http Endpoint Integer from 1 through 254 Example 100 Network Address Windows computer name Endpoint Integer from 1 through 254 Example 100 Network Address Windows computer name Endpoint Internet Port Number Example 1024 Network Address Four octet internet address or host name Endpoint Windows named pipe starting with pipe Example pipe pipename Network Address Windows server name Endpoint Integer from 1 through 65535 Example 5000 Network Address IPX internet address or Windows server name Endpoint DECnet phase IV object number preceded by character or object name Example mailserver 17 Network Address Area and node syntax Endpoint A character string up to 22 bytes long Example myservicesendpoint Network Address Windows server name optionally followed by and the Appl
597. vilege Local privileges refer to requests that are created from another object editor For example if a role is denied the Insert Request Local privilege the role will be unable to create a local Insert Request from the Restore Request Editor This class includes the following privileges Archive Request Insert Request Local Compare Request Load Request Convert Request Load Request Local Convert Request Local Report Request Delete Request Report Request Local Extract Request Restore Request Insert Request Table Editor Create New Definitions privileges are required to create or make copies of definitions e g an Access Definition The New command and the ability to save a copy of a definition in a respective definition editor will be unavailable to roles that are denied a privilege Local privileges refer to definitions that are created from another object editor For example if a role is denied the Access Definition Local privilege the role will be unable to create a local Access Definition from the Extract Request Editor This class includes the following privileges Access Definition Optim Primary Key Access Definition Local Optim Relationship Column Map Table Map Column Map Local Table Map Local Column Map Proc edure Column Map Proc Local Optim 7 1 D 1 Access Control Domain Create Security Definitions Create Utility Definitions Editor Options Installation and Config
598. voli client and API support on the machine where the Optim Server runs Node Name Identifier needed to access the Tivoli tape backup device Password Password needed to access the Tivoli tape backup device Note For security reasons the password is displayed as a series of asterisks Time of day The time to begin scanning the Optim Directories Use 24 hour time to scan format for example 1 30 p m is 13 30 Optim Directories Optim Directories registered with the Server Select the Optim to scan Directories to scan for Archive Files with a retention policy All Optim Select to automatically scan all Optim Directories registered with the Directories Server Note Selecting this option also ensures that any future Optim Directories registered with the Server are scanned 176 Optim 7 1 6 11 Status Tab 6 11 Status Tab Grid Details The Status tab displays the current connections to the Server Optim Server Settings of x General Errors Load Connection Access Startup Security Endpoints Archive Retention Status le 4e Client Client Computer Optim Directory Action Request Name Starte The Optim Server is not running on this machine 1 gt I IV Automatically Update Display Refresh Configuration Cancel Apply Help Ready The following details display in the grid Client The sign on user name for the user Client Computer The network computer name for the comp
599. w or select Open from the shortcut menu Note Until network accounts are added to the Optim Administrator role or new roles are created in the Default ACD and granted Update access in the ACL only the Security Administrator for the Optim Directory can edit Default Installation and Configuration Guide 449 Appendix D Optim Security Create ACD To create an Access Control Domain a user must be a member of a role in the Default ACD and e If Functional Security is not enabled the user must be the Security Administrator or included in a role that has update access to the Default ACD e If Functional Security is enabled the role must be allowed the Functional Privilege for Access Control Domains in the Create Security Definitions class Open Object Use the Open Object Access Control List dialog to list and display the Access Control List ACLs associated with an ACD Open this dialog by selecting List Object ACLs from the shortcut menu on the Access Control Domains dialog This option is not available for the Default ACD The Open dialog is discussed in detail in the Common Elements Manual 2 3 Using the Open Dialog Open Object Access Control List olx Identifier Column Map ACL Identifier Access Definition A a Archive Request At Ey Calendar ACL EE Column Map ACL EHE OPTUSR Column Map Proc aay Compare Request AR Convert Request A Md gt Enter pattern for Access
600. when security is initialized Only one Security Administrator can be assigned to an Optim Directory The Security Administrator can configure Optim Security as well as control access to the default Access Control Domain ACD and Access Control List ACL for the Directory For more information see Appendix D Optim Security Optim 7 1 5 1 Configure the First Workstation Use Security Administrator for this Optim Directory to identify the Security Administrator by the two part Domain User Name By default the Security Administrator is the user signed on to the workstation To specify another user click Change to open the Specify Domain Connection Information dialog which allows you to enter a different Domain User Name or select from a list of user accounts in an available domain The Security Administrator must be a user account in a network domain that is accessible from the current workstation Note You can also change the Security Administrator using the Change Security Administrator dialog available by selecting Configure Security for an Optim Directory from the Tasks menu Initialize the After identifying the Security Administrator initialize security for the Security Feature Directory by selecting Initialize and clicking Proceed When security abi Optim is initialized the Security Administrator is assigned and a default ACD x and ACL are created for the Directory For more information about ACDs and ACLs see Appendix D Opt
601. with Optim release 6 5 a signed exit must exist to use Optim whether the exit is the Optim default exit or a user supplied exit To sign an exit you must enter the company credentials supplied to your organization when you received Optim Your company credentials consist of your Optim supplied company ID Name and Password The Optim setup process will automatically request these credentials during installation so you can sign an exit Note Ifyou have write access to the Optim bin directory and you have the appropriate company credentials you can change from one exit to another at any time following installation by signing a new exit You can change from using the default exit to a user supplied exit or vice versa or you can change from one user supplied exit to another If you are switching to user supplied exit you must compile link and copy that exit to the bin directory before you can sign it The method of signing an exit in a Windows environment differs from the method used in a UNIX environment Ina Windows environment the Optim Configuration program allows you to sign either exit 1 e the default exit or a user supplied exit See 3 3 Signing an Exit in Windows on page 53 for more information e Ina UNIX environment you can only sign the default exit during installation i e during the Optim Setup program If you want to sign a user supplied exit you must run an opmusign script file Optim 7 1
602. words General PROCNFG NOLOGO FILE AUTORUN RESPONDFILE IGNORE 432 Initiate command line processing Note that the character following PR is the number 0 zero Suppress the splash logo The source of parameters or the parameters filename parameters The fully qualified path and name of a text file containing parameters for one or more tasks You must enclose a filename that includes blanks in quotes As follows Level of user intervention when running TRUE ON or YES FALSE OFF or NO Run the Configuration program in AutoRun mode hiding dialogs unless user intervention is required to correct or cancel the task If an error cannot be corrected the error message is displayed on the Log dialog Default for a parameter file Run the Configuration program normally displaying all dialogs Default for parameters from the command line The source of default values for Message IDs when AUTORUN ON filename The fully qualified path and name of a text file A sample file RESPOND PST in the RT BIN directory can be modified and used as necessary You must enclose a filename that includes blanks in quotes Begin a comment or disregard parameters All parameters that follow and are on the same line have no effect on processing Optim 7 1 C 1 Syntax and Keywords Optim Directory PSTDIRNAME PSTDIRID PSTDIRCONNECTSTR PSTDIRPASSWORD PSTDIRUSERID
603. y If the Directory is multi byte the DB Alias will be set to multi byte format however you must respond to the Round Trip Issues with Multi byte Format MBCS for a DBA dialog on page 107 Note Ifthe DB Alias represents the database in which the Optim Directory resides the Keep Character Data in Unicode Format and Specify Character Set of DB Alias Data dialogs are displayed after the Share Connection Information for the Current Database dialog Read Share Connection Information Keep Character If you are creating an Optim Directory in a DBMS for which Optim Data in Unicode supports Unicode but not multi byte you are prompted to indicate Format whether the DB Alias data is kept in Unicode format Configure First Workstation Keep Character Data in Unicode Format Bife E3 Optim he Optim Configuration Program can configure this DB Alias so data is kept in Unicode ormat To enable this option both the DBMS client and Database character sets must be TF8 This option is required if the DBMS client character set is UTF8 Conversely this ption is not allowed if the DBMS client character set is not UTF8 To enable this option elect the Keen Character Nata in Lnicade Format checkhny Select Proceed tn m Options I Keep Character Data in Unicode Format Previous Proceed _ Cancel Oracle Q0R9 Ui Installation and Configuration Guide 103 5 Configure Workstations Specify Character If Optim s
604. y as indicated below 348 Optim 7 1 A l Installation Optim Server Setup Install Shiela Note The tmp softech directory only contains files concerning the installation of Optim It does not contain any files concerning the signing of the default exit that information is stored in the rt temp directory so if installation was successful you should delete the temporary files in the tmp softech directory even if you did not sign the default exit Installation and Configuration Guide 349 Appendix A Install and Configure the Server under UNIX or Linux Setup Complete At the conclusion of the installation a dialog indicates the Server has been successfully installed Click Finish and close the console window to complete the installation process Optim Server Setup InstallShield Click Finish and close the console window to complete the installation process 350 Optim 7 1 A l Installation A 1 2 Command Line Installation To install the Server from the command line use the setup options file setupopts located on the product CD Editing setupopts To install the Server mount the product CD and copy setupopts from the root directory to a location for which you have write access You can edit the file using an ASCII editor Enable a keyword by removing the leading characters from the line Define a parameter for a keyword by editing the characters after the Installation Run the s
605. y Definitions Security Export Process Log When the Security Definition Export is complete select Show Process Log from the Tools menu to display the Security Export Process Log Security Export Process Log olx File Options Help Security Export Process Log Created on 2 19 2008 at 16 20 25 Access Control Domains Exported Default Exported EMPTY Exported OTHER Exported TEST Exported TEST2 Exported WEST Exported NRTH Access Control Lists Exported Access Control List Optim Object Template Exported OPTUSR AD1 Exported OPTUSR ADSAMP Exported OPTUSR TEST1 Exported OPTUSR ARCORD Exported OPTUSR MULTARCHIDX Exported OPTUSRE SC NOY Exported Calendar SAMPLE_DE This log displays the following details Creation Date Date and time the Security Export Process Log was created List of errors Explanatory text for each error if errors were encountered List of exported objects Names of the exported security definitions grouped by object type Print Print the log by choosing Print from the File menu Each execution of Security Definition Export clears the log file before information for the current execution is written Previous log information is not retained Installation and Configuration Guide 499 Appendix D Optim Security D 5 Import Security Definitions D 5 1 Import Dialog 500 The Import Security Definitions Utility copies security definitions from a Secured Input File
606. your Archive or Extract processes Active Inactive Default Active Default Inactive Notes Automatically extract uncommitted rows from each table in the Access Definition during all Archive or Extract Processes The Uncommitted Read check box on the Access Definition Editor is unavailable Automatically extract only committed rows from each table in the Access Definition during all Archive or Extract Processes The Uncommitted Read check box on the Access Definition Editor is unavailable The Uncommitted Read option on the Access Definition Editor is available and selected by default Uncommitted rows are extracted from the table unless the Uncommitted Read check box is cleared The Uncommitted Read option on the Access Definition Editor is available and cleared by default Uncommitted rows are not extracted from the table unless the Uncommitted Read check box is cleared e Ifyou choose to extract uncommitted rows the relational integrity of the data in the Archive or Extract File may be Optim 7 1 8 2 Using the Editor compromised Use caution if inserting data from any Archive or Extract File with uncommitted rows e Optim disables the extracting of uncommitted rows if the DBMS or version does not support it regardless of the setting Parallel Processing Set options to determine the maximum number of concurrent database connections allowed Increasing database connections improves performance when processin
607. ystem Tables for each selected database Databases Logon Defaults Stored Procedure Defaults Database DB Alias DB Alias Procedure Procedure Name Name pismen Action Qualifier ome ID 4 bia bia 4 bia La gt IV asq8 SALS alm as asas T Display SQL Skp Undo Cancel Ready Oracle Q0R9 Z The Update Multiple DB Aliases dialog displays the following tabs Databases Review a list of all databases that reside on the single server Specify explicit information for each DB Alias you want to update Logon Defaults Specify the default User ID and Password needed to create refresh stored procedures while configuring the first or additional workstations In some cases this logon may have additional privileges than the Saved Logon Defaults 228 Optim 7 1 7 11 Update DBMS Version for a DB Alias Stored Procedure Specify the default procedure Qualifier and Defaults Grant Auth ID required to create refresh stored procedures Note The default values apply to all DB Aliases unless otherwise specified on the Databases tab Databases Tab Use the Databases tab to review a list of all databases that reside on the single server You can also specify explicit details for the DB Aliases you want to update Sel Select a check box to update a DB Alias for a particular database If you do not want to update a DB Alias clear the check box This grid column is locked in position so you can scroll to t
608. zation to perform the m selected task 216 Optim 7 1 7 9 Rename an Optim Directory Specify New Optim After connecting to the database the Specify New Optim Directory Directory Name Name dialog is displayed allowing you to rename the Optim Directory and the registry entry Rename Optim Directory Specify New Optim Directory Name Specify the new name for this Optim Directory and registry entry then click lt Proceed gt o continue The option to Rename Optim Directory and Registry Entry is selected Specify the new Name for the Optim Directory A Directory name can be from 1 to 12 characters and have no embedded blanks The new Directory name cannot match an existing Directory name Installation and Configuration Guide 217 7 Maintenance and Other Configuration Tasks Connect to After an Optim Directory is renamed the Configuration program Database updates connection information in the registry entry For subsequent access to the Directory from this workstation use the Connect to Database dialog to specify a User ID and Password see page 93 Click Proceed to display the Complete dialog and complete the process Rename Optim Directory Connect to Database he Optim Configuration program remembers the User ID and optionally the Password or Future access to the Optim Directory Specify the User ID and Password then click lt Proceed gt 218 Optim 7 1 7 9 Rename an Optim Directory What to d

IBM Optim Installation and Configuration Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents